Femgv6 1

FEMGV
USER MANUAL
For Version 6.1-01

1st Edition August 1999
c Femsys Limited
Copyright
Femsys Limited
158 Upper New Walk,
Leicester,
LE1 7QA
Tel: +44 (0) 116 254 1475
Fax: +44 (0) 116 255 8982
email: support@femsys.co.uk
URL http://www.femsys.co.uk
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored or transmitted in any form
with out the prior permission of Femsys Limited.
Contents
Preface
1
ix
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 FEATURE SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 FEMGEN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.1 Definition of Model Geometry . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.2 Parametric model definition . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.3 Customised analysis environments . . . . . . .
1.2.1.4 Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.5 Controls on Mesh Density . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.6 Defining Material and Physical Properties . . .
1.2.1.7 Defining Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1.8 Defining Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 FEMVIEW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2.1 Presentation of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2.2 Filters on Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2.3 Calculations with Results . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2.4 Further Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3 VIEWING TECHNIQUES AND GENERAL FEATURES
1.2.3.1 Finite Element Model Visualisation . . . . . . .
1.2.3.2 Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3.3 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3.4 Saving of Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3.5 Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3.6 Multi-viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3.7 Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3.8 Substructures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 USE WITH FE ANALYSIS PACKAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 INPUT OF COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1 KEYBOARD INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1.1 Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1.2 Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1.3 Integer and Real Values . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1.4 Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1.5 Example of Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1.6 Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2 INPUT USING GRAPHICAL INPUT DEVICES . . . . .
1.4.2.1 Menu selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2.2 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2.3 Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.3 BATCH INPUT OF COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . .
iii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
13
14
14
15
15
16
iv
CONTENTS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
16
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
FEMGV COMMANDS
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 The Model Index Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 The Model Creation Environment : FEMGEN . . . . . . .
2.1.3 The Model Assessment Environment : FEMVIEW . . . .
2.2 PRIMARY COMMAND ASSEMBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 PRIMARY COMMAND CONSTRUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1.1 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CONIC . . . . . .
2.3.1.2 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC . . .
2.3.1.3 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS GLOBAL . . . . .
2.3.1.4 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL . . . . . .
2.3.1.5 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL . .
2.3.1.6 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL . . .
2.3.2 CONSTRUCT LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 CONSTRUCT LMASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.1 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] BODY . . . .
2.3.3.2 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] GLOBAL . . .
2.3.3.3 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] LINE . . . . .
2.3.3.4 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] SURFACE . .
2.3.4 CONSTRUCT MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5 CONSTRUCT NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.6 CONSTRUCT PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.7 CONSTRUCT SCURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.7.1 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] BODY . . . .
2.3.7.2 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] GLOBAL . .
2.3.7.3 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] LINE . . . .
2.3.7.4 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] SURFACE .
2.3.8 CONSTRUCT SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.8.1 CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name] APPEND . . .
2.3.8.2 CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.8.3 CONSTRUCT SET Set Name COMPLEMENT
2.3.8.4 CONSTRUCT SET Set name INTERSECT . .
2.3.8.5 CONSTRUCT SET OPEN . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.8.6 CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name] REMOVE . . .
2.3.9 CONSTRUCT SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.9.1 CONSTRUCT SHAPE BOX . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.9.2 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CONE . . . . . . . . .
2.3.9.3 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CURVE NURB . . . .
2.3.9.4 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CURVE INTERSECT .
2.3.9.5 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER . . . . . .
2.3.9.6 CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE . . . . . . . . .
2.3.9.7 CONSTRUCT SHAPE SPHERE . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
22
22
22
23
25
27
28
29
30
33
34
35
37
40
44
45
47
50
52
56
57
59
60
61
63
66
73
78
79
85
86
87
88
90
96
97
100
102
103
104
106
109
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.4.4 LOGGING OF INPUT . .

1.4.5 USER INTERRUPT . . .
OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . .
THE DATABASE . . . . . . . . .
LIMITATIONS ON MODEL SIZE
THE ELEMENT LIBRARY . . .
CUSTOMISATION . . . . . . . .
1.9.1 SYNONYMS . . . . . . .
1.9.2 RESOURCE FILES . . .
1.9.3 THE STARTUP FILE . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19/08/1999
CONTENTS
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.3.9.8 CONSTRUCT SHAPE SURFACE NURB .

2.3.10 CONSTRUCT SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.10.1 CONSTRUCT SPACE CURS-SHPE . . . .
2.3.10.2 CONSTRUCT SPACE DIGITIZER . . . . .
2.3.10.3 CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE . . .
2.3.10.4 CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX . . . .
2.3.11 CONSTRUCT TCURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.12 CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.12.1 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM MIRROR . . .
2.3.12.2 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM ROTATE . . .
2.3.12.3 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM SCALE . . . .
2.3.12.4 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM TRANSLATE
2.3.13 CONSTRUCT XSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMARY COMMAND DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 DRAWING ANIMATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 DRAWING CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 DRAWING DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 DRAWING RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.5 DRAWING SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.6 DRAWING VIEWPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMARY COMMAND EYE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 EYE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 EYE DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3 EYE FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4 EYE LOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5 EYE NORMAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.6 EYE PERSPECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.7 EYE ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.8 EYE SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.9 EYE WALK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.10 EYE ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMARY COMMAND FEMGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMARY COMMAND FEMVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRIMARY COMMAND GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1 GEOMETRY BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1.1 GEOMETRY BODY ELEMENTS . . . . .
2.8.1.2 GEOMETRY BODY SETS . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1.3 GEOMETRY BODY 2SURFS . . . . . . .
2.8.1.7 GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL . . . . . .
2.8.1.8 GEOMETRY BODY PRISM . . . . . . . .
2.8.2 GEOMETRY COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3 GEOMETRY FILLET LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.4 GEOMETRY FLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.5 GEOMETRY LCMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.6 GEOMETRY LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.6.1 GEOMETRY LINE ANGLE . . . . . . . .
2.8.6.2 GEOMETRY LINE ARC . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.6.3 GEOMETRY LINE CIRCLE . . . . . . . .
2.8.6.4 GEOMETRY LINE CURVE . . . . . . . .
2.8.6.5 GEOMETRY LINE ELEMENTS . . . . . .
2.8.6.6 GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT . . . . .
19/08/1999
v
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
111
112
113
114
115
117
119
126
127
129
131
132
134
135
136
140
142
143
145
147
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
160
161
163
165
167
169
170
172
173
174
176
177
179
181
183
184
187
190
194
195
196
198
200
202
203
204
vi
CONTENTS
2.8.6.7 GEOMETRY LINE NODES . . . . . .
2.8.6.8 GEOMETRY LINE PARALLEL . . . .
2.8.6.9 GEOMETRY LINE PERPENDIC . . .
2.8.6.10 GEOMETRY LINE SPLINE . . . . . .
2.8.6.11 GEOMETRY LINE STRAIGHT . . . .
2.8.7 GEOMETRY MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.8 GEOMETRY POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.8.1 GEOMETRY POINT AT-NODE . . . .
2.8.8.2 GEOMETRY POINT COORD . . . . .
2.8.8.3 GEOMETRY POINT INTERSECT . . .
2.8.8.4 GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE . . . . .
2.8.8.5 GEOMETRY POINT TRANSFORM . .
2.8.9 GEOMETRY SPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.10 GEOMETRY SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.10.1 GEOMETRY SURFACE AUTOMATIC
2.8.10.2 GEOMETRY SURFACE ELEMENTS .
2.8.10.3 GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT .
2.8.10.4 GEOMETRY SURFACE ONSHAPE . .
2.8.10.5 GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION . . .
2.8.10.6 GEOMETRY SURFACE SIDE-PNT . .
2.8.10.7 GEOMETRY SURFACE 3POINTS . . .
2.8.10.8 GEOMETRY SURFACE 3SIDES . . .
2.8.10.9 GEOMETRY SURFACE 4POINTS . . .
2.8.10.10 GEOMETRY SURFACE 4SIDES . . .
2.8.11 GEOMETRY SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.12 GEOMETRY UNSPLIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 PRIMARY COMMAND HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10 PRIMARY COMMAND INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11 PRIMARY COMMAND LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11.1 LABEL GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11.2 LABEL MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11.3 LABEL OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11.3.1 LABEL OPTIONS AXES . . . . . . . .
2.11.3.2 LABEL OPTIONS CONSTRNTS . . .
2.11.3.3 LABEL OPTIONS EXTERNAL . . . .
2.11.3.4 LABEL OPTIONS IJK . . . . . . . . .
2.11.3.5 LABEL OPTIONS LOADS . . . . . . .
2.11.3.6 LABEL OPTIONS MPC . . . . . . . .
2.11.4 LABEL SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12 PRIMARY COMMAND MESHING . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.1 MESHING CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.2 MESHING DIVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.3 MESHING ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.4 MESHING GENERATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.5 MESHING MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.6 MESHING MERGE ALL/setname . . . . . . . .
2.12.7 MESHING NODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.8 MESHING OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.8.1 MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH . . .
2.12.8.2 MESHING OPTIONS ELEMENT . . .
2.12.8.3 MESHING OPTIONS LOCK . . . . . .
2.12.8.4 MESHING OPTIONS MIDNODES . .
2.12.8.5 MESHING OPTIONS NODE . . . . . .
2.12.8.6 MESHING OPTIONS UNLOCK . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
207
208
209
211
212
213
216
217
218
220
222
224
225
227
228
229
230
233
235
237
238
240
242
244
246
249
251
253
255
256
258
263
264
265
266
267
268
270
271
273
274
275
278
279
280
282
284
285
286
291
292
293
295
296
19/08/1999
CONTENTS
2.12.8.7 MESHING OPTIONS CHECK . . . . . . . .
2.12.9 MESHING RENUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.10 MESHING SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12.11 MESHING TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13 PRIMARY COMMAND PRESENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.1 PRESENT CONTOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.2 PRESENT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.3 PRESENT GRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.3.1 PRESENT GRAPH BEAM . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.3.2 PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT . . . . . . . .
2.13.3.3 PRESENT GRAPH LINE . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.3.4 PRESENT GRAPH NODE . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.3.5 PRESENT GRAPH PROMPT . . . . . . . .
2.13.3.6 PRESENT GRAPH RESULTS . . . . . . . .
2.13.4 PRESENT NUMERIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.5 PRESENT OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.5.1 PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR . . . . . .
2.13.5.2 PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH . . . . . . . .
2.13.5.3 PRESENT OPTIONS NUMERIC . . . . . .
2.13.5.4 PRESENT OPTIONS PEAKS . . . . . . . .
2.13.5.5 PRESENT OPTIONS SIGNIF . . . . . . . .
2.13.5.6 PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS . . . . . . .
2.13.6 PRESENT PEAKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.7 PRESENT SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13.8 PRESENT VECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14 PRIMARY COMMAND PROPERTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.1 PROPERTY ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.2 PROPERTY BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.2.1 PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONSTRAINT .
2.14.2.2 PROPERTY BOUNDARY ELASTIC . . . .
2.14.2.3 PROPERTY BOUNDARY EXTERNAL . . .
2.14.2.4 PROPERTY BOUNDARY GENERAL . . . .
2.14.2.5 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBEAM . .
2.14.2.6 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBODY . .
2.14.2.7 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RCONNECT
2.14.2.8 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC EQUA . . .
2.14.2.9 PROPERTY BOUNDARY PRESCRIBE . . .
2.14.2.10 PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE . . . .
2.14.3 PROPERTY FE-PROG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.4 PROPERTY INITIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.5 PROPERTY LOADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.5.1 PROPERTY LOADS NODAL LO . . . . . .
2.14.5.2 PROPERTY LOADS DISPLACE . . . . . . .
2.14.5.3 PROPERTY LOADS PRESSURE . . . . . .
2.14.5.4 PROPERTY LOADS BL DIST . . . . . . . .
2.14.5.5 PROPERTY LOADS GL DIST . . . . . . . .
2.14.5.6 PROPERTY LOADS GP DIST . . . . . . . .
2.14.5.7 PROPERTY LOADS TEMPERAT . . . . . .
2.14.5.8 PROPERTY LOADS FACE TEM . . . . . .
2.14.5.9 PROPERTY LOADS EL TEMPE . . . . . .
2.14.5.10 PROPERTY LOADS EL FACET . . . . . . .
2.14.5.11 PROPERTY LOADS BODY FOR . . . . . .
2.14.5.12 PROPERTY LOADS CENTRIFU . . . . . .
2.14.5.13 PROPERTY LOADS ANG ACCE . . . . . .
19/08/1999
vii
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
297
298
299
301
307
309
312
313
314
315
317
319
321
324
326
328
329
333
335
336
337
338
340
341
342
345
346
348
350
351
352
353
354
356
357
359
360
361
362
363
364
366
367
368
370
373
375
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
viii
CONTENTS
2.14.5.14 PROPERTY LOADS L ADDMAS . . . . . . .
2.14.5.15 PROPERTY LOADS L FULMAS . . . . . . .
2.14.5.16 PROPERTY LOADS C ADDMAS . . . . . . .
2.14.5.17 ADVANCED LOADING . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.6 PROPERTY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.6.1 PROPERTY MATERIAL DEFINE . . . . . . .
2.14.6.2 PROPERTY MATERIAL ISO . . . . . . . . .
2.14.6.3 PROPERTY MATERIAL AISO . . . . . . . .
2.14.6.4 PROPERTY MATERIAL TISO . . . . . . . . .
2.14.6.5 PROPERTY MATERIAL ORTH . . . . . . . .
2.14.6.6 PROPERTY MATERIAL LAMI . . . . . . . .
2.14.6.7 PROPERTY MATERIAL LIBRARY . . . . . .
2.14.7 PROPERTY PHYSICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14.7.1 PROPERTY PHYSICAL DEFINE . . . . . . .
2.14.7.2 PROPERTY PHYSICAL GENERAL . . . . . .
2.14.7.3 PROPERTY PHYSICAL BEAM . . . . . . . .
2.14.7.4 PROPERTY PHYSICAL sectyp . . . . . . . .
2.14.7.5 PROPERTY PHYSICAL FLEX . . . . . . . .
2.14.7.6 PROPERTY PHYSICAL SECTION . . . . . .
2.14.7.7 PROPERTY PHYSICAL phname OFFSET . .
2.14.7.8 PROPERTY PHYSICAL phname ORIENTATE
2.14.7.9 PROPERTY PHYSICAL THICKNES . . . . .
2.14.7.10 PROPERTY PHYSICAL VAR THIK . . . . . .
2.14.7.11 PROPERTY PHYSICAL SC THICK . . . . . .
2.14.7.12 PROPERTY PHYSICAL LAMINATE . . . . .
2.15 PRIMARY COMMAND RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.1 RESULTS CALCULATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.1.1 RESULTS CALCULATE AVERAGE . . . . .
2.15.1.2 RESULTS CALCULATE AV-DIFF . . . . . . .
2.15.1.3 RESULTS CALCULATE BEAMST . . . . . .
2.15.1.4 RESULTS CALCULATE COMBINE . . . . .
2.15.1.5 RESULTS CALCULATE DIFFERENT . . . .
2.15.1.6 RESULTS CALCULATE EXPRESSN . . . . .
2.15.1.7 RESULTS CALCULATE EXTRAPOL . . . . .
2.15.1.8 RESULTS CALCULATE INTEGRATE . . . .
2.15.1.9 RESULTS CALCULATE PERDIFF . . . . . .
2.15.1.10 RESULTS CALCULATE PRESSURE . . . . .
2.15.1.11 RESULTS CALCULATE P-ESTRAIN . . . . .
2.15.1.12 RESULTS CALCULATE P-STRESS . . . . . .
2.15.1.13 RESULTS CALCULATE P-SHEAR . . . . . .
2.15.1.14 RESULTS CALCULATE P-YIELD . . . . . .
2.15.1.15 RESULTS CALCULATE SAFETY . . . . . . .
2.15.1.16 RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN LOADCASE .
2.15.1.17 RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN SURFACES .
2.15.1.18 RESULTS CALCULATE VON MISES . . . . .
2.15.2 RESULTS ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.3 RESULTS GAUSSIAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.4 RESULTS INVARIANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.5 RESULTS LOADCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.6 RESULTS NODAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.7 RESULTS OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.8 RESULTS RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.9 RESULTS STACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.10 RESULTS TRANSFORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
384
385
386
387
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
399
402
403
404
405
409
410
412
413
415
416
417
419
421
422
424
426
428
429
431
432
438
439
440
442
443
444
445
446
447
449
451
453
454
456
458
459
461
463
464
468
470
19/08/1999
CONTENTS
2.16 PRIMARY COMMAND SAVE . . . . . . . . . .
2.17 PRIMARY COMMAND STOP . . . . . . . . . .
2.18 PRIMARY COMMAND UTILITY . . . . . . . .
2.18.1 UTILITY COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.2 UTILITY DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.3 UTILITY GRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.4 UTILITY LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.5 UTILITY MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.6 UTILITY NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.7 UTILITY READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.8 UTILITY SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.8.1 UTILITY SETUP ANIMATE . .
2.18.8.2 UTILITY SETUP COLOUR . .
2.18.8.3 UTILITY SETUP CONFIRM . .
2.18.8.4 UTILITY SETUP DIALOGUE .
2.18.8.5 UTILITY SETUP ECHO . . . .
2.18.8.6 UTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK .
2.18.8.7 UTILITY SETUP MENU . . . .
2.18.8.8 UTILITY SETUP PLOTTER . .
2.18.8.9 UTILITY SETUP PRINTER . .
2.18.8.10 UTILITY SETUP QUALITY . .
2.18.8.11 UTILITY SETUP ROTATIONS .
2.18.8.12 UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS
2.18.8.13 UTILITY SETUP UNDO . . . .
2.18.8.14 UTILITY SETUP VIEW . . . .
2.18.9 UTILITY TABULATE . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.10 UTILITY UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.11 UTILITY UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.18.12 UTILITY WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19 PRIMARY COMMAND VIEW . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.1 VIEW CUTAWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.2 VIEW DEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.3 VIEW EDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.4 VIEW FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.5 VIEW GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.6 VIEW HIDDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.7 VIEW LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.8 VIEW MESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.9 VIEW OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.9.1 VIEW OPTIONS BROKEN . .
2.19.9.2 VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR . .
2.19.9.3 VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM . .
2.19.9.4 VIEW OPTIONS EDGES . . . .
2.19.9.5 VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN . . .
2.19.9.6 VIEW OPTIONS LIGHT . . . .
2.19.9.7 VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK . . .
2.19.10 VIEW SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.11 VIEW SPOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.19.12 VIEW XSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19/08/1999
ix
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
473
475
477
478
479
482
484
485
486
487
495
496
498
500
501
502
503
505
506
508
509
511
512
514
515
516
522
523
525
529
530
532
534
536
537
538
541
542
545
546
547
550
552
554
557
559
561
562
563
CONTENTS
This page intentionally blank
19/08/1999
List of Tables
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Nodal results . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Element nodal results . . . . . . . . .
Gaussian and element invariant results
Freedom names . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
308
308
308
349
xii
LIST OF TABLES
19/08/1999
List of Figures
1.1
1.2
1.3
Filled Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graph Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light source shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
6
8
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.28
2.29
2.30
2.31
2.32
2.33
2.34
2.35
2.36
2.37
2.38
2.39
Definition of a cylindrical coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Definition of a rectangular coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a spherical coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of Toll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a body load mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a global load mask in the X direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of an inverse global load mask in the X direction . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a global load mask with local coordinate system . . . . . . . .
Definition of a line load mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of an INVERSE line load mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a surface load mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of an INVERSE surface load mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat surface with four straight sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides . . . .
Cylindrical surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides
Flat surface with one constant radius arc and one degenerate side . . . . . .
Definition of a BODY space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example BODY CORNERS space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a global space curve in the X direction . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a global space curve with local coordinate system . . . . . . .
Definition of a line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIANGLE line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARABOLA line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARABOLA line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELIPSE line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NORMAL line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINE line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANTISINE line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half PARABOLA line space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a surface CORNERS space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a surface LINE space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluation of SURFACE LINE space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat surface with four straight sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides . . . .
Cylindrical surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides
Flat surface with one constant radius arc and one degenerate side . . . . . .
SURFACE LINE space curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The two sets for COMPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
35
37
43
45
47
48
49
50
50
52
53
54
54
54
54
61
62
63
65
66
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
73
74
75
76
76
76
76
77
86
xiii
xiv
LIST OF FIGURES
2.40
2.41
2.42
2.43
2.44
2.45
2.46
2.47
2.48
2.49
2.50
2.51
2.52
2.53
2.54
2.55
2.56
2.57
2.58
2.59
2.60
2.61
2.62
2.63
2.64
2.65
2.66
2.67
2.68
2.69
2.70
2.71
2.72
2.73
2.74
2.75
2.76
2.77
2.78
2.79
2.80
2.81
2.82
2.83
2.84
2.85
2.86
2.87
2.88
2.89
2.90
2.91
The resulting set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The two sets for INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The resulting set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four points defining a box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analytical Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analytical Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining a plane from three points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analytical Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAMP time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINE time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPONENT time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMOOTH time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CYCLIC time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low resolution time curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of the Mirroring Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Four Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Two Horizontal Viewports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating a sub-set of the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A body from two 4sided surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A body from two 3sided surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The order of input of surfaces for a body from five surfaces . . . . . . . .
The order of input of surfaces for a body from six surfaces . . . . . . . .
Geometry Copy S1 to S2. Note that no body is created. . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a fillet with and without the MODIFY option . . . . . . . .
A typical filleting application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A set of inconsistently aligned surfaces, prior to a flip . . . . . . . . . . .
A set of consistently aligned surfaces, after a flip . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of an arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of an ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative definition of an ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of intersection lines directly from two shapes . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of intersection lines directly from two shapes and one additional
shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of intersection lines directly from two shapes and two additional
shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of an intersection line from three points and two shapes . . . .
Definition of a line from nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a spline line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a straight line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of a point of intersection of three shapes . . . . . . . . . . . .
The resulting geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creation of intersection surfaces directly from two shapes . . . . . . . . .
Original polygons and results of different values of àngval' . . . . . . . .
An example mesh on a region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spacing nodes on a line using a grading value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of grading control on surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A mesh with the default density of 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The effect of a larger density value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The effect of a smaller density value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
86
87
87
98
100
104
107
109
120
121
121
122
122
123
123
124
124
127
130
148
149
155
157
174
174
177
179
185
187
189
191
191
199
199
199
205
. 205
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
206
206
207
211
212
220
231
232
233
236
276
276
287
287
288
19/08/1999
LIST OF FIGURES
2.92 A quadrilateral free mesh with the default density of 1 . . . . . .
2.93 The effect of a smaller density value on a quadrilateral free mesh
2.94 The effect of a larger density value on a quadrilateral free mesh .
2.95 Mapped mid-side nodes for QU8 elements . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.96 Exact mid-side nodes for QU8 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.97 Online mid-side nodes for QU8 elements . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.98 Filled contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.99 Line contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.100Graph plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.101Displaced shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.102Creation of ASAS rigid link system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.103Creation of ASAS rigid beam system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.104Rigid connection MPC for edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.105Rigid connection MPC for surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.106Defining an ASAS constraint equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.107Removal of RZ freedoms from the edge nodes of surfaces . . . .
2.108Example Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.109Construction of advanced loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.110Simple Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.111Load with local cylindrical coordinate system added . . . . . . .
2.112Load with load mask added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.113Load with space curve added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.114Load with time curve added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.115ASAS element property types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.116ASAS element property types (cont) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.117Beam section types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.118Beam section types (cont) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.119Define section orientation of a wide flange beam property . . . .
2.120Define surface thickness variation using a space curve . . . . . .
2.121Time curve graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.122Space curve graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.123Cut-away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.124Undeveloped view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.125Developed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.126Edge View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.127Hidden line with shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.128Full mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.129CONNECT-1 edges applied to a hidden view . . . . . . . . . .
2.130Hidden line with shrunken elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.131Cross section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19/08/1999
xv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
288
289
289
293
294
294
309
310
323
341
354
355
358
358
359
361
365
387
387
388
388
389
389
400
401
407
408
413
418
483
483
531
533
533
535
539
544
552
559
565
xvi
LIST OF FIGURES
19/08/1999
Preface
This manual is a user guide to the program FEMGV.
FEMGV Version 6.0-01 (Beta) provides significant improvements in functionality compared to previous releases of FEMGV.
Additional information is provided in the Release Notes for FEMGV Version 6.0-01 (Beta).
Femsys Limited
June 1999
xvii
xviii
19/08/1999
Chapter 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
1.2 Feature Summary
1.2.1 FEMGEN Features
1.2.2 FEMVIEW Features
1.2.3 Viewing Techniques and General Features
1.3 Use with FE Analysis Packages
1.4 Input of Commands
1.4.1 Keyboard Input
1.4.2 Input Using Graphical Input Devices
1.4.4 Logging of Input
1.4.5 User Interrupt
1.5 Output Devices
1.6 The Database
1.7 Limitations on Model Size
1.8 The Element Library
1.9 Customisation
1.9.1 Synonyms
1.9.2 Resource Files
1.9.3 The Startup File
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 INTRODUCTION
FEMGV is an interactive graphical pre and post-processor for the Finite Element Method
of analysis. FEMGV is the logical integration of the mesh generation program FEMGEN
with the results assessment program FEMVIEW. It may be interfaced to any finite element
analysis program, and so it can provide users with a common pre and post-processing
facility over the range of their finite element analysis requirements.
The use of any finite element analysis program comprises essentially three stages:
1. preparation of the model data (pre-processing)
2. analysis of the model
3. assessment of the results (post-processing)
Whilst the development of better algorithms and advances in computing technology have
enabled finite element techniques to be applied to increasingly more complex problems, the
tasks of data preparation and of result assessment can be discouragingly time consuming
and prone to error.
FEMGV addresses itself to the twofold task of generating the finite element model, and
of enabling users to present the results of their analysis in an informative and illuminating
way.
A variety of techniques for the generation of a model and the display of results are provided
in order to meet the individual needs of different models; and where a colour terminal is
available, FEMGV will use colour to add information and to improve the user's ability to
make a rapid assessment of his model.
With a database specifically designed to give analysis program independence, and highly
organised data structures designed to meet the tasks of mesh generation and results assessment, and to give a good interactive response; FEMGV can provide the finite element user
with an extremely flexible and powerful graphics pre and post-processor.
1.2 FEATURE SUMMARY

1.2.1 FEMGEN FEATURES
1.2.1.1 Definition of Model Geometry
The definition of the model geometry is performed by the FEMGEN program module.
The top-down approach used in FEMGEN means that the geometry of the model is first
defined, then the mesh is generated.
The building-blocks in the geometrical model are points, lines, surfaces and bodies. These
form a complete solid model where lines are defined from points, surfaces from lines, and
bodies from surfaces.
The top-down approach means that only coordinates for certain key points need be entered.
It is therefore very easy to modify a geometry by, for example, moving a few points. Then
a new mesh can be generated which conforms to the new geometry.
Further geometric objects are sets and analytical shapes. The analytical shapes provided are
planes, spheres, cylinders and cones; and these can be used for point coordinate calculation,
defining intersection curves and defining the form of a surface (projection).
19/08/1999
1.2. FEATURE SUMMARY

A set is a collection of points, lines, surfaces and bodies. It is a useful tool for many
operations, especially in the replication of part of a model.
1.2.1.2 Parametric model definition
Points and transforms can be defined in terms of named variables. As lines, surfaces and
bodies can be defined from points and transforms, a whole model can be created so that
it is `parametric' . Also, the radii of cones, spheres and cylinders may be defined as variables, which allows points and lines defined at the intersections of such shapes to be easily
adjusted. If a model is defined entirely in terms of parameters then the scale of the whole
model can be readily changed, perhaps by just changing the value of a single parameter.
If a point, line, surface or body is created using a transform the relationship between the
new part and the original part can optionally be stored. When this is done, a move of
the original part moves the related parts; changing a transform results in points (and other
parts) related to that transform also moving. Moving a point causes all points related to that
point to move.
1.2.1.3 Customised analysis environments
Analysis specific environments can be activated enabling the use of names and features
specific to the analysis package which are not available in the default neutral environment.
1.2.1.4 Mesh Generation
FEMGEN has fast and efficient mesh generation algorithms. Information about point coordinates, line types etc specified in the definition of the geometry, and also information
about how the geometric objects are connected is stored in the database. During the mesh
generation process, elements are described in terms of nodes, but also the connection between the geometry and mesh is established.
Nodal point coordinates are calculated according to the following rules:

Coordinates on lines are calculated according to the line type. Nodes are placed
exactly on the line, which means that no artificial splitting of the line is necessary.
Coordinates interior to a surface are either interpolated from the border using a Coons
patch mapping, or by rotating (sweeping) a surface.
If requested the nodes can then be projected onto a given shape (for example, a
cylinder).
Coordinates interior to a body are interpolated from the defining surfaces.
Mid-side nodes are interpolated between the corner nodes but taking into consideration curved lines and projection. (The exception to this is that graded spline lines
and intersections may have mid-side nodes not exactly at the mid-side point).
The order of generation is:

If splines and/or intersections are defined, nodes are first generated along these.
Nodes and elements are generated and numbered, first on lines in the order that they
were defined, then on surfaces and finally on bodies.
19/08/1999

The local numbering follows that of the geometry. For example, on a surface the elements
are numbered in the same sense as the surface is defined.
Element types may be specified by the user or supplied by FEMGEN . Default element
types are created and deleted according to the following rules:

When the first surface is created all default (program generated) beam elements are
deleted.
When the first body is created all default beam and surface elements types will be
deleted.
Deleted element types are not reinstated when bodies and surfaces are deleted.
1.2.1.5 Controls on Mesh Density

Various controls on the density of mesh to be generated are provided. For example, the
user may define the number of elements required by specifying the number of divisions
required on lines, surfaces and bodies; or may specify the actual length of an element side.
Variation in mesh size can be achieved by biasing the number of divisions to the ends of a
line and by specifying a different number of divisions on opposing sides of a surface.
1.2.1.6 Defining Material and Physical Properties
Material and physical properties can be assigned to the various geometric parts of the
model. The properties assigned to the geometry are then transferred to the elements when
mesh data is translated for an analysis program.
1.2.1.7 Defining Constraints
Various facilities for defining constraints are provided. A point, line, or surface may be
constrained on its own or general constraints between different parts of the model may
be defined. This enables `multi-point-constraint' equations to be generated for the finite
element analysis program. Elastic supports may also be defined, and the constraints may
be defined in local coordinate systems.
1.2.1.8 Defining Loads
Loads are applied to geometric parts (points, lines, surfaces and bodies) and may be defined
in a number of ways:

as concentrated loads applied to nodes,

as distributed loads applied to elements,
as prescribed displacements applied to nodes,
as a gravity load, centrifugal load or heat source,
as temperatures to nodes,
and as convection boundary conditions.
19/08/1999
The variation of the load over the part may be controlled with space curves and the application of the load may be restricted with the use of load masks. In addition a wide range of
time dependent load variation may be specified.
1.2.2 FEMVIEW FEATURES

1.2.2.1 Presentation of Results
The presentation of analysis results is performed by the FEMVIEW program module. A
loadcase, attribute and component of analysis results may be selected for assessment. The
actual names of the results are defined by the user and so can be tailored to the particular
type of analysis being performed. Static, dynamic and non-linear analyses are catered
for; and results may be submitted as values at the nodes for averaged nodal results, or
element wise at the nodes of each element if discontinuities at the element boundaries are
to be examined, or as values at Gauss points within the elements or as a single value per
element. Where appropriate, FEMVIEW allows these analysis results to be presented in
the following ways:

as numerical values superimposed on the model,

as numerical values tabulated to the screen,
as numerical values tabulated to a file for printing,
as contour plots, using line contours or colour fill,
as vector plots, including principal stress vector plots,
as graph plots showing variation at a node over loadcases,
as graph plots showing variation along a line of nodes,
as displaced shape plots,
as bending moment and shear force diagrams,
and maximum and minimum values may be highlighted.
Figure 1.1: Filled Contours
19/08/1999

1.2.2.2 Filters on Results
Various controls can be applied to `filter' the results selected for presentation. It is possible
to specify that only values for selected sets of elements or for certain materials or surfaces
be considered. Also, it is possible to specify threshold values above or below which results
are to be filtered out.
1.2.2.3 Calculations with Results

Loadcases can be combined and factored to produce a new loadcase, and the values of the
combination loadcase can then be presented.
Several types of calculation can be performed, such as Von Mises equivalent stress, to
transform the analysis results into a more accessable form.
1.2.2.4 Further Post-Processing

The model and results may be written to a data file. The format of this file is documented
in Appendix B of the User Manual Appendices, allowing the data to be further processed
outside of FEMVIEW.
40.
20.
V
E
L
O
C
I -20.
T
Y
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
V
X
-40.
-60.
MODEL : FLOWC
NODAL VELOCITY
VX
VARIATION ALONG A LINE

L1
-80.
L2
L3
L4
-100.
DISTANCE
Figure 1.2: Graph Plots
1.2.3 VIEWING TECHNIQUES AND GENERAL FEATURES

1.2.3.1 Finite Element Model Visualisation
FEMGV allows the user to compose the picture of the finite element model on the basis of
viewpoint and visualisation mode. Many visualisation modes are available within both the
19/08/1999

FEMGEN and FEMVIEW program modules; but certain visualisation modes which require special viewdata data sets to be constructed are only available within the FEMVIEW
module.
To obtain the desired viewpoint, the user may rotate the model, shift the model, or zoom in
or out to inspect a particular area of interest.
The visualisation modes include an outline representation of the element mesh for extra
fast drawing and the checking of mesh connectivity and the display of hidden line views.
A drawing of the full mesh or the mesh with shrunken elements is also available, and a
cross-section through a 3-D model may be obtained.
Shell models can be developed about the X, Y, or Z axis, or about an axis interactively
defined with the graphics cursor.
1.2.3.2 Colour
Colour may be used either to clarify the drawing of the geometric model, the finite element
model or the presentation of results. In colouring the finite element model, the material
number, group number, element number or element type may be used as a basis for the
selection of colour; and a hidden line picture of the model may be further enhanced by
shading according to multiple light sources. Node points may also be highlighted. When
presenting results of analysis the value of the attribute being displayed can be used to
determine a colour for the finite element model so that it can be drawn in a spectrum of
colours using red where the result values are highest through to blue where the results are
lowest.
1.2.3.3 Labelling
The geometric parts of the model may be labelled with the names of points, lines surfaces
and bodies. Materials, physical properties, constraints, loads and surface normals may be
labelled; and also the node, element, element group and material numbers can be superimposed on the finite element model.
1.2.3.4 Saving of Drawings

Selected views (`drawings' ) of a model may be saved in the database, and these may be
recovered on subsequent occasions. Saved drawings are named by the user and will appear
in the Drawing Index. Once they are recovered, the user may continue to work with the
model in the normal way, and for example, may apply a rotation, or superimpose a display
of results.
Drawings may also be saved to a named plotfile which may then be processed off-line to
provide data to drive a plotter device. The user may specify that the plotfile be written in
the standard FEMGV neutral format which is given in Appendix E of the User Manual
Appendices of this manual, or in Postscript or Interleaf format.
1.2.3.5 Animation
Animations of modeshapes or loadcase sequences can be readily created.
19/08/1999
Figure 1.3: Light source shading
19/08/1999
1.3. USE WITH FE ANALYSIS PACKAGES

1.2.3.6 Multi-viewports
A multiple viewport mode of working is available on graphics devices with a suitable resolution. In this mode the user can maintain four viewports on the graphics screen and display
different views of the same model in each viewport, or even views of different models.
1.2.3.7 Sets
Sets of points, lines, surfaces and bodies may be defined and form a powerful tool for the
generation of the geometry of a model. Also, sets of elements may be defined (interactively
or as input data) and used when assessing the results of analysis in a particular area of
interest.
1.2.3.8 Substructures
Where substructuring has been used a number of models may be assembled into a structure
and viewed together. Each model can have transformations stored in the database, and
these can be applied to the model in order to define its position within a larger structure. For
substructures, a slightly less extensive range of visualisation options and result presentation
techniques is provided.
1.3 USE WITH FE ANALYSIS PACKAGES

After a model has been generated it is necessary to store the data in the format required by
the Finite Element Analysis program. Interface programs to many Finite Element codes
are built into the FEMGEN program module and analysis specific environments can be
activated enabling the use of analysis specific names and features which are not available
in the default neutral environment.
As well as providing input in the format required by an analysis, FEMGEN can also write
model data to a file in the neutral format specified in Appendix A of the User Manual
Appendices.
Interfaces to certain CAD systems are also available. These enable specific geometric
definition data to be taken from the CAD system and used within FEMGEN.
Similarly, after a Finite Element Analysis has been run, it is necessary to convert the analysis results data into the neutral format specified in Appendix B of the User Manual Appendices so that it can be read and displayed in FEMVIEW. The program to perform this data
conversion will vary according to the particular analysis program used and will normally
run as a separate executable. Where FEMGV is running on the same computer as the analysis program, it is possible to avoid using the neutral file format and to write the results
data directly into the FEMVIEW database. A set of user callable routines are available for
this purpose.
Interface programs to many of the popular Finite Element codes are available. For specific
details it is necessary to consult the appropriate interface manual.
1.4 INPUT OF COMMANDS

The interface between FEMGV and the user is intended to make input as easy as possible.
The user will be prompted for an input from a displayed menu and then from submenus as
19/08/1999
10

required to complete a command. In this way commands can be built without referencing
the manual.
After a command has been executed FEMGV does not always return to the primary command input level. This is to make commonly repeated commands quicker to use. The
return level for these commands is noted under the command in Chapter 2. To return to the
primary level use / as described in 1.4.1
The primary level prompts are:
FGV>
FG>
FV>
in the INDEX module

in the FEMGEN module
in the FEMVIEW module
Commands may be entered from either the keyboard or by using the graphics cursor or
from batch files.
1.4.1 KEYBOARD INPUT

Commands are made up of keywords, names and values (real or integer). After each input
FEMGV will display a menu and prompt for any items required to complete a command.
If further input is optional, the optional menu will not be displayed automatically. To obtain
optional menus the = command must be used as explained in 1.4.1.6.
The full command or any part of it may be entered as a single input. Each item of a
command must be separated by at least one space.
1.4.1.1 Keywords
Keywords identify the commands and the options required. They may be input in full or
abbreviated to the number of characters which uniquely identified them. For example the
command `VIEW HIDDEN FILL' maybe input as `V H F' .
1.4.1.2 Names
Entities such as bodies and constraints are identified in FEMGENby names which may be
given be the user or created by FEMGEN.
When creating new entities FEMGV will prompt (optionally in most cases) for a name for
the entity. The menu items requiring a new name to be input are:
bodyn
surfn
linen
pointn
setn
shapen
constrn
loadn
matn
physn
systn
transfn
model
file
new name for a body

new name for a surface
new name for a line
new name for a point
new name for a set
new name for a shape
new name for a constraint
new name for a load
new name for a material
new name for a physical property
new name for a coordinate system
new name for a transform
name of a model
name of a file
19/08/1999
1.4. INPUT OF COMMANDS
11
Names may be up to eight characters long and must begin with a letter.
Where the name is optional and a name is not given FEMGEN will assign a default name
to the entity. The naming convention used is described in 2.3.5.
If the name given already exists FEMGEN will assume that the existing entity is to be
changed. Before the change is made confirmation is required to avoid accidental changes.
When FEMGEN needs to identify an existing entity its name will be prompted for. The
menu items requiring an existing name to be input are:
bodyo
surfo
lineo
pointo
seto
shapeo
constro
loado
mato
physo
systo
transfo
model
file
name of an existing body

name of an existing surface
name of an existing line
name of an existing point
name of an existing set
name of an existing shape
name of an existing constraint
name of an existing load
name of an existing material
name of an existing physical property
name of an existing coordinate system
name of an existing transform
name of a model
name of a file
1.4.1.3 Integer and Real Values

When FEMGV requires an integer or a real value ìnteger' or `real' will displayed in the
menu. The meaning of the value is specified for each command in Chapter 2 of this manual.
1.4.1.4 Coordinates
FEMGV may require either model or screen coordinates. When model coordinates are
required the menu will display `coord' . Screen coordinates are accepted in the form of
normalised device coordinates and the menu item for them is `ndc' .
1.4.1.5 Example of Input
To create a point using the menus in FEMGEN .
From the initial menu select geometry:
FG>g
A new menu and prompt are displayed:
GEOMETRY =>
19/08/1999
POINT
LINE
LCMB
SURFACE
BODY
MOVE
COPY
12

SWEEP
SPLIT
FLIP
FILLET
UNSPLIT
Select the point keyword:

GEOMETRY => p
The next menu offers a choice of keywords, values and names as input items:
COORD
INTERSECT
ONLINE
/CURSOR
`coord'
`point-o'
`line-o'
`point-n'
Select the coordinates option:

GEOMETRY POINT => c
The next menu gives the option of positioning the point or naming it:
/CURSOR
`coord'
`point-n'
Input a name for the new point

GEOMETRY POINT COORD=> PT1
The next menu requests position:
/CURSOR
`coord'
Give the coordinates:

GEOMETRY POINT COORD PT1 =>1 2 3
The command is now complete.
The same command, without using the menus, could have been enter as a single input:
FG> G P C PT1 1 2 3
19/08/1999

1.4.1.6 Special Characters
The following characters have special meaning to FEMGV .
/ kills the current command line and returns to the primary command menu. It is used to
return to the primary menu from commands that do not return automatically, see 1.4.
Example:
GEOMETRY POINT => coord /
FG>
? requests a display of the command syntax for the current command. It may be used at
any stage of command input. As all the possible combinations of inputs from the
current position are displayed it is inadvisable to use ? at a high level.
Example:
GEOMETRY POINT =>coord ?
/CURSOR
`coord'
`point-n'
/CURSOR
`point-n'
`coord'
GEOMETRY POINT COORD =>
; processes a command but does not clear the screen or redraw the picture. When making
several adjustments to a view this can save a lot of time.
Example
FV>
FV>
FV>
FV>
V
V
V
E
M
O
O
R
;
S ;
B ;
U 10
The mesh will be displayed with shrunken elements with broken outlines rotated up
10 degrees but only redrawn once.
This could also be input as:
FV> V M ; V O S ; V O B ; E R U 10
: provides a continuation line facility for a list of integers
Example
FV> VIEW LINE LIST 1 4 7 12 16 102 34 133 234 134 :
MORE =>105 106 107
@ switches the input of commands between on-line input from the keyboard and off-line
input from a batch data file which has been loaded with commands. See Appendix I
of the User Manual Appendices.
= allows the continuation of a command on a new line. This also allows optional menus to
be displayed in some cases.
Example
19/08/1999
13
14

FV> v m =
VIEW MESH =>
Without the = the mesh would have been displayed.
, in a set of model coordinates makes that coordinate the same as the corresponding value
in the previous set.
Example
FG>g p pt1 1 2
GEOMETRY POINT
GEOMETRY POINT
GEOMETRY POINT
GEOMETRY POINT
GEOMETRY POINT
3
PT1 1. 2.
=>pt2 4 ,
PT2 4. 2.
=>pt3 , ,
PT3 4. 2.
3.
5
5.
6
6.
# Allows a comment line to be written to the history and log files.

! will (under Unix or DOS operating systems) allow the user to perform operating system
commands from within FEMGV. Directory changes cannot be tracked by FEMGV.
Example
Under Unix operating systems:>!ls
>!cp filename1 filename2
Under DOS:>!DIR
>!COPY C:FILE1.DAT FILE2.DAT
1.4.2 INPUT USING GRAPHICAL INPUT DEVICES

FEMGV uses the graphics area on the screen for 3 separate purposes:

Menu selection
Positioning in screen space or in model space
Picking parts of the picture
1.4.2.1 Menu selection

Menu items are selected with the cursor, the currently selected item is shown as a raised
button and can be selected with either the left or middle mouse button.
Certain commands have trailing optional menus which are made available for selection by
using the middle button. The left button will confirm the command às is' taking defaults
for the optional commands. If having descended to an optional menu the user can still
select the default command option by entering ' return' to confirm the command.
Note: All commands specified by graphical input device are converted to their alphanumeric equivalent. If alphanumeric information is required selection of such an item will
activate the keyboard input, this should be followed by ' =' to return to menu input of optional items.
The menu cursor is initially positioned at the last selected item from that menu.
19/08/1999

1.4.2.2 Positioning
If /CURSOR is a menu option the graphics area can be selected for input by:

`pulling' the menu selector into the graphics area

selecting the /CURSOR menu item
typing /C
Whilst active a graphics cursor will be displayed and moved on the screen with the mouse.
The required position can be confirmed with the left or middle mouse buttons, but the
middle button will allow further positions to be specified. Cursor input mode can be aborted
with the right hand button or the `/' key or by moving the graphics cursor to the command
column.
Note: The position of a graphics selection is given in the command echo as either `ndc' or
model space depending on the required input.
1.4.2.3 Picking
Picking of graphical information follows the same rules as positions with the following
additions.
In FEMGEN there are several types of information that can be picked on the graphics area,
namely Points, Lines, Surfaces, Bodies and Nodes. Certain commands only allow picking
of one type of information at a time. These are denoted by:

/PICK-P for points

/PICK-L for lines
/PICK-S for surfaces
/PICK-B for bodies
In these cases the particular item is selected via the left or middle mouse button.
Other commands allow any information to be picked and are denoted by:
/PICK-*
In this case if a mouse button is used the nearest item will be selected or a keyboard key
may be used to identify the type of item to be picked namely

P-for a point
L-for a line
S-for a surface
B-for a body
19/08/1999
15
16
1.4.3 BATCH INPUT OF COMMANDS

In general, commands are entered interactively from the keyboard or picked by the graphics
cursor, but it is also possible to store a sequence of commands in a batch file and obtain
input from this file instead of the keyboard.
Batch input is particularly useful for training purposes when a demonstration file can be
run automatically, showing the new user a typical sequence of commands which illustrate
how to use FEMGV to generate and examine a model and assess results.
The batch file can pass control back to the user at any stage, and the examination of the
model and results can continue interactively until the user passes control back to the current
(or another) batch file. Timed pauses can also be added to the batch file.
Note that control can also be passed from within one batch file to another batch file. For
further information on the use of batch files see Appendix I of the User Manual Appendices.
1.4.4 LOGGING OF INPUT

A log is kept, in a disk file, of all information input to FEMGV whether from keyboard
or the graphics cursor. This enables the user to keep a record of a particular interactive
sequence and the log can be used as Batch Input (see section 1.4.3). As well as a session
log for FEMGEN, a log is kept of all inputs for each model. This is the FEMGEN history
file and can also be used for subsequent batch input.
1.4.5 USER INTERRUPT

On certain computers a software interrupt is available. After an interrupt execution will
recommence at the primary menu input, or the animation sub-menu as appropriate. The
user should check with the FEMGV distributor or FEMGV installation guide to determine
if this facility is supported on a particular computer type.
1.5 OUTPUT DEVICES

FEMGV supports both colour and greyscale devices. Where possible the body of the
FEMGV code is device independent, and the device dependent code is restricted to device
specific routines which adapt the final output to the particular screen being used.
Hardcopy is obtained by FEMGV writing plotting instructions to a file in the required
format. The user can send this file to a plotter/printer at a convenient time or get a plot
immediately if the automatic plotting feature has been set up.
1.6 THE DATABASE

FEMGV works with a structured database. For each model, the FEMGEN geometric data
is stored in one database file and the FEMVIEW analysis results (including viewdata) are
stored in a separate database file and a loadcase index file.
File names are installation dependent, generally the geometry data file will have a `.G61'
extension and the results data files will have a `.V61' and a `.M61' extension. For example,
a model with the name `FRED' will have a file for geometric data called `FRED.G61' and
19/08/1999
1.7. LIMITATIONS ON MODEL SIZE

results files called `FRED.V61' and `FRED.M61' . For further information on file names,
the user should consult his FEMGV distributor or refer to his FEMGV installation notes.
The viewdata in the results file consists of basic element and nodal point coordinate information and also special data sets constucted to support the interactive viewing facilities of
FEMVIEW. These special viewdata data sets may be created using element and coordinate
data previously generated by FEMGEN or may be created from element and coordinate
data obtained externally from an analysis program.
1.7 LIMITATIONS ON MODEL SIZE

There are few inherent limitations on the size of the model that can be generated in FEMGENas memory is allocated for geometric objects as they are created.
When viewing results in FEMVIEW, an area of memory is reserved to hold vital information about the model, and for certain installations where a limited amount of memory
is available to the user, some limitation on the model size will be encountered. A formula
which allows the user to calculate the maximum size of model that can be processed is
given in Appendix G of the User Manual Appendices. On larger computers this limitation
on model size can be overcome when the program is installed.
1.8 THE ELEMENT LIBRARY

The following elements can be handled by FEMGV. The element library covers most of the
existing FEM systems libraries. A more complete description of these elements together
with the convention for node numbering the elements is given in Appendix C of the User
Manual Appendices.
POINT ELEMENTS
P-EL - single point element
BEAMS
BE2 - two noded beam
BE3 - three noded beam
BE4 - four noded beam
BE5 - five noded beam
PLATES, THIN OR THICK SHELLS
TR3 - three noded triangle
TR6 - six noded triangle
TR9 - nine noded triangle
TR15 - fifteen noded triangle
QU4 - four noded quadrilateral
QU8 - eight noded quadrilateral
QU9 - nine noded quadrilateral
QU12 - twelve noded quadrilateral
SOLIDS
19/08/1999
17
18

TE4 - four noded tetrahedron
TE10 - ten noded tetrahedron
TE16 - sixteen noded tetrahedron
PE6 - six noded triangular prism
PE15 - fifteen noded triangular prism
PE24 - twenty four noded triangular prism
HE8 - eight noded brick
HE16 - sixteen noded brick
HE20 - twenty noded brick
HE27 - twenty seven noded brick
HE32 - thirty two noded brick
TRANSITION ELEMENTS
TN5 - five noded transition element
TN7 - seven noded transition element
TN12 - twelve noded transition element
TN18 - eighteen noded transition element
INTERFACE ELEMENTS
IP11 - Interface element between individual nodes
IL22 - Interface element between beams or surface element edges
IS33 - Interface element between surface elements or brick faces
notes :
(a)
(b)
(c)
PE6 and PE15 also function as transition elements.

HE16 and HE27 are not currently supported by FEMVIEW.
The transition elements are not currently supported by
FEMGEN.
This element library is sufficient for most purposes, and when an analysis program utilises
a particularly unusual element, it is generally possible to map onto a standard FEMGV
element.
The generic element names are given above, but when a specific analysis environment is
active the element names unique to the analysis can be used.
1.9 CUSTOMISATION
1.9.1 SYNONYMS
Up to 300 command synonyms may be defined, and read in from a startup file whenever a
FEMGV session is initiated.
This enables a user to define abbreviations or new words for existing commands, and to
define command macros, which can help to give FEMGV a more flexible, powerful, and
19/08/1999
1.9. CUSTOMISATION
personalised command language, than can be achieved by any other means. For further
information on the use of synonyms see the Installation and Customisation Guide.
For ease of use it is also possible to activate the synonyms using the standard keyboard
function keys.
A synonym file containing some commonly used synonyms is sent out as part of the standard delivery of FEMGV and can be customised by users.
1.9.2 RESOURCE FILES

The Resource Manager file allows the user to pre-define a number of controls over the
appearance and behaviour of FEMGV These include the colours that are used for forms
(where appropriate), the default element type for mesh generation, the symbols that are
used for constraints and the size and orientation of hardcopy plots. Most of these resources
may be redefined while FEMGV is being used. More details are given in the Installation
and Customisation Guide.
1.9.3 THE STARTUP FILE

The startup file allows the user to automatically select the graphics driver each time FEMGV
is used. ÌNDEX' level commands can be added to the startup file for initial selection of a
number of controls, including plotter format and dialogue area size.
19/08/1999
19
20
19/08/1999
Chapter 2
FEMGV COMMANDS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
Introduction
ASSEMBLE
CONSTRUCT
DRAWING
EYE
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
GEOMETRY
INDEX
LABEL
MESHING
PRESENT
PROPERTY
RESULTS
SAVE
STOP
UTILITY
VIEW
21
22
CHAPTER 2. FEMGV COMMANDS
2.1 INTRODUCTION
There are three working environments within FEMGV . Firstly, there is the model index
environment in which the user can obtain information on the models stored in the database
files and perform database administration tasks. Secondly, there is the model creation environment FEMGEN, and thirdly the model assessment environment FEMVIEW.
It is possible to change directly between the three environments.
2.1.1 The Model Index Environment

When execution of FEMGV is initiated, the model index is automatically displayed showing the currently available models; the user is offered a choice of command from the index
menu as well as the ability to directly access models by selecting one of the buttons adjacent
to a model name.
To enter the model index environment from either the FEMGEN or FEMVIEW environments the user must enter the command ÌNDEX' .
The commands available at the index level are:
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
ANALYSE
INDEX
ASSEMBLE
DRAWING
UTILITY
STOP
to enter the model generation environment to generate a new model

or modify an existing model.
to enter the model assessment environment to view a model and
results of analysis.
to enable an analysis to be inititated. Not currently implemented
to display the model index.
to build an assembly of models.
to control the destination of graphics output.
to setup program and output device characteristics, to read geometric
or finite element model and results data from an external file, to write
data from the database to an external file and to delete data from the
database.
to terminate program execution.
Essentially the choice is either to leave the index level and enter either the model generation
environment FEMGEN or the model assessment environment FEMVIEW; or to remain
at the index level to perform administration tasks such as the archiving or deletion of model
data.
For further information on the display of the model index and the full syntax of the commands available at the in the model index environment the user should refer to the appropriate sections of the manual.
2.1.2 The Model Creation Environment : FEMGEN

In order to create or to modify geometry it is necessary to issue the command `FEMGEN'
and give either the name of an existing model which is to be modified or the name of a
new model which is to be created. Existing models can be also be selected by using the
19/08/1999
2.1. INTRODUCTION
' Generate' button adjacent to the model name in the INDEX display. This takes the user
into the model creation environment and the following menu will appear :
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
INDEX
GEOMETRY
MESHING
PROPERTY
CONSTRUCT
VIEW
LABEL
EYE
DRAWING
UTILITY
SAVE
STOP
to create or modify a model

to assess a model
to display the model index
to define model geometry
to control mesh generation
to define material properties, physical properties, loads and
constraints
to construct sets, transformations, shapes and local coordinate
systems
to control model visualisation
to control label display
for eye position (model transformation)
to control drawing and contents
for program control, and the output, tabulation, and deletion
of data
to save the current model without leaving FEMGEN.
to terminate program execution
This is the primary menu that will always be available while the user is defining geometry
and meshing the model. The user need only type a sufficient number of letters to uniquely
identify a command, and will then be prompted for the secondary menus that reside below
these commands.
The user should refer to the appropriate sections of the manual for a full description of the
syntax of these commands.
2.1.3 The Model Assessment Environment : FEMVIEW

In order to assess a model and results it is necessary to issue the command `FEMVIEW
model name' or to select the `View' button adjacent to an existing model in the INDEX
display. This takes the user into the model assessment environment and the following menu
shown below will appear. Note that if the named model has no FEMVIEW viewdata in
existence, then where mesh data generated by FEMGEN does exist this will be accessed
and the FEMVIEW viewdata automatically created.
19/08/1999
23
24

FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
INDEX
RESULTS
PRESENT
CONSTRUCT
VIEW
LABEL
EYE
DRAWING
UTILITY
STOP
to create or modify a model

to assess a model
to display the model index
for selection of results
for results presentation
to construct sets
to control model visualisation
to control label display
for eye position (model transformation)
to control drawing and contents
for program control, and the output, tabulation, and deletion of data
to terminate program execution
This is the primary menu that will always be available while the user is assessing a model
and results of analysis. The user need only type a sufficient letters to uniquely identify
a command and will then be prompted for the secondary menus that reside below these
commands.
The user should refer to the appropriate sections of the manual for a full description of the
syntax of these commands.
19/08/1999
2.2. PRIMARY COMMAND ASSEMBLE
25
ASSEMBLE
2.2 PRIMARY COMMAND ASSEMBLE

The primary command ÀSSEMBLE' is used to assemble a model from component parts.
FEMVIEW can then be used to display results on the assembled model.
Transformations can be associated with a model and applied to it in the assembly operation.
The assembled model contains pointers to the constituent models, and if one of these models is deleted the assembled structure cannot be accessed.
The command ÀSSEMBLE' is available when the model index is displayed, and is used
when models are to be combined into an assembly. A specified transformation (or number
of transformations) is applied to each model in order to define its position in the assembly.
Once the command ÀSSEMBLE' has been issued, a question and answer sequence is
initiated asking for the name of each model and the transformations to be applied to position
it within the assembly.
Note that the transformations must have been previously input as data, ref Appendix B of
the User Manual Appendices and are referenced in the ÀSSEMBLE' command according
to the transformation number specified in the input data.
The transformations to be applied may be requested as follows:
Transformations Comments
n1 n2 n3 . . .
n1 TO n2
ALL
NONE
Transformations will be applied in the order specified.

Transformations will be applied in the order specified.
All transformations stored for the model will be applied
in the order that they were input.
No transformations are applied.
Input may be terminated by the keyword `GO' if input is satisfactory or by `/' if the input
is incorrect.
Once `GO' has been used to terminate input, the model assembly name will feature in the
model index and may be selected for post-processing as if it were a conventional model by
issuing the command `FEMVIEW' .
In general all FEMVIEW commands and their options can be applied to assemblies except
for certain of those which need explicit element or node number definitions. This restriction
is imposed since the numbering of nodes and elements may not be unique for assembled
models.
19/08/1999
26
19/08/1999
2.3. PRIMARY COMMAND CONSTRUCT
27
CONSTRUCT
2.3 PRIMARY COMMAND CONSTRUCT

The primary command `CONSTRUCT' is used to define or to redefine existing sets, coordinate systems, spaces, transforms, time curves, space curves, load masks, and analytical
shapes. It also allows the user to define geometric parameters, to merge geometric parts
and to define the alphabetic and numeric parts of names that are generated during geometry
creation.
`CONSTRUCT' has the following secondary commands:
FEMGEN command
2.3.1
2.3.3
2.3.4
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
CONSTRUCT LMASK
CONSTRUCT MERGE
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
2.3.12
CONSTRUCT NAME
CONSTRUCT PARAMETER
CONSTRUCT SCURVE
CONSTRUCT SET
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
CONSTRUCT SPACE
CONSTRUCT TCURVE
CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM
Define Local Coordinate Systems

Define a Load Mask
Merge Geometric Parts that are within a given
Tolerance
Define names to be automatically generated
Define a Geometric Parameter
Define a Space Curve
Group Geometric Parts or Elements
Define an Analytical Shape
Define a Working space
Define a Time Curve
Define a Transformation
FEMVIEW command
2.3.2
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.13
19/08/1999
CONSTRUCT LINE
CONSTRUCT SET
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
CONSTRUCT XSECTION
Define a line through the mesh

Group Elements or Nodes
Define an Analytical Shape (Planes only)
Superceded; use CONSTRUCT SHAPE
28
CONSTRUCT
COORDSYS
Define a Local Coordinate System
2.3.1 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS

In FEMGEN this command is used to define local coordinate systems for the definition of
points or the application of constraints and to select which one is operative.
In FEMVIEW this command is used to define local coordinate systems for use with `RESULTS TRANSFORM LOCAL'
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' has the following sub-commands:
2.3.1.1
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CONIC
2.3.1.2
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC
2.3.1.3
2.3.1.4
2.3.1.5
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS GLOBAL

CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL
2.3.1.6
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL
Define a local conical

system
Define a local cylindrical
system
Select a global system
Select a local system
Define a local rectilinear
system
Define a local spherical
system
19/08/1999
29
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
CONIC
Define a Local Conical System
2.3.1.1 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CONIC [csyst] defn

FEMVIEW command only
This command is used to define a local conical system for use with `RESULTS TRANSFORM LOCAL'
csyst
defn
=
=
optional name of the local coordinate system

two sets of model coordinates (x, y, z) defining the local origin
and local z axis of the system. The angle of the cone is defined
by a third set of coordinates or the keyword ÀNGLE' and an angle.
OR
the keyword `NODES' with two node numbers defining the local origin
and local z axis of the system. The angle of the cone is defined
by a third node or the keyword ÀNGLE' and an angle.
Each time that a new axis system is created an axis set is drawn at the local origin to indicate
the location and orientation of the coordinate system.
When the resulting conical axis system is used with `RESULTS LOCAL TRANSFORM'
the radial (or local x ) direction is normal to the surface of the cone, the local z direction
is in the direction of the cone axis projected on to the surface of the cone and the hoop (or
local y) direction is normal to the plane defined by the local z and radial directions.
The angle of the cone is constant.
See Also:
`RESULTS TRANSFORM LOCAL' , section 2.15.10, page 470

ÙTILITY TABULATE ' , section 2.18.9, page 516
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CONIC 1.1 1.2 2.1 3.2 2.1 4 ANGLE 45
Creates a conical axis system with the origin at x=1.1, y=1.2 and z=2.1. The local z
axis of the conical system is defined by x=3.2, y=2.1 and z=4. The angle of the cone
is 45 degrees. A name for the system will be generated automatically.
2. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CONIC CONIC1 NODES 1 10 25
Creates a conical axis system called CONIC1 with the origin at node 1, the local z
axis defined by node 10 and the angle of the cone defined by node 25.
19/08/1999
30
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
CYLINDRIC
Define a Local Cylindrical System
2.3.1.2 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC

This command is used to define a local cylindrical coordinate system.
FEMGEN command
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC [csyst] Pnamo Pnamz Pnamx
csyst
Pnamo
Pnamz
Pnamx
=
=
=
=
name of the local coordinate system, up to 4 characters

origin of coordinate system
defines the local z-axis direction from `pnamo' to `pnamz'
defines the local x-axis direction, which is the vector from `pnamo'
to `pnamx' projected onto the plane normal to the local z-axis.
The cylindrical coordinates (r; ; z ) are connected to the local

x = rcos(), y = rsin() and z = z . Where is in degrees.
x; y; z ) coordinates by
Local cylindrical coordinate systems may be selected for use in the definition of point
coordinates (in terms of the local cylindrical coordinates r, , and z ) using the command
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL' , or for the creation of skew boundary conditions
using the command `PROPERTY ATTACH'
Pnamz
z
Pnamo
Pnamx
Figure 2.1: Definition of a cylindrical coordinate system
Note 1: Default names

If no name is entered a default name is created, this is CSn where n is a count of
defined coordinate systems. The default name can be changed with the `CONSTRUCT NAME' command.
Examples:
19/08/1999

1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC CC1 P1 P4 P7
This creates a cylindrical coordinate system called CC1 with P1 as the origin, P1 to
P4 defines the local z-axis and P7 defines the local x-axis.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL' , section 2.3.1.4, page 34

`CONSTRUCT NAME' , section 2.3.5, page 57
`PROPERTY ATTACH' , section 2.14.1, page 346
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY CSYST' , section 2.18.9, page 516
ÙTILITY DELETE GEOMETRY CSYST' , section 2.18.2, page 479
FEMVIEW command
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC [csyst] def
This command is used to define a local cylindrical system for use with `RESULTS TRANSFORM LOCAL'
csyst
defn
=
=

and local z axis of the system.
OR
and local z axis of the system.
OR
X or Y or Z if the axis of the cylinder is one of the global axes.
When the resulting cylindrical axis system is used with `RESULTS LOCAL TRANSFORM' the radial (or local x) direction is normal to the surface of the cylinder, the local
z direction is in the direction of the cylinder axis and the hoop (or local y) direction is
circumferential.
See Also:

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC 1.1 1.2 2.1 3.2 2.1 4
Creates a cylindrical axis system with the origin at x=1.1, y=1.2 and z=2.1. The local
z axis of the system passes through x=3.2, y=2.1 and z=4. A name for the system
will be generated automatically.
19/08/1999
31
32

2. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC CONIC1 NODES 1 10
Creates a cylindrical axis system called CYL1 with the origin at node 1, the local z
axis defined by node 10.
19/08/1999
33
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
GLOBAL
Select Global System
2.3.1.3 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS GLOBAL

This command is used to return to the global system.
Point coordinates may be defined in the global, or a local coordinate system (see command
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL' ). The global system is the default. When point coordinates have been entered in a local coordinate system, the `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
GLOBAL' command may be used to exit this mode and return to the global system.
The current coordinate system is shown by the ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY STATUS' command (if no coordinate system is given then the global system is current).
See Also:

ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY STATUS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
34
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
LOCAL
Select a Local System
2.3.1.4 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL csyst

This command is used to activate a previously defined local coordinate system.
csyst
name of the local coordinate system
All point coordinates entered subsequently must be expressed in terms of the local system.
Coordinates entered in this way are transformed to the global system before being stored
in the database. The current coordinate system is shown by the command ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY STATUS' .
Local coordinate systems are defined using the commands `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
RECTANGUL' , `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL' , and `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
CYLINDRIC' . Return to the global coordinate system is achieved using the command
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS GLOBAL' .
Note that local systems are only used to simplify the input of geometry points and that all
points will be stored in the global system. However, local systems can be shown with the
command ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY CSYST' .
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL CS3
Activates the local coordinate system named CS3.
See Also:

19/08/1999
35
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
RECTANGUL
Define a Local Rectilinear System
2.3.1.5 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL

This command is used to define a local rectilinear coordinate system.
FEMGEN command
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL [csyst] Pnamo Pnamz Pnamx
csyst
Pnamo
Pnamz
Pnamx
=
=
=
=

defines the local z-axis direction, `pnamo' to `pnamz'
defines the local x-axis direction, which is the vector from `pnamo' to
`pnamx' projected onto the plane normal to the local z-axis.
The y-axis of the local coordinate system is automatically derived from the x- and z-axes.
Local rectilinear coordinate systems may be selected for use in the definition of point coordinates using the command `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL' , or for the creation of
skew boundary conditions using the command `PROPERTY ATTACH'
Z
Pnamz
Pnamo
Y
Pnamx
X
Figure 2.2: Definition of a rectangular coordinate system
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL CR1 PO1 PZ1 PX1
This creates a rectangular coordinate system called CR1 with its origin at point PO1.
The z-axis is defined by PZ1 and the x-axis by PX1.
19/08/1999
36

See Also:

FEMVIEW command
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL [csyst] def
This command is used to define a local rectangular system for use with `RESULTS TRANSFORM LOCAL'
csyst
defn
=
=
=

three sets of model coordinates (x, y, z) defining the local origin,
local z axis and local zx plane of the system.
or the keyword `NODES' with three node numbers defining the local origin,
local z axis and local zx plane of the system.
See Also:

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL 1.1 1.2 2.1 3.2 2.1 4 6.5 6.5 6.5
Creates a rectangular axis system with the origin at x=1.1, y=1.2 and z=2.1. The
local z axis of the system passes through x=3.2, y=2.1 and z=4 and the local zx plane
contains a point at 6.5 6.5 6.5. A name for the system will be generated automatically.
2. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL SYS1 NODES 1 10 15
Creates a cylindrical axis system called SYS1 with the origin at node 1, the local z
axis defined by node 10 and the local zx plane defined by node 15.
19/08/1999
37
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS
SPHERICAL
Define a Local Spherical System
2.3.1.6 CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL

This command is used to define a local spherical coordinate system.
FEMGEN command
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL [csyst] Pnamo Pnamz Pnamx
csyst
Pnamo
Pnamz
Pnamx
=
=
=
=

defines the local z-axis direction, `pnamo' to `pnamz'
defines the local x-axis direction, which is the vector from `pnamo' to
`pnamx' projected onto the plane normal to the local z-axis.
The spherical coordinates (r; ; ) are connected to the local (x; y; z ) coordinates by x =
r cos() sin(), y = r sin() sin() and z = r cos() where and are in degrees.
Local spherical coordinate systems may be selected for use in the definition of point coordinates (in terms of the local spherical coordinates r; ; and ) using the command `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS LOCAL' , or for the creation of skew boundary conditions using the
command `PROPERTY ATTACH'
Pnamz
Pnamo
Pnamx
Figure 2.3: Definition of a spherical coordinate system

Examples:
19/08/1999
38

1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL CS1 P1 P2 P3
This creates a spherical coordinate system called CS1 with its origin at P1. The
z-axis is defined by P2 and the x-axis by P3
See Also:

FEMVIEW command
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL [csyst] def
This command is used to define a local spherical system for use with `RESULTS TRANSFORM LOCAL'
csyst
defn
=
=

and local axis of the system.
OR
and local axis of the system.
OR
X or Y or Z if the local axis of the sphere is one of the global axes.
When the resulting spherical system is used with `RESULTS LOCAL TRANSFORM' the
radial (or local x) direction is normal to the surface of the sphere, the hoop (or local y)
direction is in a plane normal to the axis and the local z direction is perpendicular to these
two.
See Also:

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL 1.1 1.2 2.1 3.2 2.1 4
Creates a cylindrical axis system with the origin at x=1.1, y=1.2 and z=2.1. The local
axis of the system passes through x=3.2, y=2.1 and z=4. A name for the system will
be generated automatically.
19/08/1999

2. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL SPH11 NODES 1 10
Creates a cylindrical axis system called SPH11 with the origin at node 1, the local
axis defined by node 10.
19/08/1999
39
40
CONSTRUCT
LINE
Defines a line through the mesh
2.3.2 CONSTRUCT LINE Contents [line name] Mode [Range]

FEMVIEW Command only.
This command enables the user to define a line through the mesh. This line may be a line of
`NODES' , a line of ÈLEMENTS' (see note 5) or a `FREE' line depending on the selection
made for its contents. If the line is to contain nodes or elements then it may be defined in
one of the following ways.
Mode
Range
Comments
THROUGH
n1 n2 [n3....] [ANGLE Toll]

/PICK [ANGLE Toll]
n1 n2 n3 ....
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
/PICK
[BLOCK n] I n1 TO n2
... J n3 TO n4 K n5 TO n6
See notes 1 and 4.
LIST
IJK
The line is defined as connecting the

nodes or elements in the specified order.
(See notes 2 and 4).
The line of nodes or elements specified by node
or element IJK values is defined. This command
is for IJK regular models only. Note that if no
`BLOCK' is specified the default is the
1st block and that any IJK range not specified
defaults to n1 - nmax. Note also that only one
direction can have a `TO' range (or default
range) specified. (ie: only one axis can have
`n2' different to `n1' ).
If a `FREE' line is being constructed then this line is defined by either two cursor hits or
two node numbers (see note 3).
If a line name is specified in the command then the line will be saved in the database under
this name. This line can then be recovered later, for example to display results or plot a
graph along it.
19/08/1999

Note 1: Line `THROUGH' reference nodes
The `CONSTRUCT LINE NODES THROUGH n1 n2' command identifies nodes
on a straight line between nodes `n1' and `n2' . A line of elements cannot currently be defined in this way. If `THROUGH n1 n2 . . . nn' is specified then
nodes on line segments between `n1' to `n2' , `n2' to ' n3' ,. . . , `nn-1' to `nn' , are
identified.
Nodes within a solid of revolution formed by sweeping a circular arc about each
line segment are identified. The circular arc is defined with the line segment as
a cord and the angle `Toll' being the sum of the angles subtended from the cord
to a point on the arc. A default angle of 1 degree is used in normal operation.
If ÀNGLE Toll' is entered, then the angle specified will replace the 1 degree
default in the algorithm.
Note 2: Simple `LIST' of nodes or elements
The line is defined as connecting the nodes or elements in the order they are
specified. It is possible to continue entry of a simple list of nodes/elements on
the subsequent input line by using the special continuation character `:' at the
end of a line. The program will then prompt for more input with `MORE>' .
CONSTRUCT LINE NODES LIST 1 4 7 12 16 25 91 118 121 139 55 56 :
MORE> 35 51 235 236 100 103 106 109 111 45 146 158
Note 3: An arbitrary or `FREE' line

The `FREE' line is one that does not necessarily pass through node points. It
can only be used on 2D planar models or on cross-sections taken through 3D
models. The line is defined either by making two cursor hits or by giving the
numbers of two node points.
Note 4: Use of the graphics cursor to `/PICK' nodes
The command word `/PICK' enables the user to select nodes or elements for
the definition of a line by using the graphics cursor. For a node or element to
be sensitive to the cursor it must be visible in the current `VIEW' mode. To
terminate cursor picking it is necessary to make two approximately coincident
cursor hits, or to move the cursor outside the graphics area.
Note 5: Element lines
Element lines are taken to be lines connecting the centroids of the specified
elements. Currently element lines may only be used when plotting graphs.
Note 6: Maximum number of nodes/elements
The maximum number of nodes or elements in a line is 1000. There is no limit
to the length of a FREE line.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT LINE NODES THROUGH 9 108
A line of nodes is defined with all the nodes that lie on a straight line between nodes
9 and 108.
2. CONSTRUCT LINE NODES THROUGH 4 10 30 40 50 65 ANGLE 5.0
A line of nodes is defined with all the nodes that lie on or within 5 degrees of the line
segments 4 to 10, 10 to 30, 30 to 40, 40 to 50 and 50 to 65.
3. CONSTRUCT LINE NODES boundary THROUGH /PICK
The cursor is made available to pick the nodes that define the line segments that the
nodes must be on. The line is then saved in the database under the name `boundary' .
19/08/1999
41
42

4. CONSTRUCT LINE NODES LIST 1 TO 20 STEP 3
A line of nodes 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16 and 19 is defined.
5. CONSTRUCT LINE NODES top edge LIST 1 TO 50
A line of nodes from 1 to 50 is defined and saved in the database under the name
`top edge' .
6. CONSTRUCT LINE ELEMENTS LIST 1 4 7 12 16 19 112 115 118 201
A line of the elements listed is defined.
7. CONSTRUCT LINE NODES LIST /PICK
The cursor is made available to pick the nodes which are on the line.
8. CONSTRUCT LINE FREE /CURSOR
The cursor is made available to identify any two positions that define a line that will
cut a 2D planar model.
9. CONSTRUCT LINE FREE diagonal 3 112
A line passing freely through a 2D planar model from node 3 to node 112 is defined
and saved in the database under the name `diagonal' .
10. CONSTRUCT LINE NODES IJK I 51 J 1 TO 6 K 7
For an IJK regular model only, a line is defined from nodes J1 to J6 on the plane I51,
K7.
11. CONSTRUCT LINE ELEMENTS IJK BLOCK 3 I 51 J 1
For an IJK regular model only, a line is defined in block 3 from elements K1 to Kmax
on the plane I51, J1.
See Also:
`PRESENT GRAPH LINE' , section 2.13.3.3, page 317

ÙTILITY DELETE LINES' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE LINES' , section 2.18.9, page 516
`VIEW LINE' , section 2.19.7, page 541
19/08/1999
Figure 2.4: Definition of Toll
19/08/1999
43
44
CONSTRUCT
LMASK
Define a Load Mask
2.3.3 CONSTRUCT LMASK

FEMGEN Command only.
This command is used to define a load mask in order to limit the region over which a load
acts. Load masks may be defined in terms of a part's parametric space or in terms of the
global coordinate system. A local coordinate system may be attached to a global load mask
in order to re-orientate it.
Load masks may be attached to a load using the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' .
`CONSTRUCT LMASK' has the following sub-commands:
2.3.3.3
CONSTRUCT LMASK LINE
2.3.3.4
CONSTRUCT LMASK SURFACE
2.3.3.1
CONSTRUCT LMASK BODY
2.3.3.2
CONSTRUCT LMASK GLOBAL
Define a load mask for a line

load
Define a load mask for a
surface load
Define a load mask for a body
load
Define a load mask in the
global coordinate system
19/08/1999
45
CONSTRUCT LMASK
[lmask] BODY
Define a load mask for a body load
2.3.3.1 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] BODY [INVERSE] Umin Umax Vmin Vmax
Wmin Wmax
This command is used to define a load mask for use with a load applied to a body. When
attached to a load using the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' the load mask will restrict
the action of the load to those nodes or elements which lie between Umin and Umax, Vmin
and Vmax, Wmin, Wmax. The INVERSE option may be used to restrict the action of the
load to those nodes or elements which lie outside Umin, Umax, Vmin, Vmax, Wmin and
Wmax where:
lmask
INVERSE
Umin
Umax
Vmin
Vmax
Wmin
Wmax
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
name of the load mask

load acts on area outside mask
lower limit as a fraction of line length in first body direction (0 to 1)
upper limit as a fraction of line length in first body direction (0 to 1)
lower limit as a fraction of line length in second body direction (0 to 1)
upper limit as a fraction of line length in second body direction (0 to 1)
lower limit as a fraction of line length in third body direction (0 to 1)
upper limit as a fraction of line length in third body direction (0 to 1)
1
1
B1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 2.5: Definition of a body load mask
19/08/1999
46

If no name is entered a default name is created, this is LMn where n is a count of
defined load masks. The default name can be changed with the `CONSTRUCT
NAME' command.
Note 2: Masking criteria
The load mask bases its masking action upon either the coordinates of a node
or the centroid of an element or element face. Thus for element loads the mask
will simply include or exclude whole elements.
Note 3: Interaction with space curves
The body load mask will compress a surface space curve so that all of the curve
fits within the load mask limits. Where the INVERSE option has been used the
space curve will be repeated once from 0 to Umin and once from Umax to 1,
once from 0 to Vmin and once for Vmax to 1, once from 0 to Wmin and once
for Wmax to 1.
Note 4: Viewing load masks
The limits of a body load mask can only be viewed by attaching it to a load and
using the command `LABEL MESH LOAD' .
Note 5: Permitted body topologies
The body load mask can only be applied to six-sided bodies made up of foursided surfaces with straight sides. The sides of the surfaces can be combined
lines.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 BODY .2 .8 .2 .8 .2 .8
This creates a load mask which when applied to a body load will restrict the loaded
nodes or elements to those in the central section from .2 to .8 of each side length.
2. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 BODY INVERSE .2 .8 .2 .8 .2 .8
This creates a load mask which when applied to a surface load will restrict the loaded
nodes or elements to those which lie outside the central section from .2 to .8 of each
side length.
See Also:

`CONSTRUCT SCURVE' , section 2.3.7, page 60
`CONSTRUCT TCURVE' , section 2.3.11, page 119
`PROPERTY LOAD' , section 2.14.5, page 364
ÙTILITY DELETE' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
47
CONSTRUCT LMASK
[lmask] GLOBAL
Define a load mask in the global coordinate system
2.3.3.2 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] GLOBAL X/Y/Z [INVERSE] Min Max

This command is used to define a load mask for use with any load. The load mask is
specified in terms of the global X, Y, and/or Z axes. A load mask may be defined in more
than one axis by repeating the command with the same load mask name and a different
direction. When attached to a load using the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' the load
mask will restrict the action of the load to those nodes or elements which lie within the load
mask limits. The INVERSE option may be used to restrict the action of the load to those
nodes or elements which lie outside the load mask limits.
A local coordinate system may be attached to the load mask using the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' . This will modify the load mask location and the orientation of the load
mask limits.
lmask
X
Y
Z
INVERSE
Min
Max
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

mask is applied to the global X axis
mask is applied to the global Y axis
mask is applied to the global Z axis
lower limit on axis
upper limit on axis
S1
Y
S2
Z
X
Figure 2.6: Definition of a global load mask in the X direction
19/08/1999
48
S1
S2
Y
Z
X
Figure 2.7: Definition of an inverse global load mask in the X direction

NAME' command.
A global load mask will truncate an space curve.
The limits of a global load mask can only be viewed by attaching it to a load and
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 GLOBAL X 23.1 47.6
This creates a load mask which when applied to a line load will restrict the loaded
nodes or elements to those whose coordinates lie between x=23.1 and x=47.6.
2. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 GLOBAL X INV 23.1 47.6
nodes or elements to those whose coordinates are less than or equal to x=23.1 or
greater than or equal to x=47.6.
3. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 GLOBAL X 40 70
CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 GLOBAL Y 0 90
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYL CY1 P5 P6 P2
PROPERTY ATTACH LM1 CY1
This creates a load mask in two of the global directions. A local cylindrical axis
system is defined and attached to the load mask changing the X direction to be radial
and the Y direction to be rotational.
19/08/1999
49
P6
S1
Z
X
P5
P2
Figure 2.8: Definition of a global load mask with local coordinate system
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' , section 2.3.1, page 28

19/08/1999
50
CONSTRUCT LMASK
[lmask] LINE
Define a load mask for a line load
2.3.3.3 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] LINE [INVERSE] Umin Umax

This command is used to define a load mask for use with a load applied to a line. When
the action of the load to those nodes or elements which lie between Umin and Umax. The
INVERSE option may be used to restrict the action of the load to those nodes or elements
which lie outside Umin and Umax where:
lmask
INVERSE
Umin
Umax
=
=
=
=

lower limit as a fraction of line length (0 to 1)
upper limit as a fraction of line length (0 to 1)
P2
L1
P1
Figure 2.9: Definition of a line load mask
P2
L1
P1
Figure 2.10: Definition of an INVERSE line load mask
NAME' command.
19/08/1999

Note 3: Limitation
When a line load mask is attached to a load which in turn is applied specifically
to a combined line, the load mask is applied to the individual lines used in the
combined line. This limitation can be avoided by the use of a global load mask.
The line load mask will compress a line space curve so that all of the curve
fits within the load mask limits. Where the INVERSE option has been used the
space curve will be repeated once from 0 to Umin and once from Umax to 1.
The limits of a line load mask can only be viewed by attaching it to a load and
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 LINE .2 .8
nodes or elements to those in the central section from .2 to .8 of the line's length.
2. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 LINE INVERSE .2 .8
nodes or elements to those which lie from 0 to .2 and .8 to 1.0 of the line's length.
See Also:

19/08/1999
51
52
CONSTRUCT LMASK
[lmask] SURFACE
Define a load mask for a surface load
2.3.3.4 CONSTRUCT LMASK [lmask] SURFACE [INVERSE] Umin [Umax [Vmin

[Vmax]]]
This command is used to define a load mask for use with a load applied to a surface. When
the action of the load to those nodes or elements which lie between Umin and Umax, Vmin
and Vmax. The INVERSE option may be used to restrict the action of the load to those
nodes or elements which lie outside Umin, Umax, Vmin and Vmax where:
lmask
INVERSE
Umin
Umax
Vmin
Vmax
=
=
=
=
=
=

lower limit as a fraction of line length in first surface direction (0 to 1)
upper limit as a fraction of line length in first surface direction (0 to 1)
lower limit as a fraction of line length in second surface direction (0 to 1)
upper limit as a fraction of line length in second surface direction (0 to 1)
S1
Figure 2.11: Definition of a surface load mask
19/08/1999
S1
Figure 2.12: Definition of an INVERSE surface load mask

NAME' command.
The surface load mask will compress a surface space curve so that all of the
curve fits within the load mask limits. Where the INVERSE option has been
used the space curve will be repeated once from 0 to Umin and once from Umax
to 1, once from 0 to Vmin and once for Vmax to 1.
The limits of a surface load mask can only be viewed by attaching it to a load
and using the command `LABEL MESH LOAD' .
Note 5: Permitted surface topologies
The surface load mask can only be applied to four-sided surfaces with the topologies indicated in the following figures. The sides of the surfaces can be combined lines.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 SURFACE .2 .8 .2 .8
nodes or elements to those in the central section from .2 to .8 of both side lengths.
2. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 SURFACE INVERSE .2 .8 .2 .8
nodes or elements to those which lie outside the central section from .2 to .8 of both
side lengths.
19/08/1999
53
54
Figure 2.13: Flat surface with four straight sides
Figure 2.14: Flat surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides
Figure 2.15: Cylindrical surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides
Figure 2.16: Flat surface with one constant radius arc and one degenerate side
19/08/1999

See Also:

19/08/1999
55
56
CONSTRUCT
MERGE
Merges geometric parts within a given tolerance
2.3.4 CONSTRUCT MERGE [Set name] [Tol]

Set name = Only parts in the named set are to be merged.

Tol = The maximum distance to be used when deciding whether parts are to be merged.
If a tolerance is not specified then the absolute tolerance is used. The current value of the
absolute tolerance can be displayed with ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY STATUS'
and specified with `CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE ABSOLUTE' .
The `CONSTRUCT MERGE' command will delete duplicated points, lines, surfaces and
bodies which are within the specified tolerance. If a set name is given then only parts in
that set and within the specified tolerance will be merged, otherwise the command operates
on the complete model.
On completion a summary of the numbers of entities deleted is displayed.
This command is specially useful if data has come from a CAD system.
As part of the merging process a check is performed on whether any points will be merged
which are used in the definition of local axis systems, shapes, transformations and intersections. The user is asked whether these ' dependent' points should be merged. If the user
specifies that these points should be merged then some shapes, local axes etc. may be lost.
See Also:
ÙTILITY READ' , section 2.18.7, page 487

`CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE ABSOLUTE' , section 2.3.10.3,
page 115
19/08/1999
57
CONSTRUCT
NAME
Specify names for automatic generation
2.3.5 CONSTRUCT NAME Type Alpha part [Numeric part]

The `CONSTRUCT NAME' command permits the user to define the alphabetic and numeric parts of names that are automatically generated as a result of geometry generation
commands. The `numeric part' of the name must be an integer and specifies the first number to be used as part of the name. This number is incremented by one each time a new
name for this type of part is generated.
The table below gives the parts for which names can be specified and their default names.
Type
Default Comments
POINTS
LINES
SURFACES
BODIES
TRANSFORM
SHAPES
CSYST
LOADS
TCURVES
SCURVES
LMASKS
MATERIALS
CONSTRNT
PARAMETER
PHYSICAL
SETS
4-CHARS
P
L
S
B
T
SH
CS
LO
TC
SC
LM
MA
CO
PA
PH
SE
-
8-CHARS
Defines a name for points.

Defines a name for lines.
Defines a name for surfaces.
Defines a name for bodies.
Defines a name for transformations.
Defines a name for shapes.
Defines a name for local coordinates systems.
Defines a name for loads.
Defines a name for time curves.
Defines a name for space curves.
Defines a name for load masks.
Defines a name for material properties.
Defines a name for constraints.
Defines a name for parameters.
Defines a name for physical properties.
Defines a name for sets.
Specifies that 4-character names are to be used
(see note 2).
Specifies that 8-character names are to be used.
This is the default. (see notes 3 and 4).
Note 1: Length of name

The maximum length for a name is eight characters. Names that are automatically generated by FEMGEN will, by default, be generated with a leading alphabetical part as specified in the table above and a numerical part starting from
1. Using the `CONSTRUCT NAME' command the alphabetical part (max of
4 letters) and the numerical part (8 - number of letters in alpha-part) may be
redefined.
Note 2: 4-character names
The command `CONSTRUCT NAME 4-CHARS' specifies that names are restricted in length to 4 characters. This command is provided so that users can
19/08/1999
58

read in FEMGEN history files that were generated before the introduction of 8character names. To read in such a history file, the file should be edited and the
command `CONSTRUCT NAME 4-CHARS' inserted after the first `FEMGEN
model name' command found near the head of the file.
Note that 4-character names should not otherwise be used. (However, for completeness note that with 4-character names the `CONSTRUCT NAME' command could define a 1 or 2 letter alphabetical part for generated names).
Note 3: 8-character names
The command `CONSTRUCT NAME 8-CHARS' specifies that names may be
up to 8 characters in length and this is the default. Thus, for example, in the
default mode of operation, point names will be generated from P1 to P9999999
and line names generated from L1 to L9999999.
If the last name in a name generation sequence is reached then the user will be
prompted to specify the alphabetical and numerical part for the first name of a
new sequence.
On termination of a FEMGEN session the current state of the name generation
sequences for the model will be saved in the FEMGEN database and recovered
when the model is subsequently re-entered.
Note 4: Using 8-character names efficiently
There is some additional logic associated with 8-character names which can help
speed up model generation. Ideally the user should let the program generate
names as required using the default naming sequences and make sure that any
new names explicitly specified would not occur naturally in these sequences. For
example, a particular reference point should be given a name such as `CENTRE'
rather than `P2000' . If, however, the user does explicitly specify a new name
that would occur naturally in the current naming sequences it is more efficient
to make this name as close as possible to the maximum name already generated
in that sequence.
Where the `CONSTRUCT NAME' command is used to specify the first name
of a new naming sequence in order to distinguish parts of a model by the names
generated then it is more efficient to generate names in ascending order, for
example: from S1001 to S1500, S2001 to S2500 and S3001 to S3500 rather
than S3001 to S3500, S2001 to S2500 and S2001 to S2500. The rule is that the
name specified for the start of a new sequence should ideally be greater than
the maximum name already used in that sequence.
Note 5: Database compatibility
A FEMGEN model created prior to the introduction of 8-character names can
be worked on by this version of FEMGEN. The mode of working will, by default, continue to be 4-character names but the user can switch to 8-character
names by using the command `CONSTRUCT NAME 8-CHARS' .
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT NAME SU S 1001
Specifies that the first name to be used when generating a surface is S1001. The next
surface will have the name S1002.
2. CONSTRUCT NAME BODIES BODY 100
Specifies that the first name to be used when generating a body is BODY100. The
next body will have the name BODY101.
19/08/1999
59
CONSTRUCT
PARAMETER
Define a Geometric Parameter
2.3.6 CONSTRUCT PARAMETER Name Value

This command is used to define a parameter which can then be used when defining the
geometry of a model.
Name
Value
=
=
name of the parameter, which is used for later references to it.

initial value of the parameter.
Various `GEOMETRY' and `CONSTRUCT' commands can be specified in terms of defined parameters.
When the value of a parameter is changed all information dependent on the parameter will
be modified.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT PARAMETER RAD1 5.3
Defines a parameter named RAD1 with an initial value of 5.3.
See Also:
`GEOMETRY POINT' , section 2.8.8, page 216

`CONSTRUCT SHAPE' , section 2.3.9, page 96
`CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' , section 2.3.12, page 126
19/08/1999
60
CONSTRUCT
SCURVE
Define a Space Curve
2.3.7 CONSTRUCT SCURVE

This command is used to define a space curve in order to specify the variation of a value in
space. At present space curves may only be attached to loads. Space curves may be defined
in terms of a part's parametric space or in terms of the global coordinate system, in either
case the curve is only considered to be valid between the limits defining the curve. A local
coordinate system may be attached to a global space curve in order to re-orientate it.
Space curves may be viewed using the command ÙTILITY GRAPH SCURVE' and may
be attached to loads using the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' .
`CONSTRUCT SCURVE' has the following sub-commands:
2.3.7.3
CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE
2.3.7.4
CONSTRUCT SCURVE SURFACE
2.3.7.1
CONSTRUCT SCURVE BODY
2.3.7.2
CONSTRUCT SCURVE GLOBAL
Define a space curve for a

line
surface
body
Define a space curve in the
global coordinate system
19/08/1999
61
CONSTRUCT SCURVE
[scurve] BODY
Define a space curve for a body load
2.3.7.1 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] BODY CORNERS v1[-v8]

This command is used to define a space curve which varies over a body. The user may
specify a value at each corner of the body.
scurve
v1-v8
=
=
name of the space curve

value of space curve at each corner of the body
100
P8
100
100
100
75
100
75
75
50
75
50
25
50
25
50
25
P4
25
0
25
0
0
0
25
25
50
0
75
25
100
50
75
75
100
P5 50
50
50
0
50
0
100
50
75
50
50
0
75
100
50
75
25
50
0
25
0
25
25
100
75
100
75
25
P3
25
25
0
25
75
25
75
25
100
75
100
P7
100
100
75
100
75
50
100
100
50
75
50
50
0
75
25
100
100
100
75
100
50
75
100
100
P6
75
50
75
50
75
50
25
50
25
50
25
25
100
75
25
25
0
X
0
P1
P2
Figure 2.17: Definition of a BODY space curve

If no name is entered a default name is created, this is SCn where n is a count of
defined space curves. The default name can be changed with the `CONSTRUCT
NAME' command.
Note 2: Interaction with loads
A body space curve will multiply a load at a node, element face centroid or
element centroid (depending upon the load type) by the value of the space curve
at that point in space.
Note 3: Interaction with load masks
A body load mask will compress a body space curve so that all of the curve
fits within the load mask limits. A global load mask will truncate a body space
curve.
19/08/1999
62

Note 4: Viewing space curves
Body space curves may only be viewed by applying them to a load and using
the command `LABEL MESH LOADS' .
Note 5: Evaluation of BODY CORNERS space curves
The space curve value for these curve types is evaluated by linear interpolation
over the body.
Note 6: Permitted body topologies
The body load mask can only be applied to six-sided bodies made up of foursided surfaces with straight sides. The sides of the surfaces can be combined
lines.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SCURVE BODY CORNERS 0 0 0 0 100 100 100 100
This creates a space curve which varies from 0 to 100 in the body local z direction.
100
P8
100
100
100
75
100
75
75
50
75
50
25
50
25
50
25
P4
25
0
25
0
0
0
25
25
50
0
75
25
100
50
75
75
100
P5 50
50
50
0
50
0
25
25
0
25
75
25
75
25
100
75
100
100
50
75
50
75
25
75
100
50
75
25
25
0
25
100
50
75
50
50
25
100
75
100
P3 0
50
0
P7
100
100
75
100
75
50
100
50
0
75
25
100
75
100
100
75
100
50
75
100
100
P6
75
50
75
50
75
50
25
50
25
50
25
25
100
25
25
0
X
0
P1
P2
Figure 2.18: Example BODY CORNERS space curve
See Also:

`CONSTRUCT LMASK' , section 2.3.3, page 44
19/08/1999
63
CONSTRUCT SCURVE
[scurve] GLOBAL
Define a space curve in the global coordinate system
2.3.7.2 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] GLOBAL X/Y/Z Type Parameters

This command is used to define a space curve for use with any load. The space curve is
specified in terms of the global X, Y, and/or Z axes. A space curve may be defined in more
than one axis by repeating the command with the same space curve name and a different
direction. The curve may be defined as a list of position, magnitude pairs or via a function
(e.g. Normal Distribution, Parabola etc.). Lists may be read in from a file or typed in at the
keyboard; functions are defined interactively using a small number of control parameters.
A local coordinate system may be attached to the global space curve using the FEMGEN
command `PROPERTY ATTACH' . This will modify the space curve location and the orientation of the space curve limits.
scurve
X
Y
Z
Type
Parameters
=
=
=
=
=
=

space curve is defined in the global X axis
space curve is defined in the global Y axis
space curve is defined in the global Z axis
see line space curve for available types
see line space curve relevant parameters
Note that parameters Umin and Umax should be specified in global
coordinates
S1
S2
Z
X
Figure 2.19: Definition of a global space curve in the X direction

Note 1: Valid range
The space curve is only valid in the range between Umin and Umax.
NAME' command.
19/08/1999
64

A global space curve will multiply a load at a node, element face centroid or
A global load mask will truncate a global space curve.
Global space curves may be viewed either by applying them to a load and using
the command `LABEL MESH LOADS' or by using the command ÙTILITY
GRAPH SCURVE X,Y,Z' .
Note 6: Evaluation of GLOBAL space curves
The value of the space curve is calculated as S = f1(x) * f2(y) * f3(z).
All surface topologies including sets are supported.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SCURVE GLOBAL X ELIPSE 1 23.1 47.6
This creates a space curve on the global x axis starting at x=23.1, ending at x=47.6
with peak amplitude of 1.0.
2. CONSTRUCT SCURVE SC1 GLOBAL X ELIPSE 1 40 70
CONSTRUCT SCURVE SC1 GLOBAL Y LIST 0 1 90 1
CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYL CY1 P1 P6 P2
PROPERTY ATTACH SC1 CY1
This creates a space curve in two of the global directions. A local cylindrical axis
system is defined and attached to the space curve changing the X direction to be
radial and the Y direction to be rotational.
See Also:

19/08/1999
65
P6
P5
P4
Z
X
P1
P2
P3
Figure 2.20: Definition of a global space curve with local coordinate system
19/08/1999
66
CONSTRUCT SCURVE
[scurve] LINE
Define a space curve for a line
2.3.7.3 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] LINE Type Parameters

This command is used to define a space curve which varies along a line. The curve is
defined in terms of parametric distances along the line (0 to 1) and associated magnitude
values. The curve may be defined as a list of position, magnitude pairs or via a function
(e.g. Normal Distribution, Parabola etc.). Lists may be read in from a file or typed in at the
keyboard; functions are defined interactively using a small number of control parameters.
Type
Parameters
TRIANGLE
PARABOLA
ELLIPSE
NORMAL
SINE
ANTISINE
LIST
Amplitude [Umin] [Umax]

Amplitude [Power] [Umin] [Umax]
[Number sd] [Umin] [Umax]
FILE filename
u,a ...
scurve
Amplitude
Umin
Umax
Number sd
Power
filename
u
a
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

the peak amplitude of the function
lower bound on function (default=0)
upper bound on function (default=1)
number of standard deviations (default=3)
power of the function (default=2)
name of ascii file containing u,a pairs
parametric distance (0 to 1)
amplitude of space curve at position u
P2
P1
L1
Figure 2.21: Definition of a line space curve
19/08/1999

Note 1: Valid range
The space curve is only valid in the range between Umin and Umax.
NAME' command.
Note 3: Selecting portions of a space curve
The parameters Umin and Umax may be used to select a portion of one of the
above functions. A common usage of these parameters is to select half of one of
the functions which by default are symmetric. Setting Umin to 0 and Umax to
0.5 selects the first half of the space curve, Umin to 0.5 and Umax to 1.0 selects
the second half of the space curve. The resulting space curve will be mapped
to the full parametric space of the line. These parameters are also useful for
reversing the sense of a space curve on a line rather than re-defining the line
itself.
A line space curve will multiply a load at a node, element face centroid or element centroid (depending upon the load type) by the value of the space curve at
that point in space.
A line load mask will compress a line space curve so that all of the curve fits
within the load mask limits. A global load mask will truncate a line space
curve.
Note 6: Reading lists from a file
It is possible to read in long lists of space curve data from file. The file must
be ascii and have one u,a pair on each line. The u,a values must be separated
by either a comma or a space. The maximum allowable number of u,a pairs is
machine dependent but will be at least 10000.
Space curves may be viewed either by applying them to a load and using the
command `LABEL MESH LOADS' or by using the command ÙTILITY GRAPH
SCURVE' .
Note 8: The Power parameter on PARABOLIC space curves
This parameter is set to 2 by default to give the standard parabolic shape although the power parameter can be set to any even number. Setting the value to
8 gives a space curve shape which is common in boundary layer modelling.
Note 9: The Number sd parameter on NORMAL space curves
This parameter is set to 3 by default and governs the number of standard deviations which are included in the curve. When set to 3 the area under this curve
will be 0.997 which is useful for changing the distribution of a load without
changing its total.
19/08/1999
67
68

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE TRIANGLE 1
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.22: TRIANGLE line space curve
2. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE PARABOLA 1
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.23: PARABOLA line space curve
19/08/1999
69
3. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE PARABOLA 1 8
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.24: PARABOLA line space curve
4. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE ELIPSE 1
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.25: ELIPSE line space curve
19/08/1999
70

5. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE NORMAL 3
2.5
2.25
2
1.75
V 1.5
A
L
U 1.25
E
1
.75
.5
.25
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.26: NORMAL line space curve
6. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE SINE 1
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.27: SINE line space curve
19/08/1999
71
7. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE ANTISINE 1
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.28: ANTISINE line space curve
8. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE LIST 0 1 .2 1 .8 1 1 0
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.29: LIST line space curve
19/08/1999
72

9. CONSTRUCT SCURVE LINE PARABOLA 1 2 0 .5
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.30: Half PARABOLA line space curve
See Also:

19/08/1999
73
CONSTRUCT SCURVE
[scurve] SURFACE
Define a space curve for a surface
2.3.7.4 CONSTRUCT SCURVE [scurve] SURFACE Type Parameters

This command is used to define a space curve which varies over a surface. The user may
specify a value at each corner of the surface or an individual line space curve for one or
more of the surface's edges.
Type
Parameters
CORNERS
LINE
a1, [a2, [a3, [a4]]]

L1 Parameters as for line space curve except LIST FILE
scurve
a1-a4
L1-L4

amplitude of space curve at corner n
Local side identifier for surface
=
=
=
L3
a4
a3
S1
L2
L4
a1
L1
Figure 2.31: Definition of a surface CORNERS space curve
19/08/1999
a2
74
a4
L3
a3
S1
L2
L4
a1
L1
a2
Figure 2.32: Definition of a surface LINE space curve

Note 1: Valid range
When the space curve is defined using the sides rather than the corners, the space
curve is only valid in the range between Umin and Umax for each side.
NAME' command.
A surface space curve will multiply a load at a node, element face centroid or
A surface load mask will compress a surface space curve so that all of the curve
fits within the load mask limits. A global load mask will truncate a surface
space curve.
Note 5: List space curves
There is a limit of four data points (ie 8 values) on a LIST type space curve
under the SURFACE LINE option.
Space curves may be viewed either by applying them to a load and using the
command `LABEL MESH LOADS' or by using the command ÙTILITY GRAPH
SCURVE L1-L4' .
Note 7: Evaluation of SURFACE CORNERS space curves
The space curve value for these curve types is evaluated by linear interpolation
of the values a1-a4 over the surface.
19/08/1999
75
Note 8: Evaluation of SURFACE LINE space curves

The evaluation of SURFACE LINE space curves varies according to how many
and which lines on the surface have been assigned a curve.
f3(u)
P4
P3
f4(v)
S1
f2(v)
P1
v
u
P2
f1(u)
Figure 2.33: Evaluation of SURFACE LINE space curve

One curve on one side:

S = f1(u) or f2(v) or f3(u) or f4(v)
Two curves on opposite sides:
S = f1(u) + v*(f3(u)-f1(u)) or
S = f4(v) + u*(f2(v)-f4(v))
Two curves on adjacent sides:
S = f1(u) * f2(v) or
S = f2(v) * f3(u) etc.
Three curves
S1 = f1(u) + v*(f3(u)-f1(u))
S2 = f2(v)
S = (S1 + S2)/2 etc.
Four curves:
S1 = f1(u) + v*(f3(u)-f1(u))
S2 = f2(v) + u*(f4(v)-f2(v))
S = (S1 + S2)/2

The surface space curve can only be applied to four-sided surfaces with the
topologies indicated in the following figures. The sides of the surfaces can be
combined lines.
19/08/1999
76
Figure 2.34: Flat surface with four straight sides
Figure 2.35: Flat surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides
Figure 2.36: Cylindrical surface with two straight sides and two constant radius arc sides
Figure 2.37: Flat surface with one constant radius arc and one degenerate side
19/08/1999
77
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SCURVE SC1 SURFACE LINE L1 NORMAL 3
CONSTRUCT SCURVE SC1 SURFACE LINE L2 LIST 0 1 1 0
L3
L4
L2
L1
Figure 2.38: SURFACE LINE space curve
See Also:

19/08/1999
78
CONSTRUCT
SET
Group Geometric Entities
2.3.8 CONSTRUCT SET

This command is used to group entities for use in further commands.
`CONSTRUCT SET' has the following sub-commands:
2.3.8.1
2.3.8.2
2.3.8.3
CONSTRUCT SET [Set name] APPEND

CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE [Set name]
CONSTRUCT SET Set name COMPLEMENT
2.3.8.4
CONSTRUCT SET Set name INTERSECT
2.3.8.5
2.3.8.6
CONSTRUCT SET OPEN [Set name] [TYPE]

CONSTRUCT SET [Set name] REMOVE
Append to a set
Close a set
Generate the
complement of two sets
Generate the
intersection of two sets
Open a new set
Remove from a set
Notes on FEMGEN Sets

Note 1: Closing a set
The checks that are performed when a set is closed will depend on how the set
was first opened.
Sets that have been created with the default options will be automatically completed, so that all parts used in the definition of higher order parts will be added
to the set. Thus, if a body is added to a set, then when the set is closed all the
surfaces, lines and points that make up the body are also added to the set.
Sets that have been initially opened with the `LIST' or `LOOP' keywords will
be checked and modified so that they contain only parts of the given type and
will be checked for validity. The parts in these sets do not need to be given in
topological order.
Sets that have been initially opened with the ÌNCOMPLETE' keyword are not
completed or checked.
Note 2: Ordering of parts
From highest to lowest, the order of parts is Bodies, Surfaces, Lines and Points.
Notes on FEMVIEW Sets

Note 1: Set types
FEMVIEW sets may be either element or node based. When operating on the
contents of a set, the operation is mapped if necessary to be consistent with the
set type, ie, element operations are converted to nodes and node operations are
converted to elements.
19/08/1999
79
CONSTRUCT SET
[Set Name] APPEND
Add parts to an opened Set
2.3.8.1 CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name] APPEND

This command is used to append geometric parts or elements or nodes to a set.
FEMGEN Command.
CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name] APPEND [Type] Part
This command appends geometric parts to sets which have been previously activated using
the command `CONSTRUCT SET OPEN' or to the set named in the command.
Set Name = optional name of the set to which parts are to be appended. This may be
an existing or a new set. If no name is given then parts will be appended
to all the currently open sets. A named set is automatically closed and
completed after execution of the command. The currently open sets will
remain open until the `CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE' command is issued.
Completion of the set will then take place unless the set was originally
created with the ÌNCOMPLETE' , `LIST' or `LOOP' keywords.
See note 3.
Type
= optional specification of the level of part that is to be appended to the set
(see below). If omitted all levels of parts will be appended.
Part
= name of a point, line, surface, body, set, or ÀLL' (all parts) to be
appended to the set(s). More than one part may be specified at a time
and parts may be identified by name or by using the graphics cursor
(see below).
Type
No type
POINTS
LINES
SURFACES
BODIES
Comments
All the parts that make up the named part are appended to the set(s).
All the points that make up the named part are appended to the set(s).
All the lines that make up the named part are appended to the set(s).
All the surfaces that make up the named part are appended to the set(s).
All the bodies that make up the named part are appended to the set(s).
Selection of parts using the graphics cursor

The graphics cursor may be used to identify parts by picking. The graphics cursor is placed
near the required part and either a mouse button is used in which case the nearest part of
any type will be selected, or a keyboard key may be used to identify the type of part to be
picked namely:
P - for a point
L - for a line
S - for a surface
B - for a body
The drivers for some graphics devices are case sensitive such that use of a lower case letter
19/08/1999
80

allows the picking process to continue within the same command and use of an upper case
letter or a `C/R' will cause the picking process to terminate.
Also, via use of the keyword `CURSOR' , the graphics cursor can be used to control other
append operations based on the position of a part on the screen as follows:
Control
LEFT
RIGHT
TOP
BOTTOM
Comments
parts that lie entirely on the specified side of a section line
defined by two cursor positions are appended to the named or
open sets.
POLYGON
parts that lie entirely within the polygon specified by up to 20

cursor positions are appended to the named or open sets. Note
that the middle mouse button (or right button on a two button mouse)
should be used to specify the polygon vertices, the last
vertex should be specified with the left button to complete the
polygon.
The `CURSOR' commands are recorded in the history file as `CONSTRUCT SET APPEND MODEL DIVIDE/POLYGON' followed by the cursor positions in model coordinates. This is done to ensure reliable playback from history files.
Only parts that are currently being displayed will be considered. Parts are then appended
to the set if all of their primary defining parts satisfy the test (i.e. end points of lines are
considered, but points defining the centres of arcs are not).
Return Level: `CONSTRUCT SET APPEND' for a previously opened set.
Note 1: General use
The command may be repeated to append several parts or previously defined
sets. Existing sets can be re-opened to append more parts.
Note 2: Limits
A maximum of 10 parts may be specified within the same command.
Note 3: Set completion
was first opened.
will be checked for validity. The parts in these sets do not need to be given in
topological order.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET SE3 APPEND LINES B1
Add all the lines that make up B1 to the set SE3.
2. CONSTRUCT SET APPEND SU1

Add surface SU1 and all the points and lines that make up surface SU1 to all the
currently open sets.
3. CONSTRUCT SET SE3 APPEND LINES CURSOR TOP

Add to the set SE3, all the lines that lie above the section line made with 2 cursor
hits.
4. CONSTRUCT SET APPEND POINTS CURSOR POLYGON

Add to all the currently open sets, all the points that lie within a polygon defined by
up to 20 cursor hits.
FEMVIEW Command.
CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name [Set Type]] APPEND Part Range
This command appends a specified range of elements or nodes to the currently open sets.
Appended elements or nodes will be indicated by a square symbol displayed at the element
centroid or the node point.
Set Name
Set Type
Optional name of the set to which elements or nodes are to be appended.

This may be an existing set or a new set. If no name is given then
elements or nodes will be appended to all the currently open sets.
A named set, if not currently open, is automatically closed after
execution of the command, whilst the currently open sets will remain open
until the `CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE' command is issued.
Optional keyword for use with a new set which is used to define the type
of set to be created. This may be ÈLSET' (the default) to create
an element set, or `NODESET' to create a node set.
Part
Range
Comments
OLD
set name(s)
The contents of the previously defined set(s)

are appended to the named or open sets.
Up to 10 existing sets may be specified in
one command, but all must be of the same type
i.e. all node sets or all element sets.
NODES
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
Nodes in the specified range of node numbers

are appended to the named or open sets.
19/08/1999
81
82
Part
Range
Comments
CURSOR ...
The graphics cursor is used to control

append operations based on the position
of nodes on the screen.
(See note 1).
Nodes within the specified IJK range are
appended to the named or open sets.
This command is for IJK regular models only.
(Note that if no `BLOCK' is specifed
the default is all blocks and that any IJK
range not specified defaults to n1 - nmax).
IJK [BLOCK n] I n1 TO n2
ELEMENTS
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
CURSOR ...
EXTERNAL
TOP Angle
BOTTOM Angle
FRONT Angle
BACK Angle
LEFT Angle
RIGHT Angle
XMIN Limit XMAX Limit

... YMIN Limit YMAX Limit
... ZMIN Limit ZMAX Limit
GROUPS
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
Elements in the specified range of element

numbers are appended to the named or open
sets.
of elements on the screen.
(See note 1).
All elements with a free face are
These commands define a viewpoint at
infinity at the specified side of the
screen. A surface normal to each free
face of an element is calculated and
the element appended to the named or
open sets if the angle between its
normal and line of sight from the
viewpoint is less than the specified
Àngle' . Effective only with
3-dimensional solid elements.
These commands define a six sided
bounding box in the model coordinate
system. Between one and six `Limits'
to the box can be specified;
`Limits' not defined are considered
infinite. Elements that have all
nodes within the bounding box are
Elements within the specified IJK
range are appended to the named or
open sets. This command is for IJK
regular models only. (Note that if no
`BLOCK' is specifed the default is
all blocks and that any IJK range not
specified defaults to n1 - nmax).
Elements in the specified range of
element group numbers are appended
to the named or open sets.
19/08/1999
83
MATERIALS
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
Elements with material numbers in the

specified range are appended to the
named or open sets.
TYPES
Element Type
Elements of the specified type are

RESULTS
ABOVE v1 [BELOW v2]

BELOW v1 [ABOVE v2]
BETWEEN v1 v2
Nodes or elements respectively

(depending on whether the results are
nodal or elemental) with result values
equal to or above or below or between
the specified threshold values are
A loadcase and results attribute must
be current. Note that even if both
ÀBOVE' and `BELOW' thresholds
are specified only one threshold test
need be satisfied for the node/element
to be selected. (ie. the test is a
logical .OR. not a logical .AND.)
CURSOR
......

of elements on the screen for element
sets, and the position of nodes on the
screen for node sets. (See note 1).
Note 1: The `CURSOR' control

The graphics cursor can be used as follows. Note that for operations on elements, the entire element (i.e. all it's nodes) must satisfy the control for the
element to be selected.
Control
Comments
LEFT
Nodes/Elements that lie on the specified side of a
RIGHT
section line defined by two cursor positions are
TOP
BOTTOM
POLYGON
Nodes/Elements that lie within the polygon specified

by up to 20 cursor positions are appended to the named
or open sets. Note that the middle mouse button (or
right button on a two button mouse) should be used to
specify the polygon vertices. The last vertex should be
specified with the left button to complete the polygon
or by making a `hit' close to the 1st vertex.
Note 2: Appending elements (or element sets) to node sets

All the nodes that define the specified elements will be appended to the node set.
Note 3: Appending nodes (or node sets) to element sets
Any element connected to any of the specified nodes will be appended to the
element set.
19/08/1999
84

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET APPEND OLD WING
The contents of the existing set named `WING' are appended to all the open sets.
2. CONSTRUCT SET FRED APPEND OLD CAP FLANGE BOLT
The contents of the existing sets named `CAP' , ' FLANGE' and `BOLT' are appended to the set named `FRED' .
3. CONSTRUCT SET APPEND ELEMENTS 10 TO 100 STEPS 20
Elements 10, 30, 50, 70 and 90 are appended to all the open sets.
4. CONSTRUCT SET APPEND NODES 1 2 3 4 5
Nodes 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are appended to all the open sets.
5. CONSTRUCT SET VIEWSET APPEND ELEMENTS FRONT 45.0
Elements with a free face, having a surface normal making an angle of less than or
equal to 45.0 degrees with a line of sight from the front of the screen, are appended
to the set named `VIEWSET' .
6. CONSTRUCT SET APPEND MATERIALS 3
Elements with material number 3 are appended to all the open sets.
7. CONSTRUCT SET PETE NODESET APPEND RESULTS ABOVE 1.5E4
Nodes or elements respectively (depending on whether the results are nodal or elemental) having current results values above 1.5E4 are appended to set `PETE' which,
if a new set, will be created as a node set.
8. CONSTRUCT SET PETE APPEND ELEMENTS IJK I 2 TO 6
Elements in an IJK regular model having I values of 2 to 6, J values 1 to Jmax and K
values 1 to Kmax are appended to set `PETE' .
9. CONSTRUCT SET APPEND ELEMENTS IJK BLOCK 1 J 3 K 10 TO 20
Elements in block 1 of an IJK regular model having I values of 1 to Imax, a J value
of 3 and K values 10 to 20 are appended to all open sets.
See Also:
ÙTILITY TABULATE CONSTRUCT SETS' , section 2.18.9, page 516

ÙTILITY TABULATE SETS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
85
CONSTRUCT SET
CLOSE
Close a current Set
2.3.8.2 CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE [Set name]

This command closes a set. The user may have up to ten sets open simultaneously.
If a set name is specified then the specified set will be closed, otherwise the last opened set
will be closed.
Completion of a set in FEMGEN

The checks that are performed when a set is closed will depend on how the set was first
opened.
Sets that have been created with the default options (or the keyword `COMPLETE' ) will
be automatically completed, so that all parts used in the definition of higher order parts
will be added to the set. For example, if a line `L1' (which has end points `P1' and `P2' )
had been appended to the set, then the completion process will ensure that points `P1' and
`P2' are added to the set if they are not already included in the set. Thus it is possible
that the completion process will append to the set parts that have been previously explicitly
removed because these parts are referenced by other parts higher up the geometry hierarchy
viz: point, line, surface and body.
Sets that have been initially opened with the `LIST' or `LOOP' keywords will be checked
and modified so that they contain only parts of the given type and will also be checked for
validity. The parts in these sets do not need to be given in topological order.
Sets that have been initially opened with the ÌNCOMPLETE' keyword are not completed
or checked.
See Also:
`VIEW GEOMETRY' , section 2.19.5, page 537

`VIEW MESH' , section 2.19.8, page 542
19/08/1999
86
CONSTRUCT SET
Set Name COMPLEMENT
Appends the complement of sets
2.3.8.3 CONSTRUCT SET Set Name COMPLEMENT Set name1 [Set name2]
In FEMGEN the highest order parts present in both Set name1 and Set name2 is determined. Any parts of this type that are in Set name2 but not in Set name1 are appended to
the named set. The set is then completed as described in section 2.3.8. If no Set name2 is
given then the default is ÀLL' which specifies all of the geometry.
In FEMVIEW both Set name1 and Set name2 must be the same type of set. The elements
or nodes that are present in Set name2 but not Set name1 are appended to the named set.
If no Set name2 is given then the default is ÀLL' which specifies all of the model.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET SE5 COMPLEMENT SE1 SE2
If set SE1 contains surface S1 and set SE2 contains surfaces S1, S2, S3 and S4 then
surfaces S2, S3 and S4 are appended to set SE5. Set SE5 is then completed.
Figure 2.39: The two sets for COMPLEMENT
Figure 2.40: The resulting set
19/08/1999
87
CONSTRUCT SET
Set name INTERSECT
Appends the intersection of sets
2.3.8.4 CONSTRUCT SET Set name INTERSECT Set name1 Set name2
In FEMGEN the highest order part present in both Set name1 and Set name2 is determined. Any parts of this type that are in both sets are appended to the named set. The set
is then completed as described in section 2.3.8.
In FEMVIEW both Set name1 and Set name2 must be the same type of set. The elements
or nodes that are present in both Set name1 and Set name2 are appended to the named set.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET SE5 INTERSECT SET3 SET4
Assuming SET3 contains body B1 with surfaces S1, S2, S3, S4 and S5 and SET4
contains body B2 with surfaces S5, S6, S7, S8 and S9. Surface S5 will be appended
to SE5. This set will then be completed by the addition of all the parts that make up
S5.
2. CONSTRUCT SET SE3 INTERSECT SE1 SE2
If SE1 contains surface S1 and SE2 contains all of the geometry then S1 is appended
to SE3 and it is then completed.
Figure 2.41: The two sets for INTERSECT
Figure 2.42: The resulting set
19/08/1999
88
CONSTRUCT SET
OPEN
Open a Set
2.3.8.5 CONSTRUCT SET OPEN [Set name]

This command is used to open a named set. FEMGV allows the user to have up to ten sets
open simultaneously.
All `CONSTRUCT SET APPEND' commands and `CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE' commands will operate on all open sets unless specified otherwise.
A set is closed using the command `CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE' .
FEMGEN Command
CONSTRUCT SET OPEN [Set Name [Set type Part type]]
Any points, lines, surfaces and bodies defined after this command will be appended to the
newly opened set as well as to all other open sets.
Set name
Set type
optional name of the set to be created. When the name is not given
a default name of ' SEn' is used, where n is one greater than the number
of automatically generated sets.
Optional keyword, as shown below, which is used to define the type of a
set when it is first opened.
Set type
Part type
Comments
BREP
SURFACES
COMPLETE
(the default)
Not relevant
INCOMPLETE
Not relevant
LIST
POINTS
LINES
SURFACES
BODIES
POINTS
LINES
SURFACES
BODIES
Not relevant
' Brep' sets contain an ordered list of surfaces.

They are used in the definition of general bodies.
By default sets will be created as
' complete' so that they are completed when
`CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE' is used.
Sets that are ' incomplete' will not be
subject to the completion process when the set
is closed.
' List' sets will contain an ordered list of
connected parts of the type specified.
LOOP
UNIQUE
' Loop' sets will contain an ordered list of

parts of the given type that form a closed
loop. Currently this is only valid for lines and
surfaces. See note 1
This command should not be utilised by the
user; it is provided for the efficient reading of
encoded archive files. It is documented for
completeness.
19/08/1999

Note 1: The validity of sets used to define regions is checked when a `LOOP' set is
closed as well as when an attempt is made to mesh a region. As part of the
checking that takes place prior to a region being meshed all the sets used in the
region definition will have their types changed to be `LOOP LINES' or `LOOP
SURFACES' for swept regions. The type of a set can be confirmed with ÙTILITY TABULATE CONSTRUCT SETS' .
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET OPEN SET3
Opens a set called SET3.
2. CONSTRUCT SET OPEN HOLE1 LOOP LINES
Opens a set called HOLE1 to contain a loop of lines, provided that HOLE1 has not
already been created.
3. CONSTRUCT SET OPEN COVER LIST SURFACES
Opens a set called COVER to contain a list of surfaces only, provided that COVER
has not already been created.
FEMVIEW Command.
CONSTRUCT SET OPEN Set Name [Set type]
The set name must be specified by the user. If it is a new set the user will be prompted to
input some text describing the set.
Set type
Optional keyword, as shown below, which is used to define the type

of a set when it is first opened.
Set type
Comments
ELSET
NODESET
The set will be created as an element set and this is the default.
The set will be created as a node set.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET OPEN SET3
Opens a set called SET3 which by default will be an element set.
2. CONSTRUCT SET OPEN SOFFIT NODESET
Opens a set called SOFFIT which will be a node set.
See Also:

`GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION' , section 2.8.10.5, page 235
`MESHING GENERATE' , section 2.12.4, page 279
19/08/1999
89
90
CONSTRUCT SET
[Set Name] REMOVE
Remove parts from a Set
2.3.8.6 CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name] REMOVE

This command is used to remove geometric parts or elements from a set.
FEMGEN Command
CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name] REMOVE [Type] Part
This command removes geometric parts from sets which have been previously activated
using the command `CONSTRUCT SET OPEN' or from the set named in the command.
Set Name
Type
Part
optional name of the set from which parts are to be removed. This must
be an existing set. If no name is given then parts will be removed from
all the currently open sets. A named set is automatically closed and
completed after execution of the command, whilst the currently open sets
will remain open and uncompleted. The `CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE'
command will cause a set to be completed, unless it was first opened
with the ÌNCOMPLETE' , `LIST' or `LOOP' keywords. See note 3.
optional specification of the level of part that is to be removed from the
set (see below). If omitted all levels of parts will be removed.
name of a point, line, surface, body, set, or ÀLL' (all parts) to be
removed from the set(s). More than one part may be specified at a
time and parts may be identified by name or by using the graphics cursor
(see below).
Type
Comments
No type
POINTS
LINES
SURFACES
BODIES
All the parts that make up the named part are removed from the set(s).
All the points that make up the named part are removed from the set(s).
All the lines that make up the named part are removed from the set(s).
All the surfaces that make up the named part are removed from the set(s).
All the bodies that make up the named part are removed from the set(s).
Selection of parts using the Cursor

The graphics cursor may be used to identify parts by picking. The graphics cursor is placed
near the required part and either a mouse button is used in which case the nearest part of
any type will be selected, or a keyboard key may be used to identify the type of part to be
picked namely:
P - for a point
L - for a line
S - for a surface
B - for a body
The drivers for some graphics devices are case sensitive such that use of a lower case letter
allows the picking process to continue within the same command and use of an upper case
letter or a `C/R' will cause the picking process to terminate.
Also, via use of the keyword `CURSOR' , the graphics cursor can be used to control other
remove operations based on the position of a part on the screen as follows:
19/08/1999

Control
LEFT
RIGHT
TOP
BOTTOM
Comments
removes parts that lie entirely on the specified side of a section
line defined by two cursor positions.
POLYGON
removes parts that lie entirely within the polygon specified by

up to 20 cursor positions. Note that the middle mouse button (or
right button on a two button mouse) should be used to specify
the polygon vertices, the last vertex should be specified with left
button to complete the polygon.
The `CURSOR' commands are recorded in the history file as `CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE MODEL DIVIDE/POLYGON' followed by the cursor positions in model coordinates. This is done to ensure reliable playback from history files.
Only parts that are currently being displayed will be considered. Parts are then removed
from the set if all of their primary defining parts satisfy the test (ie end points of lines are
considered, but points defining the centres of arcs are not).
Return Level: ` CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE'
Note 1: General use
The command may be repeated to remove several parts or previously defined
sets. Existing sets can be re-opened to remove more parts.
Note 2: Limits
A maximum of 10 parts may be specified within the same command.
Note 3: Set completion
was first opened.
`LOOP' sets will also be checked for validity. The parts in ' LOOP' sets do not
need to be given in topological order.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE P1
Remove point P1 from all the currently open sets.
2. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE SURFACES B1
Remove all the surfaces that make up B1 from all the currently open sets. If B1 is in
the set these surfaces will be reappended on completion.
3. CONSTRUCT SET SE4 REMOVE B1
Remove B1 and all the parts that make up B1 from set SE4.
19/08/1999
91
92

4. CONSTRUCT SET SE3 REMOVE LINES CURSOR TOP
Remove from the set SE3, all the lines that lie above the section line made with 2
cursor hits.
5. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE POINTS CURSOR POLYGON

Remove from all the currently open sets, all the points that lie within a polygon
defined by up to 20 cursor hits.
FEMVIEW Command
CONSTRUCT SET [Set Name] REMOVE Type Range
This command removes a specified range of elements or nodes from the currently open
sets. Removed elements or nodes will be indicated by the symbol `X' displayed at the
element centroid or the node point.
Set Name
Optional name of an existing set from which elements or nodes are to be

removed. If no name is given then elements or nodes will be removed
from all the currently open sets. A named set, if not currently open,
is automatically closed after execution of the command, whilst the
currently open sets will remain open until the `CONSTRUCT SET CLOSE'
command is issued.
Part
Range
Comments
OLD
set name(s)
The contents of the previously defined

set(s) are removed from the named or
open sets. Up to 10 existing sets may
be specified in one command, but all
must be of the same type i.e. all
node sets or all element sets.
NODES
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
CURSOR ...
Nodes in the specified range of

node numbers are removed from the
named or open sets.
The graphics cursor is used to
control remove operations based on the
position of nodes on the screen.
(See note 1).
Nodes within the specified IJK
range are removed from the named
or open sets. This command is for
IJK regular models only. (Note that
if no `BLOCK' is specifed the
default is all blocks and that any
IJK range not specified defaults to
n1 - nmax).
19/08/1999
93
Part
Range
Comments
ELEMENTS
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
CURSOR ...
Elements in the specified range of

element numbers are removed from
the named or open set.
control remove operations based on
the position of elements
on the screen. (See note 1).
All elements with a free face are
removed from the named or open sets.
These commands define a viewpoint
at infinity at the specified side of the
screen. A surface normal to each
free face of an element is
calculated and the element removed
from the named or open sets if the
angle between its normal and line of
sight from the viewpoint is less than
the specified Àngle' . Effective only
with 3-dimensional solid elements.
These commands define a six sided
bounding box in the model
coordinate system. Between one and
six `Limits' to the box can be
specified; `Limits' not defined are
considered infinite. Elements that
have all nodes within the bounding
box are removed from the named or open
sets.
Elements within the specified IJK
range are removed from the named
or open sets. This command is for
IJK regular models only. (Note that
if no `BLOCK' is specifed the
default is all blocks and that any
IJK range not specified defaults to
n1 - nmax).
EXTERNAL
TOP Angle
BOTTOM Angle
FRONT Angle
BACK Angle
LEFT Angle
RIGHT Angle
XMIN Limit XMAX Limit

... YMIN Limit YMAX Limit
... ZMIN Limit ZMAX Limit
GROUPS
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
Elements in the specified range

of element group numbers are
MATERIALS
n1 n2 n3 ...
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
Elements with material numbers in

the specified range are removed
from the named or open sets.
TYPES
Element Type
Elements of the specified type are

removed from the set.
19/08/1999
94
Part
Range
Comments
RESULTS
ABOVE v1 [BELOW v2]

BELOW v1 [ABOVE v2]
BETWEEN v1 v2
Nodes or elements respectively

(depending on whether the results are
nodal or elemental) with result
values equal to or above or below
or between the specified threshold
values are removed from the named
or open sets. A loadcase and
results attribute must be current.
Note that even if both ÀBOVE' and
`BELOW' thresholds are specified
only one thresholdtest need be satisfied
for the node/element to be selected.
(ie. the test is a logical .OR. not a
logical .AND.) (See notes 2 and 3).
CURSOR
......

control remove operations based on
the position of elements on the screen
for element sets, and the position of
nodes on the screen for node sets.
(See note 1).
Note 1: The `CURSOR' control

The graphics cursor can be used as follows. Note that for operations on elements, the entire element (i.e. all it's nodes) must satisfy the control for the
element to be selected.
Control
Comments
LEFT
Nodes/Elements that lie on the specified side
RIGHT
of a section line defined by two cursor positions are
TOP
BOTTOM
POLYGON
Nodes/Elements that lie within the polygon specified

by up to 20 cursor positions are removed from the
named or open sets. Note that the middle mouse
button (or right button on a two button mouse) should be
used to specify the polygon vertices. The last vertex
should be specified with the left button to complete the
polygon or by making a `hit' close to the 1st vertex.
Note 2: Removing elements (or element sets) from node sets

All the nodes that define the specified elements will be removed from the node
set.
Note 3: Removing nodes (or node sets) from element sets
Any element connected to any of the specified nodes will be removed from the
element set.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET FRED REMOVE OLD RING SIDE TAIL
The contents of the existing sets named `RING' , ' SIDE' and `TAIL' are removed
from the set named `FRED' .
19/08/1999

2. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE NODES 1 2 3 4 5
Nodes 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are removed from all the open sets.
3. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE ELEMENTS TOP 27.0
Elements with a free face, having a surface normal making an angle of less than or
equal to 27.0 degrees with a line of sight from the top of the screen, are removed
from all the open sets.
4. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE ELEMENTS XMIN 1.0 XMAX 2.0 YMIN 25
Elements having all nodes with X coordinates greater than or equal to 1.0 and less
than or equal to 2.0 and Y coordinates greater than or equal to 25 are removed from
all the open sets.
5. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE GROUPS 2 3 4
Elements in groups 2, 3 or 4 are removed from all the open sets.
6. CONSTRUCT SET MATRL REMOVE MATERIALS 1 TO 3
Elements with material number 1, 2 or 3 are removed from the set named `Matrl' .
7. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE TYPES QU4 TR3
Elements of type `QU4' (4 node quadrilaterals) and type `TR3' (3 node triangles) are
removed from all the open sets.
8. CONSTRUCT SET PETE REMOVE RESULTS BELOW -1.5E4
Nodes or elements respectively (depending on whether the results are nodal or elemental) having current results values below -1.5E4 are removed from set `PETE' .
9. CONSTRUCT SET PETE REMOVE ELEMENTS IJK I 2 TO 6
Elements in an IJK regular model having I values of 2 to 6, J values 1 to Jmax and K
values 1 to Kmax are removed from set `PETE' .
10. CONSTRUCT SET REMOVE ELEMENTS IJK BLOCK 1 J 3 K 10 TO 20
Elements in block 1 of an IJK regular model having I values of 1 to Imax, a J value
of 3 and K values 10 to 20 are removed from all open sets.
See Also:
ÙTILITY TABULATE CONSTRUCT SETS' , section 2.18.9, page 516

ÙTILITY TABULATE SETS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
95
96
CONSTRUCT
SHAPE
2.3.9 CONSTRUCT SHAPE

FEMGEN Command only except `CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE'
This command is used to define analytical shapes for use in intersection definitions, for the
projection of surfaces, and for the projection of point z-coordinates when using cursor or
digitiser input.
`CONSTRUCT SHAPE' has the following sub-commands:
2.3.9.1
2.3.9.2
2.3.9.4
2.3.9.3
2.3.9.5
2.3.9.6
2.3.9.7
2.3.9.8
CONSTRUCT SHAPE BOX

CONSTRUCT SHAPE CONE
CONSTRUCT SHAPE CURVE INTERSECT
CONSTRUCT SHAPE CURVE NURB
CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER
CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE
CONSTRUCT SHAPE SPHERE
CONSTRUCT SHAPE SURFACE NURB
Define a box
Define a cone
Define an intersection curve
Define a NURB curve
Define a cylinder
Define a plane
Define a sphere
Define a NURB surface
19/08/1999
97
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
BOX
Define a box
2.3.9.1 CONSTRUCT SHAPE BOX [shape name]box definition [refcs][csname]

This command is used to define an orthogonal box shape with one of the following methods:
Two points defining the diagonal of the box
Four points defining one corner and three edge lengths
One point defining a corner and three edge lengths
The coordinates of a corner and three edge lengths
The ' box' shape is provided for use in FEMGEN to define intersection points, lines and
surfaces. The box shape is for use in defining the outer limits of intersection lines and
surfaces, consequently it cannot be the first shape to be used in in a ' GEOMETRY LINE
INTERSECT' or ' GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT' command.
shape name
refcs
=
=
csname
pnam1 pnam2
Name of the box (optional).

Reference axis type for the orientation of the box, either `GLOBAL' or
`LOCAL' . This will override the currently active system. If `LOCAL'
is specified then the name of an existing local coordinate system must
be given. (Although just the name of the existing local system can be
given.)
Name of an existing local coordinate system as defined using
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' .
Two points defining a diagonal of the box. The resulting box will have
its faces parallel to the global planes unless a local coordinate system is
active.
box definition
pnam1 pnam2 pnam3 pnam4
pnam1 xlen ylen zlen
19/08/1999
Comments
Four points defining a corner of the box. The first two
define the length and direction of the first edge, the
third point defines the orientation and length of the
second edge (measured normal to the first edge) and
the fourth point defines the length of the third edge
measured normal to the first edge.
One point defining a corner of a box and the length of
the edges in the three axis directions. It is only
necessary to give xlen when a cube is to be created. If a
local axis system is given then the orientation of the box
will be relative to this system; similarly if a local axis
system is active then the orientation of the box will be
relative to this system, unless the keyword GLOBAL
is used.
98

box definition
x y z xlen ylen zlen
Comments
Three coordinates defining the location of a corner
of a box and the length of the edges in the three axis
directions. It is only necessary to give xlen when a
cube is to be created unless a coordinate system is
explicitly named.If a local axis system is given then the
orientation of the box will be relative to this system;
similarly if a local axis system is active then the
orientation of the box will be relative to this system,
unless the keyword GLOBAL is used.
The ' box' shape is provided for use in FEMGEN to define intersection points, lines and
surfaces. The box shape is for use in defining the outer limits of intersection lines and
surfaces, consequently it cannot be the first shape to be used in in a ' GEOMETRY LINE
INTERSECT' or ' GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT' command.
P11
P7
P10
P1
Figure 2.43: Four points defining a box
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SHAPE BOX BOX12 P13 P25
Creates a FEMGEN box called BOX12 whose diagonal is defined by P13 and P25
and has all faces parallel to the global planes.
2. CONSTRUCT SHAPE BOX OUTER P11 P1 P10 P7
Creates a box called OUTER with a corner at P11, the length of the box is the distance between P11 and P1, the width is defined by P10 and the height is defined by
P7.
3. CONSTRUCT SHAPE BOX METAL P20 1.5 2 1.9
Creates a box called METAL that has a corner at P20 with edges 1.5, 2 and 1.9 in the
X, Y and Z directions.
4. CONSTRUCT SHAPE BOX .1 2.2 .5 1.5 2 3 CCSYS1
Creates an automatically named box with a corner at X=.1, Y=2.2, Z=1.5 and edges
1.5,2 and 3 long. This box is defined relative to the coordinate system CCSYS1.
See Also:

`CONSTRUCT SPACE CURS-SHPE' , section 2.3.10.1, page 113
`GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT' , section 2.8.10.3, page 230
`GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT' , section 2.8.6.6, page 204
19/08/1999

`GEOMETRY POINT INTERSECT' , section 2.8.8.3, page 220
`MESHING SHAPE' , section 2.12.5, page 280
ÙTILITY DELETE SHAPES' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY SHAPES' , section 2.18.9, page 516
`VIEW SHAPE' , section 2.19.10, page 561
19/08/1999
99
100
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
CONE
Define a cone
2.3.9.2 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CONE [shape name] pnam1 pnam2 rad1 rad2 [type
[length [offset]]]
This command is used to define a cone using two points and two radii.
shape name
pnam1, pnam2
rad1, rad2
=
=
=
type
length
offset
name of the shape. If none is given a name will be generated.

2 points defining the axis of the cone.
the radii of the cone at the two points. These may be specified
as parameter names. The shape will then be dependent on the
parameter value.
Optional keyword (INFINITE/TRUNCATE) controlling
whether the cone is infinite (the default) or truncated.
the length of the truncated cone, measured along the cone axis
in the direction from pnam1 towards pnam2. When length is
not given the cone length is taken to be the distance between
pnam1 and pnam2
the offset of the start of the truncated cone measured from
pnam1 towards pnam2.
The two points and radii define a cone which can be used subsequently to define intersection
points, lines and surfaces, for the projection of surfaces, and for projections during cursor
or digitiser input of points.
Truncating a cone specifies the axial limits within which the cone is considered to be active
when the cone is used in line or surface intersections.
Note that the position of a point defined as on a shape (or at the intersection of shapes) will
be dependent on the shape definition and its position will change if the definition of the
shape, or a parameter referenced in its definition, is changed.
P2
P1
r2
r1
Figure 2.44: Analytical Cone
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CONE CONEX P1 P2 1.23 0.5
Creates an infinite cone called CONEX with an axis P1 to P2 and with a radius of
1.23 at P1 and .5 at P2.
2. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CONE CON6 P1 P2 1.23 RADS
Creates an infinite cone called CON6 with an axis P1 to P2 and with a radius 1.23 at
P1 and as defined by the parameter RADS at P2.
3. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CONE TCONE1 P2 P5 2.5 4 TRUNCATE
Creates a truncated cone called TCONE1 with an axis from P2 to P5 and radii 2.5
and 4 respectively with an axial length equal to the distance between P2 and P5.
4. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CONE CONETR1 P2 P5 2.5 4 TRUNCATE 1.5 3.5
Creates a truncated cone, CONETR1, with an axis from P2 to P5 and radii 2.5 and
4 respectively with an axial length of 1.5 and with the start of the cone offset by 3.5
from P2 toward P5.
See Also:

`CONSTRUCT PARAMETER' , section 2.3.6, page 59
19/08/1999
101
102
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
CURVE NURB
Define a NURB curve
2.3.9.3 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CURVE NURB [shape name] ...

This command allows a NURB curve to be defined; it is provided to support the archiving
of entities created via the CAD interfaces and so is not intended to be used interactively.
See Also:

19/08/1999
103
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
CURVE INTERSECT
Define an intersection curve
2.3.9.4 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CURVE INTERSECT [shape name] shape1 shape2

This command is used to create an intersection curve (ie a FEMGEN shape, not FEMGEN geometry) between two FEMGEN analytical shapes. The curve may have one or two
components.
It is provided to support the archiving of intersection geometry and consequently is not
intended to be used interactively.
See Also:

19/08/1999
104
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
CYLINDER
Define a cylinder
2.3.9.5 CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER [shape name] pnam1 pnam2 rad [type
[length [offset]]]
This command defines a cylinder using two points and a radius.
shape name
pnam
rad
=
=
=
type
length
offset

2 points on the axis of the cylinder.
the radius of the cylinder. This may be specified as a parameter
name. The shape will then be dependent on the parameter value.
Optional keyword (INFINITE/TRUNCATE) controlling
whether the cylinder is infinite (the default) or truncated.
the length of the truncated cylinder, measured along the cylinder
axis in the direction from pnam1 towards pnam2. When length
is not given the cylinder length is taken to be the distance
between pnam1 and pnam2
the offset of the start of the truncated cylinder along the axis
from pnam1 towards pnam2.
The two points and radius define a cylinder which can be used subsequently to define
intersection points, lines and surfaces, for the projection of surfaces, and for projections
during cursor or digitiser input of points.
Truncating a cylinder specifies the axial limits within which the cylinder is considered to
be active when the cylinder is used in line or surface intersections.
P2
P1
Figure 2.45: Analytical Cylinder
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER CYL1 P1 P2 1.23
Creates a cylinder called CYL1 with an axis P1 to P2 and a radius 1.23.
19/08/1999

2. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER CY99 P1 P2 RAD6
Creates a cylinder called CY99 with an axis P1 to P2 and a radius as defined by the
parameter RAD6.
3. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER BCYL1 P2 P5 2.5 TRUNCATE
Creates a truncated cylinder called TCONE1 with an axis from P2 to P5 and radius
2.5 with an axial length equal to the distance between P2 and P5.
4. CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER CYLTR1 P2 P5 2.5 TRUNCATE 1.5 3.5
Creates a truncated cylinder, CYLTR1, with an axis from P2 to P5 and radius 2.5
with an axial length of 1.5 and the start of the cylinder offset by 3.5 from P2 to P5.
See Also:

19/08/1999
105
106
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
PLANE
Define a plane
2.3.9.6 CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE [shape name] Plane definition [refcs][csname]

This command is used to define a plane shape with one of the following methods:
the location of three points/nodes in the plane.
with reference to a coordinate system (global or local).
by specifying the unit vector of the normal to the plane.
by cursor selection of a plane normal to the screen.
shape name
refcs
=
=
csname
Name of the plane (optional).

Reference axis type for the orientation of the plane, either
`GLOBAL' or `LOCAL' . This will override the currently active
system. If `LOCAL' is specified then the name of an existing
local coordinate system must be given. (Although just the name
of the existing local system can be given. FEMGEN only)
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' . (FEMGEN only)
Definition of plane
pnam1 pnam2 pnam3
NODES n1,n2,n3
MODEL x1,y1,z1, x2 ... z3
X [offset]
Y [offset]
Comments
The names of 3 points defining the plane (FEMGEN
only).
3 nodes defining the plane (FEMVIEW only).
Co-ordinates in model space of 3 points on the plane
(FEMVIEW only).
Defines a plane parallel to the global YZ plane with an
optional offset from the model origin. In FEMGEN
csname may also be specified, in which case a plane
parallel to the local YZ plane, offset along the local
X axis is created. In FEMGEN if a local coordinate
system is active when the plane is defined, the plane
will be created relative to the local system unless the
GLOBAL keyword is used
Defines a plane parallel to the global ZX plane with an
csname name may also be specified, in which case a plane
parallel to the local ZX plane, offset along the local
Y axis is created. In FEMGEN if a local coordinate
system is active when the plane is defined, the plane
will be created relative to the local system unless the
GLOBAL keyword is used
19/08/1999

Definition of plane
Z [offset]
NORMAL x,y,z [offset]
/CURSOR
107
Comments
Defines a plane parallel to the global XY plane with an
a local coordinate system name may also be specified,
in which case a plane parallel to the local XY plane,
offset along the local Z axis is created. In FEMGEN
if a local coordinate system is active when the plane is
defined, the plane will be created relative to the local
system unless the GLOBAL keyword is used
Defines the normal to the plane with an optional offset
from the model origin in the direction of the normal.
In FEMGEN a local coordinate system may also be
specified in which case the offset and normal vector
are relative to the local system. Similarly if a local
coordinate system is active when this command is used
the plane is created in this system.
Two cursor selections are made to define a plane
that lies perpendicar to the plane of the screen.
The plane can be used subsequently in FEMGEN to define intersection points, lines and
surfaces, for the projection of surfaces, for projections during cursor or digitiser input of
points or in FEMVIEW for defining cross-sections or cut-aways.
When a label for the plane is displayed in FEMGEN the positive normal for the plane is
also displayed as a vector.
P3
P2
P1
Figure 2.46: Defining a plane from three points
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE PLN1 P1 P2 P3
Creates a FEMGEN plane called PLN1 which contains points P1, P2 and P3.
2. CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE X5 X 5
Creates a plane called X5 parallel to the global or currently active YZ plane at a
distance of 5 along the X axis.
3. CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE Y15 Y 15 LOCL10
Creates a plane called Y15 parallel to the XZ plane of th local system LOCL10 at an
offset of 15 along the local Y axis.
4. CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE NODES 25 50 75
Creates a FEMVIEW plane which contains nodes 25, 50 and 75. The name of the
plane will be automatically generated.
19/08/1999
108

5. CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE REF2 X 50.0
In FEMVIEW this will create a plane called REF2 which is parallel to the global
YZ plane at a distance of 50.0 along the X axis.
See Also:

`GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT' , section 2.8.10.3, page 230
`VIEW XSECTION' , section 2.19.12, page 563
`VIEW CUTAWAY' , section 2.19.1, page 530
19/08/1999
109
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
SPHERE
Define a sphere
2.3.9.7 CONSTRUCT SHAPE SPHERE [shape name] pnam rads

This command defines a sphere using one point and a radius.
shape name
pnam
rads
=
=
=

centre point of the sphere.
the radius of the sphere. This may be specified as a parameter
name. The shape will then be dependent on the parameter value.
The point and radius define a sphere which can be used subsequently to define intersection
points, lines and surfaces, the projection of surfaces, and for projections during cursor or
digitiser input of points.
r
P1
Figure 2.47: Analytical Sphere
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SHAPE SPHERE SPH1 P1 10.23
Creates a sphere called SPH1 with a centre at P1 and radius 10.23.
2. CONSTRUCT SHAPE SPHERE SPHE P1 RDSP
Creates a sphere called SPHE with a centre at P1 and a radius as defined by the
parameter RDSP.
See Also:

19/08/1999
110

19/08/1999
111
CONSTRUCT SHAPE
SURFACE NURB
Define a NURB surface
2.3.9.8 CONSTRUCT SHAPE SURFACE NURB [shape name] ...

This command allows a NURB surface to be defined; it is provided to support the archiving
of entities created via the CAD interfaces and so is not intended to be used interactively.
See Also:

19/08/1999
112
CONSTRUCT
SPACE
2.3.10 CONSTRUCT SPACE

`CONSTRUCT SPACE' has the following sub-commands:
2.3.10.1
CONSTRUCT SPACE CURS-SHPE
2.3.10.2
2.3.10.3
CONSTRUCT SPACE DIGITIZER

CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE
2.3.10.4
CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX
Define a cursor projection for cursor

input of points
Define parameters for the digitiser
Define the tolerance for coordinate
coincidence
Define the work-box
19/08/1999
113
CONSTRUCT SPACE
CURS-SHPE
Define a surface projection for cursor input of points
2.3.10.1 CONSTRUCT SPACE CURS-SHPE Control

This command enables coordinates input by cursor to be projected onto a previously defined shape.
Control
Comments
DEFAULT
The default mode of operation in which the out of screen (z)

coordinate of cursor input is calculated as the projection of the
cursor hit onto an xy plane of z=0. If this plane is normal to the
screen then the out of screen (y) coordinate is calculated as the
projection onto a zx plane of y=0. If this plane is normal to the
screen then the out of screen (x)coordinate is calculated as the
projection onto a yz plane of x=0.
Specify that the out of screen coordinate of cursor input be
calculated as the projection on to a plane parallel to a coordinate
plane and displaced by distance `real' .
Enables the z coordinate of cursor input to be calculated from
the projection of the cursor hit onto a previously defined shape.
Shapes may be defined using the command
`CONSTRUCT SHAPE' . The z coordinate is calculated to
lie on the specified shape at its intersection with an imaginary
line drawn perpendicular to the screen from the cursor hit
position. If this line intersects the shape twice then the position
nearest to the view point is taken.
Z ' real'
Y ' real'
X ' real'
Shape name
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SPACE CURS-SHPE CYL1
Points input by cursor will now have their z coordinate calculated from the projection of their cursor hit onto the shape CYL1.
See Also:
19/08/1999
114
CONSTRUCT SPACE
DIGITIZER
Define parameters for digitizer
2.3.10.2 CONSTRUCT SPACE DIGITIZER coor1 coor2 coor3 ndc1 ndc2 ndc3
This command is documented but currently has no effect The command `CONSTRUCT
SPACE DIGITIZER' is used to define the relation between the coordinate system of a
graphic device such as a display screen or a digitizer and the coordinate system of the
structure. This relation is automatically established when a plot is made on a screen, but
e.g. for a blank screen or a digitizer it has to be defined with the `CONSTRUCT SPACE
DIGITIZER' command.
coor
ndc
coordinates for three points in the world coordinate system which shall
correspond to the three `ndc' points.
three points given by the graphic device that shall be mapped onto the given
coordinates.
19/08/1999
115
CONSTRUCT SPACE
TOLERANCE
Define tolerance for coordinate coincidence
2.3.10.3 CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE Type Tolerance

This command is used to define the tolerance for coordinate coincidence.
When a part is generated by the commands `GEOMETRY COPY' or `GEOMETRY SWEEP'
the program checks if a point already exists within the current tolerance before generating
a new point. Also, when merging parts using the `MESHING MERGE' command the tolerance is used to determine which nodes to merge on the interface between the two parts.
Tolerance checking for `SWEEP' and `COPY' operations may be switched ÒN/OFF' by
the user, and both operations will be quicker if tolerance checking is off. Tolerance checking is always applied for `MERGE' operations.
It is possible to set the tolerance for a model in absolute terms or as relative to the size of
the work-box.
Type
=
=
=
=
Tolerance
type of tolerance.
ÒN' if tolerance checking is required for `SWEEP' and
`COPY' commands.
ÒFF' if tolerance checking is not required for `SWEEP' and
`COPY' commands. This will make the sweep and copy
operations quicker.
ÀBSOLUTE' if the `tolerance' is given as an absolute distance
specified directly in the unit system of the model and is
irrespective of the size of the work-box. A tolerance specified as
absolute is unchanged if the work-box is subsequently changed.
`RELATIVE' if the `tolerance' is given as a factor to be applied
to the largest diagonal of the work-box. (See note 1).
real number specifying the new absolute tolerance or relative
tolerance factor.
Note 1: Relative tolerance

The `CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE RELATIVE' command allows the
user to specify a relative tolerance as a factor of the largest diagonal of the workbox. If the largest diagonal of the work-box is = L, then the
absolute tolerance = relative tolerance * L

Note that the calculated absolute tolerance will automatically change as the size
of the work-box is changed.
Note 2: Default tolerance value
The default tolerance for a new FEMGEN model is a relative tolerance of 0.001.
Note 3: Saving of the tolerance
The current tolerance is saved in the data base at the end of each working session
with a model.
19/08/1999
116

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE ABSOLUTE .05
Defines the test distance as .05 units of the unit system of the model.
2. CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE RELATIVE .005
Specifies that the test distance be calculated as a factor of .005 of the longest diagonal
of the work-box.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX' , section 2.3.10.4, page 117

19/08/1999
117
CONSTRUCT SPACE
WORK-BOX
Define the work box
2.3.10.4 CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX Control

This command is used to define the work-box space and its use.
Control
CHECKING
SIZE
Coords
Comments
OFF
WARN
ERROR
AUTOMATIC
SET
Coords
Sets the severity level of coordinate checking

against the work-box (see note 1).
Sets mode of operation and the size of the
work-box (see note 2).
Sets the size of the work-box (see note 3).
Note 1: Coordinate checking

The coordinates of defined or generated points may be checked against the workbox. If `CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX CHECKING WARN' is selected
then points defined or generated having coordinates outside the work-box will
cause a warning message to be generated. This is the default. If `...... WORKBOX CHECKING ERROR' is selected then points defined or generated having
coordinates outside the work-box will cause an error condition and the points
will not be created. Coordinate checking is switched off entirely with the `......
WORK-BOX CHECKING OFF' command.
Note 2: Mode of operation
If coordinate checking against the workbox is switched to `WARN' or ÒFF'
then the `CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX SIZE AUTOMATIC' command
will cause the work-box to be sized automatically after the generation of each
new point. This is the default mode of operation. The work-box can then be
fixed at its current size by the `CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX SIZE SET'
command.
Note 3: Setting the work-box size
The size of the work-box can be set by giving the coordinates for the corner of
the box having maximum values for x, y, and z; optionally followed by the coordinates of the corner having minimum values for x, y, and z. If only one value
is given this is used as the maximum for all three directions. If minimum values
are not specified they are taken as = 0. The dimensions of the work box may be
changed at any time during the definition of a model.
The diagonal of the work-box may be used to set the tolerance for checking point coincidence with the `CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE RELATIVE' command.
The work-box may be displayed using the command ÈYE LOCATE' within FEMGEN.
19/08/1999
118

Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX 12
Constructs a work-box of [0,0,0] to [12,12,12]
2. CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX 5 5 7 -3 1 0
Constructs a work-box of [-3 1 0] to [5 5 7]
3. CONSTRUCT SPACE WORK-BOX SET
The work-box is fixed at its current size.
See Also:
ÈYE LOCATE' , section 2.5.4, page 155

`CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE' , section 2.3.10.3, page 115
19/08/1999
119
CONSTRUCT
TCURVE
Define a time curve
2.3.11 CONSTRUCT TCURVE [tcurve] Type Parameters

or ...
tcurve Modifier
This command is used to define a time curve in terms of a time and an amplitude at that
time. The curve may be defined as a list of time, amplitude pairs or via a function (e.g.
sine, exponential decay etc.). Lists may be read in from a file or typed in at the keyboard;
functions are defined interactively using a small number of control parameters. Time curves
may be attached to loads in order to vary the magnitude of a load during analysis for those
analysis packages which support such features.
Type
Parameters
Meaning
LIST
tn, an etc.
FILE filename
t
a
[tdelay]
[tstop]
t
a
[tdelay]
[tstop]
period
a
[phase]
[ a0 ]
[tstop]
A0 , A, t0 , td , [tstop]
time, amplitude pairs

name of ascii file containing t,a pairs
length of step
amplitude of step
delay before start of step (0)
termination time after end of step (t)
length of ramp
amplitude of ramp
delay before start of ramp (0)
termination time after end of ramp (t)
period of the sine wave
amplitude of the sine wave
phase shift expressed as a time (0)
amplitude shift (0)
termination time (period)
a = A0 + A exp[,(t , t0 )=td ]
STEP
RAMP
SINE
EXPONENT
Time curves may be modified by repeating the time curve command with different parameters. Time curves may also be modified using the commands listed below.
Modifier
TSHIFT
ASHIFT
TSCALE
ASCALE
TSTART
TSTOP
SMOOTH
CYCLIC
DIVISIONS
19/08/1999
Type
Meaning
real
real
real
real
real
real
rad
shifts a list by adding real to all times

shifts a list by adding real to all amplitudes
scales a list by multiplying all times by real
scales a list by multiplying all amplitudes by real
define start time in list if not t1
define end time in list if not tn
round off corners on list, step, and ramp with radius rad
curve is cyclic
curve is repeated n times
switch cyclic off
number of sampling points for function (100)
YES
YES n:
NO
integer
120
4
V
A
L
U3
E
.1
.2
.3
TIME
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Figure 2.48: Definition of a time curve

If no name is entered a default name is created, this is TCn where n is a count of
defined time curves. The default name can be changed with the `CONSTRUCT
NAME' command.
Note 2: Shifting a list time curve
Where a list of time curve values read from a file do not align exactly with t=0 a
TSHIFT may be introduced in order to move the curve if desired. The ASHIFT
subcommand may similarly be used for amplitude shifts.
Note 3: Scaling a list time curve
The TSCALE and ASCALE subcommands may be used to change the system
of units for a list time curve which has been read in from file.
Note 4: Selecting portions of a time curve Parameters TSTART and TSTOP may be
used to select a section of a list time curve rather than using the whole curve.
The resulting partial time curve will be shifted so that the start time is always 0.
Note 5: Reading lists from a file
It is possible to read in long lists of time curve data from file. The file must be
ascii and have one t,a pair on each line. The t,a values must be separated by
either a comma or a space. The maximum allowable number of pairs is machine
dependent but will be at least 10000.
Note 6: Viewing time curves
Time curves may be viewed by using the command ÙTILITY GRAPH TCURVE'
and switched off with ÙTILITY GRAPH OFF' .
19/08/1999
121
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT TCURVE LIST 0 0 .2 1 .8 1 1 0
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
10
TIME
Figure 2.49: LIST time curve
2. CONSTRUCT TCURVE STEP 1 5 1 10
V3
A
L
U
E
2
TIME
Figure 2.50: STEP time curve
19/08/1999
122

3. CONSTRUCT TCURVE RAMP 1 5 1 5
V3
A
L
U
E
2
TIME
Figure 2.51: RAMP time curve
4. CONSTRUCT TCURVE SINE 10 3 0 5
5
V
A
L
U4
E
3
10
12
TIME
Figure 2.52: SINE time curve
19/08/1999
123
5. CONSTRUCT TCURVE EXPONENT 0 5 0.2 0.2 1
V3
A
L
U
E
2
.1
.2
.3
TIME
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Figure 2.53: EXPONENT time curve
6. CONSTRUCT TCURVE TC1 RAMP 1 5 1 5

CONSTRUCT TCURVE TC1 SMOOTH .3
V3
A
L
U
E
2
TIME
Figure 2.54: SMOOTH time curve
19/08/1999
124

7. CONSTRUCT TCURVE TC1 LIST 0 0 .2 1 .8 1 1 0
CONSTRUCT TCURVE TC1 CYCLIC YES 3
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.5
1.5
2.5
TIME
Figure 2.55: CYCLIC time curve

8. CONSTRUCT TCURVE TC1 SINE 10 3 0 5
CONSTRUCT TCURVE TC1 DIV 20
5
V
A
L
U4
E
3
10
TIME
Figure 2.56: Low resolution time curve
19/08/1999

See Also:

19/08/1999
125
126
CONSTRUCT
TRANSFORM
2.3.12 CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM

`CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM' has the following sub-commands:
2.3.12.1
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM MIRROR
2.3.12.2
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM ROTATE
2.3.12.3
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM SCALE
2.3.12.4
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM TRANSLATE
Define a mirror
transformation
Define a rotational
transformation
Define a scale
transformation
Define a translation
transformation
19/08/1999
127
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM
MIRROR
Define a mirror transformation
2.3.12.1 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM MIRROR [tnam] pnam1 pnam2

This command is used to define a mirroring transformation defined by two points.
tnam
pnam
=
=
name of the transformation

2 points defining the mirror plane.
This command is used to define mirroring transformations for use in `GEOMETRY SWEEP'
,`GEOMETRY COPY' and `GEOMETRY MOVE' commands. The mirroring is perpnam2) , and with a normal direction
formed through a plane containing the point (pnam1+
2
from pnam1 to pnam2.
When part or all of a model is mirrored physical and material properties that have been
attached are mirrored, but loads, constraints and local coordinate systems are not.
P1
P2
n
la
P
r
ro
Mi
Figure 2.57: Definition of the Mirroring Plane
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM MIRROR MIRX P1 P2
This defined a reflection in a mirror, called MIRX, whose normal is P1 to P2 and
contains the point half way between them.
See Also:
`GEOMETRY COPY' , section 2.8.2, page 184

19/08/1999
128

`GEOMETRY MOVE' , section 2.8.7, page 213
`GEOMETRY SWEEP' , section 2.8.11, page 246
19/08/1999
129
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM
ROTATE
Define a rotational transformation
2.3.12.2 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM ROTATE [tnam] definition

This command is used to define a rotational transformation.
tnam
definition
=
=

definition of the transformation (see below).
Definition
pnam1 pnam2 angle
pnam1 pnam2 pnam3
pnam1 pnam2 pnam3 pnam4
Comments
The transformation is defined by specifying an
axis of rotation from point `pnam1' to point
`pnam2' and giving an àngle' (in degrees)
through which coordinates are to move about this
axis. Note that the right hand rule defines the
positive direction of rotation (see figure below). The
points may be identified by name or picked using
the graphics cursor.
The transformation is defined as a rotation about
the origin point (`pnam1' ) such that a line from
`pnam1' through point `pnam2' will rotate to a
new position through point `pnam3' . The points
may be identified by name or picked using the
graphics cursor.
The transformation is defined by specifying an
axis of rotation from point `pnam1' to point
`pnam2' . The angle of rotation is defined such that
the plane `pnam1' , `pnam2' , `pnam3' is rotated
about the axis to pass through point `pnam4' . The
points may be identified by name or picked using
the graphics cursor.
This command is used to define rotations for use in `GEOMETRY SWEEP' , `GEOMETRY
COPY' and `GEOMETRY MOVE' commands.
19/08/1999
130
Figure 2.58: Definition of the direction of rotation
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM ROTATE TR2 P1 P2 22.5
This defines a rotation, called TR2, of 22.5 deg around an axis defined by P1 and P2.
2. CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM ROTATE P1 P2 P3
This defines a rotation using point P1 as its origin and such that point P2 would
move to point P3. As no name is specified for the transformation a name will be
automatically generated.
See Also:

19/08/1999
131
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM
SCALE
Define a scaling transformation
2.3.12.3 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM SCALE [tnam] pnam1 pnam2 fact1 [fact2]

This command is used to define a scaling transformation.
tnam
pnam1
=
=
pnam2
fact1
fact2
=
=

a point at the origin of scaling. The point may be identified by name
or picked using the graphics cursor.
a point on the positive axis of scaling. The point may be identified
by name or picked using the graphics cursor.
axis scale factor to be applied in the axis direction.
optional plane scale factor to be applied about the axis in the plane
normal to the axis direction.
This command is used to define scaling transformations for use in `GEOMETRY SWEEP' ,
`GEOMETRY COPY' and `GEOMETRY MOVE' commands.
The scaling is performed relative to a plane containing the point `pnam1' and with a normal
direction (the axis of scaling) from `pnam1' to point `pnam2' . Scaling is done in the normal
direction with the specified axis scale factor. If the factor is less than 1.0, then points will
move towards the plane; if the factor is greater than 1.0, then points will move away from
the plane.
Similarly, if the plane scale factor is less than 1.0, then points will move towards the axis;
and if the plane scale factor is greater than 1.0, then points will move away from the axis.
If uniform scaling in all directions is required then `fact2' (the plane scale factor) must be
set equal to `fact1' (the axis scale factor).
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM SCALE SCA1 P1 P2 2.5
This defines a scaling of 2.5, called SCA1, relative to a plane defined by points P1
and P2.
See Also:

19/08/1999
132
CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM
TRANSLATE
Define a translation transformation
2.3.12.4 CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM TRANSLATE [trnam] pnam1 pnam2

or:
... [trnam] xyz [refcs] [csname] [depn]
This command is used to define a transformation as a translation vector.
trnam
pnam
=
=
xyz
refcs
csname
depn
name of the transformation.

The transformation is defined by specifying two existing points whose
relative positions define the translation vector. The 1st point given is taken as
the `from' point and the 2nd as the `to' point. The points may be identified
by name or picked using the graphics cursor.
The transformation is defined by specifying the x, y, z values of a translation
vector. These will be interpreted in the `GLOBAL' coordinate system unless
a coordinate system is active or a coordinate system name is given.
Reference axis type for interpretation of the coordinates, either `GLOBAL'
or `LOCAL' . This will override the currently active system. If `LOCAL' is
specified then the name of an existing local coordinate system must be given.
(' LOCAL' can be omitted and just the name of an existing local system can
be given.)
Name of an existing local coordinate system defined previously using
Control for the translation, either ÌNDEPEND' or `DEPENDEN' .
When a translation is specified as being ÌNDEPEND' the translation
vector is converted into the global system, it is unaffected by any
subsequent changes to parameters or coordinate systems. (This is the default).
When the current axis system is global or `GLOBAL' is specified in the translation
definition then ÌNDEPEND' is enforced.
`DEPENDEN' specifies that the translation is to be implicitly redefined if the
coordinate system that the translation refers to is altered in any way. When
further geometry is defined with the translation the redefined translation will
be used.
When a local system is active or a local system name is used then the
translation is `DEPENDEN' on the local system.
(See also note 2 below.)
This command is used to define a translation transformation for use in `GEOMETRY

SWEEP' ,`GEOMETRY COPY' and `GEOMETRY MOVE' commands.
Note 1: Parameters
When parameters are used in the definition of the translation, the translation
will be dependent on the parameters (and a local coordinate system if active or
specified) unless ÌNDEPEND' is specified.
Note 2: DEPENDENT
In the context of this command `DEPENDENT' refers to the translation definition itself. If the translation is dependent and uses a local coordinate system then
repositioning the points defining the coordinate system will have a corresponding effect on the translation when it is next used. It should not be confused with
19/08/1999

`DEPENDENT' for `GEOMETRY SWEEP' and `GEOMETRY COPY' which
creates a relationship between the original `part(s)' and the copy(ies).
Note 3: Translations and non rectangular coordinate systems
Although translations may be defined using cylindrical or spherical coordinate
systems it is recommended that only rectangular systems are used.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM TRANSLATE TR1 1 2 3.4
This defines a translation vector, called TR1, of x = 1, y = 2, x = 3.4. It will be
defined in the GLOBAL coordinate system.
2. CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM TRANSLATE P6 P23
This defines a translation, equal to the direction vector defined by the relative position
of point P23 with respect to point P6. As no name is specified for the transformation
a name will be generated automatically.
3. CONSTRUCT TRANSFRM TRANSLATE TRANS1 3.2 1.9 0 RECT1
This defines a translation vector, called TRANS1, of x = 3.2, y = 1.9 and z = 0 in the
previously defined coordinate system RECT1 (this overrides the current coordinate
system). If the coordinate system RECT1 is modified there will be no change to the
geometry created with this command (unless `DEPENDENT' is also specified).
See Also:

19/08/1999
133
134
CONSTRUCT
XSECTION
2.3.13 CONSTRUCT XSECTION

This command has been superceded, please refer to the `CONSTRUCT SHAPE' command.
See Also:
ÈYE NORMAL' , section 2.5.5, page 156

19/08/1999
2.4. PRIMARY COMMAND DRAWING
135
DRAWING
Control destination and display of graphics output
2.4 PRIMARY COMMAND DRAWING

The command `DRAWING' provides positional adjustment for the content of the current
drawing, viewport controls, the ability to produce animation sequences, and also controls
the destination of graphics output from FEMGV.
`DRAWING' has the following secondary commands:
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
19/08/1999
DRAWING ANIMATE
DRAWING CONTENTS
DRAWING DISPLAY
DRAWING RECOVER
DRAWING SAVE
DRAWING VIEWPORT
produce an animation sequence.

adjust contents of drawing.
update drawing on screen.
recover drawing from database.
drawing saving and dumping.
specify current viewport
136
DRAWING
ANIMATE
Produce an animation sequence
2.4.1 DRAWING ANIMATE Type Control

This command allows the user to:
1. Display an animation sequence using pictures stored in plotfiles. Each plotfile will
be a frame of the animation sequence and must have been previously generated using
the `DRAWING SAVE PLOTFILE' command or by the animation macros described
below.
2. Use animation macros to automatically generate and display animation sequences
without having to setup the individual frames with the `DRAWING SAVE PLOTFILE' command. The animation macros currently provided generate a mode shape
animation sequence, an animation sequence of complex results with changing phase
angle, or an animation sequence of the current results presentation over the currently
specified range of loadcases.
The theoretical maximum number of pictures that FEMGV can use in an animation sequence is 97. However, the animation technique uses bitmap images and so the actual
practical limit may depend on the amount of primary memory available. If the computer
has to page its bitmap images from disk, then the speed of animation may be unacceptably
slow. A viewport size of 1000x1000 on an 8 plane device would generate an 1 Mbyte bit
map for each frame in the animation sequence. A means of reducing the memory requirements is to reduce the viewport size prior to generating the animation.
Type
Control
Comments
PLOTFILES
filename filename ...
LOADCASES
[PLOTFILE filename]
MODESHAPE
STEPS n [FACTOR factor]

.... [PLOTFILE filename]
COMPLEX
[FROM ang1 TO ang2] STEPS ang3

.... [PLOTFILE filename]
Displays an animation using

pictures stored in the specified plotfiles
(see note 1).
An animation macro to generate
and display an animation sequence
showing how the current results
presentation varies over the
currently specified range of loadcases
see notes (2 and 5).
An animation macro to generate and
display a mode shape animation
sequence. (see notes 3 and 5).
An animation macro to generate and
display an animation sequence of
complex results with varying phase
angle. (see notes 4 and 5).
Note 1: The `PLOTFILES' command

The plotfiles have to be in the FEMGV Plotfile Neutral Format described in
Appendix E of the User Manual Appendices.
19/08/1999

Note 2: The `LOADCASES' command
The range of loadcases for which the animation is generated is as currently selected by the `RESULTS LOADCASE' command. Note that frames of the animation may be displayed as a cyclic or linear sequence as required, and as set
by the ÙTILITY SETUP ANIMATE' command.
Note 3: The `MODESHAPE' command
The currently selected results attribute, which must be a nodal vector quantity
comprising three cartesian components, is used as maximum displacement data
for the `VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM' display. The current view mode is maintained but any results presentation is de-activated.
The `STEPS n' control specifies the number of steps required from the datum
to the maximum displacement. A total of 2 * steps + 1 frames will be generated from +max to -max inclusive. The steps will be equally spaced at
degrees (datum = 0 degrees) with the displacement for any step calculated as
maximum displacement * sin * factor. The frames of the animation are then
displayed in a cyclic sequence.
The `FACTOR factor' control allows the user to specify a scale factor to be
applied to the attribute. If no scale factor is specified the program will automatically scale the data such that the maximum displacement will be 1/20 of the
screen if it were viewed in the plane of the screen.
Note 4: The `COMPLEX' command
The currently displayed results must be complex values. The `STEP ang3' control specifies the phase angle increment to be used between frames. It is also
possible to specify a lower and upper limit of phase angle for the animation
by using the `FROM ang1 TO ang2' controls where àng1' and àng2' must be
values between -359 and +359. If no start and finish values are specified then
a range of 0 to 359 will be used. A total of (ang2-ang1)/ang3 + 1 animation
frames will be generated and displayed as a linear sequence.
Note that the `DRAWING ANIMATE COMPLEX' command will also be effective where the model has been deformed using complex values via the `VIEW
OPTIONS DEFORM USING .....' command. In this case it is not necessary
to have a current presentation of complex results. However, if such a presentation is current, both the model deformation and results display will be animated
simultaneously.
Note 5: The `PLOTFILE filename' control
When running one of the animation macros, this control enables plotfile copies
of each animation frame to be created in the current plotter format as specified
by the ÙTILITY SETUP PLOTTER FORMAT' command. Animation plotfiles
written in the FEMGV Plotfile Neutral Format may be subsequently replayed
via the `DRAWING ANIMATE PLOTFILES' command.
Note that generally, the creation of plotfiles requires all the animation frames
to be generated twice and will therefore increase the time taken to set up an
animation sequence. The filename specified will be used as a generic name and
the plotfiles generated will have names filename1, filename2, filename3, ..... etc.
Filename extensions will be installation dependent, but are normally `.dat' . The
default is that plotfiles will not be created.
After an animation sequence the user will be offered an animation sub-menu. This enables
modifications to the animation sequence controls to be made, and the animation sequence
repeated, without the frames comprising the animation sequence having to be regenerated.
19/08/1999
137
138

This animation sub-menu provides the following controls, which can also be applied using
the ÙTILITY SETUP ANIMATE' command before an animation sequence is started.
Control
Comments
REPEAT
DURATION
To repeat the animation sequence.

To modify the duration of the animation sequence. The duration is
specified in seconds and can be from 5 seconds to 36000 seconds
(10 hours). The default is 20 seconds.
To modify the speed of animation. This can be set from 1 to 100.
The default is 75
To switch to an oscillating animation sequence.
To switch to a linear animation sequence.
To leave the animation environment and return to the primary menu.
SPEED
OSCILLATE
LINEAR
EXIT
Examples:
1. DRAWING ANIMATE PLOTFILES t1 t2 t3 t4
The pictures that have been saved in the plotfiles t1, t2, t3, and t4, in the FEMGV
Plotfile Neutral Format, are used to display an animation.
2. DRAWING ANIMATE LOADCASES
Generates and displays an animation sequence showing how the current results presentation varies over the currently selected range of loadcases.
3. DRAWING ANIMATE LOADCASES PLOTFILE m
Generates and displays an animation sequence showing how the current results presentation varies over the currently specified range of loadcases. In addition, for each
frame of the animation sequence a plotfile will be generated in the current plotfile format. Plotfile names will be m1, m2, m3 etc. An filename extension may be added,
normally `.dat' .
4. DRAWING ANIMATE MODESHAPE FACTOR 15.0 STEPS 5
A mode shape animation will be generated and displayed such that the current nodal
attribute (which must be a vector) is scaled by 15.0 to give the maximum displacement. The sequence will have 5 steps (frames) from the datum to the maximum
displacement inclusive. This will give a total of 11 frames for the complete mode
shape animation sequence, ie: +max 2 3 4 5 datum 7 8 9 10 -max. The frames will
be animated in a cyclic sequence.
5. DRAWING ANIMATE COMPLEX STEPS 60
Generates and displays an animation sequence showing how the currently displayed
complex results vary with a phase angle increment of 60 degrees. Frames will be
generated for phase angles of 0, 60, 120, 180, 240 and 300.
6. DRAWING ANIMATE COMPLEX FROM 0 TO -179 STEPS -30
Generates and displays an animation sequence showing how the currently displayed
complex results vary between phase angles of 0 degrees and -179 degrees using a
phase angle increment of -30 degrees. Frames will be generated for phase angles 0,
-30, -60, -90, -120, -150.
See Also:
19/08/1999

`DRAWING SAVE PLOTFILE' , section 2.4.5, page 145
ÙTILITY SETUP ANIMATE' , section 2.18.8.1, page 496
19/08/1999
139
140
DRAWING
CONTENTS
Adjust the contents of the drawing
2.4.2 DRAWING CONTENTS Item [Control]

This command provides positional adjustment for the contents of the current drawing.
Item
Control
Comments
AXES
POSITION
AUTO
OFF
Allows the user to control the display of

the model axes; (see note 1).
ROTATIONS
POSITION
AUTO
OFF

the absolute rotation angles of the current
view; (see note 1).
MONITOR
POSITION
AUTO
OFF
INCLUDE
EXCLUDE

the monitor; (see note 1).
FE-PROG
FE-PROG
Controls whether the FE Program

environment is displayed in the monitor.
LEGEND
POSITION
AUTO
OFF

the additional legend produced by result
presentation commands; (see note 1).
TEXT
POSITION
SHIFT
DELETE
Allows the user to enter and position

text in order to annotate a drawing;
(see note 2).
POINTER
POSITION
SHIFT
DELETE
[/PICK]
[ALL]
[/PICK]
[ALL]
Allows the user to enter and position

pointers in order to indicate areas of
interest in the drawing;
(see note 3).
NAME
POSITION
AUTO
OFF

a single line of text; (see note 1).
KEY
POSITION
AUTO
OFF

the key produced by certain non results
presentation commands; (see note 1).
19/08/1999
141
Note 1: Positioning ÀXES', `ROTATIONS', `MONITOR', `LEGEND', `NAME'

and `KEY'
When repositioning these items the graphics cursor is used to make a single hit
to indicate the new screen position of the anchor point of the item.
Item
Default Position
Anchor point
AXES
ROTATIONS
Bottom left of viewport.

Bottom left of viewport.
MONITOR
Top left of viewport,

except for graphs when
the top right corner is
the default.
Bottom right of the
viewport.
Bottom centre of the
viewport.
Bottom left of the
viewport.
Centre of the axes system.

Bottom left corner of the
text string.
Top left corner of the
monitor.
LEGEND
NAME
KEY

legend.
text string.
key.
Note 2: The `TEXT' control

The command `DRAWING CONTENTS TEXT POSITION' allows the user to
enter and position a line of text with which to annotate a drawing. A text string
may be up to 80 characters long and a maximum of 20 text strings may be used.
After entering a text string the user must position it by using the graphics cursor
to indicate the position on the screen required for the anchor point of the text
string. The anchor point of the text string is the bottom left of the first character.
The command `DRAWING CONTENTS TEXT SHIFT' allows the user to shift
the position of an existing text string. Two cursor hits must be made, the first to
pick the text string to be shifted and the second to indicate the new position of
its anchor point on the screen. The command `DRAWING CONTENTS TEXT
DELETE' enables the graphics cursor to be used to indicate a text string to be
deleted.
Note 3: The `POINTER' control
The command `DRAWING CONTENTS POINTER POSITION' allows the user
to position a pointer with which to indicate an area of interest in a drawing.
A maximum of 20 pointers may be used. A pointer is positioned by making
two hits with the graphics cursor; the first to indicate the `tail' of the pointer
and the second to indicate its `head' . The command `DRAWING CONTENTS
POINTER SHIFT' allows the user to shift the position of an existing pointer.
Three cursor hits must be made, the first to pick the pointer to be shifted, the
second to indicate the new position of its ' tail' and the third the new position
of its `head' . The command `DRAWING CONTENTS POINTER DELETE'
enables the graphics cursor to be used to indicate a pointer to be deleted.
19/08/1999
142
DRAWING
DISPLAY
Control the redraw frequency of the graphics screen
2.4.3 DRAWING DISPLAY [Mode]

This command controls the freguency with which current drawing is displayed on the
graphics terminal. In the default mode of operation, redraws are made automatically after the majority of FEMGV commands. However, the experienced user can switch off
the automatic redraws and instead enter several commands before specifically requesting a
re-draw.
Mode
Comments
CURRENT
ALL
AUTOMATIC
OFF
Redraws the current viewport (the default).

Redraws all viewports.
Switches on the automatic redraw. This is the default condition.
Switches off the automatic redraw.
Note 1: Suppression of Automatic Redraw

When running FEMGV in the automatic redraw mode it is possible to suppress a
particular redraw by entering the special character `;' at the end of the command.
Note 2: Return from a ÙTILITY TABULATE STATUS' command
If a ÙTILITY TABULATE STATUS' command is entered then the screen will
be cleared and the display of the model will be lost. In this situation a redraw of
the model is obtained with the command `DRAWING DISPLAY' .
Examples:
1. DRAWING DISPLAY
The current viewport is redrawn.
19/08/1999
143
DRAWING
RECOVER
Recover a saved drawing
2.4.4 DRAWING RECOVER Mode Control

FEMGEN and FEMVIEW only.
This command allows the user to access for further examination a particular drawing of
the model previously saved with the `DRAWING SAVE PLOTFILE [filename]' and the
`DRAWING SAVE LIVE' commands.
Mode
Control
Comments
PLOTFILE
filename
LIVE
number
OVERLAY
filenames
Recovers a formatted plotfile provided it has been saved in

the neutral plotfile format (see note 1).
(FEMVIEW only) Recovers the specified `live' drawing
which has been saved in the database (see note 2).
(FEMVIEW only) Recovers and superimposes plotfile
pictures (see note 3).
Note 1: Re-viewing plotfiles

With the `DRAWING RECOVER PLOTFILE [filename]' command, the plotting information is read from the named file in which the drawing is specified
as a sequence of moves and draws, colour changes, etc. This will regenerate a
`frozen view' of the model and/or results. The user cannot go on to work with
this view within FEMGV, but it is useful for reference purposes, and it will display the picture that would be produced if a user were to access this file for the
purpose of obtaining a hard-copy plot.
Pictures that have been generated in the format specified in Appendix E of
the User Manual Appendices but have been generated by a program other than
FEMGV can be displayed in this way.
Note 2: Recovering `live' drawings
With the `DRAWING RECOVER LIVE' command the sequence number of the
drawing within the drawing index will be used as the control to specify the view
to be reproduced. A parametric description of the view will have been saved,
and the drawing is regenerated from the model and results data stored in the
data base. This will regenerate a `live view' and the user may go on to e.g.
apply a rotation, or adjust the presentation of the results.
Note 3: Overlaying plotfile pictures
The command `DRAWING RECOVER OVERLAY' allows the user to superimpose pictures that have been written to formatted plotfiles.
Examples:
19/08/1999
144

1. DRAWING RECOVER PLOTFILE PISTON.PIC
The plotfile PISTON.PIC will be read and the drawing reproduced in the current
viewport.
2. DRAWING RECOVER LIVE 5
The parametric description of the drawing number 5 in the drawing index will be
accessed, and the drawing will be regenerated in the current viewport.
3. DRAWING RECOVER OVERLAY f1 f2 f3 f4
The named plotfiles are read and are superimposed.
See Also:
`DRAWING SAVE' , section 2.4.5, page 145

ÙTILITY TABULATE DRAWINGS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
145
DRAWING
SAVE
Save the current drawing
2.4.5 DRAWING SAVE Mode Control

This command allows the user to save a particular view of the model and/or results.
Mode
Control
Comments
PLOTFILE
filename
Writes plotter data (see notes 1, 2 and 3)to the

specified file in the current plotter format.
Saves a live drawing which is given a drawing number
(see note 4). (FEMVIEW only)
LIVE
Note 1: Saving to a plotfile

A drawing may be saved by writing to a plotfile in any of the formats available under the ÙTILITY SETUP PLOTTER' command. On hardware where
' forms' are available the plotfile format may also be specified as part of the
`DRAWING SAVE PLOTFILE' command.
Further details on formats is given in Appendix E of the User Manual Appendices. The plotfile may then be sent to a plotter to produce a hardcopy plot.
Plotfiles written in the FEMGV Plotfile Neutral Format may be recovered and
re-displayed by FEMGV for subsequent reference, or may be accessed by a
plotting program.
The user will be prompted to enter a title to be saved with the drawing in order
to help identify the drawing in the future.
Note 2: Ensuring a plotfile is current
In cases where commands have been issued which do not automatically produce
a redraw, the picture on the display will not be necessarily the picture that is
written to the plotfile. In these situations it is advisable to issue the command
`DRAWING DISPLAY' before the command `DRAWING SAVE PLOTFILE
[filename]' so that the current picture can then be viewed prior to making a plot.
Note 3: Limitations with plotter hardware
In cases where the picture displayed cannot be plotted, as for example with
colour filled contours on a pen plotter; an equivalent representation will be output to the plot file, for example, contour lines.
Note 4: Saving to the database
Alternatively, the drawing may be saved in the form of a parametric description
with the `DRAWING SAVE LIVE' command, in which case it will be stored in
the database, and will appear in the drawing index. It may then be recovered on
subsequent occasions with the `DRAWING RECOVER LIVE' command, and
the parametric description will be read, and the picture regenerated from the
model and results data stored in the data base. This will recover a `live' view of
the model and/or results, and the user may then go on to work with this view, and
for example, rotate the model, or adjust the results presentation. The recovery
19/08/1999
146

of the parametric description effectively reproduces the state of the program at
the point where the user issued the `DRAWING SAVE LIVE' command.
The user will be prompted to enter a title to be saved with the drawing in order
to help identify the drawing in the future.
Drawings saved in the drawing index are assigned a sequence number when they
are stored, and this sequence number is displayed once the command `DRAWING SAVE LIVE' has been issued. A table of saved drawings together with
the sequence number and title associated with each drawing can be obtained by
issuing the command ÙTILITY TABULATE DRAWINGS' .
See Also:
`DRAWING RECOVER' , section 2.4.5, page 145

ÙTILITY SETUP PLOTTER' , section 2.18.8.8, page 506
ÙTILITY TABULATE DRAWINGS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
147
DRAWING
VIEWPORT
Change the current viewport
2.4.6 DRAWING VIEWPORT Action Control

This command allows the user to alternate between single and multiple viewport mode, and
to specify which viewport is to be the active viewport. There is also a facility for copying
drawings from one viewport to another.
Action Control
Comments
USE
vp
COPY
vp1 TO vp2
SETUP
TWO-HORIZ
TWO-VERT
THREE-HORIZ
THREE-VERT
FOUR
The specified viewport `vp' becomes the active

viewport. If going from single to multiple viewport mode,
the current picture is automatically redrawn in the new
viewport. If going from one multi-viewport to another
empty multi-viewport then the current picture is not
automatically redrawn although all necessary information
will have been copied to the new viewport and the
picture may be displayed by issuing any command that
initiates a redraw. If returning to single viewport mode
the picture that previously existed in that viewport will
be redrawn.
The drawing from previously used viewport `vp1'
is copied to viewport `vp2' . Viewport `vp2' becomes
the active viewport.
The required multiple viewport configuration is
specified. Note that `THREE-HORIZ' and
`THREE-VERT' specify configurations comprising one
half-screen and two quarter-screen viewports where
the half-screen viewport is horizontal or vertical
respectively. (See note 3)
A viewport is specified either by a number from zero to four, or by a name as follows:
Viewport
Description
FULL or 0
TLEFT or 1
TRIGHT or 2
BLEFT or 3
BRIGHT or 4
The full screen in single viewport mode.

The top left quarter of the screen in multiple viewport mode.
The top right quarter of the screen in multiple viewport mode.
The bottom left quarter of the screen in multiple viewport mode.
The bottom right quarter of the screen in multiple viewport mode.
If the current multiple viewport configuration does not contain the requested viewport then
the most appropriate viewport will be selected. For example, if the current configuration is
`TWO-HORIZ' (two horizontal viewports), then the viewport requests `TLEFT' (top left)
and `TRIGHT' (top right) will both select the top horizontal viewport.
19/08/1999
148

Note 1: Hardware requirements
The multiple viewport facility is only supported on graphics terminals that have
an acceptable resolution.
In the multiple viewport mode of operation on lower resolution graphics devices
it may not be possible to display certain pictures which contain predominately
alphanumeric text. In these cases a warning will be issued.
Note 2: Changes to the database in multiple viewport mode
Only the current view information is retained for a viewport when a new viewport is selected. All the viewports access the same database for any particular
model and any changes to this database will effect all the viewports working
with that model. However, the display in any viewport will only change when a
command accessing the database is issued in that viewport.
For example, in FEMGEN, if only points are present in viewport 1 and lines are
then added in viewport 2, on return to viewport 1 `VIEW GEOMETRY ALL'
will show lines and points. In FEMVIEW, deletion or creation of loadcases
will effect all the viewports using that model.
Femsys Ltd
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Z
.25
.225
V .2
O
N .175
M
I
S .15
E
S
.125
S
T .1
R
E
S .75E-1
S
.5E-1
.25E-1
Y
X
0
Z
20
40
60
80
DISTANCE
100
120
140
160
180
200
Figure 2.59: Using Four Viewports
19/08/1999
149
Femsys
Model: BOTTLE
Y
X
Z
1
Model: BOTTLE
X
Z
Y
Figure 2.60: Using Two Horizontal Viewports

Note 3: Changing multiple viewport configurations
It is possible to change the multiple viewport configuration when already in
multi-viewport mode. The rule is that viewport 1 in the existing configuration
will become viewport 1 in the new configuration, viewport 2 will become viewport 2, etc. If the new configuration has fewer viewports than the existing configuration then the pictures in the viewports unsupported by the new configuration
will be lost.
It is not possible to change the multiple viewport configuration if this would
result in the active viewport being lost.
19/08/1999
150
19/08/1999
2.5. PRIMARY COMMAND EYE
151
EYE
Apply transformations to the model
2.5 PRIMARY COMMAND EYE

The ÈYE' command allows the user to control the viewpoint and the transformation of the
model.
ÈYE' has the following secondary commands:
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.5.10
19/08/1999
EYE ANGLE
EYE DIRECTION
EYE FRAME
EYE LOCATE
EYE NORMAL
EYE PERSPECT
EYE ROTATE
EYE SHIFT
EYE WALK
EYE ZOOM
- specify the view angle.

- specify the direction of sight.
- fit the picture within the viewport.
- locate a subset of the model or the workbox.
- view normal to a cross-section.
- perspective.
- relative and absolute rotations.
- translate.
- walk through the model.
- zoom in and out.
152
EYE
ANGLE
Specify the angle of sight
2.5.1 EYE ANGLE Control

The command ÈYE ANGLE' allows the user to specify the angle of sight to the model.
A pair of angles is given, the first specifying the angle in degrees between the direction
of sight and the screen Z-axis; and the second specifying the angle in degrees between the
projection on the X-Y plane of the line of sight, and the negative Y-axis. If the second angle
is not given it is set to 0.
Examples:
1. EYE ANGLE 30 60
A line of sight is defined having an angle of 30 degrees to the screen Z-axis; and an
angle of 60 degrees between its projection on the X-Y plane and the negative Y-axis.
19/08/1999
153
EYE
DIRECTION
Specify the direction of sight
2.5.2 EYE DIRECTION Control

The command ÈYE DIRECTION' allows the user to specify the direction of sight to the
model. A `from' and `to' pair of model co-ordinate triplets may be given to define the line
of sight. If no `to' co-ordinate position is given then the `to' position is taken as the origin
of the model.
Examples:
1. EYE DIRECTION 100 20 20
A line of sight is defined from co-ordinates X=100, Y=20, and Z=20 in model space
to the model origin.
2. EYE DIRECTION 100 20 20 300 0 0
A line of sight is defined in model space from co-ordinates X=100, Y=20, and Z=20
to co-ordinates X=300, Y=0, Z=0 .
19/08/1999
154
EYE
FRAME
Transform the model to fit within the frame of the viewport
2.5.3 EYE FRAME [Part] [Mode]

The command ÈYE FRAME' applies a shift and zoom to the model in order to fit the
model comfortably inside the frame of the current viewport. It is also possible to specify
that a specific part of the model is `framed' .
This command has associated with it an automatic mode whereby each successive view
will be `framed' in this way until the automatic mode is switched off. There is a small
overhead in computing time when running in the automatic mode, and the user may wish
to leave the automatic framing off, which is the default condition, and to use the command
ÈYE FRAME' on a one-off basis as and when he wishes a picture to be centred and scaled
to fit within its viewport.
Part
Mode
OFF
Partname
[AUTO]
ALL
[AUTO]
WORK-BOX
[AUTO]
Comments
Turns off automatic framing.
FEMGEN only. Frames to a specified line,
surface, body or set. The automatic mode may be
selected.
Frames the whole model (this is the default). The
automatic mode may be selected.
FEMGEN only. Frames to the FEMGEN work box.
The automatic mode may be selected.
Examples:
1. EYE FRAME
Frames to the current set on a one-off basis. If no set is selected it frames the whole
model.
2. EYE FRAME S1 AUTO
Requests automatic framing to the part `S1' .
3. EYE FRAME BOD6
Requests framing to the part `BOD6' on a one-off basis.
4. EYE FRAME OFF
Turns off automatic eye framing.
19/08/1999
155
EYE
LOCATE
Visually locate model subset or workbox
2.5.4 EYE LOCATE [OFF]

This command enables the user to visually locate the geometry or part of the mesh of the
model.
The locating mode may be switched off with the command ÈYE LOCATE OFF' .
FEMGEN Command
The command ÈYE LOCATE' causes the FEMGEN workbox to be drawn in order to
assist the user to visually locate the geometry of the model within the workbox.
FEMVIEW Command
The command ÈYE LOCATE' causes the drawing of an outline representation of the
model in order to assist the user to visually locate a subset or a cross-section within the
model.
When locating is on, a subsequent ÈYE FRAME' command will use the whole model and
not the current subset to calculate the scaling.
Figure 2.61: Locating a sub-set of the model
See Also:
ÈYE FRAME' , section 2.5.3, page 154
19/08/1999
156
EYE
NORMAL
View section in plane of viewport
2.5.5 EYE NORMAL

This command causes the model to be rotated and scaled so the current cross-section lies
in the plane of the screen, and comfortably fills the viewport. The first pair of nodes or the
two cursor hits used to defined the cross-section will be rotated to the x-axis of the screen.
See Also:
19/08/1999
157
EYE
PERSPECT
Apply perspective to model
2.5.6 EYE PERSPECT [Control]

This command allows the user to apply perspective to the model. Perspective remains
active until it is switched off, or the perspective factor is set to zero.
Control
Comments
[FACTOR] Factor
A factor between 0 and 3 may be entered to control the amount of

perspective that will be applied (see note 1). Z-plane clipping at Z=0.0
in the plane of the viewport will be activated.
Switches perspective off. Also switches off Z-plane clipping.
OFF
Note 1: Controlling the Position of the Vanishing Point

The vanishing point is at a position behind the centre of the viewport at a distance
controlled by the perspective factor such that the greater the factor the greater
the perspective distortion.
Figure 2.62: Perspective
Examples:
1. EYE PERSPECT
Applies the default perspective to the model.
2. EYE PERSPECT FACTOR 2
Applies a perspective of factor 2 to the model.
3. EYE PERSPECT OFF
Removes perspective from the model.
19/08/1999
158
EYE
ROTATE
Apply absolute and relative rotation
2.5.7 EYE ROTATE Control Arguments

This command is used to rotate the position of the eye around the current subset of the
finite element model. Both relative and absolute rotations are provided.
Note that when the Open GL driver is available dynamic rotate, zoom and pan are activated
with CTRL and the left, middle or right mouse buttons respectively.
Control
Arguments
Comments
TO
Rotation angles about the

screen X, Y and Z axes.
Gives an absolute rotation from the model

frame of reference (see note 1).
LEFT
RIGHT
UP
DOWN
CLOCK
ACLOCK
Rotation angle
Rotates the model relative to its current

orientation (see note 2).
Note 1: The axis system used for absolute rotations

the X-axis is horizontal, parallel to the plane of the screen, and positive
from left to right.
the Y-axis is vertical, parallel to the plane of the screen, and positive upwards.
the Z-axis is perpendicular to the plane of the screen, and positive out from
the screen.
the `right hand screw rule' defines the positive direction of rotation.
rotations are applied in X, Y, Z order.
Note 2: Relative rotations

Relative rotations are, by default, specified in terms of the movement of the eye
of the viewer. If this is found to be unnatural, the command ÙTILITY SETUP
ROTATION MODEL' can be used to make the commands for relative rotations
apply to the movement of the model rather than the eye.
Note 3: The origin of rotation
The origin of rotation is taken as the centre of the current subset of elements.
Note 4: Centring of the model
A rotated model is translated so that the centre of the current subset of elements
is positioned at the centre of the viewport.
Examples:
19/08/1999

1. EYE ROTATE TO 0 0 90
The viewer's position is moved so the model z axis lies along the screen y axis and
the model y axis lies along the screen -z axis.
2. EYE ROTATE RIGHT 45
The viewer's position is rotated right by 45 degrees. The model will appear to rotate
left 45 degrees.
3. EYE ROTATE UP 20
The viewer's position is rotated up by 20 degrees. The model will appear to rotate
down by 20 degrees.
4. EYE ROTATE TO 0
The model axes are aligned with the screen axes.
See Also:
`DRAWING CONTENTS ROTATIONS' , section 2.4.2, page 140

ÙTILITY SETUP ROTATIONS' , section 2.18.8.11, page 511
19/08/1999
159
160
EYE
SHIFT
Apply translation
2.5.8 EYE SHIFT Control

This command is used to shift (translate) the model.
Control
Comments
/CURSOR
The cursor is positioned twice to indicate a `from' and `to' position

for the applied shift. Note that the cursor hit positions must be within
the current viewport. (see note 1)
The shift is specified in terms of a `from' and `to' pair of
x,y normalised device co-ordinates (ndc). (see note 1)
The shift is specified by giving distances in model coordinates for
translations in the screen X, Y and Z directions. Note that with this
command it is the eye that shifts, rather than the model. Note also
that the positive Z direction is out of the screen (towards the user).
ndc1 ndc2
XYZ dx [dy] [dz]
Note 1: Cursor and ndc shifts

These have the effect of dragging the model from the `from' position to the `to'
position; so it is the model that shifts rather than the eye.
Examples:
1. EYE SHIFT .5 .5 .6 .5
The model is moved .1 normalised device coordinates along the screen x-axis.
2. EYE SHIFT XYZ 10 10 10
The eye is moved 10 model coordinates along the screen x-axis, the screen y-axis
and the screen z-axis.
3. EYE SHIFT XYZ 0 250
The eye is moved 250 model coordinates along the screen y-axis.
19/08/1999
161
EYE
WALK
Walk through the model
2.5.9 EYE WALK eye point [[view point] [[up point] [size]]]
A sequence of these commands can be used to `walk through' the model.
eye point
view point
up point
size
OFF
Specifies the position in model coordinates at which the eye is

located. If this is the only information given then the effect will be
to move the model (at the current orientation and size) so that the eye
point specified is translated to the centre of the viewport.
Specifies the position in model coordinates at which the eye is
looking; i.e. in conjunction with the èye point'
it defines the line of sight.
Specifies a position in model coordinates which will be vertically
above the line of sight. This determines the orientation of the model
about the line of sight.
Specifies how much of the model fits into the viewport. The `size' is
given in model space coordinates and this determines the dimension
of the model that will be visible within the smaller of the viewport
dimensions. This effectively allows the user to apply a scale factor
if required.
The command ÈYE WALK OFF' is used to turn off the Z-plane
clipping activated for the walk through. (See note 2.)
Note 1: Rotations
Use of the existing relative rotation commands will allow the user to `look
around' the model from any èye point' .
Note 2: Clipping
During use of the ÈYE WALK' command, the model will be Z-clipped in the
plane of the viewport at the present eye point. This can produce odd looking
views if when inside the model the viewport is larger than the cavity. After
using the ÈYE WALK' command, to turn off Z-plane clipping and revert to the
normal mode of operation for FEMGV , it is necessary to issue the ÈYE WALK
OFF' command. Z-plane clipping will also be turned off if an ÈYE FRAME'
or ÈYE ROTATE TO' command is issued. Note that if perspective is on then Zplane clipping will not be turned off until the command ÈYE PERSPECTIVE
OFF' is also given.
Note 3: Hidden line
Hidden line pictures may be incorrect in places. This is because the facets are
only clipped when drawn; i.e. the unclipped facet is used to hide facets behind
it that may in fact become partly visible when the facet is clipped. (Facets that
are completely in front of the clipping plane are not included).
19/08/1999
162

Examples:
1. EYE WALK 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 1 0 20
This command will result in a view from the origin of the model, in the positive
direction of the model z-axis and with the model y-axis vertically upwards. The
model is scaled such that 20 units of model space fit into the smallest dimension of
the viewport (i.e. the height of the viewport if it is landscape).
See Also:
ÈYE ROTATE' , section 2.5.7, page 158
19/08/1999
163
EYE
ZOOM
Zoom in or Zoom out
2.5.10 EYE ZOOM Control

This command may be used to simultaneously scale and translate the current drawing of
the model.
Control
Comments
IN
[/CURSOR]
[ndc1 ndc2]
OUT
[/CURSOR]
[ndc1 ndc2]
/CURSOR
ndc1 ndc2
FACTOR
Factor [coords]
The cursor may be used twice to define opposite corners

of the zoom window (this is the default). The current
picture is then transformed so that the contents of the
zoom window expand to fit the current viewport.
Alternatively, opposite corners of the zoom window may
be specified in normalised device co-ordinates (pairs of
screen co-ordinates in the range 0-1).
The cursor may be used twice to define opposite corners
of the zoom window (this is the default). The current
picture is then transformed so that the contents of the
zoom window expand to fit the current viewport.
Alternatively, opposite corners of the zoom window may
be specified in normalised device co-ordinates (pairs of
screen co-ordinates in the range 0-1).
This is equivalent to the command
ÈYE ZOOM IN /CURSOR' .
This is equivalent to the command
ÈYE ZOOM IN ndc1 ndc2' . (ndc1 and ndc2 are pairs
of screen co-ordinates in the range 0-1).
A scale factor may be specified. In addition a shift may
be specified by giving distances in model coordinates for
translations in the screen X, Y and Z directions. Note
that if shifts are applied with this command it is the eye
that shifts, rather than the model.
Examples:
1. EYE ZOOM FACTOR .5
A scale factor of 0.5 is applied to the current view. The centre of the zoom is the
centre of the current viewport.
2. EYE ZOOM FACTOR 4 0 100
A scale factor of 4 is applied to the current view. The centre of the zoom is the centre
of the current viewport. In addition a translation is applied such that the eye moves
100 model coordinates along the screen y-axis.
19/08/1999
164

3. EYE ZOOM IN 0 0 0.5 0.5
This would have the effect of zooming in on the bottom left hand corner of the screen.
See Also:
19/08/1999
2.6. PRIMARY COMMAND FEMGEN
165
FEMGEN
Enter the Model Creation Environment
2.6 PRIMARY COMMAND FEMGEN

FEMGEN [Model name]
In order to create or to modify geometry it is necessary to issue the command `FEMGEN'
and give either the name of an existing model which is to be modified or the name of a new
model which is to be created. This takes the user into the model creation environment. The
name that is given has to be 6 characters or less.
When FEMGEN is used under DOS or Windows 3.*, modelnames `CON' and `LPT'
should not be used as these are reserved system names.
Examples:
1. FEMGEN
The current model will be used in FEMGEN. If no model is current the user will be
prompted for a model name which must be 6 characters or less.
2. FEMGEN CONROD
The model CONROD will be used in FEMGEN. If no model CONROD exists, then
it is assumed that the user wishes to create a new model called CONROD.
19/08/1999
166
19/08/1999
2.7. PRIMARY COMMAND FEMVIEW
167
FEMVIEW
Enter the Model Assessment Environment
2.7 PRIMARY COMMAND FEMVIEW

FEMVIEW [Model name]
In order to assess a model and results it is necessary to issue the command `FEMVIEW
model name' . This takes the user into the model assessment environment.
Note that if the named model has no FEMVIEW viewdata in existence, then where meshdata generated by FEMGEN does exist this will be accessed and the FEMVIEW viewdata
automatically created.
Examples:
1. FEMVIEW
The current model will be used in FEMVIEW. If no model is current the user will
be prompted for a model name.
2. FEMVIEW CONROD
The model CONROD will be used in FEMVIEW.
19/08/1999
168
19/08/1999
2.8. PRIMARY COMMAND GEOMETRY
169
GEOMETRY
Define model geometry
2.8 PRIMARY COMMAND GEOMETRY

The `GEOMETRY' command allows the user to define new geometric parts or to redefine
existing ones. In general, the name of the new geometric part may be omitted, it will then
be generated automatically, and the type of definition (e.g. COORD) may also be omitted,
it being determined from the subsequent parameters.
Where existing part names are required these may be supplied by using the cursor to pick
them by specifying /PICK.
`GEOMETRY' has the following secondary commands:
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.8.9
2.8.10
2.8.11
2.8.12
19/08/1999
GEOMETRY BODY
GEOMETRY COPY
GEOMETRY FILLET
GEOMETRY FLIP
GEOMETRY LCMB
GEOMETRY LINE
GEOMETRY MOVE
GEOMETRY POINT
GEOMETRY SPLIT
GEOMETRY SURFACE
GEOMETRY SWEEP
GEOMETRY UNSPLIT
- define a body.
- copies geometry.
- fillets geometry.
- reverse Z-axis of a surface.
- specify a combined line.
- specify a line definition.
- transforms geometry.
- specify a point definition.
- split a line.
- defines a surface.
- sweeps geometry.
- unsplits a line.
170
GEOMETRY
BODY
Define a body
2.8.1 GEOMETRY BODY Control

This command is used to define new bodies or to redefine existing bodies. FEMGEN bodies may have either a fixed or flexible topology.
FEMGEN bodies with flexible topology may be generated using either a PRISM or a GENERAL BODY. A PRISM may be created automatically when the `GEOMETRY SWEEP'
command is used to sweep a region. The topology of the PRISM body is essentially the
same as that of the underlying region. A GENERAL BODY is created from a set (or sets)
containing a number of bounding surfaces. A GENERAL BODY may have a topology that
is considerably more flexible than that of the PRISM.
If adjacent geometric parts are created separately and have an identical mesh on the boundary, then in order to join them, it may be necessary to use the `MESHING MERGE' command to ensure that the final mesh is continuous across the boundary.
FEMGEN bodies with fixed topology have four, five or six sides. These sides may be
specified explicitly, or for five and six sided bodies implicitly by specifying two opposing
surfaces and allowing FEMGEN to automatically generate the connecting sides.
When five or six sided bodies are being created the full definition requires two surfaces
that are opposite one another, followed by the remaining surfaces in sequence. There is a
shortened definition using just two opposing surfaces; when this is used FEMGEN will
generate the least twisted body that can be created from the specified surfaces, although if
this definition is not the one required then the full definition of the body must be given.
For tetrahedral bodies all four surfaces must be specified.
Bodies may also be generated automatically when the `GEOMETRY SWEEP' command
is used to sweep one or more surfaces.
The sub-commands ÈLEMENTS' , `2SURFS' , `4SURFS' , `5SURFS' , and `6SURFS' are
optional. The command processor is able to determine which option is required from the
additional parameters which follow. Once a body has been defined using one of these commands, the command processor assumes that further bodies are to be entered and remains
at the `GEOMETRY BODY' level. From this level, further bodies may be defined or a
different primary command may be selected.
19/08/1999
171
`GEOMETRY BODY' has the following sub-commands:
2.8.1.1
2.8.1.2
GEOMETRY BODY ELEMENTS

GEOMETRY BODY SETS
2.8.1.3
2.8.1.5
2.8.1.5
2.8.1.6
2.8.1.7
2.8.1.8
GEOMETRY BODY 2SURFS

GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL
GEOMETRY BODY PRISM
From a set of elements

From two sets of topologically equivalent
surfaces
Two-sided definition
Four-sided definition
Five-sided definition
Six-sided definition
Multiple-sdied definition from bounding sets
Multiple-sided definition from a region
sec:geometry:body:general
Note 1: In-line editing of body definitions
The commands `GEOMETRY body name /EDIT' and `GEOMETRY /PICK-B
/EDIT' will cause up to 80 characters from the definition of the specified or
picked body to be loaded into the input buffer for in-line editing.
19/08/1999
172
GEOMETRY BODY
ELEMENTS
Define a body from a set of elements
2.8.1.1 GEOMETRY BODY ELEMENTS [bnam] [elt]

This command is used to define a body from elements directly.
bnam
elt
=
=
name of the body , used for later references

element type on the body. Refer to command `MESHING TYPES' for a
detailed description.
FEMGEN normally creates nodes and brick elements automatically from the body definitions entered by the user (or from a CAD system). When a higher degree of control over
element definitions is required, elements may be defined manually.
The `GEOMETRY BODY ELEMENTS' command is used to associate a body name and
element type to the elements manually defined in subsequent `MESHING ELEMENT'
commands.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY BODY'
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY BODY ELEMENTS BM1 HE8
Create a body BM1 on which HE8 elements will be manually defined.
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY BODIES' , section 2.11.1, page 256

`MESHING ELEMENT' , section 2.12.3, page 278
ÙTILITY DELETE BODIES' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY BODIES' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
173
GEOMETRY BODY
SETS
Bodies from two sets
2.8.1.2 GEOMETRY BODY SETS senam1 senam2 [divs]

This command is used to define a number of bodies from two sets of surfaces.
senam1
senam2
divs
=
=
=
name of the first set of surfaces.

name of the second set of surfaces.
number of divisions on lines to be created between the two sets
Given two sets of topologically equivalent surfaces FEMGEN will create a number of
bodies between the two sets. The surfaces do not need to be ordered in the sets and a
proximity algorithm is used to locate matching surfaces.
Straight lines connecting corresponding corners of corresponding surfaces in the two sets
will be generated. Also, depending on whether corresponding surfaces in the two sets are 3
or 4 sided, 3 or 4 surfaces connecting corresponding sides of the surfaces will be generated.
The proximity algorithm will fail if the two sets of surfaces are severely sheared relative to
one another. Under such circumstances the algorithm will incorrectly match one or more
of the surface pairs and will terminate with an error message.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY BODY SETS SE01 SE02 3
Create a number of bodies between sets SE01 and SE02 which are assumed to contain topologically identical sets of surfaces.
See Also:

19/08/1999
174
GEOMETRY BODY
2SURFS
Body from two surfaces
2.8.1.3 GEOMETRY BODY 2SURFS [bnam] snam1 snam2 [elt]

This command is used to define a body from 2 surfaces.
bnam
snam
elt
=
=
=
name of the body , used at later references.

names of the surfaces that define the body.
FEMGEN will generate the least twisted body that can be defined from the two specified
surfaces. Straight lines connecting corresponding corners of the given surfaces will be
generated, and also 3 or 4 surfaces connecting corresponding sides of the given surfaces.
Whenever possible, instead of generating new objects, existing ones with the same topology
are used.
Figure 2.63: A body from two 4sided surfaces
Figure 2.64: A body from two 3sided surfaces

19/08/1999

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY BODY 2SURFS B1 S1 S2
Create a body B1 with two opposing surfaces S1 and S2 and 3 or 4 side surfaces,
with the default element types PE6, or HE8 respectively.
2. GEOMETRY BODY 2SURFS B1 S1 S2 HE20
Create a body B1 with two opposing surfaces S1 and S2 and 4 side surfaces, with
HE20 elements.
See Also:

19/08/1999
175
176
GEOMETRY BODY
4SURFS
Body from four surfaces
2.8.1.4 GEOMETRY BODY 4SURFS [bnam] snam1 snam2 snam3 snam4 [elt]
This command is used to define a tetrahedral body from 4 surfaces.
bnam
snam
elt
=
=
=
name of the body , used for later references.

The four surfaces may be entered in any order. If èlt' is omitted, a default element type of
TE4 will be assumed.
Note that currently only one element per 4 sided body is allowed.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY BODY 4SURFS B1 SURFT SIDE1 SIDE2 SIDE3
Create a tetrahedral body B1 defined by the surfaces SURFT SIDE1 SIDE2 SIDE3
and (implicitly) element type TE4.
2. GEOMETRY BODY 4SURFS B1 SURFT SIDE1 SIDE2 SIDE3 TE10 4
Create a tetrahedral body B1 defined by the surfaces SURFT SIDE1 SIDE2 SIDE3
with element type TE10, variant 4.
See Also:

19/08/1999
177
GEOMETRY BODY
5SURFS
Body from five surfaces
2.8.1.5 GEOMETRY BODY 5SURFS [bnam] snam1 snam2 snam3 snam4 snam5
[elt]
bnam
snam
elt
=
=
=
name of the body , used at later references.

The first two surfaces must be opposite each other. The following three surfaces may be
entered in a clockwise or anti-clockwise manner. If èlt' is omitted, a default element type
of PE6 will be assumed.
Figure 2.65: The order of input of surfaces for a body from five surfaces
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY BODY 5SURFS B1 STOP SBOT SLEF SFRN SRGT
Create a body B1 with two opposing surfaces STOP and SBOT, three side surfaces
SLEF, SFRN, SRGT, and element type PE6.
2. GEOMETRY BODY 5SURFS B1 STOP SBOT SLEF SFRN SRGT PE15
Create a body B1 with two opposing surfaces STOP and SBOT, three side surfaces
SLEF, SFRN, SRGT, and element type PE15.
19/08/1999
178

See Also:

19/08/1999
179
GEOMETRY BODY
6SURFS
Body from six surfaces
2.8.1.6 GEOMETRY BODY 6SURFS [bnam] snam1 snam2 snam3 snam4 snam5
snam6 [elt]
bnam
snam
elt
=
=
=
name of the body , used at later references

names of the surfaces that define the body
The first two surfaces must be opposite each other. The following four surfaces may be
entered in a clockwise or anti-clockwise manner. If èlt' is omitted, a default element type
of HE8 will be assumed.
Figure 2.66: The order of input of surfaces for a body from six surfaces
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY BODY 6SURFS B1 STOP SBOT SFRN SLEF SBAK SRGT
Create a body B1 with two opposing surfaces STOP and SBOT, four side surfaces
SFRN, SLEF, SBAK, SRGT, and element type HE8.
2. GEOMETRY BODY 6SURFS B1 STOP SBOT SFRN SLEF SBAK SRGT HE20
Create a body B1 with two opposing surfaces STOP and SBOT, four side surfaces
SFRN, SLEF, SBAK, SRGT, and element type HE20.
See Also:
19/08/1999
180

19/08/1999
181
GEOMETRY BODY
GENERAL
Body from many sets of surfaces
2.8.1.7 GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL [bnam] set outer [set inner*][elt]

or
bnam APPEND/REMOVE Set inner*
This command is used to create a multiple faced body with optional internal cavities.
bnam
set outer
set inner*
=
=
=
elt
name of the body , used for later references to the body.

name of a set containing the surfaces that form the outer shell.
set names, each set containing the surfaces that form the shells
that represent the cavities. One set per cavity.
element type on the body, either TE4, TE10 or TE16. (See
`MESHING TYPES' also).
In order for a general body to be defined, a set that contains a number of surfaces must
exist. Ideally, the surfaces within the set will form a closed shell, with each line of the shell
being contained in the definition of two and only two surfaces from the set. If this is not the
case, a warning message will be generated, in which the geometric part that has caused the
problem wil be highlighted. The body is created regardless of whether problems are found,
although in the case of an erroneous definition, there is no guarantee that meshing will be
possible.
The surfaces can be appended to the defining set in any order.
Internal cavities may also be defined using sets of surfaces. Ideally, the surfaces within
each set will form a closed shell. Cavitites may be given in the initial definition of the
general body, as well as added or removed once the general body has been defined. This
may be undertaken with the `GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL bnam APPEND/REMOVE'
command.
Whenever, a general body is modified the existing mesh on the body will be cancelled. In
order for meshing to take place, the internal cavities must be located entirely within the
outer shell. Only tetrahedral element types TE4, TE10 and TE16 may be associated with
the general body. Mesh density may be controlled by the divisions on the lines that define
the surfaces in the shell sets, and by the density parameter associated with those surfaces
that have the Delaunay algorithm attached.
The general body may be viewed as analogous to the two-dimensional REGION, (See `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION' ).
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL B13 OUTER
Create a general (multiple sided) body B13 from the surfaces forming a closed shell
that are in the set OUTER.
19/08/1999
182

2. GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL B13 APPEND CAV1 CAV2 CAV3
Add the cavities defined by the surfaces in the sets CAV1, CAV2 and CAV3 to the
existing definition of B13.
3. GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL OUTER CAV1 CAV2 CAV3 TE10
Create a general body from the surfaces that are in the set OUTER, with three internal cavities defined by the sets CAV1, CAV2 and CAV3. The body name will be
generated automatically by FEMGEN. The body definition will match that resulting from application of the commands exhibited in examples 1 and 2. Element type
TE10 will be attached to the body.
4. GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL B13 REMOVE CAV3
Remove the cavity defined by the set CAV3 from the definition of the body B13.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT SET' , section 2.3.8, page 78

`MESHING DIVISION' , section 2.12.2, page 275
`MESHING TYPES' , section 2.12.11, page 301
19/08/1999
183
GEOMETRY BODY
PRISM
Body from many surfaces
2.8.1.8 GEOMETRY BODY PRISM [bnam] snam front snam back set sides [elt]
This command is used to define a prismatic body created when a ' region' is swept. The
command is not intended for interactive use; it is provided solely to allow archiving and
subsequent recreation of prismatic bodies and is documented here for completeness. Users
wishing to create prismatic bodies should create a surface with the command `GEOMETRY
SURFACE REGION' and then sweep the resulting surface using a pre-defined translation.
bnam
snam front
=
=
snam back
set sides
elt
=
=
name of the body , used for later references.

name of the surface created with `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION'
that was swept to create the body.
name of the surface opposite snam front that was created with
a `GEOMETRY SWEEP' command.
set containing the side surfaces created when snam front was swept.
element type on the body, either PE6 or PE15. Refer to command
`MESHING TYPES' for a detailed description.

See Also:

19/08/1999
184
GEOMETRY
COPY
Copy and transform an existing part or set
2.8.2 GEOMETRY COPY part [name] trnam [times] [depn]

or:
... part [name] [times] trtype [tr new] defn [depn]
This command is used to define new geometric parts by copying existing ones using either
a previously defined transformation or a transformation that is defined as part of this command. Selection of the geometry to be copied is either by keyboard or cursor. Multiple
copies are achieved by specifying the number of times the copy is to be performed.
part
name
=
=
trnam
times
depn
=
=
trtype
tr new
=
=
defn
name of a point, line, surface, body, or set to be copied.

name of a new point, line, surface, body, or set that will be created by taking a
copy of `part' and transforming it. If `name' is omitted FEMGEN will
automatically generate a new name. If multiple copies are specified then `name'
will be given to the final copy of the original part and FEMGEN will generate
names for the parts generated by the intermediate copies.
name of the transformation to be used. (Defined with
CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM)
number of times the part is to be copied. The default is 1.
dependency control, either `DEPENDEN' or ÌNDEPEND' (the default). If the
transformation is specified as part of this command then the copy operation can
only be independent. If `DEPENDEN' is specified then the geometry of any
parts created by the `GEOMETRY COPY' command will remain dependent on
the transformation used in the command and also on the geometry of the original
part. Thus if the transformation is subsequently redefined in any way (e.g. by
changing the co-ordinates of the reference points used in its definition) or the
geometry of the original part is changed then the geometry of the parts generated
by the `COPY' command will be changed correspondingly. If ÌNDEPEND' is
specified then any parts created by the `GEOMETRY COPY' command will be
unaffected by subsequent redefinitions of the transformation used in the copy or
by changes to the geometry of the original part.
Type of the transformation to be used. (See below).
name for transform created as part of the copy operation. A new transform name
will be saved in the database if a name is given for the transform or if the copy
is defined as being dependent on the transform.
Definition of transform (See below).
trtype
defn
TRANSLATE
Two point translation definition OR

Three offset distances with optional coordinate system
Three or four point rotation definition OR
Two points and angle of rotation
Two point mirror definition
Two point scale definition with a scaling factor plus a second
optional scaling factor
ROTATE
MIRROR
SCALE
Whenever possible, instead of generating new objects, existing ones with the same topology
are used. Nodes on polylines are not tested for coincidence with existing nodes. See also
the commands `GEOMETRY SWEEP' and `CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE' . For
19/08/1999
185
a detailed description of the definitions of the four transforms the user is referred to the
command `CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' . Although translations may be performed using
cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems it is recommended that only rectangular systems
are used.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY COPY'
S2
S1
S1
Figure 2.67: Geometry Copy S1 to S2. Note that no body is created.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY COPY SET1 ROT1
Copy all parts associated with set SET1 using transformation ROT1, and let FEMGEN generate a name for the new set.
2. GEOMETRY COPY SET1 SET2 TR1
Copy all points, lines, surfaces, and bodies contained within set SET1 to create a new
set SET2 using transformation TR1.
3. GEOMETRY COPY S1 SSRF TR6 4
Copy surface S1 4 times using transformation TR6. The name of the final surface
generated is to be SSRF. FEMGEN will generate the names for the intermediate
surfaces.
4. GEOMETRY COPY S1 SSRF TR6 4 DEPENDEN
Copy surface S1 4 times using transformation TR6. The name of the final surface
generated is to be SSRF. FEMGEN will generate the names for the intermediate
surfaces. The geometry of the parts created will remain dependent on the transformation TR6 and on the geometry of the original surface S1 and will be effected by
any subsequent change to the definition of TR6 or to the geometry of S1.
5. GEOMETRY COPY SET1 ROTATE PAXIS1 PAXIS2 PSTART P43
Copies all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 by rotating about an axis
through points PAXIS1 and PAXIS2 by an angle defined by point PSTART to point
P43.
6. GEOMETRY COPY SET1 TRANSLATE 10 0 12 GLOBAL
Copies all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 using a translation of x = 10, y
= 0, z = 12 in the global current coordinate system, regardless of the currently active
coordinate system.
7. GEOMETRY COPY SET1 TRANSLATE 1.05 2.392 0 RECT1
Copies all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 using a translation of x = 1.05,
y = 2.392, z = 0 in the previously defined coordinate system RECT1.
8. GEOMETRY COPY L1 TRANSLATE TR1 1 0 0
Copies the line L1 to a new position offset from the current location by 1 unit in the
x direction. In addition it will create a new transform called TR1 which defines this
translation.
19/08/1999
186

9. GEOMETRY COPY L1 TRANSLATE 1 0 0 DEPENDENT
Copies the line L1 to a new position offset from the current location by 1 unit in the
x direction. In addition it will create a new transform called TR1 which defines this
translation and make the new points dependent on the transform TR1.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT SPACE' , section 2.3.10, page 112.

`CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' , section 2.3.12, page 126.
`GEOMETRY SWEEP' , section 2.8.11, page 246.
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY TRANSFORM' , section 2.18.9,
page 516
19/08/1999
187
GEOMETRY
FILLET LINE
Define a fillet between two lines
2.8.3 GEOMETRY FILLET LINE [lnam1] lnam2 lnam3 radius [divn]

[pnam] [MODIFY]
This command is used to define a fillet. A fillet (which is an arc line) can be created either
as a separate entity or joined to the geometry from which it was defined. Where the fillet is
joined to existing geometry, this old geometry is modified and any higher order geometric
entities or line combinations associated with the filleted region are deleted.
lnam1
lnam2
lnam3
radius
divn
=
=
pnam
MODIFY
name of new fillet line to be created or name of an existing arc or straight

line. If no name is given a name will be automatically created.
name of an existing straight line or arc to be filleted.
/PICK and a cursor hit to select the line or arc.
name of 2nd existing straight line or arc to be filleted.
/PICK and a cursor hit to select the straight line or arc.
the fillet radius.
integer which specifies how many nodes are to be placed along the fillet.
If omitted a default of four divisions (ie Five nodes) is assumed. The
default number of divisions can be reset using the command
`MESHING DIVISION DEFAULT' .
name of an existing (guide) point used to indicate which intersection to
choose (with arcs there may be two possible intersections) and which
quadrant of that intersection to fillet (see note 2).
/PICK and a cursor hit to select the guide point.
to indicate that the existing lines will be modified to join the fillet,
the default is for the original geometry not to be modified (see note 3).
L3
P1
P5
P3
L1
P2
L1
L2
P2
P4
P4
L2
L3
P1
P6
P1
P3
L1
P2
P5
P7
P3
L2
P4
Figure 2.68: Definition of a fillet with and without the MODIFY option
19/08/1999
188

Return Level: `GEOMETRY FILLET'
Note 1: Limitations
The two lines to be filleted may be straight lines or arcs and may be joined at
one end, both ends, or completely separate. The fillet will not be re-calculated
if either of the defining lines are themselves re-defined.
Note 2: Use of the Guide point
A guide point may optionally be defined and must already exist. This point is
used to define the intersection region in which to place the fillet; for example
a straight line, when extended infinitely, may intersect an arc at two points and
a fillet could be placed near either of these two points. The guide point is also
used to define the quadrant around an intersection region in which to place the
fillet; where two lines cross, a fillet could be placed in any of the four quadrants.
The guide point must not be placed on either of the lines.
Where the guide point is omitted, a guide point is guessed and the fillet calculated on the basis of this guess. Where the two existing lines are not joined, the
guide point is placed mid-way between the line end points which are furthest
appart. Where the two existing lines are joined at one point, the guide point is
placed mid-way between the ends which are not joined. Where the two existing lines are joined at both ends the guide point is placed mid-way between the
mid-point of each line.
The guide point is only used internally and it will not be created as part of the
filleting command.
Note 3: The MODIFY option
The MODIFY option may be used to join the ends of the existing lines to the
new fillet line; the default is to simply create a new fillet which is not connected
to anything else. Where the MODIFY option is used, one point from each of the
original lines will be modified and used as an end point for the fillet. The point
nearest the fillet will be modified. Any line combinations or surfaces (and any
higher order entities which depend upon them) associated with the original lines
will be deleted when the MODIFY option is used.
Note 4: Effect of tolerance
The filleting calculation is sensitive to the model tolerance. For example, if the
distance between the guide point and one of the existing lines is less than the
model tolerance the point will be considered to lie on the line and an error will
occur.
Note 5: Use with existing lines
Where lnam1 is an existing line it will be modified to conform to the new fillet definition. Any line combinations or surfaces that reference lnam1 will be
deleted (see note 3).
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY FILLET LINE L1 L2 9
Create a radius 9 fillet between lines L1 and L2 with the default number of divisions.
2. GEOMETRY FILLET LINE L1 L2 9 M
Create a radius 9 fillet between lines L1 and L2 and join the ends of L1 and L2 to the
fillet.
19/08/1999

3. GEOMETRY FILLET LINE LNEW L1 L2 9 8
Create a radius 9 fillet called LNEW between lines L1 and L2 with 8 divisions.
4. GEOMETRY FILLET LINE LNEW L1 L2 9 M 8 P3
Create a radius 9 fillet called LNEW between lines L1 and L2 with 8 divisions in the
region defined by point P3 and join the nearest ends of L1 and L2 to the fillet.
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY LINES' , section 2.11.1, page 256

ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY LINES' , section 2.18.9, page 516
Figure 2.69: A typical filleting application
19/08/1999
189
190
GEOMETRY
FLIP
Reverse the local Z-axis of a surface
2.8.4 GEOMETRY FLIP part/ALL

or:
... CONSISTENT senam [snam]
or:
... FOCAL senam [snam] [pnam]
This command is used to reverse the direction of the local Z-axis of a surface or a group
of surfaces. This is particularly important for pressure loading or situations where surfaces
surfaces need to be oriented consistently. Where necessary, this enables the local Z-axis of
the elements generated on the surface(s) to be `flipped' in order to be consistent with the
local Z-axis of elements generated on other surfaces.
The effect of the command is to change the order of the lines that define a surface. In the
case of a three- or four-sided surface, line 1 and line 3 are swapped in the surface definition.
This gives the local axis system a rotation of 180 degrees about the local X-axis. In the case
of a region, the sense of the outer loop (defined by the first set in the region definition) is
reversed. Thus, under a flip, clockwise becomes anti-clockwise and vice versa.
part
ALL
senam
snam
pnam
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
name of an existing surface or set of surfaces to be flipped.

/PICK-S and a cursor hit to select an existing surface to be flipped.
All surfaces in the current model will be flipped.
name of a set of surfaces (in the case of CONSISTENT or
FOCAL mode).
name of an optional reference surface (in the case of CONSISTENT or
FOCAL mode).
name of an optional user-specified focal point (in the case of FOCAL mode).
A group of surfaces may be flipped in normal, consistent or focal mode.

Normal mode
When GEOMETRY FLIP is used without the CONSISTENT or FOCAL keywords, the
command is assumed to be working in normal mode. In normal mode, the local Z-direction
for each surface is flipped, regardless of its topological or geometrical status in relation to
other surfaces.
Consistent mode
Use of the keyword CONSISTENT indicates that the surfaces will be flipped in consistent
mode.
In consistent mode, the surfaces within a set are selectively flipped such that the normals
of topologically connected surfaces within that set are aligned in a consistent manner. The
next two figures demonstrate a consistent flip. The first depicts a set of surfaces whose normals are aligned inconsistently. The second figure demonstrates the result of GEOMETRY
FLIP CONSISTENT on the same set of surfaces.
19/08/1999
Figure 2.70: A set of inconsistently aligned surfaces, prior to a flip
Figure 2.71: A set of consistently aligned surfaces, after a flip

Topological information only is used to assess whether two surfaces have their normals
aligned consistently. The angles between surfaces are immaterial, only the order of the
lines that define the outer, bounding loop of each surface is taken into account. For two
adjacent surfaces to have consistent normals, their common (or shared) line must be used
such that its use in the definition of one surface is opposite (in sense) to its use in the
definition of the other surface. For a well defined shell of surfaces (in which an outside
and an inside exists), the effect of GEOMETRY FLIP CONSISTENT will be to orient the
surfaces such that their normals either (i) all point outwards, or (ii) all point inwards with
respect to the inside of the shell.
A reference surface may be specified optionally in order to select a reference normal that
defines a sense of alignment. For a well defined shell of surfaces, a reference normal may
be used to specify whether the surfaces should be aligned in an inward or an outward
sense. In general, the specification of a reference surface will ensure that the normals of all
surfaces that are topologically connected to the reference surface are aligned consistently
with the normal of the reference surface. The reference surface itself is never flipped. If no
reference surface is specified, then the first surface in the set is taken as a default reference
surface.
Note 1: Use of reference surface
If a reference surface is specified as part of a CONSISTENT flip, then only those
surfaces that are topologically connected to that surface will be flipped. If the
reference surface is not contained in the specified set, then a warning message
will notify the user of this, and no surfaces will be flipped.
Note 2: Scope of sets that can be consistently flipped
There exist sets of surfaces for which it is not possible to perform a consistent
flip and subsequently obtain predictable results. This applies in particular to the
case in which a line is referred to by three or more surfaces from the specified
19/08/1999
191
192

set. In this instance, the concept of topological consistent normals becomes
ambiguous, and the user is notified that a flip will not take place.
Note 3: Orientability
Sets of surfaces that constitute definitions of objects that are not properly orientable (such as Klein bottles and Mobius strips) cannot be flipped consistently.
If a consistent flip is shown to be impossible, then the user will be notified of
this.
Note 4: Holes
For the pruposes of GEOMETRY FLIP CONSISTENT, surfaces that are attached to the lines that define the hole(s) in a region are not considered to be
topologically attached to the lines that define the outer boundary of the region.
Focal mode
Use of the keyword FOCAL indicates that the surfaces will be flipped in focal mode.
In focal mode, the surfaces within a set are selectively flipped such that the normal of each
surface is aligned with a direction defined by the surface's ' focal vector' , (defined later).
Compared to consistent mode, the sense of alignment (or otherwise) is determined entirely
by geometric information. In general, the result of a focal flip on a set of surfaces is to
redefine surfaces, where necessary, such that all the normals of surfaces in the set are either
(i) pointing away from a focal point, or (ii) pointing towards a focal point.
The focal technique involves the specification (directly or indirectly) of a focal point for the
set in question. The focal point may be defined explicitly by the user as a point name, or
specified indirectly (the default) as the centroid of the set. A focal vector is then associated
with each surface in the set. The focal vector is taken from the set's focal point to the
centroid of the surface in question. For each surface, a sense of alignment can then be
determined by assessing the direction of the surface's normal against its focal vector.
Under a focal flip, a surface is flipped if its sense of alignment is opposite to the sense of
alignment of a reference surface. The user may explicitly specify the reference surface,
otherwise the reference surface is taken as the first surface in the set.
Note 1: Indeterminate surfaces in focal mode
Under certain circumstances, the alignment and location of the reference surface
with respect to the focal point may cause indeterminacy. This is the case where
the focal vector is perpendicular to the surface normal, and where the centroid
of a surface coincides with the focal point. In these cases, no flip is undertaken
and a warning message is issued. Non-reference surfaces that are indeterminate
will not be flipped.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY FLIP'
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY FLIP S23
Flips the definition (and thus local axis system) of surface S23.
2. GEOMETRY FLIP ALL
Flip the definition of all the surfaces in the current model.
3. GEOMETRY FLIP SE4
Flip the definition of all the surfaces in the set SE4.
19/08/1999

4. GEOMETRY FLIP CONSISTENT SE13
Flip any surface in SE13 that is topologically connected to the first surface in SE13,
such that its normal is topologically consistent with that of the first surface.
5. GEOMETRY FLIP CONSISTENT SE4 S13
Flip any surface in SE4 that is topologically connected to the surface S13, such that
its normal is topologically consistent with that of S13.
6. GEOMETRY FLIP FOCAL SE13
Flip any surface in SE13 whose normal is not aligned with a focal vector taken from
the centroid of the set to the centroid of the surface in question.
7. GEOMETRY FLIP FOCAL SE13 P2
Flip any surface in SE13 whose sense of alignment is opposite to that of the first
surface in the set. Use the point P2 as the focal point.
8. GEOMETRY FLIP FOCAL SE13 S7
Flip any surface in SE13 whose sense of alignment is opposite to that of surface S7.
The focal point is the centroid of SE13.
9. GEOMETRY FLIP FOCAL SE13 S7 P4
Flip any surface in SE13 whose sense of alignment is opposite to that of surface S7.
The focal point is located at point P4.
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY NORMALS' , section 2.11.1, page 256

`LABEL GEOMETRY AXES' , section 2.11.1, page 256
`LABEL MESH AXES' , section 2.11.2, page 258
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY SURFACE' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
193
194
GEOMETRY
LCMB
Specify a combined line
2.8.5 GEOMETRY LCMB lnam lnam1 lnam2 [lnam3] [lnam4]

This command is used to define a line as a combination of up to 4 existing lines.
lnam
lnamn
name for the combined line, which is used for later references to it,
for example when a surface is defined.
names of the existing basic lines that form the combined line.
The `GEOMETRY LCMB' command is used to define or change a combined line which
consists of two, three or four basic lines, defined previously with the `GEOMETRY LINE'
command. This concept is of great value for the definition of natural sides for surfaces.
Observe that the basic lines must be given in consecutive order and be connected by common points.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY LCMB'
Note 1: Potential problem
Users should exercise caution when sweeping combined lines as it is possible
to create discontinuities between adjacent surfaces depending on how the combined line is used. Currently there is not a combined surface equivalent to combined lines.
Usually such model discontinuities can be removed with `CONSTRUCT MERGE'
or `MESH MERGE' .
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LCMB LC1 L1 L2
Creates a combined line LC1 from two existing lines L1 and L2 which are joined at
a point.
2. GEOMETRY LCMB LC2 L1 L2 L3
Creates a combined line LC2 from three existing lines L1, L2, and L3 which are
joined at two points.
19/08/1999
195
GEOMETRY
LINE
Define a line
2.8.6 GEOMETRY LINE Control

This command is used to define new lines or to redefine existing lines. If an existing line is
redefined then the position of any existing parts whose definition depends on the line will
change automatically. The use of the commands ÀRC' , ÌNTERSECT' , ÈLEMENTS' ,
`NODES' , `SPLINE' , and `STRAIGHT' is optional (except where cursor picking is used).
The command processor is able to determine which option is required from the additional
parameters which follow. Once a line has been defined using one of these commands, the
command processor assumes that further lines are to be entered and remains at the `GEOMETRY LINE' level. From this level, further lines may be defined or a different primary
command may be selected.
Lines may also be generated automatically when the `GEOMETRY SWEEP' command is
used to sweep one or more points.
When adjacent geometric parts are created separately, and need to be joined, it may be
necessary to use the `MESHING MERGE' command to ensure that the final mesh is continuous across the boundary.
`GEOMETRY LINE' has the following sub-commands:
2.8.6.1
2.8.6.2
GEOMETRY LINE ANGLE

GEOMETRY LINE ARC
2.8.6.3
2.8.6.4
2.8.6.5
2.8.6.6
2.8.6.7
2.8.6.8
2.8.6.9
2.8.6.10
2.8.6.11
GEOMETRY LINE CIRCLE

GEOMETRY LINE CURVE
GEOMETRY LINE ELEMENTS
GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT
GEOMETRY LINE NODES
GEOMETRY LINE PARALLEL
GEOMETRY LINE PERPENDIC
GEOMETRY LINE SPLINE
GEOMETRY LINE STRAIGHT
19/08/1999
Line at a given angle to an existing line

Circular arc less than 180 degrees or
ellipse lines
Creates arcs to make a circle
Creates a NURB curve line
Line of manually defined elements
Line at Intersection of two shapes
Polyline of manually defined nodes
Parallel copy of an existing line
Perpendicular line to an existing line
Spline curve
Straight line
196
GEOMETRY LINE
ANGLE
Create a line at an angle to an existing line
2.8.6.1 GEOMETRY LINE ANGLE [new l] old l angle start p dirn [length] [refcs]
[csname] [div]
The effect of this command is to make a new line that is at a specified angle to an existing
line. It works on straight lines only.
new l
old l
angle
start p
=
=
=
=
dirn
length
refcs
csname
div
name of the line to be created.

name of an existing line.
angle in degrees between the old line and the new line.
name of an existing point that the new line will start from. It does not have to
be one of the points defining òld l' .
Direction for the new line, defined using either a guide point or by specifying
a general plane. When a guide point is given the new line is created, starting
at `start p` in the direction of the guide point. If, however, XY, YZ or ZX is
used for `direction' then the new line will lie in a plane parallel to the specified
plane in either the current coordinate system or the coordinate system specified
by `csname' .
The length of the new line. If `dirn' above has been specified using a named
plane, `length' is the length of the line in that plane. Otherwise if the
direction has been specified using a guide point, the distance is measured from the
start point towards the guide point. Finally, if a guide point is used but no
distance is given then the length is the distance from the start point to the
guide point.
Reference coordinate system (either GLOBAL or LOCAL) for interpretation
of the direction specified above. If specified this will override the currently
active coordinate system. If `LOCAL' is
specified then the name of an existing local coordinate system
must be given.
name of an existing local coordinate system previously defined using
`CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' . It can only be a rectangular coordinate system.
the number of divisions to be created along the line. The default is set with
`MESHING DIVISIONS DEFAULT' ; the initial value is 4.
If a coordinate system direction is specified then this will be interpreted in the currently
active coordinate system unless the user gives `GLOBAL' or `LOCAL' with an existing
coordinate system name. Local coordinate systems can be defined using the command
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE ANGLE L10 23.9 P45 P10
Will create a line (named automatically) at an angle of 23.9 degrees to line L10, from
P45 in the general direction of P10. The length of the line is the distance from P45
to P10.
19/08/1999

2. GEOMETRY LINE ANGLE LANG23 L23 22.5 P35 XY 1.293
Will create a new line called LANG23 at an angle of 22.5 degrees to L23, starting
at P35 with a length of 1.293 in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current
coordinate system.
3. GEOMETRY LINE ANGLE L11 60 P43 ZX 3.95 LOCAL RECT11 5
Will create a line at an angle of 60 degrees to L11 starting at P43. The new line will
line in a plane parallel to the ZX plane of the local coordinate system RECT11; the
line will be 3.95 units long and have five divisions.
19/08/1999
197
198
GEOMETRY LINE
ARC
Define an arc line
2.8.6.2 GEOMETRY LINE ARC [lnam] pstart pend pcentre [paxis] [divn]
This command is used to define an arc of less than 180 degrees via three points
or an ellipse via four points.
lnam
pstart
pend
pcentre
paxis
=
=
=
=
=
divn
name of the line, used for later references to the line.

name of a point which defines the start point of the arc.
name of a point which defines the end point of the arc.
name of a point which is the centre of the arc.
name of the point which defines one axis of an ellipse. This point can be one
of the end points of the ellipse. Generally the shortest part of an ellipse will
be created; however, in situations where neither end point lies along the axis
defined by ' pcentre' to ' paxis' , the direction of the axis can be used to control
which part of the ellipse is created. In order to achieve this, the axis (or an
extension of the axis) should intersect the projected arc. This is illustrated in
the examples below. In general, the segment of the ellipse that is defined may
be toggled by reversing the direction of the axis.
integer which specifies how many nodes are to be placed along the line. If
omitted a default of four divisions (ie Five nodes) is assumed. The default
number of divisions can be reset using the command
Note 1: Deletion of the centre point

If the centre is deleted for any reason then the line will be changed to a straight
line.
Note 2: Unequal radii
If the distance between the start point and centre point and the end point and
centre point of a three point arc definition is not the same then a curve with a
radius which varies linearly with angle will be created.
Note 3: Ambiguous ellipses
In situations where the ellipse definition is ambiguous or invalid a straight line
is generated.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY LINE'
19/08/1999
199
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE ARC C1 P1 P2 P3
Defines a line named C1 from P1 to P2 with centre P3.
P2
P5
P1
Figure 2.72: Definition of an arc

2. GEOMETRY LINE ARC ELL1 P2 P7 P1 P3
Defines an ellipse named ELL1 from P2 to P7 with a centre at P1 and one of the axes
defined by P3.
P7
P3
P2
P1
Figure 2.73: Definition of an ellipse

3. GEOMETRY LINE ARC ELL2 P2 P7 P1 P3
Defines an ellipse named ELL2 from P2 to P7 with a centre at P1 and one of the axes
defined by P3.
P7
P2
P1
P3
Figure 2.74: Alternative definition of an ellipse
See Also:

19/08/1999
200
GEOMETRY LINE
CIRCLE
Create a circle
2.8.6.3 GEOMETRY LINE CIRCLE pnam radius [plane]

or:
... pnam1 pnam2 pnam3
This command is used to create circles. In one form four 90 degree arcs of given radius
with a centre at the specified point are created; the second form creates a circle formed of
arcs connected to the three points.
pnam
radius
plane
pnam1
pnam2
pnam3
=
=
=
=
=
=
name of a point which defines the centre of the circle.

radius of circle.
plane in which the circle is to be created
name of first point through which the circle passes.
name of second point through which the circle passes.
name of third point through which the circle passes.
Where ' plane' can be any of the following:

plane
none
SCREEN
XY [' csname' ]
YZ [' csname' ]
ZX [' csname' ]
'shape'
' normal dir' 'split dir'
description
The circle will be in a plane parallel to the global XY plane
The circle will be in a plane parallel to the screen
The circle will be in a plane parallel to the plane
specified; if a coordinate system name is given the plane will
be in that local system, otherwise the plane will be global
The name of an existing FEMGEN plane shape
The definition of the normal to the circle and the location of a
point defining the arcs
By default each arc that is created will have four divisions (ie five nodes). The default
number of divisions can be reset using the command `MESHING DIVISION DEFAULT' .
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE CIRCLE P51 1.23
Creates four 90 degree arcs in a plane parallel to the global XY plane centred on p51
with a radius of 1.23
2. GEOMETRY LINE CIRCLE P51 1.23 ZX LOCAL1
Creates four 90 degree arcs centred on P51 with a radius of 1.23 in a plane parallel
to the ZX plane of the local coordinate system ' LOCAL1' .
3. GEOMETRY LINE CIRCLE PCENTRE .5534 0 1 0 .707 0 .707
Creates four 90 degree arcs centred on PCENTRE with a radius of .5534 in a plane
normal to the (0 1 0) direction, ie y-direction, with the end points of the arcs being
created at 90 degrees from the starting position defined by the vector (.707 0 .707) ie
at 45 degrees to the X axis.
19/08/1999

4. GEOMETRY LINE CIRCLE P23 P36 P110
Creates a series of arcs from a circle passing through the specified points. The points
given are used in the arc definitions an additional point may also be generated as any
arc over 170 degrees will be split into two.
See Also:

19/08/1999
201
202
GEOMETRY LINE
CURVE
Create a line based on a NURB curve
2.8.6.4 GEOMETRY LINE CURVE [lnam] pnam1 pnam2 shape [divn] [parm1 [parm2][parm3]]
lnam
pnam1
pnam2
shape
divn
parm1
parm2
parm3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

start point of line.
end point of line.
Underlying FEMGEN shape for the NURB curve.
Number of divisions on the line. If not specified the default is used.
Parametric position of the start point of the line on the NURB curve.
Parametric position of the end point of the line on the NURB curve.
Value used (when there are two possible parts of an curve) to indicate
which part of the curve is to be used.
This command allows a line to be defined using all or part of a NURB curve as its underlying shape. This command is primarily provided to support the archiving of entities created
via the CAD interfaces.
If the parametric positions of the start and end points are not given then FEMGEN will
calculate the values.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT SHAPE CURVE NURB' , section 2.3.9.3, page 102

`CONSTRUCT SHAPE SURFACE NURB' , section 2.3.9.8, page 111
19/08/1999
203
GEOMETRY LINE
ELEMENTS
Define a line of beam elements
2.8.6.5 GEOMETRY LINE ELEMENTS lnam [elty]

This command is used to define a line from elements directly.
lnam
elty
=
=
name of the line, used for later references to the line, for example for plotting.
either BE2 or BE3
FEMGEN normally creates nodes and beam elements automatically from the line definitions entered by the user (or from a CAD system). When a higher degree of control over
element definitions is required, beam elements may be defined manually.
The `GEOMETRY LINE ELEMENTS' command is used to associate a line name and
element type to the elements manually defined in subsequent `MESHING ELEMENT'
commands.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE ELEMENTS LM1
Create a line LM1 which will be used to create manually defined BE2 elements.
See Also:

19/08/1999
204
GEOMETRY LINE
INTERSECT
Definition of an intersection line
2.8.6.6 GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT [lnam] shp1 shp2 [[+/-/ ] shpn...] [divn]
or:
... [lnam] pnm1 pnm2 pnm3 shp1 shp2 [divn]
The two forms of this command allow intersection lines to be created from FEMGEN
analytical shapes either directly or by using existing FEMGEN points to define the extent
of the intersection curve.
lnam
shp1, shp2
=
=
shpn
pnm1
pnm2
pnm3
=
=
=
divn
name of the first line that is created, used for later references to the line.
names of two analytical shapes (ie plane, cylinder, cone or sphere) on which
the intersection line(s) will lie.
names of additional shapes used to limit the extent of the intersection line.
If no additonal shapes are given then the full intersection curve between the
two shapes is generated and divided into a suitable number of FEMGEN
lines.
name of a point which defines the start point of the line.
name of a point which defines the end point of the line.
name of a point which specifies which of the two possible curves that is
intended. The point need not lie on the curve but should be near the middle
of the curve.
omitted a default of four divisions (ie Five nodes) is assumed. The default
number of divisions can be reset using the command
With the first form of this command it is possible to use additional shapes to control the
extent of the intersection that is created by using the ' +' character to select the positive side
of a plane or inside of any other shape and ' -' to select the negative side of a plane or the
outside of any other shape (except for a box shape). If ' +/-' is not specified then points on
the intersection line are created where the additional shape(s) meet the two main shapes.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT CYL1 CYL2
Create a series of intersection lines which lie on the intersection curve between
shapes CYL1 and CYL2. Note that both the possible intersections are considered.
Figure 2.75: Definition of intersection lines directly from two shapes

2. GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT CYL1 CYL2 +PLY0
shapes CYL1 and CYL2 and are on the positive side of the plane PLY0.
Figure 2.76: Definition of intersection lines directly from two shapes and one additional
shape
19/08/1999
205
206

3. GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT CYL1 CYL2 +PLY0 +PLZ0
shapes CYL1 and CYL2 and are on the positive side of the plane PLY0 and the
plane PLZ0.
Figure 2.77: Definition of intersection lines directly from two shapes and two additional
shapes
4. GEOMETRY LINE INTERSECT LC1 P1 P2 P3 SH1 SH2
Create a line LC1 with start point P1, end point P2, which lies on the intersection
curve between shapes SH1 and SH2 which is nearest to point P3, with the default
number of divisions.
SH2
P2
P1
P3
SH1
Figure 2.78: Definition of an intersection line from three points and two shapes
See Also:

19/08/1999
207
GEOMETRY LINE
NODES
Definition of a polyline from manually defined nodes
2.8.6.7 GEOMETRY LINE NODES [lnam] pnam1 pnam2 nono1 nono2

This command is used to define a polyline from manually defined nodes .
lnam
pnam1
pnam2
nono1
nono2
=
=
=
=
=

the number of the first node of a consecutive series of nodes on the line.
the number of the last node on the line.
P2
P1
2
Figure 2.79: Definition of a line from nodes

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE NODES LS1 P1 P2 1 4
Defines a line in terms of actual node positions.
See Also:

19/08/1999
208
GEOMETRY LINE
PARALLEL
Make a parallel copy of an existing line
2.8.6.8 GEOMETRY LINE PARALLEL [new l] old l dirn [dist] [refcs] [csname]
[div]
This command is used to create a parallel copy of an existing line. It will only work on
straight lines.
new l
old l
dirn
=
=
=
dist
refcs
csname
div

name of the old line to be copied.
Direction of the offset between the old line and the new line. Can be specified
either by use of a guide point or by use of X or Y or Z to refer to an existing
rectangular coordinate system.
The distance between the ' old line' and the ' new line' . If `dirn' above has
been specified using a named axis direction, `dist' is the translation along that
axis. Otherwise if the direction has been specified using a guide point, the
distance given is the perpendicular distance between the two lines. If a guide
point is used but no distance is given then the perpendicular distance from the
line to the guide point is used.
of the direction specified above. This will override the currently active
coordinate system. If `LOCAL' is specified then the name of an existing local
coordinate system must be given.
the number of divisions to be created along the line. The default is set
by `MESHING DIVISION DEFAULT' ; the initial value is 4.
The line that is created will have the same length as the old line. The new line will lie in the
plane containing the old line and the guide point (if used), or if an axis direction is given
the plane is defined by the old line and the axis vector.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE PARALLEL L10 P45 23
Will create a line (named automatically) parallel to line L10 in a direction towards
point P45. The perpendicular distance between the two lines will be 23.
2. GEOMETRY LINE PARALLEL LPAR23 L23 X 1.293
Will create a new line called LPAR23 parallel to L23, the distance between them is
1.293 in the X axis of the current coordinate system.
3. GEOMETRY LINE PARALLEL L11 Z -3.95 LOCAL RECT11 5
Will create a line parallel to L11 offset by 3.95 in the negative Z direction of coordinate system RECT11. This will override the current coordinate system. The new
line will have five divisions.
19/08/1999
209
GEOMETRY LINE
PERPENDIC
Create a line perpendicular to an existing line
2.8.6.9 GEOMETRY LINE PERPENDIC [new l] old l start p dirn [length] [refcs]
[csname] [div]
This command will make a new line that is perpendicular to an existing line. It only works
with straight lines.
new l
old l
start p
=
=
=
dirn
length
refcs
csname
div

name of an existing line.
name of an existing point that the new line will start from. It does not have to
be one of the points defining òld l' .
Direction for the perpendicular line, defined using either a guide point or by
specifying a general plane. When a guide point is given the new line is created
perpendicular to the old line and in the plane containing the guide point and the
old line. If, however, XY, YZ or ZX is used for `direction' then the new line
will lie in a plane parallel to the specified plane in either the current coordinate
system or the coordinate system specified by `csname' .
The length of the new line. If `dirn' above has been specified using a named
plane, the length is the perpendicular distance in that plane. Otherwise if
the direction has been specified using a guide point, the distance is the perpendicular
distance from the old line towards the guide point. Finally, if a guide point
is used but no distance is given then the length is the perpendicular distance
from the old line to the guide point.
of the direction specified above. If specified this will override the currently
active coordinate system. If `LOCAL' is specified then the name of an existing
local coordinate system must be given.
the number of divisions to be created along the line. The default is set
with `MESHING DIVISIONS DEFAULT' ; the initial value is 4.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE PERPENDIC L10 P45 P10 23
Will create a line (named automatically) perpendicular to line L10, starting at P45 in
a direction towards point P10. The length of the line will be 23.
2. GEOMETRY LINE PERPENDIC LPERP23 L23 P35 XY 1.293
Will create a new line called LPERP23 perpendicular to L23, starting at P35, the new
line will be 1.293 units long and be in a XY parallel to the current coordinate system.
19/08/1999
210

3. GEOMETRY LINE PERPENDIC L11 P43 ZX 3.95 LOCAL RECT11 5
Will create a line perpendicular to L11 starting at P43. The new line will line in a
plane parallel to the ZX plane of the coordinate system RECT11; the line will be
3.95 units long and have five divisions.
19/08/1999
211
GEOMETRY LINE
SPLINE
Definition of a spline curve line from a set of points
2.8.6.10 GEOMETRY LINE SPLINE [lnam] pnam1 pnam2 senm [divn]

This command is used to define a spline curve line from a set of points.
lnam
pnam1
pnam2
senm
=
=
=
divn
name of the line, used for later references to the line, for example when
a surface is defined.
name of the start point of the line in the set.
name of the end point of the line in the set.
name of a set containing the start and end points, plus mid points and any
other points that are to be used in the evaluation of the spline.
omitted the default as set with `MESHING DIVISION DEFAULT' is used.
The points are used in the order that they appear in the set. The start and end points
must belong to the set, but need not be the first and last points in the set. The order in
which points are stored in the set may be found using the command ÙTILITY TABULATE
GEOMETRY POINTS senm' . All the points in the set are used in the calculation of the
spline parameters. It is recommended that a separate set containing points is created for
each spline that is to be defined (unless two adjacent splines are required to have continuity
of slope). The maximum number of points allowed in a set which is used in the definition
of a spline is 99. Exceeding this limit will cause the message E0014 : Too many
points in spline *** to be issued (even though the spline itself may not directly
refer to the maximum number of points). The line referred to in the message will then be
seen as a straight line from the start point to the end point.
P2
P5
P3
P1
P6
P4
Figure 2.80: Definition of a spline line

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE SPLINE LS1 P1 P6 SE1
Creates a spline line LS1 starting at point P1, ending at point P6, where start, mid
and end points are defined in set SE1.
See Also:

19/08/1999
212
GEOMETRY LINE
STRAIGHT
Definition of a straight line
2.8.6.11 GEOMETRY LINE STRAIGHT [lnam] pnam1 pnam2 [divn]

This command defines a straight line using two points.
lnam
pnam1
pnam2
divn
=
=
=
=

integer which specifies how many nodes are to be placed along the line.
If omitted a default of four divisions (ie Five nodes) is assumed.
The default number of divisions can be reset using the command
P1
P2
Figure 2.81: Definition of a straight line

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY LINE STRAIGHT L1 P1 P2
Creates a straight line L1 with end points P1 and P2, with the default number of
divisions.
2. GEOMETRY LINE STRAIGHT L1 P1 P2 -306
Creates a straight line L1 with end points P1 and P2, with 6 divisions biased towards
P1. The ratio of the lengths of the last division to the first division is 3, see command
`MESHING DIVISION' for more information on this.
See Also:

19/08/1999
213
GEOMETRY
MOVE
Move a part or a set
2.8.7 GEOMETRY MOVE part trkey [definition]

or:
... ONTO shape [direction]
or:
... X/Y/Z coord [refcs] [csname]
This command can work in three ways:
1. The command is used to move the points defining existing parts by a transformation.
The transformation can be separately defined or it can be defined as part of this
command.
2. The command is used to move the points defining existing parts onto a FEMGEN
shape.
3. The command is used to give the points defining existing parts a specific coordinate
value in an axis system.
Selection of the geometry to be moved is either by keyboard or cursor.
part
shape
direction
=
=
coord
refcs
=
=
csname
name of a point, line, surface, body, or set that will be moved by transforming
it according to `trkey' (see below).
name of a previously defined FEMGEN shape.
Direction in which points are to be moved onto the shape, can be `NORMAL' to
the shape (the default), normal to the `SCREEN' or defined by the x, y, z
components of a direction vector.
a coordinate value
reference coordinate system, either `GLOBAL' or `LOCAL' . If `LOCAL' is
used then the name of the coordinate system must be given.
name of a previously defined local rectangular coordinate system.
trkey
definition
TRANSLATE

Two point mirror definition
Two point scale definition with a scaling factor plus an
Name of transform previously defined with command
`CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM'
ROTATE
MIRROR
SCALE
transform name
The command transforms all points associated with `part' , and hence moves any lines,
surfaces, or bodies defined using those points. All parts that will be affected by the move
will be drawn in red and the user is asked for confirmation before the parts are moved.
ÙTILITY SETUP CONFIRM' can be used to inhibit the need for confirmation, althougn
this is not recommended.
The first form of the command is useful for assembling different components of a structure
which have been developed separately. In this case, the command `MESHING MERGE'
would be needed to remove discontinuities at the interfaces between components.
19/08/1999
214

For a detailed description of the definitions of the four transforms the user is referred to the
command `CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' .
Although translations may be performed using cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems
it is recommended that only rectangular systems are used.
The second form of the command is useful for ensuring that the points defining the given
geometry lie on a shape. It can also be useful for projecting points onto a shape as an aid to
creating intersection geometry. Note that all the points used in the definition of the ' part' ,
including arc centres, will be moved.
The third form is used to ensure that points have the same coordinate.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY MOVE'
Note 1: Moving points with dependency
Any point that has a dependency associated with it will have that dependency
removed when moved with this command.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY MOVE S1 ROT1
Move all points and lines associated with surface S1 using transformation ROT1.
2. GEOMETRY MOVE SET1 TR1
Move all the points defining the lines, surfaces and bodies within set SET1 using
transformation TR1.
3. GEOMETRY MOVE SET1 ROTATE PAXIS1 PAXIS2 PSTART P43
Rotate all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 about an axis through points
PAXIS1 and PAXIS2 by an angle defined by point PSTART to point P43.
4. GEOMETRY MOVE SET1 TRANSLATE 10 0 12 GLOBAL
Translate all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 by x = 10, y = 0, z = 12 in
the global current coordinate system, regardless of the currently active coordinate
system.
5. GEOMETRY MOVE SET1 TRANSLATE 1.05 2.392 0 RECT1
Translate all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 by x = 1.05, y = 2.392, z = 0
in the previously defined coordinate system RECT1.
6. GEOMETRY MOVE SIDE ONTO TUBE
Translate all the points defining parts in the set SIDE to lie on the shape called TUBE.
The points are moved in a direction normal to the shape.
7. GEOMETRY MOVE SIDE ONTO TUBE 0 1 0
Translate all the points defining parts in the set SIDE in the global Y direction to lie
on the shape called TUBE.
8. GEOMETRY MOVE S10 Y 10.5
Move all the points defining S10 to have a global Y coordinate of 10.5
9. GEOMETRY MOVE LUG Z 25.3 LOCAL1
Move all the points defining LUG to have a Z coordinate of 25.3 in the local system
LOCAL1.
19/08/1999

See Also:
`CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' , section 2.3.12, page 126.

`MESHING MERGE' , section 2.12.5, page 280
page 516
19/08/1999
215
216
GEOMETRY
POINT
Specify a point
2.8.8 GEOMETRY POINT Control

This command is used to define new points or to redefine existing points. If an existing
point is redefined then the position of any existing parts whose definition depends on the
point will change automatically.
`GEOMETRY POINT' has the following sub-commands:
2.8.8.1
2.8.8.2
2.8.8.3
GEOMETRY POINT AT-NODE

GEOMETRY POINT COORD
GEOMETRY POINT INTERSECT
2.8.8.4
GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE
2.8.8.5
GEOMETRY POINT TRANSFORM
Create a point at a node.

Explicit point definition.
Position an existing point onto an
analytical shape, or onto the
intersection of two or three
analytical shapes or onto the
intersection of two lines.
Define a point as a ratio on an
existing line or between
existing points.
Define a point as a transformation
of an existing point.
The use of the command words ÀT-NODE' , `COORD' , ÌNTERSECT' , ÒNLINE' and
`TRANSFORM' is optional. The command processor is able to determine which option
is required from the additional parameters which follow. Once a point has been defined
using one of these commands, the command processor assumes that further points are to
be entered and remains at the `GEOMETRY POINT' level. From this level, further points
may be defined or a different primary command may be selected.
Note 1: In-line editing of point definitions
The commands `GEOMETRY point name /EDIT' and `GEOMETRY /PICKP /EDIT' will cause up to 80 characters from the definition of the specified or
picked point to be loaded into the input buffer for in-line editing.
19/08/1999
217
GEOMETRY POINT
AT-NODE
Define a point at a node
2.8.8.1 GEOMETRY POINT AT-NODE [pnam] node

This command is used to create a new point, or move an existing point, to the position of
an existing node.
pnam1
node
=
=
=
the name of a new point to be created or an existing point to be moved.

If no name is given a new point name will be automatically generated.
/PICK and a cursor hit to select an existing point to be moved.
the name of an existing node at which the point is to be positioned.
/PICK and a cursor hit to select an existing node at which the point is
to be positioned.
Although the main purpose of this command is to specify the position of a point, it may
also be used, for example, to attach a point to a node for the purpose of applying loads or
constraints.
If the point is part of the meshed geometry a node will be generated at the point in the
usual way. Otherwise, note that no permanent connection is formed between the point and
the node and that if the model is re-meshed the connection between point and node is lost.
Thus, in this case, if the model is re-meshed it will be necessary to either re-attach the point
to the node by using the `GEOMETRY POINT AT-NODE' command again or by using the
`MESHING MERGE' command to connect the point to another geometric part on which
the node will be generated.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY POINT AT-NODE P1 613
If P1 is a new point then it is created at the position of node 613. If P1 is an existing
point then it is moved to the position of node 613.
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY POINTS' , section 2.11.1, page 256

ÙTILITY DELETE POINTS' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY POINTS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
218
GEOMETRY POINT
COORD
Explicit definition of a point
2.8.8.2 GEOMETRY POINT COORD [pnam] coor [refcs] [csname] [depn]

This command is used to explicitly define the coordinates of a point .
pnam
coor
=
=
=
refcs
=
=
csname
depn
name of new point, used at later references to the point, for example
when a line is defined.
name of existing point to be moved.
x, y and z-coordinates of the point. Each component of the coordinate
may be specified as a parameter name. The coordinate component
will then be dependent on the value of the parameter.
/CURSOR and a cursor hit to define the coordinates.
Reference axis type for interpretation of the coordinates, either
`GLOBAL' or `LOCAL' . This will override the currently active system.
If `LOCAL' is specified then the name of an existing local coordinate
system must be given. (Although just the name of the existing local
system can be given.)
Dependency control, either `DEPENDEN' or ÌNDEPEND' . The default
is INDEPENDENT unless a local system name is given, parameters are
used or DEPENDENT is specified. When a point is specified as being
ÌNDEPEND' the location of the point is converted into the global
system, it is unaffected by any subsequent changes to parameters or axes
systems.
If the point name is omitted, a new name will be automatically generated. When a sequence
of coordinates are being entered, a ' ,' can be used to repeat a component from the last
entered coordinate.
If axis type or local axis name is not specified then the coordinates are interpreted in the
current coordinate system as set by the command `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' .
When using the cursor to generate points, the x and y coordinates are determined from
the screen. The use of the `CONSTRUCT SPACE CURS-SHPE' command enables the z
coordinate to be projected onto a previously defined shape. Shapes may be defined using
the command `CONSTRUCT SHAPE' .
Return Level: `GEOMETRY POINT'
Note 1: Local systems and parameters
When a point is dependent on a local coordinate system and is defined using
parameters the parameters are interpreted relative to the local system.
If points are defined to be dependent on a local axis system then moving the
local axis system will move all the dependent points. It also possible to build up
a hierarchy of local coordinate systems.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY POINT COORD P1 0
Defines a point named P1 at x = 0, y = 0, z = 0
2. GEOMETRY POINT COORD P2 /CURSOR
Defines a point named P2 at a position defined using the cursor.
3. GEOMETRY POINT COORD CENT 1.5 0. 6.25
Defines a point named CENT at x = 1.5, y = 0, z = 6.25
4. GEOMETRY POINT COORD PNEW 1.5 PC1 PC2
Defines a point named PNEW at x = 1.5, y = parameter PC1, z = parameter PC2
5. GEOMETRY POINT COORD 12.3456 3.5
Defines a point (named automatically) at x = 12.3456, y = 3.5
6. GEOMETRY POINT COORD P1 0
P2 ,1
P3 1,
P4 ,0
Defines the points :
P1 at x = 0, y = 0, z = 0
P2 at x = 0, y = 1, z = 0
P3 at x = 1, y = 1, z = 0
P4 at x = 1, y = 0, z = 0
7. GEOMETRY POINT COORD 1.5 22.5 5.66 CYLIND1
Defines a point (named automatically) at r = 1.5, theta = 22.5, z = 5.66 relative to the
local cylindrical coordinate system CYLIND1 regardless of the current active coordinate system. The point that is created will be DEPENDENT on system CYLIND1
See Also:

19/08/1999
219
220
GEOMETRY POINT
INTERSECT
Position a point on the intersection of up to three shapes or two lines
2.8.8.3 GEOMETRY POINT INTERSECT pnam shnm1 [shnm2] [shnm3] or lnam1

lnam2
This command positions an existing point to be on the intersection of up to three shapes.
pnam
shnm
lnam
=
=
name of a point that has been defined earlier. The existing coordinates are used as a
first approximation. If the approximation is too bad, the ÌNTERSECT' command
may fail to calculate the correct coordinates of the point.
names of up to three shapes which define the coordinates of the point.
or names of up to two lines which define the coordinates of the point.
The position of the point will be dependent on the shapes referenced in the command. If
the definition of a referenced shape changes then the position of the point will also change.
P8
CYL2
PLN4
P7
CYL1
Figure 2.82: Definition of a point of intersection of three shapes

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY POINT INTERSECT P12 SHP4 SHP8 SHP9
Positions the point P12 at the intersection of the three shapes SHP4, SHP8 and SHP9.
2. GEOMETRY POINT INTERSECT P12 L1 L2
Positions the point P12 at the intersection of the two lines L1 and L2.
19/08/1999

See Also:

19/08/1999
221
222
GEOMETRY POINT
ONLINE
Define a point on a line or between two points
2.8.8.4 GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE [pnam] nam position [int][depn]

This command defines a point as a ratio along a line or between two existing points.
pnam
nam
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
position
=
=
int
depn
name of a new point.

name of an existing point to be moved.
name of an old line.
/PICK and a cursor hit to select the line.
The names of two reference points defining an existing or imaginary
straight line.
/PICK and two cursor hits selecting two points on an existing or
imaginary straight line.
name of an existing FEMGEN curve shape
relative position along the line (0.0 to 1.0), see note 1.
The relative position of the point along the line may be specified
as a real value or a parameter. If the relative position of the
point is specified as a parameter the point will be classified as dependent as
described below.
Integer value (1 or 2); used when a FEMGEN curve shape has two possible parts
to select which of the parts is to be used. Normally only used in FEMGEN
archive files.
dependency control, either `DEPENDENT' or ÌNDEPEND' (the default).
If `DEPENDENT' is specified then the position of the point created by the
`GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE' command will remain dependent on the
definition of the line or the positions of the two end points of the line
specified in the command. Thus if the line or the position of either end point
is subsequently redefined then the created point will be moved to maintain
its relative position. If ÌNDEPEND' is specified then the position of the
point created by the `GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE' command will be uneffected
by subsequent redefinitions of the originating line or its two end points.

Note 1: Positioning of the point
Position = 0.0 corresponds to the start point of the old line or first reference
point, and position = 1.0 corresponds to the end point of the old line or second
reference point. The position maybe specified outside this range in which case
the coordinate will be extrapolated.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE P7 L1 .5
Creates a point P7 half way along line L1.
19/08/1999

2. GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE P8 P1 P2 .25
Creates a point P8 a quarter of the distance between points P1 and P2.
3. GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE P8 P1 P2 PCCC
Creates a point P8 having its relative position between points P1 and P2 defined by
the parameter PCCC. Because PCCC is a parameter, P8 will remain dependent on
P1, P2 and PCCC, and be effected by any changes to the definition of P1, P2 or
PCCC.
4. GEOMETRY POINT ONLINE P7 L1 .5 DEPENDENT
Creates a point P7 half way along line L1. The position of the point P7 will remain
dependent on, and thus be effected by, any subsequent change to the definition of
line L1 or the position of its end points.
See Also:

19/08/1999
223
224
GEOMETRY POINT
TRANSFORM
Define a point as the transformation of an existing point
2.8.8.5 GEOMETRY POINT TRANSFORM [pnam1] pnam2 trnm [type][depn]

This command is used to create a new point, or move an existing point, by applying a
transformation to an existing point.
pnam1
pnam2
trnm
type
depn
=
=
=
the name of a new point to be created or an existing point to be moved. If no

name is given a new point name will be automatically generated.
the name of an existing point to which the transformation is applied in order
to define the position of a new point or the moved position of an existing
point. Note that pnam2 must be different to pnam1.
the name of the transformation to be used.
COPY or AXIS. Normally only used in FEMGEN archive files.
dependency control, either `DEPENDENT' or ÌNDEPEND' (the default).
If `DEPENDENT' is specified then the position of the point created by the
`GEOMETRY POINT TRANSFORM' command will remain dependent on
the transformation used in the command and the position of the originating
point. Thus if the transformation is subsequently redefined in any way (e.g.
by changing the co-ordinates of one of the reference points used in its
definition) or the position of the originating point is subsequently redefined
then the created point will be moved to maintain its relative position. If
ÌNDEPEND' is specified then the position of the point created by the
`GEOMETRY POINT TRANSFORM' command will be uneffected by subsequent
redefinitions of the transformation used or by changes to the position of the
originating point.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY POINT TRANSFORM P7 P88 TRN6
If P7 is a new point then point P7 is created by applying transformation TRN6 to
point P88. If P7 is an existing point then it is moved to the new position defined by
applying transformation TRN6 to point P88.
2. GEOMETRY POINT TRANSFORM P7 TR3
Creates a new point by applying transformation TR3 to point P7. The name of the
new point will be automatically generated.
See Also:
19/08/1999
225
GEOMETRY
SPLIT
Use the cursor to split a line
2.8.9 GEOMETRY SPLIT line name [point name] position on line OR

[point name] /CURSOR
This command is used to split a line into two using the cursor.
line name
point name
position on line
/CURSOR
=
=
the name of the line to be split. If not specified /CURSOR will

select the line.
a name for the point created when the line is split. If an old point
name is given this point will be moved to the newly defined
position.
a real number between 0 and 1 defining the position along
the line where it is to be split OR
a cursor hit to define the position.
a single cursor hit can define two actions. If the name of the line
to be split has not been given in the command, then the cursor
hit will select the line. The position of the cursor hit will also
define where a line is to be split unless the middle mouse button
is used to select the line, in which case the user can also specify
the postion on line. (See Note 1)
Note 1: Splitting definitions

The action of `GEOMETRY SPLIT' depends on the type of line being split.
Line Type
Comments
ARC and STRAIGHT
SPLINE
INTERSECT
The selected line will be split at the nearest

place to the cursor hit and a new point created.
point on the line that is defined in the spline
set.
node position on the line.
Note 2: Naming of Split Lines

If the line is not part of a surface definition, the line segment containing the first
point defined (in the original line definition ) is given the old line name. A new
line is generated for the other section.
If the line is part of a surface, both halves of the original line are given new
names. A line combination is defined with the original name and made up of the
two new lines.
Note 3: Unsplitable lines
Lines defined from elements or nodes cannot be split. Lines already in line
combinations can only be split if there are less than four lines in the combination.
This is because any new lines formed are added to a line combination.
19/08/1999
226

Note 4: Line divisions
The number of divisions/line is split as evenly as possible between the two new
lines. The total number of divisions will remain the same. For example, if a
line has 4 divisions and is split approximately half way along there will be two
divisions on each of the new lines. If the same line was split about three quarters
of the way along, the new lines would have one division and three divisions.
See Also:

19/08/1999
227
GEOMETRY
SURFACE
Define a surface
2.8.10 GEOMETRY SURFACE Control

This command is used to define new surfaces or to redefine existing surfaces. If an existing
surface is redefined then the position of any existing parts whose definition depends on the
surface will change automatically. The use of the commands ÈLEMENTS' , `3POINTS' ,
`4POINTS' , `3SIDES' , `4SIDES' , and `SIDE-PNT' is optional (except where defining
points or lines are to be picked with the cursor). The command processor is able to determine which option is required from the additional parameters which follow. Once a surface
has been defined using one of these commands, the command processor assumes that further surfaces are to be entered and remains at the `GEOMETRY SURFACE' level. From
this level, further surfaces may be defined or a different primary command may be selected.
Surfaces may also be generated automatically when the `GEOMETRY SWEEP' command
is used to sweep one or more lines.
When adjacent geometric parts with no common geometry need to be joined, it may be
necessary to use the `MESHING MERGE' command to ensure that the final mesh is continuous across the boundary.
`GEOMETRY SURFACE' has the following sub-commands:
2.8.10.1
GEOMETRY SURFACE AUTOMATIC
2.8.10.2
2.8.10.3
GEOMETRY SURFACE ELEMENTS

GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT
2.8.10.4
GEOMETRY SURFACE ONSHAPE
2.8.10.5
GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION
2.8.10.6
2.8.10.7
2.8.10.8
2.8.10.9
2.8.10.10
GEOMETRY SURFACE SIDE-PNT

GEOMETRY SURFACE 3POINTS
GEOMETRY SURFACE 3SIDES
GEOMETRY SURFACE 4POINTS
GEOMETRY SURFACE 4SIDES
Automatic generation of surfaces

from existing lines
From a set of elements
Surfaces direct from intersections
of analytical shapes
Automatic sub-division of plane
polygons into surfaces
Surfaces bounded by sets of lines
with optional internal holes
One side and one point definition
Three point definition
Three side definition
Four point definition
Four side definition
Note 1: In-line editing of surface definitions

The commands `GEOMETRY surface name /EDIT' and `GEOMETRY /PICKS /EDIT' will cause up to 80 characters from the definition of the specified or
picked surface to be loaded into the input buffer for in-line editing.
19/08/1999
228
GEOMETRY SURFACE
AUTOMATIC
Automatic definition of 3 and 4 sided surfaces from existing lines
2.8.10.1 GEOMETRY SURFACE AUTOMATIC

This command will create surfaces from existing closed areas of three or four lines (this
can include existing combined lines). Note that the three or four lines forming a closed
loop do not have to lie in a plane.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY SURFACE'
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE AUTOMATIC
Creates a surface wherever an area is bounded by 3 or 4 lines.
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY SURFACES' , section 2.11.1, page 256

ÙTILITY DELETE SURFACES' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY SURFACES' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
229
GEOMETRY SURFACE
ELEMENTS
Manual definition of plate/shell elements
2.8.10.2 GEOMETRY SURFACE ELEMENTS [snam] [elt]

This command is used to create a surface from a number of manually defined elements .
snam
elt
=
=
name of the surface, used for later references to the surface.

determines which type of element is to be (manually) put into this surface.
Refer to command `MESHING TYPES' for a detailed description.
FEMGEN normally creates nodes and plate/shell elements automatically from the surface
definitions entered by the user (or from a CAD system). When a higher degree of control
over element definitions is required, elements may be defined manually.
The `GEOMETRY SURFACE ELEMENTS' command is used to associate a surface name
and element type to the elements manually defined in subsequent `MESHING ELEMENT'
commands.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE ELEMENTS SM1 QU4
Create a surface SM1 on which QU4 elements will be manually defined.
See Also:

19/08/1999
230
GEOMETRY SURFACE
INTERSECT
Creation of intersection surface(s)
2.8.10.3 GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT [snam] shp1 [+/-]shp2 [[+/-/ ] shpn...]

This command allows intersection surfaces to be created directly from FEMGEN analytical shapes.
snam
shp1
=
=
shp2
shpn
+/-
name of the first surface that is created, used for later references to the surface.
name of an analytical shape (ie plane, cylinder, cone or sphere) on which the
intersection surface will lie.
name of an analytical shape (ie plane, cylinder, cone, sphere or box) used to
limit the extent of the intersection surface.
names of further additional shapes used to limit the extent of the intersection
surface.
sign which is used to control which side of the shape geometry is created on.
If no sign is given, then both sides of the given shape are considered.
The first shape given is the shape that the resulting surfaces lie on. The second and any
subsequent shapes are used to control the extent of the resulting surface, for example a
' box' could be used to define the location of the end of a cylinder and a plane (of symmetry,
perhaps) could be used to control which half of the model is created.
Note 1: Closed surfaces
This command will generate one or more surfaces, but it is unable to create
surfaces which form a closed loop, such as the surface of a truncated cylinder.
In this case it is necessary to introduce a plane to split the cylindrical surface
axially.
Note 2: Truncated shapes
Cylinders and cones can be ' truncated' to provide additional control on the extent of the resulting surface.
Note 3: Use of the '+' and '-' signs
The ' +' or ' -' sign is used with each shape (except for a box) to indicate which
side of the shape is to be used in creating the surfaces.If no sign is given then
both sides of the shape will be used.
When a plane is created or labelled the positive side of the plane is shown with
a small arrow; for cylinders, cones and spheres ' +' refers to the inside and ' -' to
the outside.
For a box, only the inside is considered to be active and a box cannot be used as
the first shape in the surface definition.
The extended example below is intended to show some of these features.
Examples:
19/08/1999

1. Intersection surfaces between three cylinders
These pairs of points are used to define axes for the three cylinders, the second and
third cylinders being at 45 and 135 degrees to the first.
GEOMETRY POINT P10 0
GEOMETRY POINT P13 8 3
GEOMETRY POINT P14 3 3
EYE DIRECTION 1 2 3
EYE FRAME
Two truncated cylindrical shapes are used, their length is defined by the location of
the points (P10, P11 and P12, P13 and P15 P14).
CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER MAIN P10 P11 1.05
CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER BRANCH1 P12 P13 .65 TRUNCATE
CONSTRUCT SHAPE CYLINDER BRANCH2 P15 P14 .45 TRUNCATE
The planes X1 and X9 will be used to limit the extent of the MAIN cylinder, the
plane Z0 is used as a plane of symmetry. If the complete structure were required
then the ' +' would be omitted from the ' Z0' in the GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT commands below.
CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE Z0 Z 0
CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE X1 X 1
CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE X9 X 9
To create the surfaces on the main part of the structure:
GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT MAIN BRANCH1 BRANCH2 +Z0 +X1 X9
EYE FRAME
FEMGEN surfaces are created on the main cylinder, but inside the two branch cylinders since no sign has been given for either BRANCH1 or BRANCH2
Create the remaining surfaces:
GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT BRANCH1 BRANCH2 -MAIN +Z0
GEOMETRY SURFACE INTERSECT BRANCH2 -MAIN -BRANCH1 +Z0
Figure 2.83: The resulting geometry

Note that the default divisions are unsuitable and so should be modified with either
the MESHING DIVISON LINE or MESHING DIVISION ELSIZE command.
MESHING DIVISION ELSIZE ALL .2
MESHING DIVISION AUTOMATIC
MESH GENERATE
VIEW MESH
VIEW HIDDEN FILL
19/08/1999
231
232
Figure 2.84: Creation of intersection surfaces directly from two shapes

See Also:

19/08/1999
233
GEOMETRY SURFACE
ONSHAPE
Automatic sub-division of plane polygons into 3 or 4 sided surfaces
2.8.10.4 GEOMETRY SURFACE ONSHAPE shnam angval

This command is used to create 3 or 4 sided surfaces within irregular multi-sided plane
polygons. Additional lines and combined lines will be created where necessary. When
there is more than one polygon to be automatically subdivided all the polygons must be
contiguous (i.e. connected with one or more common lines). All the points and lines defining the polygon(s) must lie on the FEMGEN shape(s) specified. Currently this command
only works with plane shapes.
When FEMGEN encounters an angle greater than (180 + àngval' ) an extra line will be
generated to split the internal angle. Àngval' can be given a negative value. In general, a
larger value of àngval' will result in a larger number of combined lines being formed.
shnam
angval
=
=
name of the plane or ÀLL' plane shapes may be specified.

The value to be used in deciding whether to split internal angles.
S1
Original geometry
Angval = 1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S3
S1
Angval = 40
Angval = -45
S2
S1
S4
S3
S4
S2
S9
S5
S7
S8 S13 S12
S6
S11
S10
Figure 2.85: Original polygons and results of different values of àngval' .
19/08/1999
234

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE ONSHAPE PLANE1 3
Creates surfaces within contiguous multi-sided plane polygons that lie on plane
PLANE1. Extra lines will be generated to split internal angles that are greater than
183 degrees.
See Also:

19/08/1999
235
GEOMETRY SURFACE
REGION
Create a multiple-sided surface with optional internal voids
2.8.10.5 GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION [snam] set outer [set inner*][elt]

or
snam APPEND/REMOVE Set inner*
This command is used to create a multiple sided surface with optional internal holes.
snam
set outer
set inner*
=
=
=
elt

name of a set containing a list of lines forming a closed loop.
set names containing a list of lines forming closed loops which represent
the internal holes. One set per hole.
element type on the surface. A default element type of QU4 will be
assumed if èlt' is not given. Refer to command
`MESHING TYPES' for a detailed description.
In order that a region can be defined a set must exist which contains lines forming a closed
loop representing the outer boundary of the region. The lines can be appended to the set in
any order.
Internal holes are also defined using sets of lines, with a set containing a closed loop for
each hole. Holes may be given in the initial definition of the region as well as added or
removed once the region is defined (with the `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION snam
APPEND/REMOVE' command). Whenever a region is modified the existing mesh will be
cancelled. Internal holes must be within the external boundary.
Regions can be mixed with 3 and 4 sided FEMGENsurfaces. Mesh density is controlled
by the divisions on the lines defining the region, thus ensuring continuity of mesh between
surfaces.
Unlike 3 or 4 sided surfaces the internal shape is not derived from the external boundary;
consequently a FEMGENshape must be assigned to the surface unless it is planar. The
`MESHING SHAPE' command is used to assign a shape to a surface.
Note 1: When points or lines used in the definition of region are deleted the region definition is not deleted; this is intentional. This approach is used in order that the
region does not have to be redefined when some of the geometry is modified.
However, any attempt to create a mesh on an invalid region will be prevented.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION S25 OUTER
Create a multiple sided surface S25 from the lines forming a closed loop that are in
the set OUTER.
2. GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION S25 APPEND HOLE1 HOLE2 HOLE3
Add the holes defined by the lines in the sets HOLE1, HOLE2 and HOLE3 to the
existing definition of S25.
19/08/1999
236

3. GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION OUTER HOLE1 HOLE2 HOLE3 TR6
Create a multiple sided surface from the lines forming a closed loop that are in the set
OUTER, with three internal holes defined by the sets HOLE1, HOLE2 and HOLE3.
The surface name will be generated automatically by FEMGEN. The surface definition will be similar to the resulting surface shown in example 1 and 2.
An example mesh on such a region is shown below.
Figure 2.86: An example mesh on a region

4. GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION COVER REMOVE HOLE2
Remove the hole defined by the set HOLE2 from the definition of the surface COVER.
See Also:

`CONSTRUCT SET ' , section 2.3.8, page 78
`MESHING DIVISIONS' , section 2.12.2, page 275
19/08/1999
237
GEOMETRY SURFACE
SIDE-PNT
Create a 3-sided surface from a point and a line
2.8.10.6 GEOMETRY SURFACE SIDE-PNT [snam] lnam pnam [elt]

This command is used to create a 3-sided surface from 1 line and 1 point.
snam
lnam
pnam
elt
=
=
=
=
name of surface, and used for later references to the surface.

name of line, or line combination.
name of a point.
element type on the surface.
Refer to command `MESHING TYPES' for a detailed description.
FEMGEN will generate two straight lines from the point to the ends of the line. Where
lines already exist, between any of the points, new lines will not be created. A default
element type of TR3 will be assumed if èlt' is omitted.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE SIDE-PNT S1 L1 P1
Create a three-sided surface named S1. If the end points of line L1 are P2 and P3,
the surface will have vertices P1, P2, and P3. The default element type of TR3 will
be assumed.
2. GEOMETRY SURFACE SIDE-PNT S1 L1 P1 TR6
Create a three-sided surface named S1. If the end points of line L1 are P2 and P3,
the surface will have vertices P1, P2, and P3. The element type will be TR6.
See Also:

19/08/1999
238
GEOMETRY SURFACE
3POINTS
Create a 3-sided surface from 3 points
2.8.10.7 GEOMETRY SURFACE 3POINTS [snam] [+mid1] pnam1 [+mid2] pnam2

[+mid3] pnam3 [elt]
This command is used to create a 3-sided surface from 3 points. An extended form of the
command allows the automatic creation of combined lines for the sides of the surface by
allowing mid-side points to be specified.
snam
+mid
=
=
pnam
elt
=
=

names of mid-side points used to define new combined lines. There may
be more than one mid-side point on a side of the surface.
names of three corner points.
element type on the surface. A default element type of TR3 will be
assumed if èlt' is omitted. Refer to command `MESHING TYPES' for a
In the case where no mid-side points are present, FEMGEN will generate three straight
lines connecting the corner points, and define a surface based on these three lines. Where
lines already exist between any of the points, new lines will not be created, rather the
existing lines will be used in the definition.
In the extended form of the command, either cursor picking or keyboard input can be used
to distinguish between corner points and mid-side points. With the cursor, the left button is
used to specify a corner point and the middle button (or right button on a two button mouse)
is used to specify a mid-side point. With the keyboard, a corner point is typed normally
while a mid-side point is immediately preceded by a `+' (plus sign).
The order in which points are specified is different if mid-side points are present. This enables simple termination of the command. Each side is identified by its end point (whereas
in the case of a surface without mid-side points it is identified by its start point). Thus the
definition of the surface is completed by specifying the end point of the last side (this is
also the start point of the first side).
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE 3POINTS S1 P1 P2 P3
Create a three-sided surface S1 with vertices P1, P2, and P3 with the default element
type TR3.
2. GEOMETRY SURFACE 3POINTS S1 P1 P2 P3 TR6
Create a three-sided surface S1 with vertices P1, P2, and P3 with element type TR6.
3. GEOMETRY SURFACE 3POINTS S1 +P4 P2 P3 +P5 +P6 P1
Create a surface S1 with 3 sides, the first of which is a combined line comprising the
lines joining P1 to P4 and P4 to P2; the second side is a line from P2 to P3; and the
19/08/1999

third side is a combined line comprising the lines joining P3 to P5, P5 to P6 and P6
to P1.
See Also:

19/08/1999
239
240
GEOMETRY SURFACE
3SIDES
Create a 3-sided surface from 3 lines
2.8.10.8 GEOMETRY SURFACE 3SIDES [snam] [+mid1] lnam1 [+mid2] lnam2

[+mid3] lnam3 [elt]
This command is used to create a 3-sided surface from 3 lines. An extended form of the
command allows the automatic creation of combined lines.
snam
+mid
lnam
elt
=
=
=
=

names of lines defining new combined lines.
names of lines, or line combinations.
element type on the surface. A default element type of TR3 will be
assumed if èlt' is omitted. Refer to command `MESHING TYPES' for a
In the case where no new combined lines are defined in the command, FEMGEN will
create a surface based on the three lines specified. These lines may be a simple line or a
combined line.
Where new combined lines are defined in the command, either cursor picking or keyboard
input can be used to distinguish between `last lines' and `mid-side lines' . With the cursor,
the left button is used to specify a last line and the middle button (or right button on a two
button mouse) is used to specify a mid-side line. With the keyboard, a last line is typed
normally while a mid-side line is immediately preceded by a `+' (plus sign).
Each side is identified by its last line which enables simple termination of the command.
Thus the definition of a surface is completed by specifying the last line of the last side.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE 3SIDES S1 L1 L2 L3
Create a three-sided surface S1 with edges L1, L2, and L3 with the default element
type TR3.
2. GEOMETRY SURFACE 3SIDES S1 L1 L2 L3 TR6
Create a three-sided surface S1 with edges L1, L2, and L3 with element type TR6.
3. GEOMETRY SURFACE 3SIDES S1 +L1 +L2 L3 L4 +L5 L6
lines L1, L2 and L3; the second side is the line L4 and the third side a combined line
comprising the lines L5 and L6.
19/08/1999

See Also:

19/08/1999
241
242
GEOMETRY SURFACE
4POINTS
Create a 4-sided surface from 4 points
2.8.10.9 GEOMETRY SURFACE 4POINTS [snam] [+mid1] pnam1 [+mid2] pnam2

[+mid3] pnam3 [+mid4] pnam4 [elt]
This command is used to create a 4-sided surface from 4 points. An extended form of the
command allows the automatic creation of combined lines for the sides of the surface by
allowing mid-side points to be specified.
snam
+mid
=
=
pnam
elt
=
=

names of mid-side points used to define new combined lines. There may
be more than one mid-side point on a side of the surface.
names of the four corner points.
assumed if èlt' is omitted. Refer to command `MESHING TYPES' for
a detailed description.
In the case where no mid-side points are present, FEMGEN will generate four straight lines
connecting the corner points, and define a surface based on these four lines. Where lines
already exist between any of the points, new lines will not be created, rather the existing
lines will be used in the definition.
In the extended form of the command, either cursor picking or keyboard input can be used
to distinguish between corner points and mid-side points. With the cursor, the left button is
used to specify a corner point and the middle button (or right button on a two button mouse)
is used to specify a mid-side point. With the keyboard, a corner point is typed normally
while a mid-side point is immediately preceded by a `+' (plus sign).
The order in which points are specified is different if mid-side points are present. This enables simple termination of the command. Each side is identified by its end point (whereas
in the case of a surface without mid-side points it is identified by its start point). Thus the
definition of the surface is completed by specifying the end point of the last side (this is
also the start point of the first side).
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE 4POINTS S1 P1 P2 P3 P4
Create a four-sided surface S1 with vertices P1, P2, P3, and P4 with the default
element type QU4.
2. GEOMETRY SURFACE 4POINTS S1 P1 P2 P3 P4 QU8
Create a four-sided surface S1 with vertices P1, P2, P3, and P4 with element type
QU8.
3. GEOMETRY SURFACE 4POINTS S1 +P2 +P3 P4 P5 P6 +P7 P1
Create a surface S1 with 4 sides, the first of which is a combined line comprising
the lines joining P1 to P2, P2 to P3 and P3 to P4; the second side is a line from P4
19/08/1999

to P5; the third side is a line from P5 to P6; and the fourth side is a combined line
comprising the lines joining P6 to P7 and P7 to P1.
See Also:

19/08/1999
243
244
GEOMETRY SURFACE
4SIDES
Create a 4-sided surface from 4 lines
2.8.10.10 GEOMETRY SURFACE 4SIDES [snam] [+mid1] lnam1 [+mid2] lnam2

[+mid3] lnam3 [+mid4] lnam4 [elt]
This command is used to create a 4-sided surface from 4 lines. An extended form of the
command allows the automatic creation of combined lines.
snam
+mid
lnam
=
=
=
elt

names of lines defining new combined lines.
names of lines, or line combinations. The sides must be given in
consecutive order but may start at any side and go in either direction.
assumed if èlt' is omitted. Refer to command `MESHING TYPES' for
a detailed description.
In the case where no new combined lines are defined in the command, FEMGEN will
create a surface based on the four lines specified. A line may be a simple line or a combined
line.
Where new combined lines are defined in the command, either cursor picking or keyboard
input can be used to distinguish between `last lines' and `mid-side lines' . With the cursor,
the left button is used to specify a last line and the middle button (or right button on a two
button mouse) is used to specify a mid-side line. With the keyboard, a last line is typed
normally while a mid-side line is immediately preceded by a `+' (plus sign).
Each side is identified by its last line, which enables simple termination of the command.
Thus the definition of a surface is completed by specifying the last line of the last side.
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE 4SIDES S1 L1 L2 L3 L4
Create a four-sided surface S1 with edges L1, L2, L3, and L4 with the default element
type QU4.
2. GEOMETRY SURFACE 4SIDES S1 L1 L2 L3 L4 QU8
Create a four-sided surface S1 with edges L1, L2, L3, and L4 with element type
QU8.
3. GEOMETRY SURFACE 4SIDES S1 +L1 +L2 L3 L4 L5 +L6 L7
lines L1, L2 and L3; the second side is the line L4; the third side is the line L5; and
the fourth side a combined line comprising the lines L6 and L7.
19/08/1999

See Also:

19/08/1999
245
246
GEOMETRY
SWEEP
Sweep a part or set
2.8.11 GEOMETRY SWEEP part [name] trnam [divn] [depn]

or:
... part [name] [divn] trtype [tr new] defn
[depn]
This command is used to define new parts by sweeping existing ones through a transformation. The transformation can either be previously defined or be defined as part of this
command. Selection of the geometry to be swept is either by keyboard or cursor.
part
name
=
=
trnam
divn
depn
trtype
tr new
=
=
defn
name of an existing point, line, surface or set.

name of a new point, line, surface or set that will be created by taking a copy
of ' part' and transforming it according to `trkey' . If omitted FEMGEN will
automatically generate a new name.
name of the transformation to be used (translation, rotation or scale only, defined
with CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM).
integer which specifies how many nodes are to be placed along the lines that
are generated from swept points. If omitted the default (as set with
`MESHING DIVISION DEFAULT' ) is used.
dependency control, either `DEPENDEN' or ÌNDEPEND' (the default). If the
transformation is specified as part of this command then the copy operation can
only be independent. If `DEPENDEN' is specified then the geometry of any
parts created by the `GEOMETRY SWEEP' command will remain dependent
on the transformation used in the command and also on the geometry of the
original part. Thus if the transformation is subsequently redefined in any way
(e.g. by changing the co-ordinates of one of the reference points used in its
definition) or the geometry of the original part is changed, then the geometry of
the parts generated by the `SWEEP' command will be changed correspondingly.
If ÌNDEPEND' is specified then any parts created by the `GEOMETRY SWEEP'
command will be uneffected by subsequent redefinitions of the transformation
used in the sweep or by changes to the geometry of the original part.
Type of the transformation to be used. (See below).
name for transform created as part of the copy operation. A new transform name
will be saved in the database if a name is given for the transform or if the copy
is defined as being dependent on the transform. The transform created is
associated with the surfaces and bodies created as part of the sweep operation.
Definition of transform (See below).
trtype
defn
TRANSLATE

Two point scale definition with a scaling factor plus a second
ROTATE
SCALE
The `GEOMETRY SWEEP' command is used to sweep a profile (part) through space to
create new objects. The sweep path is determined by the transformation that is used. If it
is a pure rotation the sweep will be rotational, otherwise it will be straight.
19/08/1999

When a named rotational transform (created with `CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' ) is used
to create a swept surface, the transform is stored as part of the surface definition. Similarly,
when the rotation definition is given as part of the `GEOMETRY SWEEP' command a new
transform is created and stored.
The transform used in the sweep operation is also used when a mesh is generated to ensure that nodes are correctly positioned on a surface of revolution and is an essential part
of prism bodies generated by sweeping ' region' type surfaces. This dependency can be
removed (if required) with the `MESHING SHAPE surface BOUNDARY'
For a detailed description of the definitions of the four transforms the user is referred to
the command `CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' . Although translations may be performed
using cylindrical or spherical coordinate systems it is recommended that only rectangular
systems are used.
The difference between `GEOMETRY COPY' and `GEOMETRY SWEEP' is that `GEOMETRY SWEEP' will not only create the new object ' name' , but also connect `part' and
`name' with lines (and surfaces) and finally create surfaces or bodies between `part' and
`name' . Thus points will create lines, lines surfaces, and surfaces bodies.
Whenever possible, instead of generating new objects, existing ones with the same topology are used. Nodes on polylines are not tested for coincidence with existing nodes. If the
check for existing objects is not required then the command `CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE OFF' may be used which will have the effect of making the sweep operation
quicker.
Return Level: `GEOMETRY SWEEP'
Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SWEEP SET1 ROT1
Sweep all points, lines and surfaces contained within set SET1 using transformation ROT1, and let FEMGEN generate a name for the new set. Intermediate lines,
surfaces, and bodies will also be produced.
2. GEOMETRY SWEEP SET1 SET2 TR1 5
Sweep all points, lines and surfaces contained within set SET1 to create a new set
SET2 using transformation TR1. Intermediate lines having 5 divisions, and surfaces,
and bodies will also be produced.
3. GEOMETRY SWEEP SUR1 SUR2 TR1 DEPENDEN
Sweep surface SUR1 to create a new surface SUR2 using transformation TR1. Intermediate lines, surfaces, and a body will also be produced. The geometry of the
parts created will remain dependent on the transformation TR1 and on the geometry
of the original surface SUR1 and will be effected by any subsequent change to the
definition of TR1 or to the geometry of SUR1.
4. GEOMETRY SWEEP SET1 ROTATE PAXIS1 PAXIS2 PSTART P43
Sweeps all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 by rotating about an axis
through points PAXIS1 and PAXIS2 by an angle defined by point PSTART to point
P43. The rotational transform is not stored.
5. GEOMETRY SWEEP SET1 TRANSLATE 10 0 12 GLOBAL
Sweeps all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 using a translation of x = 10, y
= 0, z = 12 in the global current coordinate system, regardless of the currently active
coordinate system.
19/08/1999
247
248

6. GEOMETRY SWEEP SET1 TRANSLATE 1.05 2.392 0 RECT1
Sweeps all points, lines, surfaces and bodies in SET1 using a translation of x = 1.05,
y = 2.392, z = 0 in the previously defined coordinate system RECT1.
7. GEOMETRY SWEEP L1 ROTATE C1 C2 90
Sweeps the line L1 90 degrees about a line through C1 and C2. In addition it will
create a new transform with this definition. If L1 is curved the internal shape of the
resulting surface will be dependent on this transform.
8. GEOMETRY SWEEP S1 TRANSLATE MYTRAN 1 0 0
Sweeps the surface S1 to a new position offset by 1 unit in the x direction. In addition it will create a new transform called MYTRAN with this definition. If S1 is a
' region' type surface, the internal shape of the resulting body will be dependent on
this transform.
See Also:

`CONSTRUCT TRANSFORM' , section 2.3.12, page 126
`MESHING DIVISION DEFAULT' , section 2.12.2, page 275
page 516
19/08/1999
249
GEOMETRY
UNSPLIT
Make two lines into a single line
2.8.12 GEOMETRY UNSPLIT name1 [name2]

This command is used to reverse the effect of the `GEOMETRY SPLIT' command by
making a single line from two lines.
name1
name2
name of an existing point or the name of an existing line. The

graphics cursor may be used to pick an existing point or line.
where `name1' was the name of a line then `name2' must be the name
of a second existing line that is joined to the first line. The
graphics cursor may be used to pick the second line.
Note 1: Naming of unsplit lines

The single line that results from the ÙNSPLIT' operation takes the name of the
original line that was previously `split' using the `GEOMETRY SPLIT' command
Note 2: Parts deleted
The line created by the original `SPLIT' operation will be deleted. Note that the
point between the two lines will also be deleted unless any other lines make use
of it in which case it will not be deleted.
Note 3: Line divisions
The number of divisions on the single line formed by the ÙNSPLIT' operation
will be the sum of the divisions on the two component lines.
See Also:

`GEOMETRY SPLIT' , section 2.8.9, page 225
19/08/1999
250
19/08/1999
2.9. PRIMARY COMMAND HELP
251
HELP
Superceded
2.9 PRIMARY COMMAND HELP

This command has now been removed from FEMGV.
Functionality that was available with HELP STATUS has been moved to ÙTILITY TABULATE STATUS' .
See Also:
ÙTILITY TABULATE ' , section ??, page ??
19/08/1999
252
19/08/1999
2.10. PRIMARY COMMAND INDEX
253
INDEX
Enter the Model Index Environment
2.10 PRIMARY COMMAND INDEX

The command ÌNDEX' is used to enter the model index environment and to display the
models that exist in the working directory.
The form of index display is currently different for Unix and PC platforms, although the
functionality provided is roughly similar. The index display described here is for the PC.
The model index not only indicates the progress of a job from model generation through to
results assessment, but also reminds the user of the model names and filenames that exist
within the current directory.
Note that the working directory is interrogated each time the model index is displayed so
that the index is always correct at the time of display.
When FEMGV is initiated, the model index is automatically displayed and the user is
offered a choice of command from the index menu. In addition, the user may pick one
of the action buttons displayed against a model name in the index in order to perform a
required action on that model. The action buttons provided are as follows:
Action Button
Effect
Generate
Enter the model generation environment FEMGEN.

This action button is only available for existing FEMGEN
models.
View
Enter the model assessment environment FEMVIEW.

This action button will be available for existing FEMVIEW
models or when there is only an existing FEMGEN database
for a model in which case an internal transfer from FEMGEN
to FEMVIEW will be performed prior to entering the model
assessment environment.
Status
Gives the current status of a model. See ' Model Status

Information' below.
Update
Updates the databases for a model from FEMGV Version 4.0

to FEMGV Version 5.0.
This action button is only available when a model has no
FEMGV Version 5.0 database files.
Analyse
Executes the analysis program.

This action button is only effective where an analysis program
has been integrated with the FEMGV installation.
If there is more model index information than can be displayed in the current viewport then
the model index will be displayed in a paged mode; the next page being accessed via the
More action button that will be displayed at the foot of the index.
19/08/1999
254

Model Status Information
The command ÌNDEX model name' or picking the Status action button for a model will
cause a status report for that model to be displayed. The general form of this information
is shown below:
Geometry created:
01-JUN-96 10:25
Geometry modified:
15-JUN-96 15:04
Title: A 20 character title
Points:
531
Lines:
676
Surfaces: 250
Bodies:
289
Nodes:
20400
Elements: 14678
Viewdata created:
23-JUN-96 09:12
Single level model
Title: A 20 character title
Origin: External source
Nodes:
20400
Elements: 14678
Results 1st entered: 23-JUN-96 09:20
Loadcases: 15
Note 1: Origin
If the origin of the viewdata is specified as Ìnternal transfer' then this means that
it has been generated directly from the mesh generated by FEMGEN, while if
it is classified as Èxternal source' this means that it has been generated using
element and co-ordinated data obtained from an external file, presumably from
an analysis run.
To exit the model status information and return to the model index the Exit action button
that is displayed at the foot of the status information should be used.
If there is more model status information than can be displayed in the current viewport then
the index will be displayed in a paged mode; the next page being accessed via the More
action button that will be displayed at the foot of the status information.
19/08/1999
2.11. PRIMARY COMMAND LABEL
255
LABEL
Label a model attribute
2.11 PRIMARY COMMAND LABEL

The `LABEL' command allows the user to add labels to the display of the model.
`LABEL' has the following secondary commands:
19/08/1999
2.11.1
2.11.2
2.11.3
LABEL GEOMETRY
LABEL MESH
LABEL OPTIONS
2.11.4
LABEL SHAPE
display geometry labels.

display mesh labels.
additional controls on the
`LABEL' command.
display shape labels.
256
LABEL
GEOMETRY
Display geometry labels
2.11.1 LABEL GEOMETRY Attribute [Part name [Colour]]

The command `LABEL GEOMETRY' allows the user to specify the geometrical attributes
that will be labelled, the part name to which the labels will be applied, and the colour to be
used for the labels. The command word ÀLL' may be used instead of a part name if labels
on all parts are required and the command word `CURRENT' if labels on all currently
displayed parts are required (this is the default).
Once the attribute to be displayed has been selected the part to be labelled can also be
`picked' from the screen.
Attribute
Comments
POINTS
LINES
SURFACES
BODIES
MATERIALS
PHYSICAL
CSYST
CONSTRNT
INITIAL
LOADS
TYPES
DIVISIONS
MERGE
AXES
EXTERNAL
NORMALS
OFF
Point names are displayed.

Line names are displayed.
Surface names are displayed.
Body names are displayed.
Material names are displayed (see note 2).
Physical property names are displayed (see note 2).
Coordinate systems are displayed (see note 2).
Constraint names are displayed.
Initial conditions are displayed
Loads are displayed (see note 3).
Element types names are displayed (see note 4).
Numbers of divisions on lines are displayed.
Merged parts are displayed.
Local axes of parts are displayed (see note 5).
External freedoms are displayed.
Surface normals are displayed (see note 6).
Switches labels off.
Return Level: `LABEL GEOMETRY' except for ÒFF'

Note 1: Use of colour
When displaying geometry labels, the use of either `WHITE' , `RED' , ÒRANGE' , `YELLOW' , `GREEN' , `BLUE' or `VIOLET' colour may be specified.
Note 2: Labelling of Materials, Physical Properties and Coordinate Systems
These will only be labelled if they have been assigned to a part.
Note 3: Labelling of Loads and initial conditions
When requesting that a load be labelled it is possible to specify the load name
or the load number instead of a part name and this will label that load name on
all parts to which it has been assigned. To obtain a graphical representation of a
load the command `LABEL MESH LOADS' must be used.
19/08/1999

Note 4: Labelling element types
If the User has selected an analysis environment (with `PROPERTY FE ...' or
by the use of an environment variable) then the element type specific to the FE
package will be displayed on the relevant geometry. Otherwise the FEMGEN
generic element type will be shown.
Note 5: Labelling of local axes
When requesting that the local axes for a part be displayed it is possible to
specify that either ÀLL' axes or only the `X' , `Y' or `Z' axis be shown. If
the local axes for a part are changed, then it will be necessary to use `LABEL
GEOMETRY AXES' to recalculate the orientation vectors, rather than using
`DRAWING DISPLAY' .
Note 6: Display of surface normals
The positive direction of the local Z-axis of a surface (surface normal) is indicated by a single arrow drawn from the centre of the surface. The arrow is red if
it is pointing away from the screen (viewer) and green if it is pointing towards
the screen. Only surfaces will have their normals displayed. Note that to reverse
the direction of the local Z-axis of a surface the `GEOMETRY FLIP' command
can be used.
Examples:
1. LABEL GEOMETRY BODIES WING RED
Labels the bodies for the part named `wing' using colour red.
2. LABEL GEOMETRY DIVISIONS
Labels the lines with the division numbers that have been assigned to them as meshing controls.
3. LABEL GEOMETRY LOADS CAS8 BLUE
Labels all parts, using colour BLUE, that have the Load Instance (name) CAS8 applied to them.
4. LABEL GEOMETRY NORMALS ALL
Displays the surface normals for all the surfaces in the model regardless of whether
a surface is currently displayed or not. The arrows representing the surface normals
will be coloured red if they are pointing away from the screen and green if they are
pointing towards the screen.
5. LABEL GEOMETRY AXES L12 X YELLOW
Displays the local x-axis of line L12 in yellow.
19/08/1999
257
258
LABEL
MESH
Display Mesh Labels
2.11.2 LABEL MESH Attribute [Control]

The command `LABEL MESH' allows the user to specify the labels that will be displayed
on the mesh.
FEMGEN Command.
The user may specify the part name to which the labels will be applied, and the colour to be
used for the labels. The command word ÀLL' may be used instead of a part name if labels
on all parts are required and the command word `CURRENT' if labels on all currently
displayed parts are required (this is the default).
Attribute
Control
Comments
OFF
All labelling will be switched off.
ELEMENTS
NODES
MATERIALS
PHYSICAL
CSYST
CONSTRNT
LOADS
INITIAL
TYPES
MERGE
AXES
EXTERNAL
[OFF]
[ALL] [colour]
[CURRENT] [colour]
[Part name] [colour]
`n' [colour]
The requested attribute is labelled on the

parts of the mesh specified. The labels
will be in the specified colour. When
labelling nodes or elements a specific
node or element number (rather than a
part name) may be given.
QUALITY
Part name [Test]
Labels elements that fail quality tests

(see note 5).
Return Level: `LABEL MESH' except for ÒFF'

When displaying mesh labels, the use of either `WHITE' , `RED' , ÒRANGE' ,
`YELLOW' , `GREEN' , `BLUE' or `VIOLET' colour may be specified.
Note 2: Difference between `LABEL GEOMETRY' and`LABEL MESH'
`LABEL MESH' labels each element but `LABEL GEOMETRY' labels each
part.
Note 3: Labelling of loads
A graphical representation of the load will be displayed rather than the load
name as is the case with the `LABEL GEOMETRY LOADS' command. When
requesting that a load be labelled it is possible to specify the load name or the
load number instead of a part name and this will display that load on all the
19/08/1999

parts it is assigned to. The display of vector loads is such that vectors are drawn
proportional to the magnitude of the load, but additional control on the size of
the displayed vectors is given by the `LABEL OPTIONS LOADS' command.
Scalar loads and tensor components are represented as numeric values. A component of multiple scalars values or single components of tensor are selected by
an optional integer.
Note 4: Labelling element types
If the User has selected an analysis environment (with `PROPERTY FE ...' or
by the use of an environment variable) then the element name specific to the FE
package will be displayed on each element. Otherwise the FEMGEN generic
element type will be shown.
Note 5: Control of mesh quality labels
The keywords `MINANG' , `MAXANG' , ÀSPECT' , `NODOFF' , `BULGE'
`WARP' or `TOTAL' request that elements failing the specified quality test are
labelled. The default is that the first test to fail is labelled (where the order is dependent on the relative weighting of the quality tests); and the keyword `NFAIL'
requests that the number of failures per element be labelled. Further information
on Mesh Quality is given in Appendix J of the User Manual Appendices.
Note 6: Labelling of local axes
When requesting that the local axes for a part be displayed it is possible to
specify that either ÀLL' axes or only the `X' , `Y' or `Z' axis be shown.
Note 7: Labelling of MERGES `LABEL MESH MERGE' will label all the nodes on
parts that are referred to in any stored merges (as shown by ÙTILITY TABULATE MESH MERGE' )
Examples:
1. LABEL MESH NODES B1
Labels all the nodes on body B1
2. LABEL MESH ELEMENTS 186 YELLOW
Labels element number 186 in yellow
3. LABEL MESH MATERIALS ALL RED
Labels all the materials in red
4. LABEL MESH LOADS CAS1 2 RED
Labels all parts that have Load Instance (name) CAS1 applied. The 2nd component
of the load is displayed as a numerical value in the colour red.
5. LABEL MESH QUALITY ALL MAXANG
Labels all elements that fail the Maximum Angle test.
6. LABEL MESH QUALITY SUR5 NFAIL
Labels all elements on surface SUR5 to indicate how many quality tests each element
failed.
7. LABEL MESH AXES L12 X YELLOW
Displays the local x-axis of elements associated with line L12 in yellow.
See Also:
19/08/1999
259
260

`LABEL OPTIONS' , section 2.11.3, page 263
FEMVIEW Command.
It is possible to specify a range of nodes, elements, groups or materials for which labels
are required. Alternatively, the graphics cursor may be used to interactively enquire the
identity of a node, element number, group number or material number.
Attribute
Range
Comments
OFF
All labelling will be switched off.
NODES
ELEMENTS
GROUPS
MATERIALS
OFF
ALL [Colour]
/PICK
VIEWMODE [Colour]
Set name [Colour]
n1 n2 n3 ... n17
n1 TO n2 [STEPS n3]
Labels attribute requested on the

parts of the mesh defined in the
range (see notes 1 and 2).
TYPES
Type
OFF
Labels elements of the requested type.
CONSTRNTS
EXTERNALS
MPCS
Colour
OFF
Labels nodes that have constraints

applied, that have external degrees of
freedom, or labels multi-point
constraints (see note 11).
RESULTS
Colour
OFF
Labels enumerative results (see note 13).
Set name
Colour
If the set is a node set then the nodes

in the set are labelled. If the set is an
element set then the elements in the
set are labelled.
AXES
NODAL
ELEMENT
GAUSSIAN
X [Colour] [QUICK]
Y [Colour] [QUICK]
Z [Colour] [QUICK]
ALL [Colour] [QUICK]
OFF
Labels nodal, element or

gaussian results local axes
(see note 10).
Note 1: Labelling elements on node sets

Any element connected to any of the nodes in the node set will be labelled.
Note 2: Labelling nodes on element sets
All the nodes that define the elements in the element set will be labelled.
Note 3: Notation for Material and Group labels
To distinguish them from element labels and from each other, material labels are
19/08/1999

prefixed by `M' and group labels are prefixed by `G' .
Note 4: Positioning of labels
If labelling of nodes has been requested then node numbers are displayed adjacent to the corresponding nodal point. If labelling of element attributes has
been requested then labels are displayed as a list starting at the centroids of the
appropriate elements. A label is not displayed if any part of it would lie outside
the current viewport.
Note 5: Effect of model subsets
Only nodes and elements in the current model subset are considered regardless
of the ' Range' specified.
Note 6: Effect of visualisation
If no `Range' is specified, or the command `VIEWMODE' is used, then only
`visible' elements or nodes in the subset will be labelled. For a node to be
`visible' it would have attached mesh lines shown as a result of the command
`VIEW OPTIONS EDGES ALL' ; (the effect of commands `VIEW OPTIONS
EDGES OUTLINE' and `VIEW OPTIONS EDGES INHIBIT' is ignored). For
a beam or shell element to be `visible' , all of its nodes must be `visible' ; whereas
a solid element is considered `visible' if one or more of its nodes is `visible' .
(The exception to this rule is that with models comprising only beam and/or
plate/shell elements, the visualisation test is not applied for element labels unless
a hidden line view is current).
Note 7: Use of the graphics cursor
The command word `/PICK' enables the user to enquire the identity of a node
or element by using the graphics cursor. Only `visible' nodes or elements will
be sensitive to the cursor (see note 4. above). An element is located by the
position of its centroid. To terminate cursor picking it is necessary to make two
approximately coincident cursor hits.
Note 8: Effect of changing the model visualisation mode
If the `VIEW' mode is changed whilst labels are displayed, the labels are not
effected and remain displayed as they were. The exception to this rule is when
going to or from a cross-section, in which case all labels will be removed.
Note 9: Node labels on cross-sections
Intersection points are generated where the cross-section intersects an edge of a
finite element. An intersection point is labelled with the number of the nearest
node on the intersected finite element edge as long as this node is within 1/10th
of the edge length to the intersection point. Otherwise the intersection point will
not be given a node label.
Note 10: Labelling results local axes
Local axes systems can only be displayed if the required results local axes system dataset has been input, see Appendix B of the User Manual Appendices.
The exception is for element results local systems where, if no data has been
input, then a single local system will be displayed at the element centroid based
on the definition of the element. A colour `RED' , ÒRANGE' , `YELLOW' ,
`GREEN' , `BLUE' or `VIOLET' may be chosen. For the display of both element and gaussian local systems the `QUICK' option will display an axes system at only the 1st node or gauss point encountered for the element. Note that,
by default, on 2D displays the axes system vectors will have 3D heads and on
3D displays the vectors will have 2D heads.
19/08/1999
261
262

Note 11: Labelling Constraints, Externals and MPCS
These labels can only be displayed if the required dataset has been input, see
Appendix B of the User Manual Appendices. A colour `RED' , ÒRANGE' ,
`YELLOW' , `GREEN' , `BLUE' or `VIOLET' may be chosen.
Note 12: Labelling using IJK values
With IJK regular models it is possible to specify a range of nodes or elements by
their IJK reference values. To have the actual IJK values themselves displayed
as labels the command `LABEL OPTIONS IJK ON' must be used.
Note 13: Labelling of enumerative results
Currently only element gaussian results can be labelled. The first field of the
enumerative data is used as the label.
Examples:
1. LABEL MESH NODES /PICK
The cursor is made available, and the user can make cursor hits at or near node points
and the node numbers will be displayed.
2. LABEL MESH ELEMENTS
All elements in the current model subset will have their element numbers displayed,
if these form part of the current visualisation mode (see Note 2 above).
3. LABEL MESH NODES ALL
All nodes in the model subset will be labelled regardless of whether they are `visible'
or not.
4. LABEL MESH MATERIALS 1 TO 4
Elements of materials 1 through to 4 inclusive will have their material numbers displayed.
5. LABEL MESH GROUPS 21 TO 51 STEPS 10
Elements in groups 21, 31, 41 and 51 will have their group numbers displayed.
6. LABEL MESH ELEMENTS IJK J 5
Elements with a J value of 5 will be labelled
7. LABEL MESH NODES IJK J 5 K 1 TO 3
Nodes with a J value of 5 and a K value between 1 and 3 will be labelled
19/08/1999
263
LABEL
OPTIONS
Additional control of labels
2.11.3 LABEL OPTIONS

The `LABEL OPTIONS' command gives additional controls on the display of certain labels.
`LABEL OPTIONS' has the following sub-commands:
2.11.3.1
AXES
2.11.3.5
LOADS
2.11.3.2
CONSTRNT
2.11.3.3
EXTERNAL
2.11.3.6
2.11.3.4
MPC
IJK
19/08/1999
control size of vectors displayed to represent

local axes systems.
control size of vectors displayed
to represent loads.
control size symbols displayed to represent
constrained freedoms and switch degree of freedom
names on and off
control size of symbols displayed to represent external
freedoms.
to control display of MPC symbols and text
request node and element labels be displayed
in IJK notation.
264
LABEL OPTIONS
AXES
Control size of results local axes system symbols
2.11.3.1 LABEL OPTIONS AXES Factor

The `LABEL OPTIONS AXES' command allows the user to control the size of the vectors
that are displayed on the mesh to represent results local axes systems. The results local
axes systems themselves are displayed by using `LABEL MESH AXES' command.
The `Factor' specified is used to scale the standard vector size.
Examples:
1. LABEL OPTIONS AXES 3.0
Requests that results local axes system vectors are displayed three times their normal
size.
See Also:
`LABEL MESH AXES' , section 2.11.2, page 258
19/08/1999
265
LABEL OPTIONS
CONSTRNTS
Control display of constraint symbols and text
2.11.3.2 LABEL OPTIONS CONSTRNTS Control

The `LABEL OPTIONS CONSTRNTS' command allows the user to control the size of the
symbols that are displayed on the mesh to represent constrained freedoms. The command
is also used to control the display of degree of freedom names. The constraint symbols
themselves are displayed by using `LABEL MESH CONSTRNT' command.
Control
Comments
< real >

TEXT
ON/OFF
SYMBOLS
ON/OFF
MACROS
ON/OFF
Scales constraint labels by factor < real >

Switches on/off degree of freedom names,
the default is off.
Switches on/off degree of freedom symbols,
the default is on.
Switches on/off degree of freedom macros
(XSYMM etc), the default is on if text is on.
Examples:
1. LABEL OPTIONS CONSTRNTS 2.0
Requests that constraint symbols are displayed twice their normal size.
2. LABEL OPTIONS CONSTRNTS TEXT ON
Switch on degree of freedom names.
See Also:
`LABEL MESH CONSTRNTS' , section 2.11.2, page 258
19/08/1999
266
LABEL OPTIONS
EXTERNAL
Control size of external symbols
2.11.3.3 LABEL OPTIONS EXTERNAL Factor

The `LABEL OPTIONS EXTERNAL' command allows the user to control the size of
the symbols that are displayed on the mesh to represent external freedoms. The external
symbols themselves are displayed by using `LABEL MESH EXTERNAL' command.
The `Factor' specified is used to scale the standard symbol size.
Examples:
1. LABEL OPTIONS EXTERNAL 0.5
Requests that external symbols are displayed half their normal size.
See Also:
`LABEL MESH EXTERNAL' , section 2.11.2, page 258
19/08/1999
267
LABEL OPTIONS
IJK
Requests node and element labels be displayed in IJK notation
2.11.3.4 LABEL OPTIONS IJK Control

With IJK regular models, the command `LABEL OPTIONS IJK ON' allows the user to
request that node and element labels be displayed using IJK notation. For example, a node
with an I value of 5, a J value of 20, and a K value of 6 will be given the label:
5,20,6
The command `LABEL OPTIONS IJK OFF' turns off IJK notation labelling for nodes and
elements, and labelling reverts to normal notation.
See Also:
`LABEL MESH' , section 2.11.2, page 258
19/08/1999
268
LABEL OPTIONS
LOADS
Control size of load symbols and moving loads display
2.11.3.5 LABEL OPTIONS LOADS Control

The `LABEL OPTIONS LOADS' command allows the user to control the size of the vectors that are displayed on the mesh to represent loads. The vectors themselves are displayed
by using the `LABEL MESH LOADS' command. The default vector size is set to give a
displayed size of approximately 10mm.
This command is also used to specify the stopping position at which selected moving loads
are to be displayed. It does not apply when moving loads are displayed by the `LABEL
MESH LOADS loadcase' command.
Control
Comments
FIXED
[factor]
RELATIVE
[factor]
POSITION
START
STOP
integer
NEXT
PREVIOUS
DISTANCE real
RATIO real
Each load selected for display will have the vector that
is displayed to represent its maximum value scaled to the
same length. A `factor' may be specified to scale up or
down the default vector length.
Each of the vectors representing the values to be displayed
will be scaled relative to the largest value in any of the
displayed loads (see note 1). A `factor' may be specified
to scale up or down the default vector length.
Display selected moving loads at:
the start position
the stop position
the position numbered ' integer'
the next position from the current one
the previous position from the current one
a distance ' real' from the start point
a ratio ' real' from the start point
Note 1: Adding load display under the `RELATIVE' option

If loads are currently displayed and a new load is added to the display while
the `RELATIVE' option is current then all the load vectors will be redisplayed
according to a recalculated factor.
Note 2: Default condition
The default condition is `RELATIVE' .
Note 3: Start position of a moving load
The start position of a moving load is defined as the first axle (or point load) of
the vehicle placed on the path start point.
Note 4: Stop position of a moving load
The stop position of a moving load is defined as the last axle (or point load) of
the vehicle placed on the path stop point.
19/08/1999

Note 5: Numbered position of a moving load
An integer gives the position number at which the moving load is to be displayed, such that 1 corresponds to the start position. Any integer value below 1
will default to the start position and any integer value above the total number of
stopping positions will default to the stop position.
Note 6: Next and previous position of a moving load
NEXT and PREVIOUS show respectively the next and previous stopping position from the currently selected position if any.
Note 7: Stopping position of a moving load defined by a distance
Selected moving loads can be displayed at a specified distance measured from
the start point to the front axle of the vehicle. The display is at the nearest load
application point.
Note 8: Stopping position of a moving load defined by a ratio
Selected moving loads can be displayed at a specified ratio from the start point.
The display is at the nearest load application point and is such that a ratio of
0. corresponds to the start position and a ratio of 1. corresponds to the stop
position.
Examples:
1. LABEL OPTIONS LOADS FIXED 1.5
Requests that load vectors are displayed such that within each load the maximum
length vector will be approximately 15mm.
2. LABEL OPTIONS LOADS POSITION 3
Requests that all selected moving loads are displayed at the third position in the
sequence of stopping positions.
See Also:
`LABEL MESH LOADS' , section 2.11.2, page 258
19/08/1999
269
270
LABEL OPTIONS
MPC
Control display of MPC symbols and text
2.11.3.6 LABEL OPTIONS MPC Control

The `LABEL OPTIONS MPC' command allows the user to control the size of the symbols
that are displayed on the mesh to represent MPC's. The command is also used to control
the display of degree of freedom names. The constraint symbols themselves are displayed
by using `LABEL MESH CONSTRNT' command.
Control
Comments
SYMBOLS
ON/OFF
TEXT
ON/OFF
IDOF
ON/OFF
LINE
ON/OFF
DIRECTION
ON/OFF
Switches on/off slave/master symbols, the

default is on.
Switches on/off slave/master names, the
default is off.
Switches on/off degree of freedom names, the
default is off.
Switches on/off MPC line connections , the
default is on.
Switches on/off MPC orientation vectors, the
default is on.
Examples:
1. LABEL OPTIONS MPC DOF ON
Switch on degree of freedom names.
See Also:
`LABEL MESH CONSTRNTS' , section 2.11.2, page 258
19/08/1999
271
LABEL
SHAPE
Display labels of shapes
2.11.4 LABEL SHAPE [Shape name [Colour]]

The command `LABEL SHAPE' allows the user to specify the shape name to which the
labels will be applied as well as the colour to be used for the labels. The command word
ÀLL' may be used instead of a shape name if labels on all shapes are required and the
command word `CURRENT' may be used if labels on all currently displayed shapes are
required (this is the default).
To turn off shape labels the command `LABEL SHAPE OFF' should be used.
The label is positioned depending on the type of shape being labelled, as shown below :
Shape
Label Position
PLANE
CONE
CYLINDER
SPHERE
At the origin of the plane.

On the surface of the cone, halfway through the workbox.
On the surface of the cylinder, halfway through the workbox.
On the surface of the sphere at one of the local poles.

When displaying shape labels, the use of either `WHITE' , `RED' , ÒRANGE' ,
`YELLOW' , `GREEN' , `BLUE' or `VIOLET' colour may be specified.
Examples:
1. LABEL SHAPE
Labels the currently displayed shapes.
2. LABEL SHAPE CYLIND1 RED
Labels the shape CYLIND1 with red text.
19/08/1999
272
19/08/1999
2.12. PRIMARY COMMAND MESHING
273
MESHING
Mesh generation and control
2.12 PRIMARY COMMAND MESHING

The command `MESHING' is the keyword for finite element mesh generation.
`MESHING' has the following secondary commands:
2.12.1
2.12.2
2.12.3
2.12.4
2.12.5
2.12.6
2.12.7
2.12.8
2.12.10
2.12.9
2.12.11
19/08/1999
MESHING CANCEL
MESHING DIVISION
MESHING ELEMENT
MESHING GENERATE
MESHING MERGE
MESHING MERGE ALL
MESHING NODE
MESHING OPTIONS
MESHING SHAPE
MESHING RENUMBER
MESHING TYPES
cancel the current mesh.

control number of elements in mesh.
create or change an element.
mesh a part.
merge the mesh of two unconnected parts.
merge the nodes of a generated mesh.
create or change the co-ordinates of a node.
controls on the `MESHING' command.
project a surface onto a shape.
renumber node numbers.
define element types to be generated.
274
MESHING
CANCEL
Cancel the current mesh
2.12.1 MESHING CANCEL

The `MESHING CANCEL' command is used to cancel the current mesh. It is useful,
for example, when a `MESHING MERGE' command has not merged the required nodes
because of an inappropriate tolerance setting; or when the position of a node has been
changed using the `MESHING NODE' command after the mesh was generated.
The mesh on locked parts will not be effected by this command. A locked part can be
unlocked with the `MESHING OPTIONS UNLOCK' command.
Note that the current (unlocked) mesh will always be automatically cancelled if the existing
geometry is modified in any way, for example, if a point is moved; or if meshing controls
such as the element types to be generated are changed.
See Also:

`MESHING OPTIONS LOCK' , section 2.12.8.3, page 292
`MESHING OPTIONS UNLOCK' , section 2.12.8.6, page 296
19/08/1999
275
MESHING
DIVISION
Define number of elements for meshing
2.12.2 MESHING DIVISION Control Part name Parameter

The `MESHING DIVISION' command is used to control the number of elements that will
be created when a mesh is generated.
Control
Part name
Parameter Comments
LINE
ALL
Line name
Set name
n
n
n
Defines the number of elements by

division of lines. (See note 1).
If a line name is specified the
word `LINE' is optional.
SURFACE
ALL
Surface name
Set name
n1 n2
n1 n2
n1 n2

division of surfaces. (See note 2).
If a surface name is specified the
word `SURFACE' is optional.
BODY
ALL
Body name
Set name
n1 n2 n3
n1 n2 n3
n1 n2 n3

division of bodies. (See note 3).
If a body name is specified the
word `BODY' is optional.
FACTOR
ALL
Line name
Surface name
Body name
Set name
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Factor
Multiplies the number of divisions by

the factor (See note 4).
ELSIZE
ALL
Line name
Surface name
Body name
Set name
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Set the number of divisions by the

length of an element edge.
(See note 5).
AUTOMATIC
Adjust the number of divisions

automatically. (See note 6).
RELATIVE
ALL
Line name
Surface name
Body name
Set name
n
n
n
n
n
Adds the input value to the number

of divisions (may be negative).
DEFAULT
Sets the default number of divisions.
n1 [n2] [n3]
Allows the part to be picked
/PICK
19/08/1999
276

Return Level: `MESHING DIVISION Control' except for part name ÀLL' and controls
ÀUTOMATIC' and `DEFAULT' which return to the top level.
Note 1: Division of lines
If the nodes are to be evenly spaced along the line, `n' is the number of divisions
on a line . In this case `n' must be less than 100.
If you wish to control the spacing of the nodes `n' is calculated as follows:`n' = Sign(IQ*100+IE) (an integer), where:
IQ = quotient of the lengths of the largest and the smallest element edge on the
line (integer < 10 ). This is called the grading value.
Sign + : elements are smaller at start point of line .
Sign - : elements are smaller at end point of line .
IE = number of elements with no midside nodes that can be generated along the
line. The number of elements with midside nodes that can be generated is = IE/2
(IE must be even for these elements). If `divn' is not specified the default value
is used. IE must be < 100.
Figure 2.87: Spacing nodes on a line using a grading value

Note 2: Divisions of surfaces
`n1' = division along the first and third sides of the surface. IQ must be = 0. (see
note 1. above).
`n2' = division along the second and fourth sides of the surface. IQ must be = 0.
-306
304
-306
406
-404
-404
906
-906
404
404
-404
Figure 2.88: Examples of grading control on surfaces

Note 3: Divisions of bodies
`n1' = division along the first and third sides of the bottom surface. IQ must be
= 0. (see note 1. above)
19/08/1999

`n2' = division along the second and fourth sides of the bottom surface. IQ must
be = 0.
`n3' = division along the sides from bottom to top surface. IQ must be = 0.
Note 4: Multiplying divisions by a factor
`Factor' is a real number which will multiply the divisions on all lines in ' part' .
The new division is rounded off to the nearest integer value. The grading value
is kept unchanged.
Note 5: Setting divisions by element edge length
`Length' is the requested element side length. It is used to calculate a `divn' value for all lines in `part' . The new division is rounded off to the nearest integer
value. The grading value is kept unchanged.
Note 6: Setting divisions automatically
All surfaces and bodies in the structure will be checked to comply with the rules
of division (see command `MESHING TYPES' ). If e.g. a surface is found that
cannot be meshed, FEMGEN tries to change the division on one line in the
surface (a warning is written). If it fails to make a surface meshable, an error
message is given.
Examples:
1. MESHING DIVISION LINE L3 4
Define four equal divisions on line L3.
2. MESHING DIVISION LINE L1 -406
Define six unequal divisions on line L1. The divisions are biased towards the start
point of the line. The ratio of largest to smallest division is 4.
3. MESHING DIVISION SURFACE S6 3 4
Define three equal divisions on sides 1 and 3, and four equal divisions on sides 2 and
4, for surface S6.
4. MESHING DIVISION SURFACE SET1 3 4
Define all divisions on surfaces within set SET1 as per the previous example.
5. MESHING DIVISION BODY B1 2 2 4
Define divisions on body B1. Two equal divisions on sides 1 and 3 of the bottom
surface, two equal divisions on sides 2 and 4 of the bottom surface, and four equal
divisions on all sides connecting the top and bottom faces.
6. MESHING DIVISION BODY ALL 1 2 3
Define divisions for all bodies in the model. One division on sides 1 and 3 of the
bottom surface, two equal divisions on sides 2 and 4 of the bottom surface, and three
equal divisions on all sides connecting the top and bottom faces.
See Also:
`GEOMETRY LINE' , section 2.8.6, page 195

`LABEL GEOMETRY DIVISIONS' , section 2.11.1, page 256
19/08/1999
277
278
MESHING
ELEMENT
Create or change an element
2.12.3 MESHING ELEMENT Definition

The `MESHING ELEMENT' command is used to create or change the definition of a finite
element.
Examples:
1. MESHING ELEMENT 101 3 5 7 33
Element number 101 is defined as being connected to nodes 3, 5, 7 and 33.
Before creating new elements the user must declare with a `GEOMETRY LINE ELEMENTS lname elty' , `GEOMETRY SURFACE ELEMENTS sname elty' or `GEOMETRY BODY ELEMENTS bname elty' command, which type of elements will be defined.
The elements defined must be given consecutive numbers, starting with the next available
number. Their specification must conform to the type given. The same is true when changes
are made on existing elements. Observe that elements given after an automatic mesh generation (command `MESHING GENERATE' ) are lost when the mesh is regenerated.
Return Level: `MESHING ELEMENT'
See Also:
`GEOMETRY BODY ELEMENTS' , section 2.8.1.1, page 172

`GEOMETRY LINE ELEMENTS' , section 2.8.6.5, page 203
`GEOMETRY SURFACE ELEMENTS' , section 2.8.10.2, page 229
19/08/1999
279
MESHING
GENERATE
Generate finite element mesh
2.12.4 MESHING GENERATE [Part]

The `MESHING GENERATE' command is used for the automatic generation of a finite
element mesh. The mesh may be generated on a specified part of the model or on the whole
model.
Part
Comments
ALL
Part name
Generate mesh on the whole model (default).

Generate mesh on the named part where this is the name of a line,
surface, body, or set.
Nodes and elements are generated and numbered by the program.

If any part of the existing geometry is altered then all of the existing mesh is cancelled. Only
elements or nodes that have been generated manually before any `MESH GENERATE'
command will be kept.
Note, however, that new geometric parts can be created without the existing mesh being
cancelled.
Note also that if a part has been `locked' (see the `MESHING OPTIONS LOCK' command), it is not possible to alter the geometry of the part.
Examples:
1. MESHING GENERATE
The whole model is meshed.
2. MESHING GENERATE SUR3
The part (surface) named `SUR3' only is meshed.
See Also:

19/08/1999
280
MESHING
MERGE
Merge separately defined subparts
2.12.5 MESHING MERGE [Merge] Part1 Part2

The `MESHING MERGE' command is used to merge the nodes on separately defined
subparts which are not connected through common geometric parts, for example a common
line. However two points must not be merged (it is easier to have a common point). During
the mesh operation, the program will merge nodes on `Part1' and `Part2' which are within
the tolerance specified with the command `CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE' .
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY STATUS' will show the current tolerance.
The merging operation involves the deletion of one of each pair of `coincident' nodes on
the separate parts. Elements on the part whose nodes have been deleted are then redefined
in terms of the nodes on the other part and any remaining nodes on the original part.
Merge
Part1
Part2
The name to be given to the merge, and which is used for future references
to it. If no name is given then a name will be automatically generated.
The name of the first part to be merged, and must be a name of a point, line
or surface.
The second part to be merged, the name of a point, line or surface.
For each node in the part with the fewest nodes, the node in the other part is chosen which is
closest and within the tolerance and not merged already. If no node fulfils these conditions
the merge will not be complete. The node with the lowest number is used.
As an example suppose we have a solid model where two surfaces meet but are not identical. Instead of splitting a body into several bodies, the merge command `MESHING
MERGE S1 S2' may be used. Of course the mesh patterns (divisions) on parts `S1' and
`S2' must fit otherwise the connection will not be complete.
Note that a point for which a node will not be generated can be merged with another part.
The point can then be used to associate information (eg: loading data) with the coincident
node.
Return Level: `MESHING MERGE'
Examples:
1. MESHING MERGE ME77 P1 S3
A node at P1 will be merged with any on S3 within the tolerance. The resultant
merge will be called ME77.
2. MESHING MERGE L1 L2
Any nodes on L1 will be merged with any on L2 within the tolerance. The resultant
merge will be given an automatically generated name.
19/08/1999

See Also:
`CONSTRUCT MERGE' , section 2.3.4, page 56

19/08/1999
281
282
MESHING
MERGE ALL/setname
Merge nodes within tolerance
2.12.6 MESHING MERGE ALL/setname [Control]

This command is used after the `MESHING GENERATE' command to merge any nodes
within a certain distance of each other. The defaults are that the merge tolerance will be
as specified in the `CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE' command, the merges will not
be saved, and that degenerate elements may be created during the operation. The number
of degenerate elements existing after the `MESHING MERGE' operation will be given
in a warning message and the location of any degenerate elements will be shown by red
markers.
Control
NOSAVE
SAVE
NOCHECK
CHECK
Tolerance
Comments
(The default). The merges identified during the operation will not be
stored. This means that they will be lost if the model is remeshed, and
the ' MESHING MERGE' command will have to be reissued. This is the
fastest way of working, but the user needs to remember to carry out a
final merge once the model is complete.
The merges identified during the operation will be stored in the data base
and will be used to automatically merge nodes in any subsequent
meshing operations. This may result in longer mesh regeneration
times for large models.
(The default). The creation of degenerate elements will not be prevented
during the merging operation; the total number of degenerate elements
will be given on completion of this command. Degenerate elements will
be highlighted with red markers. This is the fastest way of working.
The creation of degenerate elements will be prevented; the merge
tolerance may be temporarily reduced during the operation to half the
distance between the two closest nodes on an element. A warning will be
given if the tolerance is overridden.
The tolerance to be used in the merging operation. The default is
the current value of the absolute tolerance as set with
`CONSTRUCT SPACE TOLERANCE ABSOLUTE'
Where nodes are merged a white merging symbol will be used to provide graphical feedback for this operation. This may be controlled with the ' UTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK'
command.
When ' MESHING MERGE setname' is used the merging operation will be limited to the
nodes on the geometry in the specified set.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. MESHING MERGE ALL
Any nodes within the current tolerance will be merged. Merges will not be saved. If
degenerate elements are created then a warning will be issued.
2. MESHING MERGE ALL 0.001
Any nodes within 0.001 will be merged. Merges will not be saved and if degenerate
elements are created a warning will be issued.
3. MESHING MERGE SE8 SAVE
Any nodes on part SE8 within the current tolerance will be merged and the merges
will be saved and used in subsequent mesh generation operations. If degenerate
elements are created then a warning will be issued.
4. MESHING MERGE SE8 SAVE CHECK 0.001
The meshing merge operation will be carried out on set SE8 with an initial tolerance
of 0.001 but a preliminary check for degeneracy will be made possibly resulting in a
reduction of this initial tolerance. Warnings will be given. Merges will be saved for
use in subsequent meshing operations.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT MERGE' , section 2.3.4, page 56

ÙTILITY TABULATE MESH MERGE' , section 2.18.9, page 516
ÙTILITY DELETE MERGE' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK MESHING MERGE ' , section 2.18.8.6,
page 503
19/08/1999
283
284
MESHING
NODE
Create or change the co-ordinates of a node
2.12.7 MESHING NODE Definition

The `MESHING NODE' command is used to create or change the coordinates of a nodal
point. The co-ordinates are interpreted in the current coordinate system as defined by the
command `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' .
If a new node is being created then it must take the next available node number and is
unaffected by the MESHING OPTIONS NODE command.
Return Level: `MESHING NODE'
Examples:
1. MESHING NODE 6 5.6 0.0 10.2
Node number 6 is given the coordinates X=5.6, Y=0.0 and Z=10.2.
19/08/1999
285
MESHING
OPTIONS
Additional controls on meshing
2.12.8 MESHING OPTIONS

The `MESHING OPTIONS' command gives additional controls on mesh generation.
`MESHING OPTIONS' has the following sub-commands:
2.12.8.1
2.12.8.2
2.12.8.3
2.12.8.4
2.12.8.5
2.12.8.6
2.12.8.7
19/08/1999
ALGORITH
ELEMENT
LOCK
MIDNODES
NODE
UNLOCK
CHECK
select type of meshing algorithm.

control start of element numbering.
control of mesh locking.
control of mid-side nodes.
control start of node numbering.
control of mesh unlocking.
checking and automatic control of meshing parameters.
286
MESHING OPTIONS
ALGORITH
select type of meshing algorithm
2.12.8.1 MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH Algorithm Surface [Control]

This command controls the selection of the meshing algorithm to be used on the specified
surfaces of the model.
Surface = the name of a surface or set containing surfaces
Algorithm
Control
MAPPED
DELAUNAY
[Density]
PAVING
[Density]
DEFAULT
REGION
Comments
This is for use with 3 and 4 sided surfaces in FEMGEN. It will produce a
conventional mapped mesh on the surfaces given. If the surface given has
been created with `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION' then ' MAPPED'
will be ignored.
This will create a triangular free mesh on any type of FEMGEN surface.
The optional density parameter relates the largest element side on the
boundary to the size of the internal elements. The default for the density
parameter is 1, and allowable values are between 0.1 and 10.
The effect of the density parameter on the mesh can be seen in Examples 1,
2 and 3 below. Overall control of the mesh on a region is therefore
provided by the number of divisions on the boundary and the density
parameter.
Selecting this algorithm will set the generic element type for the surface
to be TR3 unless a triangular element type has already been selected.
This is the default meshing algorithm and will create a quadrilateral free
mesh on any type of FEMGEN surface. The optional density parameter
allows the user to control the coarseness of the internal mesh. The
default for the density parameter is 1, with allowable vaules ranging from
0.1 to 2.
Overall control of the mesh on a region is therefore provided by the
number of divisions and the density parameter. The effect of the density
parameter on the mesh is illustrated in Examples 4, 5 and 6 below.
Selecting this algorithm will set the generic element type for the surface
to be QU4 unless a quadrilateral element type has already been selected.
This command will set the default meshing alogrithm for surfaces created
with the command ' GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION' . The command
does not alter the algorithm attributed to any exisying surfaces.
Two options are available for this command; DELAUNAY or PAVING.
If the default algorithm is not specified, then the meshing algorithm
is automatically set to PAVING.
Surfaces may be selected from the keyboard or with the cursor. A set of surfaces may also
be given.
Setting an algorithm for a surface or set of surfaces resets the density value to 1.
Note 1: The default meshing algorithm may be set using a FEMGV resource; for more
information on resources please refer to the FEMGV Installation and Customisation Guide.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH DELAUNAY S23
Specifies that a triangular free mesh will be generated on S23.
Figure 2.89: A mesh with the default density of 1

2. MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH DELAUNAY S23 1.3
Specifies that a triangluar free mesh will be generated on S23 with the internal elements having edge lengths based on 1.3 times the size of the largest element on the
boundary.
Figure 2.90: The effect of a larger density value
19/08/1999
287
288

3. MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH DELAUNAY S23 .8
Specifies that a triangluar free mesh will be generated on S23 with the internal elements having edge lengths on 0.8 times the size of the largest element on the boundary.
Figure 2.91: The effect of a smaller density value

4. MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH PAVING S23
Specifies that a quadrilateral free mesh will be generated on S23.
Figure 2.92: A quadrilateral free mesh with the default density of 1
19/08/1999

5. MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH PAVING S23 .7
Specifies that a quadrilateral free mesh will be generated on S23 with the internal
elements having edge lengths based on 0.7 times the average size of the elements on
the boundary.
Figure 2.93: The effect of a smaller density value on a quadrilateral free mesh
6. MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH PAVING S23 1.3
Specifies that a quadrilateral free mesh will be generated on S23 with the internal
elements having edge lengths based on 1.3 times the average size of the elements on
the boundary.
Figure 2.94: The effect of a larger density value on a quadrilateral free mesh
7. MESHING OPTIONS ALGORITH DEFAULT REGION DELAUNAY
Specifies that all surfaces to be created with ' GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION'
will be meshed using the Delaunay algorithm.
See Also:
19/08/1999
289
290

19/08/1999
291
MESHING OPTIONS
ELEMENT
Set start number for element generation
2.12.8.2 MESHING OPTIONS ELEMENT Start element

This command is used to specify the first number to be used for elements generated by the
program. The default start number is 1.
Note 1: Archive files Note that this offset is not stored if an archive file is written with
the ÙTILITY WRITE ARCHIVE' command.
Examples:
1. MESHING OPTIONS ELEMENT 50
Sets the start number for generated elements as 50. Thus elements generated will be
numbered 50, 51, 52, 53 .......
See Also:

`MESHING OPTIONS NODE' , section 2.12.8.5, page 295
19/08/1999
292
MESHING OPTIONS
LOCK
Control of mesh locking
2.12.8.3 MESHING OPTIONS LOCK Part

This command controls locking of the mesh.
Part
The mesh generated so far is locked up to and including the highest numbered
node and element on the specified part. Thus the mesh on parts other than
the specified part may be also locked.
When the mesh on a part has been locked then it is not possible to change the geometry
of that part, or change any meshing controls that would effect the mesh on that part. The
mesh can be unlocked by the command `MESHING OPTIONS UNLOCK' .
Examples:
1. MESHING OPTIONS LOCK SUR6
The mesh generated so far is locked upto and including the highest node and element
number on part SUR6.
19/08/1999
293
MESHING OPTIONS
MIDNODES
Control position of mid-side nodes
2.12.8.4 MESHING OPTIONS MIDNODES Control

This command controls the calculation of the position of mid-side nodes.
Control
Comments
MAPPED
all mid-side nodes will be subject to mapping on to the actual shape of

the surface. This is the default, and should be used for shells and solids,
but is not actually necessary for swept or projected surfaces where all the
generated nodes will automatically be placed on the surface.
all mid-side nodes will be placed exactly half-way between the corner
nodes.
mid-side nodes on the bounding geometric lines of a surface will be
placed on the actual bounding lines, but the internal mid-side nodes
(ie those not on bounding geometric lines) will be placed on straight
lines joining the corner nodes of elements. This is useful in 2-D when
the internal mesh is distorted because of topological rather than
geometric considerations.
EXACT
ON-LINE
Figure 2.95: Mapped mid-side nodes for QU8 elements
19/08/1999
294
Figure 2.96: Exact mid-side nodes for QU8 elements
Figure 2.97: Online mid-side nodes for QU8 elements
Examples:
1. MESHING OPTIONS MIDNODES MAPPED
Specifies that all mid-side nodes will be subject to mapping on to the actual shape of
the surface.
See Also:

19/08/1999
295
MESHING OPTIONS
NODE
Set start number for node generation
2.12.8.5 MESHING OPTIONS NODE Start node

This command is used to specify the first number to be used for nodes generated by the
program. The default start number is 1.
Note 1: Archive files Note that this offset is not stored if an archive file is written with
the ÙTILITY WRITE ARCHIVE' command.
Examples:
1. MESHING OPTIONS NODE 100
Sets the start number for generated nodes as 100. Thus node generated will be numbered 100, 101, 102, 103 .......
See Also:

`MESHING OPTIONS ELEMENT' , section 2.12.8.2, page 291
19/08/1999
296
MESHING OPTIONS
UNLOCK
Control of mesh unlocking
2.12.8.6 MESHING OPTIONS UNLOCK Part

This command controls unlocking of the mesh.
Part
The mesh on the model generated so far is unlocked down to and including
the lowest numbered node and element on the specified part. Thus the mesh
on parts other than the specified part may be also unlocked.
When the mesh on a part has been locked then it is not possible to change the geometry of
that part, or change any meshing controls that would effect the mesh on that part.
Examples:
1. MESHING OPTIONS UNLOCK SUR6
The mesh generated so far is unlocked down to and including the lowest node and
element number on part SUR6.
19/08/1999
297
MESHING OPTIONS
CHECK
Automatic checking and control of meshing attributes
2.12.8.7 MESHING OPTIONS CHECK Control ON/OFF

This command is used to enable (or alternatively disable) a meshing pre-check facility.
Control
GBODY
Comments
[ON]
[OFF]
Enable the general body pre-checking facility.

When a general body is created, (or alternatively when one of its defining sets
is altered) with the pre-check switched on, the meshing attributes (algorithm
and element type) of each defining surface are checked automatically. If, for a
given surface, either attribute is not compatible with the meshing algorithm
associated with the general body, then the relevant meshing attribute is changed
to an appropriate setting.
Disable the general body pre-checking facility.
Note 1: Default for general body pre-check

By default, the general body pre-check facility is switched on. This may be
reversed by setting the resource variable, ' MESH.CHK GBODY' to FALSE.
Note 2: Locked meshes
A general body pre-check will not redefine a surface's meshing attributes if the
mesh attached to the surface is locked.
Examples:
1. MESHING OPTIONS CHECK GBODY OFF
Disable the general body pre-check facility.
2. MESHING OPTIONS CHECK GBODY ON
Enable the general body pre-check facility. A general body that is created subsequent
to this command, will have the definition of its underlying surfaces scrutinized and,
if necessary, redefined such that the surfaces have meshing attributes consistent with
the alogrithm attached to the general body.
See Also:
`MESHING OPTIONS LOCK' , section 2.12.8.3, page 292

`GEOMETRY BODY GENERAL' , section 2.8.1.7, page 181
19/08/1999
298
MESHING
RENUMBER
Re-number node numbers
2.12.9 MESHING RENUMBER Control

This command is used to re-number node numbers in order to improve solution time during
the analysis of the model.
Control
GLOBAL
Comments
[XYZ]
[YXZ]
[ZXY]
[XZY]
[YZX]
[ZYX]
The node numbers are re-numbered according

to the global coordinate system in increasing
`xyz' order as specified. The default is `XYZ' .
DIAGONAL
The direction of the maximum distance between points

is calculated and used to define the direction of the
z-axis to be used for re-numbering. The nodes will be
re-numbered in the plane normal to the z-axis.
Cord sys
The node numbers are re-numbered according to the

specified rectangular coordinate system. The
nodes will be numbered in increasing x direction,
then y direction and then z direction.
Examples:
1. MESHING RENUMBER CYS7
Re-numbers the nodes with reference to the rectangular coordinate system CYS7.
See Also:
19/08/1999
299
MESHING
SHAPE
Project generated surface nodes onto a shape or swept profile
2.12.10 MESHING SHAPE Part Projection

The `MESHING SHAPE' command is used to define the form of a surface by projection
onto a shape or swept profile.
All nodes that belong to a named part are projected onto a specified analytical shape or onto
a swept profile defined by a specified transformation. The projection is performed during
the mesh operation initiated by the command `MESHING GENERATE' . Only nodes internal to a surface are projected; nodes on the border of a surface are not projected.
This command is needed to produce the required mesh when the default surface blending
technique does not produce the desired effect, usually exhibited by a flattening out of the
surface towards its centre..
Part
The name of the part to be projected. This must be the name of a surface, the
name of a set or ÀLL' where ÀLL' means all surfaces in the model.
Projection
Comments
Shape name
Specifies the analytical shape onto which the internal nodes of

a surface are to be projected. (See note 1).
Specifies the rotational transformation that will define the swept
profile onto which the internal nodes of a surface are to be
projected. (See note 2).
Specifies that internal nodes of a surface are to be calculated by
blending between the surface edges. This is the default. (See
note 3).
Transform name
BOUNDARY
Return Level: `MESHING SHAPE'

Note 1: Projecting onto analytical shapes
The analytical shape onto which nodes of the surface are to be projected must
have been defined previously using the command `CONSTRUCT SHAPE' .
Note 2: Projecting onto a swept profile
The position of each internal node of a surface is calculated by projection onto
the surface formed by a rotational sweep of the first side of the surface. This
command is provided purely to allow reading of FEMGEN Àrchive' files that
contain surfaces that were generated by sweeps.
19/08/1999
300

Note 3: The BOUNDARY command
The `BOUNDARY' command is used to de-activate projection onto a shape or
swept profile. This may be required if part of a swept surface is moved such that
its position no longer corresponds to that defined by the sweep transformation.
Examples:
1. MESHING SHAPE S1 CYL1
Project the nodes generated on surface S1 onto analytical shape CYL1.
See Also:

19/08/1999
301
MESHING
TYPES
Define the type of elements to be generated
2.12.11 MESHING TYPES Part [El type] [El variant]

The `MESHING TYPES' command is used to define the type of element that will be created on existing parts of the geometry when a mesh is generated, it does not set a default
type for future geometry creation.
Selection of the specific element types required by a particular FEM package is achieved
by using either the generic element type and an element variant or by using a specific FE
package element name.
Part
El type
ALL
POINTS
STRAIGHT
ARC
SPLINE
3SIDES
4SIDES
REGION
4SURFS
5SURFS
6SURFS
PRISM
GBODY
point name
Line name
Surface name
Body name
Set name
Any-type or NONE
P-EL or NONE
1D-type or NONE
1D-type or NONE
1D-type or NONE
2D-type or NONE
2D-type or NONE
2D-type or NONE
3D-type or NONE
3D-type or NONE
3D-type or NONE
3D-type or NONE
3D-type or NONE
P-EL or NONE
1D-type or NONE
2D-type or NONE
3D-type or NONE
Any type or NONE
Return Level: `MESHING TYPES' except for Part ÀLL' which returns to the top level.
Note 1: FEMGEN generic element types

Full details of the generic element types available in FEMGEN are given in
Appendix C of the User Manual Appendices.
Note 2: Element types for ÀLL' and `Set name'
In these two cases, only parts with appropriate geometry will be assigned an
element type and variant.
Note 3: Default Element types
When lines are created the default situation is that as long as no surfaces exist
in the model, all lines are given the element type `BE2' . When the first surface
is defined these element types are cleared and a `QU4' element type is given to
surfaces as they are created (unless another suitable element type is given in the
19/08/1999
302

surface definition). A similar change is made to the surface element definitions
when the first body is defined.
19/08/1999

Note 4: Element type selection
The operation of this commmand depends on whether an analysis specific environment has been selected.
FEMGEN Neutral environment
When the FEMGEN neutral environment is active (as shown by Ànalysis: NEUTRAL' in the monitor) then element types are selected with the generic element
type and, optionally, a variant number.
FEM Specific analysis environment
When a specific FEM analysis environment is active (as shown by Ànalysis:
FEM package name, then element types can be selected in three ways:
1. From the menu select a generic element type followed by the required
element name from the list shown.
2. Use the command line to give the required finite element name for Èl type'
3. Use a generic Èl name' and a variant number.
A specific FEM analysis environment can be selected with the `PROPERTY FE
Program name' command or by using the environment variable `FG PRE INT=fem
package' . Please refer to the Workstation User Guide for more information on
environment variables.
See also Note 6 below.
Note 5: The Èl variant' control
The Èl variant' parameter is an integer selecting one of the possible element
variants in the desired FEM-program; the default 1.
It is possible to select different defaults for the element variants by use of the
Resource Manager file. (Please refer to the Installation and Customisation Guide
for more details).
For each supported FEM-program and each FEMGEN geometric element type,
there are a number of element variants. The element types that are supported and
their variant numbers can be listed with the command ÙTILITY TABULATE
FE [Program Name] [El type]' .
Note 6: Point elements
A point element `P-EL' may be specified for a point. Only a single element type
is available although variants may be specified. At no stage are points given a
default element type.
Note 7: Element types for regions
Only TR3, TR6, TR9 or TR15 elements may be specified for surfaces created
with the `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION' command and with meshing algorithm set to DELAUNAY.
Only QU4, QU9, QU9 or QU12 elements may be specified for surfaces created with the `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION' command and with meshing
algorithm set to PAVING.
Note 8: Element types for tetrahedral bodies Only TE4, TE10 and TE16 elements
may be generated in tetrahedral (four surface bodies) and only one element per
FEMGEN body can be created.
19/08/1999
303
304

Note 9: Element types for prisms
Only PE6, PE15 or PE24 elements may be specified for bodies (prisms) created by sweeping surfaces created with the `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION'
command and with meshing algorithm set to DELAUNAY.
Only HE8, HE20, HE27 or HE32 elements may be specified for bodies (prisms)
created by sweeping surfaces created with the `GEOMETRY SURFACE REGION' command and with meshing algorithm set to PAVING.
Note 10: Element types for general bodies
Only TE4, TE10, TE16 elements may be specified for general bodies.
Note 11: Removing element types
The `MESHING TYPES Part NONE' will prevent elements being generated on
the named part.
Rules for Divisions
1. The number of divisions along a side must be <100.
2. A side with 1 mid-side node must have an even number of divisions.
3. A side with 2 mid-side nodes must have a number of divisions that is divisible by
three.
4. For TR3 elements there are no restrictions.
5. For QU4 elements the sum of the divisions around a surface must be an even number.
6. For QU8 and QU9 elements the sum of the divisions around a surface must be a
multiple of 4 (because of rules 2 and 5).
7. For QU12 elements the sum of the divisions around a surface must be a multiple of
6 (because of rules 3 and 5).
8. For bodies, the divisions on the second surface (the top) must correspond to the
divisions on the first surface (the bottom) and the rules above apply for each surface
of the body even if no surface elements are generated.
Also, all sides connecting the top and bottom surfaces must have an equal number of
divisions.
Examples:
1. MESHING TYPES S1 QU8
Elements on surface S1 will be type QU8 and by default will be variant 1.
2. MESHING TYPES ALL HE20 2
All 3D Elements will be type HE20 variant 2.
3. MESHING TYPES ALL C3D20
All 3D Elements will be ABAQUS element type C3D20, provided that the ABAQUS
analysis environment has been selected.
4. MESHING TYPES L1 BE2 4
Elements on line L1 will be type BE2. Variant 4 will be used in analysis.
5. MESHING TYPES 3SIDES TR6 2
All elements on all triangular surfaces will be TR6 variant 3.
19/08/1999

6. MESHING TYPES REGION TR15
All elements on all regions will be type TR15.
7. MESHING TYPES PRISM SOLID73
All elements of all prisms will be ANSYS element type SOLID73, provided that the
ANSYS analysis environment has been selected.
See Also:
`GEOMETRY BODY' , section 2.8.1, page 170

`GEOMETRY SURFACE' , section 2.8.10, page 227
`GEOMETRY LINE' , section 2.8.6, page 195
ÙTILITY TABULATE FE' , section 2.18.9, page 516
`PROPERTY FE' , section 2.14.3, page 362
19/08/1999
305
306
19/08/1999
2.13. PRIMARY COMMAND PRESENT
307
PRESENT
Present results
2.13 PRIMARY COMMAND PRESENT

The command `PRESENT' is used to initiate the presentation of results, and is only available within the results assessment module FEMVIEW.
`PRESENT' has the following secondary commands:
2.13.1
2.13.2
PRESENT CONTOUR
PRESENT DIAGRAM
2.13.3
2.13.4
2.13.5
2.13.6
PRESENT GRAPH
PRESENT NUMERIC
PRESENT OPTIONS
PRESENT PEAKS
2.13.7
2.13.8
PRESENT SHAPE
PRESENT VECTORS
- contour plots (iso-lines)

- shear force diagrams
- bending moment diagrams
- graph plotting
- numerical values
- controls on the `PRESENT' commands
- minimum and maximum values
- highlight concentrations
- displaced shape
- vector plots
Values considered for Presentation

Results are presented for those elements and nodes in the current results set (see `RESULTS RANGE SET' , section 2.15.8, page 464). Additional controls on the values in
the results set considered for presentation are given by the `RESULTS RANGE MATERIAL/SURFACE/VALUES' commands; which can be used to request specific material(s),
surface(s) and a range of values as filters on the presentation command.
However, certain of the `PRESENT' commands allow a range of elements (or nodes) to
be specified in the command itself and, where this facility is used, results for the specified
range of entities will be presented regardless of whether they are in the current results set
or not, and generally speaking, regardless of the `MATERIAL/SURFACE/VALUES' filters
currently applied. The results set will be unchanged.
Presentation modes available with each results type

For nodal, element nodal, Gaussian and element invariant results, tables showing the presentation modes available with the various view modes are given below.
19/08/1999
308
CONTOUR
NUMERIC
PEAKS
GRAPH
SHAPE
VECTORS
EDGES
(1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MESH FACES HIDDEN LINE SECTION

Yes
Yes
Yes
(2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
specified node, line or results graph
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(3)
DEVEL
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
(4)
Table 2.1: Nodal results
CONTOUR
NUMERIC
PEAKS
GRAPH
SHAPE
VECTORS
DIAGRAM
EDGES
(1)
Yes
Yes
/
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
(2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
specified element, line or results graph
/
/
/
/
/
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(3)
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
/
DEVEL
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
(4)
/
Table 2.2: Element nodal results
CONTOUR(4)
NUMERIC
PEAKS
GRAPH
SHAPE
VECTORS
DIAGRAM
EDGES
(1)
Yes
Yes
/
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
/
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
/
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
/
specified element, line or results graph
/
/
/
/
/
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
/
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
/
DEVEL
Yes
Yes
Yes
/
(4)
/
Table 2.3: Gaussian and element invariant results
Notes:
1. Only on 2D elements. The picture obtained is equivalent to `VIEW MESH' , followed
by `VIEW OPTIONS EDGES OUTLINE' .
2. Only for `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR FILL' or `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR EDGES' .
3. Only displacements.
4. Only principal stresses.
19/08/1999
309
PRESENT
CONTOUR
Display contour plots
2.13.1 PRESENT CONTOUR Mode [Range]

This command draws contours of result values.
Mode
Range
Comments
DATUM
v1 STEPS v2
Using v1 as a datum, values in steps of + and - v2

from this datum are contoured.
`n' contours will be drawn at equal increments
above and below the datum `v1' . The increment
is chosen according to the current minimum and
maximum values.
`n' contours will be drawn at equal increments
between the current minimum and maximum
result values. If `n' is not specified a default
value (initially 10) is used (see note 5).
Each value will be contoured.
With `v1' as the 1st contour, contours will
be drawn at `v3' increments until `v2' .
`n' contours (inclusive of a contour at `v1'
and `v2' ) will be drawn at equal increments
between `v1' and `v2' .
v1 LEVELS n
LEVELS
[n]
VALUES
FROM
v1 [v2]...
v1 TO v2 STEPS v3
v1 TO v2 LEVELS n
Figure 2.98: Filled contours
Examples:
1. PRESENT CONTOUR DATUM 0.0 STEPS 1.0
If the minimum value were 7.5 and the maximum 10.2 then values 8.0, 9.0 and 10.0
would be contoured.
2. PRESENT CONTOUR LEVELS 20
20 equal increment contours will be drawn from the minimum to the maximum value
19/08/1999
310

of the current result component. The actual minimum and maximum values are not
contoured.
3. PRESENT CONTOUR VALUES 1.1 1.2 1.5
Contour corresponding to the values 1.1, 1.2 and 1.5 will be displayed.
4. PRESENT CONTOUR FROM 2.5 TO 3.3 STEPS 0.1
Contours will be displayed at 0.1 intervals in the specified result range, e.g. 2.5, 2.6,
2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3.
C
C
B
B
C
B
E
D
C
B
E
D
B
C
A
C
E
E
D
D
B
D
E
C
E
D
F
G
D
D
G
G
F
E
H
F
G
F
H
I
G
G
J
Figure 2.99: Line contours
Note 1: Effect of view mode when contouring element faces

Where the faces of elements are to be contoured (see `PRESENT OPTIONS
CONTOUR FILL' and `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES' ), with view
modes (see: `VIEW' ) other than `VIEW HIDDEN' , the faces of the model will
be contoured in the order in which the elements occur in the database, so with
some models, the faces at the back of the model may be contoured after faces
nearer to the observer which will produce a confusing picture.
The effect of contouring element faces with certain view modes is as follows:
View Mode
EDGES
HIDDEN
MESH
Region Contoured
With 2D and shell models all element faces in the current
results set are contoured. With 3D solid models, because
no individual element faces are defined, an error message
will be generated.
All drawn element faces in the results set are contoured.
The order of contouring ensures a full hidden line contour
picture.
All drawn element faces in the results set are contoured.
Note that with 3D solid models ìnternal' element faces
are drawn and so will be contoured.
Note 2: Determination of Maximum and Minimum Values

The default condition is that the maximum and minimum values used by the
contouring algorithms refer to the current results set. If no results set has been
defined the results set equates to the current model sub-set, which by default is
the whole model. The user can explicitly request that the maximum and minimum values used refer to the whole model by entering the command `RESULTS
RANGE GLOBAL' ; or refer to the current results set by entering the command
19/08/1999

`RESULTS RANGE LOCAL' . If a cross-section has been defined the command
`RESULTS RANGE LOCAL SECTION' will request that the maximum and
minimum values used refer to the cross-section.
Note 3: Interpolation of Values
The values used to produce contours of nodal, element nodal or Gaussian results
are calculated by linear interpolation from the values at the nodal points. (When
contouring Gauss point values, the vertex node of an element will have been
given the result value of its nearest Gauss point. Values at element mid-side
nodes are taken as the average of the two appropriate vertex nodes. However,
if the mesh is being viewed in filled or shaded mode then only one value per
element will be used. This limitation may be overcome by use of the `RESULTS
CALCULATE EXTRAPOLATE' command.)
When contouring element invariant values no interpolation is performed (this is
an option with other values, see `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR' ); and each
element is represented by a single colour.
Note 4: Annotation
When line contours are being displayed (see: `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES' ) the default condition is that each contour line will be annotated,
on average, every every fifth segment of its length. If the number of contour lines
exceeds 26 then some contour lines will not be annotated. The user may alter
the frequency of annotation (see: `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES
KEYLINE' ).
Note 5: Changing defaults
The default for `PRESENT CONTOUR LEVELS' is that 10 contours will be
drawn. The default may be changed via the command `PRESENT OPTIONS
CONTOUR LEVELS DEFAULT n'
See Also:
`PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR' , section 2.13.5.1, page 329

`RESULTS CALCULATE EXTRAPOL' , section 2.15.1.7, page 438
`RESULTS RANGE' , section 2.15.8, page 464
19/08/1999
311
312
PRESENT
DIAGRAM
Display beam graphs on the mesh
2.13.2 PRESENT DIAGRAM [[FACTOR] Factor]

This command provides for beam graphs to be superimposed on the mesh.
Beam elements can be graphed in three ways:
1. For element nodal results; a graph can be displayed showing the variation of the
currently selected results component at the nodes of the elements.
2. For Gauss point results; a graph can be displayed showing the variation of the currently selected results component at the Gauss points of the elements.
3. For element nodal results, where loading information is available for beams and the
element nodal results have the correct result types; FEMVIEW will calculate and
display the appropriate shear force or bending moment diagram.
Note 1: Scale factor
If no scale factor is specified FEMVIEW will scale the vectors so that the length
of the maximum vector, if viewed normal to its length will be approximately 10
mm. The scale factor calculated by the program is displayed. This should be
used as a basis for new factors.
Note 2: Axes system convention
The positive direction is determined from the local X-direction (from node 1 to
node 2), and the Z-direction (out of the screen), with the positive Y-direction as
for a right-handed system. For example, if the beam is defined from left to right
on the screen the positive values will be above the beam and the negative values
below the beam.
Examples:
1. PRESENT DIAGRAM
The graphs for all the beams are superimposed on the mesh.
See Also:
`PRESENT GRAPH BEAM' , section 2.13.3.1, page 314
19/08/1999
313
PRESENT
GRAPH
Display of graphs of results
2.13.3 PRESENT GRAPH Mode

This command enables bending moment and shear force diagrams on beams to be drawn,
graphs along lines through the model to be plotted, graphs across sets of results at a particular node or element to be plotted, or graphs of one results attribute against another to
be drawn. Each of these distinct procedures is invoked by specifying the graphing mode as
follows:
Mode
2.13.3.1
BEAM
2.13.3.2
2.13.3.3
2.13.3.4
2.13.3.5
ELEMENT
LINE
NODE
PROMPT
2.13.3.6
RESULTS
bending moment and shear force diagrams and graphing results

on beam elements.
graphing across several sets of results at an element.
graphing along a line through the model.
graphing across several sets of results at a node.
a question and answer session is initiated allowing a variety
of graphs to be generated.
graphing of one results attribute against another.
Since the form of the commands for each of the graphing modes differs considerably, each
command is considered separately below. Additional control over graphing is given by the
`PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH' command.
The default position for the monitor information for graphs is the top right corner of the
viewport, in order that axis scaling information is not obscured. The position of the monitor
can be changed with `DRAWING CONTENTS MONITOR ...'
19/08/1999
314
PRESENT GRAPH
BEAM
Bending moment and shear force diagrams for beams
2.13.3.1 PRESENT GRAPH BEAM Elements

This command will produce a graph showing the variation of the currently selected results
attribute along the specified beam element(s). Up to 1000 beams may be superimposed on
one graph. The required beam elements can be an ÒLD' list (the last element or elements
to be graphed) or they can be specified as part of the command.
Beam elements can be graphed in three ways:
1. For element nodal results a graph is displayed showing the variation of the currently
selected results component at the nodes of the elements.
2. For element Gaussian results a graph is displayed showing the variation of the currently selected results component at the Gauss points of the elements.
3. For element nodal results with the correct results type and where loading information
is available, the appropriate shear force or bending moment diagrams are calculated
and displayed.
Examples:
1. PRESENT GRAPH BEAM 10 TO 20 STEP 5
A graph for beams 10, 15 and 20 is drawn.
See Also:
`PRESENT DIAGRAM' , section 2.13.2, page 312

`PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH' , section 2.13.5.2, page 333
19/08/1999
315
PRESENT GRAPH
ELEMENT
Variation at an element
2.13.3.2 PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT Elements

This command will produce a graph showing the variation of results at a specified element
(see note 2) across the range of loadcases specified in the `RESULTS LOADCASE' command. If more than one element is specified then graphs for each (up to a limit of 1000) will
be superimposed. The required elements can be an ÒLD' list (the last element or elements
to be graphed), they can be specified as part of the command, or they can be taken from a
specified set (see note 1).
Note 1: Specifying a set

If a set is specified that is a node set, then the elements used in the graph will be
all those elements that have a node in the set.
Note 2: Element results
For each specified element, by default one representative results value is taken.
This can be set to be either the (absolute) maximum, (absolute) minimum, mean
value, or nth value of the results at each of the element's nodes or Gauss points
using the command `RESULTS RANGE EL-RESULT' .
However, if a list of elements is entered as part of the `PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT' command, then after each element number the option is given to specify what value for that element is to be used. The choice available is `NODE n' ,
`GAUSS n' , `MAX [ABSOLUTE]' , `MIN [ABSOLUTE]' , or `MEAN' , making
it possible to graph variation at specific element nodes (for elementwise nodal
results) or specific Gauss points (for elementwise Gaussian results) as well as
extreme or mean values for an element. If `NODE' is specified, then the node
number entered is the model node number and the user should ensure that the
node is actually part of the associated element. If `GAUSS' is specified, then
the Gauss point number is local to the associated element and refers to the order
in which the Gauss point results were entered into FEMVIEW
Note 3: Nodal results
This command is only available if the currently selected results attribute contains
element results. If nodal results have been selected then a warning message will
be produced and the user should use the command `PRESENT GRAPH NODE' .
Note 4: Graphs of more than one attribute
The results graphed will be the currently selected results superimposed with
any results previously added to the `RESULTS STACK' . In this way multiple
attribute graphs are possible, provided of course that all of the attributes to be
graphed are element results.
Note 5: Maximum number of loadcases
The maximum number of loadcases that can be graphed across is 1000.
Note 6: Input of results data to FEMVIEW
For a time, frequency, or load step related loadcase, the results should be sub19/08/1999
316

mitted to FEMVIEW in ascending order of time, frequency, or load step within
the loadcase.
Note 7: Graphs across static loadcases
If a range of static loadcases has been specified with the `RESULTS LOADCASE' command, then the graph will be plotted with a constant increment along
the x-axis.
Note 8: Graphs of results for multiple surfaces
Where there are results values for more than one surface, the required surface or
surfaces may be specified with the `RESULTS RANGE SURFACE' command.
If no surface number is specified then all of the surfaces encountered will be
used.
Examples:
1. PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT OLD
A graph of the currently selected results and those previously stored in the results
stack at the previously selected element(s) against loadcases is drawn.
2. PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT 1 TO 10
A graph of results at the specified elements against loadcases is drawn.
3. PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT 1 NODE 2 7 NODE 15 22 NODE 47
A graph of (elementwise nodal) results at the nodes 2, 15 and 47 in elements 1, 7 and
22 respectively is plotted against loadcases.
4. PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT 1 GAUSS 2 7 GAUSS 3 22 GAUSS 1
A graph of (elementwise Gaussian) results at the 2nd, 3rd and 1st Gauss points in
elements 1, 7 and 22 respectively is plotted against loadcases.
5. PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT 36 MAX 36 MIN
A graph of the maximum and minimum results values for element 36 against loadcases is drawn.
6. PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT bracket
A graph of results at the elements in the set `bracket' against loadcases is drawn.
See Also:
`PRESENT GRAPH NODE' , section 2.13.3.4, page 319

`RESULTS LOADCASE' , section 2.15.5, page 459
`RESULTS STACK' , section 2.15.9, page 468
19/08/1999
317
PRESENT GRAPH
LINE
Variation along a line
2.13.3.3 PRESENT GRAPH LINE Line definition

This command will produce a graph showing the variation of results along a specified line.
The line can be defined as part of the command in the same way as for `CONSTRUCT
LINE' , it can be the ÒLD' line (the last line to be constructed, viewed or graphed along),
or it can be specified by name for lines previously saved to the database.
Note 1: Superimposition of graphs

Where a range of loadcases has been specified, the graphs for each set of results
will be superimposed. Graphs for a maximum of 1000 loadcases can be superimposed in this way.
Also, more than one named line may be specified as part of the command, and
if so graphs along each of these lines will be superimposed. Graphs for a maximum of 20 named lines can be superimposed in this way.
attribute graphs are possible.
Note 3: Calculation of distance
The distance along the line is calculated as the cumulative distance between each
node or element centroid, in the order that they were specified. If the nodes or
elements are given in a different order then this distance will change.
Note 4: Graphs of nodal results
Graphs of nodal results are only possible along a line of nodes or a free line.
Note 5: Graphs of element nodal results
Graphs of element nodal results are possible along all three types of line.
For graphs along a line of nodes, the database is searched to find elements with
edge definitions that match the segments (e.g.: n1 to n2) of the specified line.
All elements encountered in the database with the appropriate edge nodes for a
line segment are selected and the results for these elements used in the graph.
Therefore several lines may be drawn on the graph for each segment of the specified line. Thus, where a line is common to more than one element, to ensure
that only the results for the required elements are graphed, these elements can
be placed into a set, which should then be viewed before issuing the `PRESENT
GRAPH LINE' command.
For graphs along a line of elements, one representative results value is taken for
each element, which can be set to be either the (absolute) maximum, (absolute)
minimum, mean value or nth value of the results at each of the element's nodes
19/08/1999
318

using the command `RESULTS RANGE EL-RESULT' .
For graphs along a free line, results values at each element boundary that the line
passes though are interpolated. Discontinuities will occur where the line passes
outside the model.
Note 6: Graphs of element Gaussian results
Graphs of element Gaussian results are only possible along a line of elements.
For each specified element one representative results value is taken which can
be set to be either the (absolute) maximum, (absolute) minimum, mean value or
nth value of the results at each of the element's Gauss points using the command
`RESULTS RANGE EL-RESULT' .
Note 7: Graphs of element invariant results
Graphs of element invariant results are only possible along a line of elements.
Note 8: Graphs of nodal material dependent results
Where the results values are nodal material dependent, the required material
may be specified with the `RESULTS RANGE MATERIAL' command. If no
material number is specified then all of the materials encountered at each node
will be used, and the line may be discontinuous at material boundaries.
used.
Examples:
1. PRESENT GRAPH LINE OLD
stack for the selected loadcases against distance along the current line is drawn.
2. PRESENT GRAPH LINE NODES LIST 1 TO 20
A graph of results against distance along the line of nodes from 1 to 20 is drawn.
3. PRESENT GRAPH LINE top edge bot edge
A graph of results against distance along the previously saved lines `top edge' and
`bot edge' is drawn.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT LINE' , section 2.3.2, page 40

19/08/1999
319
PRESENT GRAPH
NODE
Variation at a node
2.13.3.4 PRESENT GRAPH NODE Nodes

This command will produce a graph showing the variation of results at a specified node
across the range of loadcases specified in the `RESULTS LOADCASE' command. If more
than one node is specified then graphs for each (up to a limit of 1000) will be superimposed.
The required nodes can be an ÒLD' list (the last node or nodes to be graphed), they can
be specified as part of the command, or they can be taken from a specified set (see note 1).
Note 1: Specifying a set

If a set is specified that is an element set, then the nodes used in the graph will
be all those nodes that define the elements in the set.
Note 2: Element results
This command is only available if the currently selected results attribute contains
nodal results. If element results have been selected then a warning message
will be produced and the user should use the command `PRESENT GRAPH
ELEMENT' .
attribute graphs are possible, provided of course that all of the attributes to be
graphed are nodal results.
Note 4: Maximum number of loadcases
The maximum number of loadcases that can be graphed across is 1000.
Note 5: Input of results data to FEMVIEW
For a time, frequency, or load step related loadcase, the results should be submitted to FEMVIEW in ascending order of time, frequency, or load step within
the loadcase.
Note 6: Graphs across static loadcases
If a range of static loadcases has been specified with the `RESULTS LOADCASE' command, then the graph will be plotted with a constant increment along
the x-axis.
Note 7: Graphs of nodal material dependent results
Where the results values are nodal material dependent, the required material
may be specified with the `RESULTS RANGE MATERIAL' command. If no
material number is specified then all of the materials encountered will be used.
used.
19/08/1999
320

Examples:
1. PRESENT GRAPH NODE OLD
stack at the previously selected node(s) against loadcases is drawn.
2. PRESENT GRAPH NODE 1 TO 10
A graph of results at the specified nodes against loadcases is drawn.
3. PRESENT GRAPH NODE bracket
A graph of results at the nodes in the set `bracket' against loadcases is drawn.
See Also:
`PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT' , section 2.13.3.2, page 315

19/08/1999
321
PRESENT GRAPH
PROMPT
Prompts user to specify required graph
2.13.3.5 PRESENT GRAPH PROMPT

This command initiates a question and answer sequence which allows the user to generate
graphs of variation over loadcases, variation along a line, and variation of one results attribute with respect to another.
Firstly, the user will be prompted to specify the X-axis of the graph. This will determine
what sort of graph will be drawn.
Choice
Comments
LOADCASES
The graph will be of results at a node or element against loadcases,

as in `PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT' or `PRESENT GRAPH NODE' .
The graph will be of results against distance along a line through
the model, as in `PRESENT GRAPH LINE' .
The graph will be of one results attribute against another, as in
`PRESENT GRAPH RESULTS' .
DISTANCE
RESULTS
If LOADCASES is selected then the user will be prompted to specify which loadcases are
to be graphed over. The user will then be prompted to enter the number of Y-axis results
attributes that are to be superimposed on the graph, followed by the definition of each one.
Finally the user will be prompted to specify which node(s) (if the results are nodal) or element(s) (if the results are element) the results are to be taken from. The choices here are
the same as in `PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT/NODE' .
If DISTANCE is selected then the user will be prompted to define the line(s) along which
results variation is to be plotted. The choices here are the same as in `PRESENT GRAPH
LINE' . The user will then be prompted to enter the number of Y-axis results attributes that
are to be superimposed on the graph, followed by the definition of each one. Finally the
user will be asked to specify the loadcase(s) that the results are to be taken from.
If RESULTS is selected then the user will be prompted to specify the X-axis results attribute. The user will then be prompted to enter the number of Y-axis results attributes that
are to be superimposed on the graph, followed by the definition of each one. The user will
then be prompted to select what they want to graph over, i.e. whether they want values to
be plotted over LOADCASES for a given node/element, or plotted at the nodes/elements
in the specified LINE(S) for a given loadcase. If LOADCASES is selected here, then the
user will receive the same prompts as if they had chosen LOADCASES at the first prompt,
except for those relating to the Y-axis attribute(s). If LINE(S) is selected here, then the user
will receive the same prompts as if they had chosen DISTANCE at the first prompt, except
for those relating to the Y-axis attribute(s).
Examples:
19/08/1999
322

1. PRESENT GRAPH PROMPT
SPECIFY X-AXIS => LOADCASES

FOR WHICH LOADCASES => ALL
NUMBER OF Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTES => 2
Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL STRESS S11
Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL STRAIN E11
FOR WHICH NODE(S) => 1
A graph of NODAL STRESS S11 and NODAL STRAIN E11 at node 1 against all
loadcases is drawn.
SPECIFY X-AXIS => DISTANCE

FOR WHICH LINE(S) => side top
Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL TEMP
FOR WHICH LOADCASE(S) => HEAT1 HEAT2
A graph of NODAL TEMP against distance along the lines `side' and `top' for loadcases HEAT1 and HEAT2 is drawn.
SPECIFY X-AXIS => RESULTS

X-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => ELEMENT STRAIN E11
Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => ELEMENT STRESS S11
GRAPH OVER => LOADCASES
FOR WHICH LOADCASES => LC1 1 TO LC1 10
FOR WHICH ELEMENT(S) => 3 5
A graph of ELEMENT STRESS S11 against ELEMENT STRAIN E11 for elements
3 and 5 over loadcase LC1 steps 1 to 10 is drawn.
SPECIFY X-AXIS => RESULTS

X-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL STRAIN YY
Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL STRESS YY
Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL DISPLACE YY
GRAPH OVER => LINE(S)
FOR WHICH LINE(S) => NODES LIST 10 TO 20
FOR WHICH LOADCASE(S) => L1
A graph of NODAL STRESS YY and NODAL DISPLACE YY against NODAL
STRAIN YY along a line of nodes from 10 to 20 for loadcase L1 is drawn.
19/08/1999
323
See Also:

`PRESENT GRAPH RESULTS' , section 2.13.3.6, page 324
40.
20.
V
E
L
O
C
I -20.
T
Y
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
V
X
-40.
-60.
MODEL : FLOWC
NODAL VELOCITY
VX
VARIATION ALONG A LINE

L1
-80.
L2
L3
L4
-100.
DISTANCE
Figure 2.100: Graph plots
19/08/1999
324
PRESENT GRAPH
RESULTS
Graph of one results attribute against another
2.13.3.6 PRESENT GRAPH RESULTS

This command initiates a question and answer sequence which allows the user to generate a
graph of one results attribute against another. It is very similar to the command `PRESENT
GRAPH PROMPT' .
Firstly the user will be prompted to specify the X-axis results attribute. The user will then
be prompted to enter the number of Y-axis results attributes that are to be superimposed
on the graph, followed by the definition of each one. The user will then be prompted to
select what they want to graph over, i.e. whether they want values to be plotted over LOADCASES for a given node/element, or plotted at the nodes/elements in the specified LINE(S)
for a given loadcase.
If LOADCASES is selected then the user will be prompted to specify which loadcases are
to be graphed over. Then the user will be prompted to specify which node(s) (if the results
are nodal) or element(s) (if the results are element) the results are to be taken from. The
choices here are the same as in `PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT/NODE' .
If LINE(S) is selected then the user will be prompted to define the line(s) along which
results variation is to be plotted. The choices here are the same as in `PRESENT GRAPH
LINE' . Then the user will be asked to specify the loadcase(s) that the results are to be taken
from.
Examples:
1. PRESENT GRAPH RESULTS
X-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => ELEMENT STRAIN E11

Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => ELEMENT STRESS S11
GRAPH OVER => LOADCASES
FOR WHICH LOADCASES => LC1 1 TO LC1 10
FOR WHICH ELEMENT(S) => 3 5
A graph of ELEMENT STRESS S11 against ELEMENT STRAIN E11 for elements
3 and 5 over loadcase LC1 steps 1 to 10 is drawn.
2. PRESENT GRAPH RESULTS
X-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL STRAIN YY

Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL STRESS YY
19/08/1999

Y-AXIS ATTRIBUTE => NODAL DISPLACE YY
GRAPH OVER => LINE(S)
FOR WHICH LINE(S) => NODES LIST 10 TO 20
FOR WHICH LOADCASE(S) => L1
A graph of NODAL STRESS YY and NODAL DISPLACE YY against NODAL
STRAIN YY along a line of nodes from 10 to 20 for loadcase L1 is drawn.
See Also:

`PRESENT GRAPH PROMPT' , section 2.13.3.5, page 321
19/08/1999
325
326
PRESENT
NUMERIC
Display numerical information on the mesh
2.13.4 PRESENT NUMERIC [Range]

This command will display numerical values of the current component of analysis results.
Also the graphics cursor may be used to enquire the numeric value of results at a particular
node or element.
Range
Comments
VIEWMODE
n1 n2 n3 . . .
n1 TO n2
n1 TO n2 STEPS n3
ALL
It is possible to specify a range, and this is interpreted

as a range of nodes for nodal results, or of elements for
element results.
/PICK
See Note 3.
Note 1: Positioning of displayed values

The default condition is that 3 significant digits will be output. If required, the
user may request up to 7 significant digits, see `PRESENT OPTIONS SIGNIF' .
Nodal results are displayed adjacent to their associated nodal point. A node that
is on a material discontinuity will, for results that are materially related, have a
value displayed for each material type present at the node. In this case the values
are tabulated and suffixed by the material number, for example:
7.53M1
7.23M3
The positions at which these tabulated values are displayed do not indicate to
which side of the discontinuity they refer.
Element nodal results are displayed adjacent to their associated nodal point but
indented towards the centre of the element, element Gaussian (integration) point
results are adjacent to their associated Gauss point, and element invariant results
are displayed at the centre of the element.
Note 2: The `VIEWMODE' and ÀLL' controls
If the command `PRESENT NUMERIC VIEWMODE' is used, then only `visible' nodes or elements will have result values displayed; and this is the default.
For a node to be `visible' it must have attached mesh lines shown as part of the
current `VIEW' mode, (`VIEW OPTIONS EDGES ALL' is assumed, the effect
of commands `VIEW OPTIONS EDGES OUTLINE' and `VIEW OPTIONS
EDGES INHIBIT' is ignored). For a beam or shell element to be `visible' , all
of its nodes must be `visible' ; whereas a solid element is considered `visible'
if one or more of its nodes is `visible' . (The exception to this rule is that with
models comprising only beam and/or plate/shell elements, the visualisation test
is not applied for element labels unless a hidden line view is current).
19/08/1999

The command `PRESENT NUMERIC ALL' means that all nodes (or elements)
in the current results set will have result values displayed regardless of `visibility' .
Note 3: Use of the graphics cursor
The command word `/PICK' enables the user to enquire the result for a particular
node, element or Gauss point, by using the graphics cursor. In this case, where
the previous `PRESENT' command was `PRESENT NUMERIC' specifying or
picking an explicit range of nodes or elements, then the `picked' values will be
added to the display without a screen clear. Only `visible' nodes or elements
will be sensitive to the cursor (see note 2. above). An element is located by the
position of its centroid. To terminate cursor picking it is necessary to make two
approximately coincident cursor hits.
When the cursor is being used, filters imposed by the commands `RESULTS
RANGE MATERIALS/VALUES' will be ignored.
Note 4: Specifying an explicit Range
If a range of entities (elements or nodes) is explicitly specified in the command
(e.g.: `PRESENT NUMERIC 103 to 155' ), then the values for the requested entities will be displayed regardless of whether they form part of the current results
set and regardless of the filters currently imposed by the `RESULTS RANGE
MATERIAL/VALUES' commands. The results set will remain unchanged.
Note 5: Additional filter controls
If no range of entities is explicitly specified in the command, then filters on the
values that are displayed are provided by the `RESULTS RANGE' command.
Note 6: Colour Modulation
The displayed values will be colour modulated and this can be controlled by the
`PRESENT OPTIONS NUMERICS' command.
Examples:
1. PRESENT NUMERIC
All `visible' nodes or elements in the current results set will have their result values
displayed depending on the filters set in the `RESULTS RANGE' command.
2. PRESENT NUMERIC /PICK
The cursor is made available, and the user can make cursor hits at or near node points
or element centroids and the result values will be displayed.
See Also:
`PRESENT OPTIONS NUMERIC' , section 2.13.5.3, page 335

`PRESENT OPTIONS SIGNIF' , section 2.13.5.5, page 337
`VIEW' , section 2.19, page 529
19/08/1999
327
328
PRESENT
OPTIONS
Additional control of results presentation
2.13.5 PRESENT OPTIONS

The `PRESENT OPTIONS' command gives additional control of the presentation of results.
`PRESENT OPTIONS' has the following sub-commands:
2.13.5.1
CONTOUR
2.13.5.2
2.13.5.3
2.13.5.4
2.13.5.5
GRAPH
NUMERIC
PEAKS
SIGNIF
2.13.5.6
VECTORS
control of annotation.
control of style of contour colouring.
control of graph axes and labelling.
control of colour modulation.
control of number of significant digits
used for numerical output.
style of vector presentation.
19/08/1999
329
PRESENT OPTIONS
CONTOUR
Control of annotation and style of contouring
2.13.5.1 PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR Mode [Control] [Range]

The `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR' command allows the user additional controls on
the contour plots displayed via the `PRESENT CONTOUR' command.
Mode
Control
Range
Comments
LINES
MODULATE
ALL
Frequency
OFF
Controls colour modulation

of line contours (see note 1).
ANNOTATE
Frequency
OFF
Controls how often a line

contour is annotated
(see note 2.)
KEYLINE
Frequency
AUTOMATIC
Controls which line contours

are annotated (see note 3).
FILL
ALL
MAX [ABSOLUTE]
MIN [ABSOLUTE]
MEAN
POINT-ID n
Controls the result values

to be considered on an element
when displaying colour fill
contours (see notes 4 & 6.)
EDGES
ALL
MAX [ABSOLUTE]
MIN [ABSOLUTE]
MEAN
POINT-ID n
Controls the result values to

be considered on an element
when displaying colour edge
contours (see note 5.)
Sets the default number of

contour levels for the `PRESENT
CONTOUR LEVELS [n]'
command.
LEVELS
DEFAULT
Note 1: Colour Modulation of Line Contours

The command `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES MODULATE' controls the use of colour modulation for contour lines.
The default condition is that contour lines will be drawn in a `FULL' spectrum
of colours from red to blue on the basis of the results values, and that the full
range of colours on the current graphics device will be used.
Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES MODULATE 10
10 colours will be selected for colour modulation.
19/08/1999
330

2. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES MODULATE ALL
Depending upon the number of contour lines, the full range of colours will
be used for modulation.
3. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES MODULATE OFF
Colour modulation will be switched off.
Note 2: Frequency of Annotation of Line Contours
The command `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES ANNOTATE' controls the frequency of annotation on contour lines, and is only applicable to line
contours.
The default condition is that each contour line is annotated every fifth line segment of its length. This may not always be appropriate, and the user may increase or decrease the frequency of annotation according to the complexity of
the model. The annotation is linked to the actual contour values in a legend (see
`DRAWING CONTENTS LEGEND' ).
The annotation may be turned off completely by selecting `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES ANNOTATE OFF' and this is useful when using
a large number of coloured contours as in the case of the command `PRESENT
CONTOURS LEVEL 50' . In this case each colour is linked to the contour values in a legend, and these colours will be mapped, depending upon the number
of colours that are available with the particular graphics display.
Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES ANNOTATE 1
Every contour line segment will be annotated.
2. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES ANNOTATE 12
Every twelfth line segment of a contour will be annotated.
3. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES ANNOTATE OFF
Annotation will be switched off.
Note 3: Frequency of Key line Annotation of Line Contours
The command `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES KEYLINE' allows
the user to specify which contour lines should act as key lines for annotation. If
the user specifies a key line value of 2 then every other line will be annotated.
The default is that all lines, up to a maximum of 26, will be annotated.
Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES KEYLINE 4
Every fourth contour line will be annotated. For example if a temperature
plot was being produced with a datum of 0 degrees and a step of 25 degrees
then only the contours in increments of 100 degrees would be annotated
(including 0 degrees).
2. PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES KEYLINE AUTOMATIC
Keyline control will be switched off, and the program will return to the
default condition.
Note 4: Filled Contours
The command `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR FILL' requests that colour
fill be used for contouring. Areas between contour lines are filled with colour,
and thus each colour corresponds to a range of result values.
19/08/1999

The ÀLL' control, which is the default, requests that all the values on the element face be considered and each element face may be contoured in more than
one colour depending upon the number of contour levels specified, the number
of colours available, and the distribution of results.
The `MAX' , `MAX ABSOLUTE' , `MIN' , `MIN ABSOLUTE' and `MEAN'
controls request that the face of an element be filled with a single colour corresponding to the maximum, absolute maximum, minimum, absolute minimum or
mean value on the element face (or on the element as a whole when contouring
Gauss values). The `POINT-ID n' control requests that the face of an element
be coloured with a single colour corresponding to the nth value for the element.
For example, if `POINT-ID 3' is specified then for elementwise nodal results
the value for the third node (according to the element topology) is used and for
elementwise Gaussian results the value for the third Gauss point (according to
the order entered into FEMVIEW) is used.
With `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR FILL' applied to model visualisation
modes (see `VIEW' ) other than `VIEW HIDDEN' the faces of the model will
be drawn in the order in which the elements occur in the database, so with some
models, the faces at the back of the model may be drawn after faces nearer to
the observer which will produce a confusing picture.
Note 5: Edge Contours
The command `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR EDGES' requests that, when
drawing the model, the mesh will be drawn in a colour corresponding to the
result values on the element. The segments of element edges between contour
lines are coloured according to the range of values.
The ÀLL' control, which is the default, requests that all the values on the element edge be considered and each element edge may be drawn in more than
one colour depending upon the number of contour levels specified, the number
of colours available, and the distribution of results.
controls request that the edge of an element be coloured with a single colour
corresponding to the maximum, absolute maximum, minimum, absolute minimum or mean value on the element edge (or on the element as a whole when
contouring Gauss values). The `POINT-ID n' control requests that the edge of
an element be coloured with a single colour corresponding to the nth value for
the element. For example, if `POINT-ID 3' is specified then for elementwise
nodal results the value for the third node (according to the element topology) is
used and for elementwise Gaussian results the value for the third Gauss point
(according to the order entered into FEMVIEW) is used.
When using `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR EDGES' for contouring elementwise nodal results or material dependent nodal results it will be necessary
to apply a small shrink factor if the differences between adjacent elements are
to be seen.
Note 6: Contouring Gauss Point Values
When contouring Gauss point values, the commands `PRESENT OPTIONS
CONTOUR LINES' and `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR FILL ALL' and
`PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR EDGES ALL' will cause the vertex node
of an element to be given the result value of its nearest Gauss point. Values at
element mid-side nodes are taken as the average of the two appropriate vertex
nodes. This, depending on the distribution of results over the model and the contouring command issued, will mean that an element may be contoured in more
than one colour. Contours will be discontinuous at element boundaries.
19/08/1999
331
332

If the mesh is being viewed in filled or shaded mode then only one value per
element will be used. This limitation may be overcome by use of the `RESULTS
CALCULATE EXTRAPOLATE' command.
controls request that a single colour be used corresponding to the maximum,
absolute maximum, minimum, absolute minimum or mean Gauss value on the
element as a whole. The `POINT-ID n' control requests that a single colour
corresponding to the nth Gauss point for the element (according to the order
entered into FEMVIEW) be used. The monitor box will show which value has
been used.
Note 7: Contouring Invariant Values
The commands `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR LINES' , `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR FILL ALL' and `PRESENT OPTIONS CONTOUR EDGES
ALL' cannot be used with element invariant results as these contouring modes
(which may produce modulated contours within an element) require result values at the nodes of an element.
Otherwise, the element is either filled or drawn in a single colour regardless of
the specified `Control' . No contour modulation within an element is shown.
See Also:
`DRAWING CONTENTS LEGEND' , section 2.4.2, page 140

`PRESENT CONTOUR' , section 2.13.1, page 309
`RESULTS CALCULATE EXTRAPOL' , section 2.15.1.7, page 438
`RESULTS RANGE EL-RESULT' , section 2.15.8, page 464
ÙTILITY SETUP COLOUR' , section 2.18.8.2, page 498
`VIEW' , section 2.19, page 529
19/08/1999
333
PRESENT OPTIONS
GRAPH
Control axes and labelling of graphs
2.13.5.2 PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH Subject [Control]

The `PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH' command provides the user with additional controls
over the graphs displayed by the `PRESENT GRAPH' command.
Subject
Control
Comments
AXES
AUTOMATIC
XMIN value
XMAX value
YMIN value
YMAX value
ìnteger'
XLINEAR
XLOG
YLINEAR
YLOG
SINGLE
MULTIPLE
DEFAULT
Sets the graph axes to be automatically scaled to fit the data.

Sets the minimum limit to the X-axis (see note 3).
Sets the maximum limit to the X-axis (see note 3).
Sets the minimum limit to the Y-axis (see note 3).
Sets the maximum limit to the Y-axis (see note 3).
Allows limits to be set for a specific axis (see note 4).
Sets the X-axis to have a linear scale.
Sets the X-axis to have a logarithmic scale (except for BEAM graphs).
Sets the Y-axis to have a linear scale.
Sets the Y-axis to have a logarithmic scale (except for BEAM graphs).
Specifies that a single axis is to be used for multiple attribute graphs.
Specifies that multiple axes are to be used for multiple attribute graphs.
Specifies that the number of axes for multiple attribute graphs is to be
set by default (see note 1).
Swaps the X and Y axes.
Switches the material labels on or off.
Switches the surface labels on or off.
Switches the point labels on or off.
Switches the point symbols on or off.
Sets the graph lines to be off.
Sets the graph lines to be thin.
Sets the graph lines to be of normal thickness.
Sets the graph lines to be thick.
Sets the graph grid to be drawn according to defaults (see note 1).
Sets the graph grid to be off.
Sets the graph grid to be drawn with broken (dashed) lines.
Sets the graph grid to be drawn with full (solid) lines.
Sets the graph to be drawn centred over most of the screen.
Defines a rectangle on the screen within which the graph is to be drawn.
Displays the values of up to 20 points on a graph until a new graph is
drawn or until the values are switched OFF.
MATERIALS
SURFACE
POINTS
LINES
GRID
RESIZE
FEEDBACK
SWAP
[OFF]
[OFF]
LABELS [OFF]
SYMBOLS [OFF]
[OFF]
[THIN]
[NORMAL]
[THICK]
DEFAULT
OFF
BROKEN
FULL
FRAME
/CURSOR
/CURSOR
OFF
Note 1: Default conditions

The default condition is that all of the graph axes will be scaled automatically
with linear scales, and that point symbols and normal thickness graph lines will
be drawn, but with no labels displayed. For multiple attribute graphs, by default
single graph axes will used if different components of the same attribute are
being graphed, but multiple axes will be used if different attributes are being
graphed. By default the graph grid will be drawn with broken lines on single axis
19/08/1999
334

graphs but will not be drawn on multiple axes graphs. All of these conditions
are reset whenever a model is accessed from the database.
Note 2: Axis limits
Any value given for an axis limit will be altered slightly if the range of the axis
is extended during the calculation of conveniently sized annotation intervals.
Note 3: Specifying more than one axis limit in the same command
Two, three or all four axis limits may be specified as part of the same command
as follows: `PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH AXES XMIN v1 XMAX v2 YMIN
v3 YMAX v4' .
Note 4: Specifying axis limits with multiple axes
For graphs with multiple axes, any axes limits specified will apply to all of the
axes unless an integer representing one of the axes is entered first. The axes are
numbered from 1 on the outside to up to 6 on the inside.
Note 5: Changing axis limits using ÈYE' commands
It is possible to zoom in on or out from a graph using the commands ÈYE
ZOOM IN' , ÈYE ZOOM OUT' and ÈYE ZOOM FACTOR' . The section of
graph displayed may also be changed with the ÈYE SHIFT' command. These
commands effectively change the limits to the graph axes, which can be reset with the command ÈYE FRAME' , or with the command `PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH AXES AUTO' , which has exactly the same effect.
Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH AXES XMIN 0.0 YMIN 1.0E3
The axes of the graph will be scaled so that the X-axis has 0.0 as its lower limit and
the Y-axis has 1.0E3.
2. PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH AXES 2 YMIN 1.0E5 YMAX 9.0E5
For multiple Y-axes, the second Y-axis will be scaled to start at 1.0E5 and end at
9.0E5.
3. PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH AXES YLOG
The Y-axis will have a logarithmic scale.
4. PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH AXES SINGLE
Single axes will be used for multiple attribute graphs.
5. PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH POINTS SYMBOLS OFF
Graph point symbols will be switched off.
6. PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH GRID OFF
The graph paper grid will not be drawn.
7. PRESENT OPTIONS GRAPH FEEDBACK /CURSOR
The X and Y values closest to the cursor hit will be displayed.
See Also:
`PRESENT GRAPH' , section 2.13.3, page 313
19/08/1999
335
PRESENT OPTIONS
NUMERIC
Control of colour modulation of numeric output
2.13.5.3 PRESENT OPTIONS NUMERIC MODULATE Control

The `PRESENT OPTIONS NUMERIC MODULATE' command allows the user to control
colour modulation of the results values displayed via the `PRESENT NUMERIC' command.
Control
Comments
ALL
Number
OFF
The full range of colours will be used for modulation.

The specified number of colours will be used.
Colour modulation is turned off.
Note 1: Colours Used for modulation

The default condition is that 3 colours will be used, so that numerics will be
in red where values are highest, green where mid-range values exist, and blue
where values are lowest.
Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS NUMERIC MODULATE 6
Requests 6 colours to be used for colour modulation of numeric output.
See Also:
`PRESENT NUMERIC' , section 2.13.4, page 326
19/08/1999
336
PRESENT OPTIONS
PEAKS
Control colour modulation in display of peak values
2.13.5.4 PRESENT OPTIONS PEAKS MODULATE Control

The `PRESENT OPTIONS PEAKS MODULATE' command allows the user to control
colour modulation of the peak values displayed via the `PRESENT PEAKS' command.
Control
Comments
ALL
Number
OFF
The full range of colours will be used for modulation.

The specified number of colours will be used.
Colour modulation is turned off.
Note 1: Colours Used for modulation

The default condition is that only two colours for modulation will be used; red to
identify values above the maximum threshold, and blue to identify values below
the minimum threshold.
If more than 2 colours are specified, then colours will be allocated according to
result value, so that marker symbols will be in red where the values are highest
through to blue where they are lowest.
Note 2: Other Controls
If no results range has been specified with the `RESULTS RANGE VALUES ...'
command, then only the maximum and minimum values will be marked.
Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS PEAKS MODULATE 6
Requests 6 colours to be used for colour modulation of peak display.
See Also:
`PRESENT PEAKS' , section 2.13.6, page 340

19/08/1999
337
PRESENT OPTIONS
SIGNIF
Control number of significant digits for numerical output
2.13.5.5 PRESENT OPTIONS SIGNIF (Number)

The command `PRESENT OPTIONS SIGNIF' allows the user to specify the number of
significant digits required in the display of numerical values. Up to 7 significant digits can
be requested, and the default condition is 3 significant digits.
Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS SIGNIF 4
Sets the output of numerical values to 4 significant digits.
See Also:
`PRESENT NUMERIC' , section 2.13.4, page 326

ÙTILITY TABULATE RESULTS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
338
PRESENT OPTIONS
VECTORS
Control the colour and style of vector presentation
2.13.5.6 PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS Control [Range]

The `PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS' command allows the user to control the colour
modulation of, and to select different styles for, the vectors displayed via the `PRESENT
VECTORS' command.
Control
Range
Comments
MODULATE
ALL
Number
OFF
Controls the number of colours used for colour modulation.
NOHEADS
2DHEADS
3DHEADS
Selects a line representation for vectors. This is the

default condition.
Selects a two-dimensional arrow head representation
for vectors.
Selects a three-dimensional arrow head representation
for vectors (see note 3).
Note 1: Colours Used for Modulation

The default condition is that 3 colours will be used, so that high values will be
in red, mid-range values green, and low values blue.
If colour modulation with other than 3 colours is selected, then vectors will be
coloured according to result value, so that vectors will be in red where the values
are highest through to blue where they are lowest.
Note 2: Default Vector Style
The default condition is that a simple line representation will be used for vectors.
Note 3: 3-D Arrow Heads
Each vector is given a solid square based pyramid arrow head. One side of the
base is always displayed in the plane of the screen with a length proportional
to the in-plane magnitude whilst the adjacent side is in the same proportion to
the out-of-plane magnitude. The overall length of the vector, plus arrow head, is
the same as for a `LINES' or `2DHEADS' representation. Note that a `LINES'
representation will be drawn if the 3-D head would be too small.
Note 4: Notation for principal stresses
Positive principal stresses are shown by a simple vector and negative principal
stresses are denoted by bars at the ends of the vector.
Arrow heads are not drawn with principal stresses and the commands `PRESENT
OPTIONS VECTORS 2DHEADS' , `PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS 3DHEADS'
and `PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS NOHEADS' have no effect.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS MODULATE 12
Selects 12 colours for modulation of vectors.
2. PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS 2DHEADS
A two dimensional arrow head representation will be used for vectors.
3. PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS 3DHEADS
A three dimensional arrow head representation will be used for vectors.
See Also:
`PRESENT VECTORS' , section 2.13.8, page 342
19/08/1999
339
340
PRESENT
PEAKS
Highlight Minimum and Maximum and concentrations
2.13.6 PRESENT PEAKS

This command indicates points on the model at which analysis results values are at a maximum and minimum, or exceed a user specified level, or are below a user specified level.
On execution of the `PRESENT PEAKS' command FEMVIEW will display the minimum
and maximum result values that exist in the finite element model and mark the corresponding nodal or Gauss points with `MIN' and `MAX' .
A maximum and/or minimum threshold value may be specified within the `RESULTS
RANGE VALUES' command. If a maximum threshold is specified, then parts of the model
where the results exceed the maximum threshold will be marked with a red box symbol. If a
minimum threshold is given, then parts of the model where values are below this threshold
will be marked with a blue cross symbol.
Note 1: Effect of having defined a results set

The default condition is that the minimum and maximum values refer to the current results set which, unless specifically defined, equates to the current model
subset. The command `RESULTS RANGE GLOBAL' will refer minimum and
maximum values to the whole model.
Note 2: Effect of model visualisation
Points on the model having minimum or maximum values are highlighted even
if they are not visible, but points above or below the threshold values are only
marked if visible.
See Also:
`PRESENT OPTIONS PEAKS' , section 2.13.5.4, page 336

19/08/1999
341
PRESENT
SHAPE
Display deformed shape of model
2.13.7 PRESENT SHAPE [[FACTOR] Factor]

This command applies a scale factor to the current loadcase and displays the displaced
shape of the elements in the current results set of the finite element model.
If no scale factor is specified FEMVIEW will calculate a scale factor such that the maximum displacement vector will be approximately 10 mm (if viewed normal to its length).
The factor calculated is displayed and can be used as a basis for new factors
Figure 2.101: Displaced shape
Examples:
1. PRESENT SHAPE FACTOR 100.0
The factor is changed from the default to 100. The effect of this depends on the
original factor.
19/08/1999
342
PRESENT
VECTORS
Display a vector plot
2.13.8 PRESENT VECTORS [Control]

This command applies a scale factor to the current loadcase and displays a vector plot to
represent both the magnitude and direction of result values.
If no scale factor is specified FEMVIEW will scale the vectors so that the length of the
maximum vector, if viewed normal to its length will be approximately 10 mm.
Control
Comments
VIEWMODE [factor]
All [factor]
FACTOR [factor]
factor
See note 6.
See note 6.
Works as for `VIEWMODE' .
Works as for `VIEWMODE' .
Note 1: Scale factor

Where no scale factor is specified, the scale factor calculated by the program is
displayed. This should be used as a basis for determining new scale factors.
Note 2: Colour coding of vectors
On a colour graphics display the vectors can be colour coded according to
their magnitude with the command `PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS MODULATE' .
Note 3: Choice of arrowheads
By default, vectors are drawn with 3D arrowheads. The commands `PRESENT
OPTIONS VECTORS 2DHEADS' or `PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS NOHEADS' can be used to select other representations of vectors.
Note 4: Notation for principal stresses
Positive principal stresses are shown by a simple vector and negative principal
stresses are denoted by bars at the ends of the vector.
Arrow heads are not drawn with principal stresses and the commands `PRESENT
OPTIONS VECTORS 2DHEADS' , `PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS 3DHEADS'
and `PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS NOHEADS' have no effect.
Note 5: Simultaneous display of three principal stresses
If principal stresses are to be calculated by FEMVIEW, then the command `RESULTS CALCULATE P-STRESS ALL' will allow the three principal stresses
to be displayed simultaneously.
Note 6: The `VIEWMODE' and ÀLL' controls
If the command `PRESENT VECTORS VIEWMODE' is used, then only `visible' nodes or elements will have vectors displayed; and this is the default. For
a node to be `visible' it must have attached mesh lines shown with the current
`VIEW' command; (`VIEW OPTIONS EDGES ALL' is assumed, the effect
of commands `VIEW OPTIONS EDGES OUTLINE' and `VIEW OPTIONS
19/08/1999

EDGES INHIBIT' is ignored). For a beam or shell element to be `visible' , all
of its nodes must be `visible' ; whereas a solid element is considered `visible'
if one or more of its nodes is `visible' . (The exception to this rule is that with
models comprising only beam and/or plate/shell elements, the visualisation test
is not applied for element labels unless a hidden line view is current).
The command `PRESENT VECTORS ALL' means that all nodes (or elements)
in the current results set will have vectors displayed regardless of `visibility' .
Note 7: Other controls
Note that further controls and filters on the vectors that are displayed are provided by the `RESULTS RANGE' command.
Examples:
1. PRESENT VECTOR FACTOR 100
The scale factor is changed from the default to 100. The visible effect of this depends
on the original scale factor.
See Also:

`PRESENT OPTIONS VECTORS' , section 2.13.5.6, page 338
19/08/1999
343
344
19/08/1999
2.14. PRIMARY COMMAND PROPERTY
345
PROPERTY
2.14 PRIMARY COMMAND PROPERTY

The primary command `PROPERTY' is used to define or redefine various properties associated with the finite element mesh, and is only available in FEMGEN .
The exact form of the `PROPERTY' commands is dependent on the FE program environment used (see `PROPERTY FE-PROG ASAS' ). The following sections give the `PROPERTY' commands used to define loading data, material properties data and physical properties data that are specific to ASAS.
Where no FE program environment has been selected, the user will operate in the `NEUTRAL' FE program environment (this is the default).
`PROPERTY' has the following secondary commands:
2.14.1
PROPERTY ATTACH
2.14.2
2.14.3
2.14.4
2.14.5
2.14.6
2.14.7
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
PROPERTY FE-PROG
PROPERTY INITIAL
PROPERTY LOADS
PROPERTY MATERIAL
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
19/08/1999
Attach material and physical properties,

or a local coordinate system to nodes
generated on a part. Attach time curves,
space curves, load masks to loads.
Define boundary conditions
Select the FE Program environment
Define initial model conditions
Define loading conditions.
Define material properties.
Define physical properties.
346
PROPERTY
ATTACH
Assign Properties
2.14.1 PROPERTY ATTACH Part name [Identifier] Assignment

This command is used to assign material and physical properties to elements generated on a
part, or a local coordinate system to nodes generated on a part. This command is also used
to attach time curves, space curves and load masks to loads and to attach local coordinate
systems to nodes on a part or to global space curves and load masks.
Part name
Identifier
Assignment
ALL
Point name
Line name
Surface name
Body name
Set name
[MATERIAL]
[PHYSICAL]
[COORSYS]
Material name or NONE

Property name or NONE
Coordinate System name or NONE
Load name
[TCURVE]
[SCURVE]
[LMASK]
name or NONE
Lmask name
Scurve name
[COORDSYS]
name or NONE
The properties assigned to the geometry are transferred to the elements during translation
to analysis. Note that use of a property identifier `MATERIAL' , `PHYSICAL' or `COORDSYS' is mandatory if the assignment `NONE' is used.
The local coordinate systems defined with the `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS RECTANGUL' , `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS SPHERICAL' , and `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC' may be attached to parts of a model requiring skewed constraints/loading. Local
coordinate systems are converted to skew systems in the ASAS data file.
Addition of more than one property
Material and physical properties maybe attached in the same command. The order must
be material property and then physical property. The identifiers must not be used. (See
Example 1).
Attaching properties to lines and surfaces
There is a potential problem when properties are being attached to a model which creates
both line and surface elements. When a property is attached to a set containing surfaces the
property is automatically attached to the lines defining the surfaces since these are in the set
also. This means that the line elements can inadvertently be given surface properties. Such
inappropriate property attachments will be flagged during the translation to the ASAS data
file. This problem can be avoided by attaching the line element properties after the surface
element properties have been attached.
Advanced loading features
The effects of attaching time curves, space curves and load masks to loads and attaching
local coordinate systems to space curves, load masks and loaded parts are explained in
section 2.14.5.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. PROPERTY ATTACH ALL MAT1 PH1
Assign material MAT1 and thickness PH1 to all elements in the model.
2. PROPERTY ATTACH S1 SYS1
Assign local coordinate system SYS1 to surface S1.
3. PROPERTY ATTACH B1 MATERIAL NONE
Delete the material attachment to B1
4. PROPERTY ATTACH LO1 LM1
Attach a load mask to load LO1.
5. PROPERTY ATTACH LO1 LM NONE
Remove a load mask attachment on load LO1.
6. PROPERTY ATTACH LM1 CY1
Attach a local coordinate system to a global load mask.
7. PROPERTY ATTACH SC1 CY1
Attach a local coordinate system to a global space curve.
See Also:

`LABEL GEOMETRY ' , section 2.11.1, page 256
`PROPERTY MATERIAL' , section 2.14.6, page 390
`PROPERTY PHYSICAL' , section 2.14.7, page 399
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
347
348
PROPERTY
BOUNDARY
Constrain Parts
2.14.2 PROPERTY BOUNDARY

This command is used to define or redefine boundary constraints.
`PROPERTY BOUNDARY' has the following sub-commands:
2.14.2.1
PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONSTRNT
2.14.2.2
PROPERTY BOUNDARY ELASTIC
2.14.2.3
PROPERTY BOUNDARY EXTERNAL
2.14.2.4
PROPERTY BOUNDARY GENERAL
2.14.2.5
PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBEAM
2.14.2.6
2.14.2.7
PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBODY

PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RCONNECT
2.14.2.8
PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC EQUA
2.14.2.9
PROPERTY BOUNDARY PRESCRIBE
2.14.2.10
PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE
Apply a fixed constraint

(ASAS suppressions)
Apply an elastic support
(ASAS springs)
Apply an external freedom
(ASAS link freedoms)
Apply a generalised constraint
(ASAS constraint equations)
Apply a multi-point constraint
(ASAS rigid constraints)
Not applicable to ASAS
Apply a prescribed value to a
degree of freedom
Release a previously
fixed constraint
The parts to be constrained may be specified from the keyboard or selected with the cursor.
ASAS Freedom Release data
`PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE' should not be confused with the ASAS Freedom
Release data, which at present cannot be defined in FEMGEN .
ASAS Rigid Constraint data
`PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RCONNECT' (rigid connection) should not be confused with the ASAS Rigid Constraint data, which should be generated with `PROPERTY
BOUNDARY MPC RBEAM' .
19/08/1999
349
Freedom Names:
Boundary conditions are applied in terms of nodal freedoms, either individually, in groups,
or by predefined freedom sets known as ' freedom macros' . The valid freedoms and macros
are shown in the table below.
Freedom Names
ASAS single freedoms
X Y Z RX RY RZ
ASAS freedom macros
XSYMM
YSYMM
ZSYMM
ALL
XASYMM
YASYMM
ZASYMM
ENCASTRE
PINNED
NOROTATE
ASAS special freedoms
FIXED
S R1&R2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
X RY RZ
Y RX RZ
Z RX RY
X Y Z RX RY RZ
Y Z RX
X Z RY
X Y RZ
X Y Z RX RY RZ
XYZ
RX RY RZ
ALL
Table 2.4: Freedom names
Note 1: ALL and FIXED

The ALL freedom is not the same as the ÀLL' in the ASAS data. It only fixes
the 6 degrees of freedom shown. FIXED should be used instead to suppress
ÀLL' , all the available freedoms at a node.
Note 2: FIXED, S and R1&R2
FIXED, S and R1&R2 freedoms will not appear in the FEMGEN menu structure as they are not standard FEMGEN freedom names. These freedoms MUST
be defined correctly in the FEMSYS.INI file.
Note 3: R1&R2 Freedom
The R1&R2 freedom only applies to mid-side nodes of GCS6/GCS8/GCB3 elements.
Note 4: FEMGEN W Freedom
The W freedom shown in the FEMGEN menu is not used for ASAS.
19/08/1999
350
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
CONSTRAINT
Apply fixed constraints - ASAS suppressions
2.14.2.1 PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONSTRAINT [name] part dof

This command is used to apply a fixed single point constraint (or suppression in ASAS
terms) to all nodes on a part. This is equivalent to fixing the freedom value to zero. If the
freedom value is set to a non-zero value then the commands `PROPERTY BOUNDARY
PRESCRIBE' or `PROPERTY LOAD DISPLACE' should be used.
name = constraint name for use in future references
part
= name of a point, line, surface or set
dof
= degree of freedom to be suppressed
(see the Table of section 2.4, page 349)
Releasing freedoms
Previously suppressed freedoms may be ' un-suppressed' by using the `PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE' command. A typical use for this is where only the internal nodes of a
surface are to be suppressed. The suppressions are applied to the whole surface first and
then removed from the boundary lines. This procedure is shown in the second example
below where ÈDGE' is a set containing the boundary lines.
Warnings
If freedoms are explicitly suppressed that do not actually exist at the node, a warning will
be issued when the ASAS data file is written and the suppression omitted from the ASAS
data file. Use of freedom `FIXED' is recommended to avoid these warnings.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONSTRAINT P1 FIXED
Suppress all available degrees of freedom at the node generated at point P1.
2. PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONSTRAINT L5 XSYMM
Suppress the X translational freedom and the RY/RZ rotational freedoms at the nodes
generated on line L5.
3. PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONSTRAINT S3 RZ
PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE EDGE RZ
Suppress the RZ freedom for all nodes generated on surface S3 and then release the
RZ suppressions at the nodes on the parts in set ÈDGE'
See Also:

`LABEL GEOMETRY CONSTRNT' , section 2.11.1, page 256
`LABEL MESH CONSTRNT' , section 2.11.2, page 258
`LABEL OPTIONS CONSTRNT' , section 2.11.3, page 263
ÙTILITY DELETE CONSTRNT' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE PROPERTY CONSTRNT' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
351
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
ELASTIC
Apply elastic supports - ASAS springs
2.14.2.2 PROPERTY BOUNDARY ELASTIC [name] part dof stiff

This command is used to apply elastic or `spring to ground' supports. Although this type
of support is not available directly in ASAS, it is modelled in the ASAS data file by the use
of spring elements with appropriate stiffnesses.
name
part
dof
=
=
=
stiff
constraint name for use in future references

name of a point, line, surface or set
degree of freedom to be suppressed
spring constant
Examples:
1. PROPERTY BOUNDARY ELASTIC P1 X 1.7E-3
Apply an elastic support of stiffness 1.7E-3 to the node generated at point P1 suppressing the X freedom.
2. PROPERTY BOUNDARY ELASTIC L5 PINNED 32.5E-7
Apply elastic supports of stiffness 32.5E-7 to all the nodes generated on line L5
suppressing the X,Y & Z freedoms.
See Also:

19/08/1999
352
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
EXTERNAL
Apply external freedoms - ASAS link freedoms
2.14.2.3 PROPERTY BOUNDARY EXTERNAL [name] part dof

This command is used to specify nodal freedoms that are to be ASAS link freedoms in
sub-structure components.
name
part
dof
=
=
=

the name of a point, line, surface or set
degree of freedom to be link freedom
Releasing freedoms
Previously defined link freedoms may be ' un-defined' by using the `PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE' command.
Warnings
If freedoms are defined that do not actually exist at the node, a warning will be issued when
the ASAS data file is written and the link freedom omitted from the ASAS data file.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY BOUNDARY EXTERNAL P1 FIXED
All degrees of freedom available at the node generated at point P1 are to be link
freedoms.
2. PROPERTY BOUNDARY EXTERNAL L5 X RX RY RZ
The X translational and all the rotational freedoms of the nodes generated on line L5
are to be link freedoms.
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY EXTERNAL' , section 2.11.1, page 256

`LABEL MESH EXTERNAL' , section 2.11.2, page 258
19/08/1999
353
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
GENERAL
Apply generalised constraints - ASAS constraint equations
2.14.2.4 PROPERTY BOUNDARY GENERAL [name] part1 dof1 part2 [dof2] [real]
This command is used to apply generalised constraints between two parts of the same type
with corresponding nodes.
name
part1
dof1
=
=
=
part2
dof2
=
=
real

name of a point, line, surface or set for the slave freedoms
degrees of freedom for slaves
name of a point, line or surface or set for the master freedoms
degrees of freedom for masters
- defaults to dof1
factor to be applied to master freedoms
Restriction to similar parts

Although FEMGEN permits the two parts to be of different types, the interface to ASAS
restricts the parts to be of the same type with corresponding nodes. It is not required that
the degrees of freedom are the same, but if more than one freedom is used for the master
freedom (i.e. a freedom macro), then either a single freedom or the same freedom macro
must be used for the slave freedom.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY BOUNDARY GENERAL L1 X L2 Y 0.5
The X displacement of the nodes generated on line L1 are constrained to be half the
Y displacements of the corresponding nodes generated on line L2.
2. PROPERTY BOUNDARY GENERAL S1 Z S2 PINNED
The Z displacement of the nodes generated on surface S1 are constrained to be the
sum of the X, Y and Z displacements of the corresponding nodes generated on surface S2.
See Also:

19/08/1999
354
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
MPC RBEAM
Apply multi-point constraints - ASAS rigid constraints
2.14.2.5 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBEAM [name] part point dof

This command is used to connect a single node to many others using a rigid beam connection.
part
= name of a point, line, surface, body, or set
point = name of a point
dof
= degree of freedom to be rigid link freedom (either PINNED or ENCASTRE)
Independent and dependent nodes
The node at point is the independent node and the nodes on part are the dependent nodes.
If the independent node appears on part, it will be omitted from the dependent node list.
Type of system generated
If the degree of freedom is ÈNCASTRE' , an ASAS rigid beam system will be generated.
If the degree of freedom is `PINNED' , an ASAS rigid link system will be generated. No
other freedom combinations are permitted with ASAS.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBEAM S1 P1 PINNED
Connect the node generated at point P1 to all other nodes generated on S1 using an
ASAS rigid link system.
Figure 2.102: Creation of ASAS rigid link system
19/08/1999

2. CONSTRUCT SET EDGE APPEND L1 L2 L3 L4
PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBEAM EDGE PC ENCASTRE
Connect the node generated at point PC to all other nodes generated on the lines in
set EDGE using an ASAS rigid beam system.
Figure 2.103: Creation of ASAS rigid beam system
See Also:

`LABEL OPTIONS MPC' , section 2.11.3, page 263
19/08/1999
355
356
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
MPC RBODY
2.14.2.6 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RBODY

The command is not applicable for use with ASAS.
19/08/1999
357
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
MPC RCONNECT
Apply multi-point constraints - ASAS constraint equations
2.14.2.7 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RCONNECT [type] [name] part1 part2

dof
This command is used to connect the nodes on one part to those on another using a rigid
connection. When the two parts are the edges of surfaces, the command will attempt to
'stitch' the two parts together using a variety of one to one and many to one connections,
depending on the number of elements and their order on either side of the connection.
In all other cases the command will connect one node on part1 with one node on part2
using a proximity algorithm or a mapping algorithm that takes into account the centroid
and orientation of each part.
type
name
part1
part2
dof
=
=
=
=
=
type of algorithm to be used for node connections. See below

degree of freedom to be constrained
Algorithm type
An algorithm type may be used optionally in order to specify how the nodes on each part
are to be connected. The algorithm type may be input as PROXIMITY or MAPPED. The
default algorithm type is PROXIMITY, which connects nodes with the use of a proximity
algorithm. This algorithm is that which has been used in previous versions of FEMGV.
If the algorithm type is specified as MAPPED, then the connections are based on local
co-ordinate systems defined using the orientation and centroid of each part.
Surface connections
An equal number of nodes must exist on both part1 and part2.
Mesh existence
A mesh must exist for this option to perform correctly.
ASAS constraint equations
This rigid connection option generates ASAS constraint equations (NOT ASAS rigid constraints).
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET SET1 APPEND L4 L8
CONSTRUCT SET SET2 APPEND L11 L15
PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RCONNECT SET1 SET2 X
Connect X displacements of the nodes on SET1 to SET2 using ASAS constraint
equations.
2. PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC RCONNECT S1 S2 Z
Constrain the Z displacements of all nodes on S2 to those of the corresponding nodes
on S1.
19/08/1999
358
Figure 2.104: Rigid connection MPC for edges
Figure 2.105: Rigid connection MPC for surfaces

See Also:

19/08/1999
359
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
MPC EQUA
Apply generalised constraints - ASAS constraint equations
2.14.2.8 PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC EQUA SLAVE [name] point dof const
or
MASTER [name] point sname dof const fact
These commands are used to build ASAS constraint equations between points on the
model. The slave degree of freedom is defined first, followed by a series of master degrees of freedom. The slave is the degree of freedom whose movement will be controlled
by the movement of the masters. See the ASAS User Manual for a fuller description of the
use of constraint equations.
name
point
dof
=
=
=
const
sname
fact
=
=
=

name of a point
degree of freedom to be constrained
constant term to be added to slave freedom
constraint name of constraint defining slave freedom
factor to be applied to master freedom
Examples:
1. PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC EQUA SLAVE CO2 P10 X 0.0
PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC EQUA MASTER P21 CO2 X 0.75
PROPERTY BOUNDARY MPC EQUA MASTER P22 CO2 X 0.25
The following ASAS constraint equation will be created:
X 2 0.75 X 3 0.25 X 1
Figure 2.106: Defining an ASAS constraint equation
See Also:
19/08/1999
360
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
PRESCRIBE
Apply prescribed displacements
2.14.2.9 PROPERTY BOUNDARY PRESCRIBE [name] part dof value [lcas]

This command is used to prescribe a value to a degree of freedom for a particular loadcase
(the default is for all loadcases). This command has the same effect as the `PROPERTY
LOAD DISPLACE' command except that the prescribed displacements may be applied to
all the loadcases at once.
part
= name of a point, line, surface or set
dof
= degree of freedom prescribed
value = value to be assigned to dof
lcas
= loadcase number to which the prescribed value is applied
Restriction on prescribing freedom in both BOUNDARY and LOADS
A freedom must not be prescribed by both the `PROPERTY BOUNDARY PRESCRIBE'
command and the `PROPERTY LOADS DISPLACE' command for the same loadcase.
Degree of freedom indicator
The degree of freedom must be a single freedom i.e. degree of freedom macros and multiple
degree of freedom specifications are not permitted.
Value in other loadcases
A freedom prescribed in one loadcase will result in it having a prescribed value of zero in
all other loadcases, unless explicitly prescribed with a different value.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY BOUNDARY PRESCRIBE L1 X 0.5
Set the X displacement of the nodes generated on line L1 to 0.5 for all loadcases.
See Also:

19/08/1999
361
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
RELEASE
Release freedoms
2.14.2.10 PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE [name] part dof

This command is used to remove single point constraints (ASAS suppressions) previously
applied to a part.
name
part
dof
=
=
=

degree of freedom to be released
(see the table of section 2.4, page 349)
ASAS Freedom Release

This option should not be confused with the ASAS freedom release facility.
Drilling Freedoms
This command is useful for applying suppressions only to the ìnternal' nodes on a surface. For example, when modelling a stiffened plate, it may be necessary to suppress the
`drilling' freedoms on all the nodes except those that have stiffening members.
Examples:
1. CONSTRUCT SET DECK APPEND SURFACES ALL
CONSTRUCT SET STIFF APPEND LINES ALL
PROPERTY BOUNDARY CONSTRAINT DECK RZ
PROPERTY BOUNDARY RELEASE STIFF RZ
Figure 2.107: Removal of RZ freedoms from the edge nodes of surfaces
See Also:

19/08/1999
362
PROPERTY
FE-PROG
Select FE program environment
2.14.3 PROPERTY FE-PROG ASAS

This command is used to select the ASAS environment in which the model will be generated. The current FE program environment is displayed in the FEMGEN monitor.
Specifying the ASAS Environment
A `NEUTRAL' environment is used by FEMGEN by default. If the environment is not set
using the `PROPERTY FE-PROG ASAS' command, then the full range of ASAS properties will not be available to the user.
Other interfaces
In some instances additional interface programs for other FE programs may have been
licensed. In this case the other programs may be specified in place of ASAS in the `PROPERTY FE-PROG' command. Once environment specific loading, material properties or
physical properties have been applied to a model it is possible to switch to another environment, but the environment specific loading etc will be deleted, if the user confirms the
operation. This is because, by their very nature, definitions specific to one environment
will not be be available in another environment.
Default environment
If one FE program is used regularly then it is suggested that the Operating System environment variable `FG PRE INT' is set to the name of the FE package (as seen in the
menu). This will select the specified FE environment each time that FEMGEN is used. Refer to the Installation and Customisation Guide for details of how to set Operating System
environment variables.
Change of environment
If the environment is changed halfway through creating a model, all element types will be
removed and all materials, physical properties and loads will be deleted, upon confirmation.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY FE-PROG ASAS
Selects the ASAS FE program environment.
19/08/1999
363
PROPERTY
INITIAL
2.14.4 PROPERTY INITIAL

The command is not applicable for use with ASAS.
19/08/1999
364
PROPERTY
LOADS
Define a loading condition
2.14.5 PROPERTY LOADS

In the ASAS environment `PROPERTY LOADS' has the following sub-commands to define or re-define loading conditions:
2.14.5.1
2.14.5.2
2.14.5.3
2.14.5.4
PROPERTY LOADS NODAL LO

PROPERTY LOADS DISPLACE
PROPERTY LOADS PRESSURE
PROPERTY LOADS BL DIST
2.14.5.5
PROPERTY LOADS GL DIST
2.14.5.6
PROPERTY LOADS GP DIST
2.14.5.7
2.14.5.9
PROPERTY LOADS TEMPERAT

PROPERTY LOADS EL TEMPE
2.14.5.8
PROPERTY LOADS FACE TEM
2.14.5.10
PROPERTY LOADS EL FACET
2.14.5.11
2.14.5.12
2.14.5.13
2.14.5.14
2.14.5.15
2.14.5.16
PROPERTY LOADS BODY FOR

PROPERTY LOADS CENTRIFU
PROPERTY LOADS ANG ACCE
PROPERTY LOADS L ADDMAS
PROPERTY LOADS L FULMAS
PROPERTY LOADS C ADDMAS
Define a concentrated load

Define a prescribed displacement
Define a pressure load
Define a distributed load in element
local axes
Define a distributed load in
global axes
Define a projected load in
global axes
Define a temperature load
Define an elemental temperature
load
Define a nodal temperature
gradient load
Define an elemental temperature
gradient load
Define a gravity load
Define a centrifugal load
Define an angular acceleration load
Define a lumped added mass
Define a lumped full mass
Define a consistent added mass
A FEMGEN load definition is made up of a load type (e.g. PRESSURE), an optional

loadcase number, a geometric part to which the load is applied and some numeric data to
describe the load magnitude and possibly direction. The part to be loaded may be specified
from the keyboard or selected with the cursor.
This load data is mapped onto the finite element mesh associated with the FEMGEN part
in a variety of ways depending upon the load type. For example NODAL LO loads are
applied to nodes, PRESSURE loads to element faces or edges and BODY FOR loads to
element centroids.
For complex load definitions using load masks, space curves and time curves, see Section
2.14.5.17.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOAD PRESSURE S1 100 0
This command illustrates the simplest form of load definition.
Figure 2.108: Example Load
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY LOADS' , section 2.11.1, page 256

ÙTILITY DELETE LOADS' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY LOADS' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
365
366
PROPERTY LOADS
NODAL LO
Apply concentrated loads
2.14.5.1 PROPERTY LOADS NODAL LO [lonm] [lcas] part force dof

This command is used to apply a concentrated load in a single direction. The part can be
selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
force
=
=
=
=
dof
name of the loadcase for use in future references

loadcase number (integer)
part to be loaded, point, line, surface, body or set
size of force or moment. This load will be applied to all nodes in the
specified part
direction of load (see note 1)
Loadcase numbers
The loadcase number is used to group load applications into loadcases. The loadcases may
be built from a number of differing load applications entered in any order.
Note 1: Direction of load
The direction of the load (degree of freedom) is defined by a freedom code as
shown in the Table of section 2.4, page 349. If a local axes system has been
assigned to the part being loaded then the load will be applied in this system.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS NODAL LO LO1 1 P1 1023 Z
A concentrated load of 1023 in the Z direction is applied to the node generated at P1.
This loading is called LO1 and is part of loadcase 1.
2. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC CS1 P1 P30 P2
PROPERTY ATTACH P15 CS1
PROPERTY LOADS NODAL LO LO2 11 P15 2.57 Y
A concentrated load of 2.57 in the Y direction of local axes system CS1 is applied to
the node generated at P15. This loading is called LO2 and is part of loadcase 11.
See Also:

19/08/1999
367
PROPERTY LOADS
DISPLACE
Apply prescribed displacements
2.14.5.2 PROPERTY LOADS DISPLACE [lonm] [lcas] part disp dof

This command is used to apply a prescribed displacement in a single direction. The part
can be selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
disp
=
=
=
=
dof

part to be loaded, point, line, surface, body or set
size of displacement or rotation. This displacement will be applied to all
nodes in the specified part
direction of displacement (see note 1)
Loadcase numbers
Suppressing effect
The application of a prescribed displacement will imply a suppression in the freedom direction for all other loadcases (unless specifically prescribed in those loadcases).
Note 1: Direction of prescribed displacement
The direction of the load (degree of freedom) is defined by a freedom code as
shown in the Table of section 2.4, page 349. If a local axes system has been
assigned to the part being loaded then the load will be applied in this system.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS DISPLACE LO1 5 P12 0.35 Z
A prescribed displacement of 0.35 in the Z direction is applied to the node generated
at P12. This loading is called LO1 and is part of loadcase 5.
2. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC CS1 P1 P30 P2
PROPERTY ATTACH P15 CS1
PROPERTY LOADS DISPLACE LO2 13 P15 3.25 Y
A prescribed displacement of 3.25 in the Y direction of local axes system CS1 is
applied to the node generated at P15. This loading is called LO2 and is part of
loadcase 13.
See Also:

19/08/1999
368
PROPERTY LOADS
PRESSURE
Apply pressure loads
2.14.5.3 PROPERTY LOADS PRESSURE

[lonm] [lcas] part pres1 [dof [pnam1 pnam2 pres2]]
This command is used to apply a pressure load. The part can be selected either with the
keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
pres1
dof
pnam1
pnam2
pres2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

part to be loaded, point, line, surface or set
pressure value (at point pnam1 if varying)
0 = direction of pressure (see note 1)
point where pressure value is pres1
point where pressure value is pres2
pressure value at point pnam2
Loadcase numbers
Loaded part
For axi-symmetric models the part must be a line (or a set of lines). In all other cases the
part must be a surface (or set of surfaces). If these bound a meshed body, then the pressure
will be applied to faces of brick elements.
Varying pressure
If the last three parameters are defined, then the pressure will vary linearly between points
pnam1 and pnam2. These points do not have to be on the loaded part.
Note 1: Direction of pressure
This should always be zero to indicate that the pressure is to be applied in the
element local axes. This is the default for a constant pressure load.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS PRESSURE LO1 7 L20 5.23
A pressure load of 5.23 is applied to the edge of an axi-symmetric model generated
along line L20. This loading is called LO1 and is part of loadcase 7.
2. PROPERTY LOADS PRESSURE LO2 9 S1 20.0 0 P7 P8 10.0
A hydrostatic type of loading is applied to surface S1. The pressure values vary from
20.0 to 10.0 between points P7 and P8. This loading is called LO2 and is part of
loadcase 9. Note that the 0 representing the dof must be inserted.
See Also:

19/08/1999

19/08/1999
369
370
PROPERTY LOADS
BL DIST
Apply distributed loads in beam local axes
2.14.5.4 PROPERTY LOADS BL DIST

[lonm] [lcas] part [opart] dist1 [dof [pnam1 pnam2 dist2]]
This command is used to apply distributed loading to beam members in the member local
axes or distributed loading along the shell element. The part can be selected either with the
keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
opart
=
=
=
=
dist1
dof
pnam1
pnam2
dist2
=
=
=
=
=

line or set of lines to be loaded
optional surface or set of surfaces, which contains the
elements to be loaded. Only required when there is ambiguity
over which elements are to be loaded. See below
value of distributed load (at point pnam1 if varying)
direction of load (see notes 1 and 2)
point where load value is dist1
value of distributed load at point pnam2
Loadcase numbers
Loaded part determines BL or ML loading
In all cases the part must be a line (or a set of lines). If the line is meshed, then the ASAS
BL type loading is generated. Otherwise, if the line bounds a meshed surface, then the
ASAS ML type loading is generated.
Ambiguous loading
Ambiguity over which elements are loaded may arise when the line that is loaded is attached to more than one surface. This ambiguity can be resolved by specifying the surface
containing the elements to be loaded in the definition of the load. If the (optional) surface
is not given then the load is applied to the surface with the lower entity number.
Varying load
If the last three parameters are defined, then the distributed load will vary linearly between
points pnam1 and pnam2. These points do not have to be on the loaded part.
Note 1: Direction of load - BL loading
For BL loading, the direction of the load (degree of freedom) is defined by a
freedom code as defined in the Table of section 2.4, page 349. These relate to
the element local axes defined by the `PROPERTY PHYSICAL ORIENTATE'
command see section 2.14.7.8, page 413.
Note 2: Direction of load - ML loading
For ML loading, the direction of the load (degree of freedom) is defined by a
freedom integer in the range 1 to 3. These are as follows:
1
2
3
=
=
=
axial load along edge in direction of elements order

normal edge load, positive away from elements centre
transverse edge load, positive in the direction of the elements positive normal.
19/08/1999

IMPORTANT RESTRICTION
Note that the direction of the ML loading for freedoms 2 and 3 will be displayed
according to the lines local y and z directions, which may not relate to the correct
load direction for the surface.
19/08/1999
371
372

Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS BL DIST LO1 4 L15 450 Z
A distributed load of 450 is applied along the beam elements generated on line L15
in the local z direction. This loading is called LO1 and is part of loadcase 4.
2. PROPERTY LOADS BL DIST LO2 6 L5 120.0 Y P5 P6 110.0
A varying distributed load is applied to line L5 in the local y direction. The loading
values vary from 120.0 to 110.0 between points P5 and P6. This loading is called
LO2 and is part of loadcase 6.
3. PROPERTY LOADS BL DIST LO3 8 L35 32.0 2
A distributed load of 32.0 is applied to line L35 along the edge of a surface element.
The loading will be a ML2 load (in-plane loading away from the centre of the surface), although the load vector will be displayed in the local y axis of line L22. This
loading is called LO3 and is part of loadcase 8.
See Also:

19/08/1999
373
PROPERTY LOADS
GL DIST
Apply distributed loads in the global axes
2.14.5.5 PROPERTY LOADS GL DIST

[lonm] [lcas] part dist1 [dof [pnam1 pnam2 dist2]]
This command is used to apply distributed loading to beam members in the global axes.
The part can be selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
dist1
dof
pnam1
pnam2
dist2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Loadcase numbers
Loaded part
In all cases the part must be a line (or a set of lines).
Varying load
Note 1: Direction of load - GL loading
For GL loading, the direction of the load (degree of freedom) is defined by a
the global axes for the model.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS GL DIST LO1 2 L5 100 X
A distributed load of 100 is applied along the beam elements generated on line L5 in
the global X direction. This loading is called LO1 and is part of loadcase 2.
2. PROPERTY LOADS GL DIST LO2 3 L10 5.0 Z P5 P6 6.0
A varying distributed load is applied to line L10 in the global Z direction. The
loading values vary from 5.0 to 6.0 between points P5 and P6. This loading is called
LO2 and is part of loadcase 3.
See Also:

19/08/1999
374

19/08/1999
375
PROPERTY LOADS
GP DIST
Apply projected distributed loads in the global axes
2.14.5.6 PROPERTY LOADS GP DIST

[lonm] [lcas] part dist1 [dof [pnam1 pnam2 dist2]]
This command is used to apply projected distributed loading to beam members in the global
axes. The part can be selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
dist1
dof
pnam1
pnam2
dist2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Loadcase numbers
Loaded part
In all cases the part must be a line (or a set of lines).
Varying load
Note 1: Direction of load - GP loading
For GP loading, the direction of the load (degree of freedom) is defined by a
the global axes for the model.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS GP DIST LO1 2 L5 100 X
A projected distributed load of 100 is applied along the beam elements generated on
line L5 in the global X direction. This loading is called LO1 and is part of loadcase
2.
2. PROPERTY LOADS GP DIST LO2 3 L10 5.0 Z P5 P6 6.0
A varying projected distributed load is applied to line L10 in the global Z direction.
The loading values vary from 5.0 to 6.0 between points P5 and P6. This loading is
called LO2 and is part of loadcase 3.
See Also:

19/08/1999
376

19/08/1999
377
PROPERTY LOADS
TEMPERAT
Apply temperatures at nodes
2.14.5.7 PROPERTY LOADS TEMPERAT [lonm] [lcas] part temp

This command is used to apply temperatures at nodes. The part can be selected either with
the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
temp
=
=
=
=

part that shall have specified temperature (point, line, surface, body or set)
temperature
Loadcase numbers
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS TEMPERAT LO6 5 S11A 22
Define a temperature load of 22 degrees on all nodes generated in set S11A. This
See Also:

19/08/1999
378
PROPERTY LOADS
FACE TEM
Apply temperature gradients at nodes
2.14.5.8 PROPERTY LOADS FACE TEM [lonm] [lcas] part temp1 temp2
This command is used to apply temperature gradients at nodes. The part can be selected
either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
temp1
temp2
=
=
=
=
=

part that shall have specified temperature (point, line, surface or set)
temperature on face1
temperature on face2
Loadcase numbers
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS FACE TEM LO8 7 S22A 10 50
Define a temperature gradient load on all nodes generated in set S22A. The temperature gradient varies from 10 degrees on face 1 to 50 degrees on face 2. This loading
is called LO8 and is part of loadcase 7.
See Also:

19/08/1999
379
PROPERTY LOADS
EL TEMPE
Apply temperatures on elements
2.14.5.9 PROPERTY LOADS EL TEMPE [lonm] [lcas] part temp

This command is used to apply temperatures on elements. The part can be selected either
with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
temp
=
=
=
=

part that shall have specified temperature (line, surface, body or set)
temperature
Loadcase numbers
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS EL TEMPE LO2 3 S33A 32
Define a temperature load of 32 degrees on all elements generated in set S33A. This
See Also:

19/08/1999
380
PROPERTY LOADS
EL FACET
Apply temperature gradients on elements
2.14.5.10 PROPERTY LOADS EL FACET [lonm] [lcas] part temp1 temp2

This command is used to apply temperature gradients on elements. The part can be selected
lonm
lcas
part
temp1
temp2
=
=
=
=
=

part that shall have specified temperature (line, surface, body or set)
temperature on face 1
temperature on face 2
Loadcase numbers
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS EL FACET LO1 1 S44A 20 30
Define a temperature load on all elements generated in set S44A. The temperature
gradient varies from 20 degrees on face 1 to 30 degrees on face 2. This loading is
called LO1 and is part of loadcase 1.
See Also:

19/08/1999
381
PROPERTY LOADS
BODY FOR
Apply gravity loads and linear accelerations
2.14.5.11 PROPERTY LOADS BODY FOR [lonm] [lcas] part acc dof
This command is used to apply gravity loading and linear accelerations to the structure.
The part can be selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
acc
dof
=
=
=
=
=

part to be loaded (line, surface, body or set)
linear acceleration
direction of acceleration (X, Y or Z)
Loadcase numbers
Loaded part
The part may be a line, surface, body or set. Body force loading is only applied to elements
on the part. ÀLL' may be used as the part name to request body force loading on all
elements.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS BODY FOR LOD1 15 ALL -9.81 Z
Apply a gravity acceleration of -9.81 in the Z direction. This load application, called
LOD1, applies to all elements in the model and is part of loadcase 15.
2. PROPERTY LOADS BODY FOR LOD2 20 HEAVY -10.0 Z
Apply a linear acceleration of -10.0 in the Z direction. This load application, called
LOD2, applies to elements in the set `HEAVY' and is part of loadcase 20.
See Also:

19/08/1999
382
PROPERTY LOADS
CENTRIFU
Apply centrifugal accelerations
2.14.5.12 PROPERTY LOADS CENTRIFU [lonm] [lcas] part vel dof pnam1 pnam2
This command is used to apply centrifugal loading to the structure. The part can be selected
lonm
lcas
part
vel
dof
pnam1
pnam2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

angular velocity (radians/sec)
0 (this must be included)
first point defining axis of rotation
second point defining axis of rotation
Loadcase numbers
Loaded part
The part may be a line, surface, body or set. Centrifugal loading is only applied to elements
on the part. ÀLL' may be used as the part name to request centrifugal loading on all
elements.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS CENTRIFU LOD1 15 ALL 1.7 0 P26 P34
Apply an angular velocity of 1.7 radians/sec about a line from point P26 to P34.
This load application, called LOD1, applies to all elements in the model and is part
of loadcase 15.
2. PROPERTY LOADS CENTRIFU LOD2 20 SPIN 0.7 0 P35 P45
Apply an angular velocity of 0.7 radians/sec about a line from point P35 to P45. This
load application, called LOD2, applies to all elements in the set `SPIN' and is part
of loadcase 20.
See Also:

19/08/1999
383
PROPERTY LOADS
ANG ACCE
Apply angular acceleration loads
2.14.5.13 PROPERTY LOADS ANG ACCE [lonm] [lcas] part acc dof pnam1 pnam2
This command is used to apply angular acceleration loading to the structure. The part can
be selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
lcas
part
acc
dof
pnam1
pnam2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

angular acceleration
0 (this must be included)
first point defining axis of rotation
second point defining axis of rotation
Loadcase numbers
Loaded part
The part may be a line, surface, body or set. Angular acceleration loading is only applied to
elements on the part. ÀLL' may be used as the part name to request angular acceleration
loading on all elements.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS ANG ACCE LOD1 15 ALL 0.83 0 P26 P34
Apply an angular acceleration of 0.83 radians/sec2 about a line from point P26 to
P34. This load application, called LOD1, applies to all elements in the model and is
part of loadcase 15.
2. PROPERTY LOADS ANG ACCE LOD2 20 SPIN 1.15 0 P35 P45
Apply an angular acceleration of 1.15 radians/sec2 about a line from point P35 to
P45. This load application, called LOD2, applies to all elements in the set `SPIN'
and is part of loadcase 20.
See Also:

19/08/1999
384
PROPERTY LOADS
L ADDMAS
Apply a lumped added mass
2.14.5.14 PROPERTY LOADS L ADDMAS [lonm] part mass dof

This command is used to apply an additional lumped mass in a single direction. This
lumped mass is in addition to the mass of the elements in the structure. The part can be
selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
part
mass
=
=
=
dof

part to be loaded (point, line, surface, body or set)
value of lumped mass. This mass will be applied in the
direction of the freedom
direction of mass (see note 1)
Loadcase numbers
Loadcase numbers should not be used in this command and will be ignored if present. The
lumped mass is active for all appropriate loadcases.
Lumped full mass
This command cannot be used in conjunction with the L FULMAS command.
Note 1: Direction of mass
The direction in which the mass is active (X, Y, Z, RX, RY, RZ).
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS L ADDMAS LO1 P1 1000 Z
A concentrated point mass of 1000 is applied to the node generated at P1 in the global
Z direction. This additional mass is called LO1.
See Also:

19/08/1999
385
PROPERTY LOADS
L FULMAS
Apply a lumped full mass
2.14.5.15 PROPERTY LOADS L FULMAS [lonm] part mass dof

This command is used to apply a lumped mass in a single direction. With this command
the mass of the elements in the structure is omitted. The part can be selected either with
the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
part
mass
=
=
=
dof

part to be loaded (point, line, surface, body or set)
value of lumped mass. This mass will be applied in the
direction of the freedom
direction of mass (see note 1)
Loadcase numbers
lumped mass is active for all appropriate loadcases.
Lumped added mass
This command cannot be used in conjunction with the L ADDMAS command.
Note 1: Direction of mass
The direction in which the mass is active (X, Y, Z, RX, RY, RZ).
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS L FULMAS LO2 P2 200 Z
A concentrated point mass of 200 is applied to the node generated at P2 in the global
Z direction. This lumped mass is called LO2 and replaces the mass of all the elements
in the structure.
See Also:

19/08/1999
386
PROPERTY LOADS
C ADDMAS
Apply a consistent added mass
2.14.5.16 PROPERTY LOADS C ADDMAS [lonm] part massx massy massz

This command is used to apply additional distributed mass to beam elements. The part can
be selected either with the keyboard or the cursor.
lonm
part
massx
massy
massz
=
=
=
=
=

part to be loaded (point, line or set of lines)
component of additional material density in the element local x direction
component of additional material density in the element local y direction
component of additional material density in the element local z direction
Loadcase numbers
distributed mass is active for all appropriate loadcases.
ASAS natural frequency analysis
This is only for use in ASAS natural frequency analysis.
Applicability of load
This loading can only be applied to ASAS BEAM, BM2D, BM3D, TUBE and GRIL elements.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOADS C ADDMAS LO1 L10 10 20 30
Additional densities of 10 20 30 are applied to the elements generated on line L1 in
the local x, y and z directions respectively. This added mass is called LO1.
See Also:

19/08/1999
387
ADVANCED LOADING
2.14.5.17 ADVANCED LOADING

It is possible to define more complex loads in FEMGEN by the use of Time Curves, Space
Curves, Load Masks, and Local Coordinate Systems. These data types are defined separately to the load using the `CONSTRUCT' command and appended to the load using the
`PROPERTY ATTACH' command. It is thus possible to define a simple load and then increase the complexity of its definition by progressively appending more data to it. Figure
2.109 illustrates the data types which may be associated with a simple load.
LOAD (Type, Number, Case, Part, Values)
TCURVE
SCURVE
LMASK
CSYST
CSYST
Figure 2.109: Construction of advanced loading

TCURVE
SCURVE
LMASK
CSYST
=
=
=
=
time curve definition (see `CONSTRUCT TCURVE' )

space curve definition (see `CONSTRUCT SCURVE' )
load mask definition (see `CONSTRUCT LMASK' )
local coordinate system definition (see `CONSTRUCT COORDSYS' )
Examples:
1. PROPERTY LOAD NODAL LO LO1 S1 100 X
LABEL MESH LOADS
This is a simple load definition to which more complex data will be defined and
Figure 2.110: Simple Load

attached in the following examples.
19/08/1999
388

2. CONSTRUCT COORDSYS CYLINDRIC CY1 P1 P2 P5
PROPERTY ATTACH S1 CY1
DRAWING DISPLAY
Local Coordinate systems are used to modify the direction of a load and are thus
Figure 2.111: Load with local cylindrical coordinate system added

usually reserved for nodal vector loads. A typical application would be to specify
a radial load on a circular part by the application of a local cylindrical coordinate
system.
IMPORTANT RESTRICTION
Note that the local coordinate system is attached to the loaded part NOT to the load.
Attaching it to the load has the same effect in FEMGEN , BUT this is not translated
to the ASAS data file.
3. CONSTRUCT LMASK LM1 SURFACE .2 .8 .2 .8
PROPERTY ATTACH LO1 LM1
DRAWING DISPLAY
Load Masks are used to limit the extent of a load. Load Masks may be defined either
Figure 2.112: Load with load mask added

in terms of parametric (0-1) distances on the loaded part's geometry or in terms of
the global coordinate system. It is possible to append a local coordinate system to a
load mask defined in the global coordinate system. A typical application might be
the definition of the water line on a ship model.
Edge of load mask
The edge of the loading will be on the edge of the outer elements on the edge of load
mask, NOT on the edge of the load mask itself (unless these coincide).
19/08/1999

4. CONSTRUCT SCURVE SC1 SURFACE LINE L1 ELIPSE 10
PROPERTY ATTACH LO1 SC1
DRAWING DISPLAY
Space curves are used to describe the variation of a load in space and consist of
Figure 2.113: Load with space curve added

a number of locations and associated values by which the basic load is multiplied.
Space curves may be defined either in terms of parametric (0-1) distances on the
loaded part's geometry or in terms of the global coordinate system. It is possible to
append a local coordinate system to a space curve defined in the global coordinate
system. A typical application would be the radial variation of a load on a circular
geometry.
Use of load mask with space curve
If a line/surface load mask is with a space curve, then the space curve will compressed to fit the load mask. However if a global load mask is used, then the space
curve definition will be truncated by the load mask.
5. CONSTRUCT TCURVE TC1 RAMP 1 1
PROPERTY ATTACH LO1 TC1
DRAWING DISPLAY
Time curves are used to describe the variation of a load with time and are applicable
Figure 2.114: Load with time curve added

only to non-linear or transient analyses. The Time Curve is a list of times and amplitude values by which the basic load is multiplied. Example applications might be the
magnitude of a pressure pulse from an explosion or the variation in film coefficients
and temperatures on the boundary of a transient heat transfer analysis.
Display of time curves
The application of a time curve has no visible effect on the display of the load vectors.
However both time curves and space curves may be displayed in graphical form by
use of the ÙTILITY GRAPH' command.
19/08/1999
389
390
PROPERTY
MATERIAL
Define Material Properties
2.14.6 PROPERTY MATERIAL

This command is used to define or redefine material properties.
`PROPERTY MATERIAL' has the following sub-commands:
2.14.6.1
PROPERTY MATERIAL DEFINE
2.14.6.2
2.14.6.3
2.14.6.4
PROPERTY MATERIAL ISO

PROPERTY MATERIAL AISO
PROPERTY MATERIAL TISO
2.14.6.5
2.14.6.6
2.14.6.7
PROPERTY MATERIAL ORTH

PROPERTY MATERIAL LAMI
PROPERTY MATERIAL LIBRARY
Used for model archiving purposes only;

do not use
Define isotropic material properties
Define anisotropic material properties
Define temperature dependent isotropic
material properties
Define orthotropic material properties
Define laminate material properties
Define material properties from external
library
FEMGEN material names cannot be reused for a different class of material type unless the
existing definition is deleted and then recreated.
See Also:

`LABEL GEOMETRY MATERIALS' , section 2.11.1, page 256
`LABEL MESH MATERIALS' , section 2.11.2, page 258
ÙTILITY DELETE MATERIALS' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY MATERIALS' , section 2.18.9,
page 516
19/08/1999
391
PROPERTY MATERIAL
DEFINE
Define material properties
2.14.6.1 PROPERTY MATERIAL DEFINE Type name Nvals

This command is used only for archiving FEMGEN models and should NOT be used
interactively.
19/08/1999
392
PROPERTY MATERIAL
ISO
Define isotropic material properties
2.14.6.2 PROPERTY MATERIAL ISO [manm] emod nu [alpha [rho]]

This command is used to define isotropic material properties.
manm
emod
nu
alpha
rho
=
=
=
=
name of material, used at later references. If omitted a new name is

generated automatically
modulus of elasticity
Poisson's ratio
coefficient of thermal expansion
density
The definition of emod and nu are compulsory, alpha and rho will be set to zero if not
specified. This command should be used to define isotropic material properties only. To
assign material properties to a certain part of the structure, use the command `PROPERTY
ATTACH' .
Examples:
1. PROPERTY MATERIAL ISO STEEL1 200000 .3
Define an isotropic material called STEEL1 with property values emod = 200000,
nu = 0.3, alpha = 0 and rho = 0.
2. PROPERTY MATERIAL ISO 1500.0 .25 1.0E-5 8.0
Define an isotropic material with property values emod = 1500, nu = 0.25, alpha =
0.00001 and rho = 8, and an automatically generated name.
See Also:

page 516
19/08/1999
393
PROPERTY MATERIAL
AISO
Define anisotropic material properties
2.14.6.3 PROPERTY MATERIAL AISO [manm] real1 [real2 real3 ...]

This command is used to define anisotropic material properties.
manm
realn

material property data as specified for the particular ASAS element it is
attached to see Appendix A of the ASAS User Manual
To assign material properties to a certain part of the structure, use the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' .
Examples:
1. PROPERTY MATERIAL AISO 0.290 =
0.42E8 0.18E8 0.39E8 0.18E8 0.16E8 =
0.42E8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.13E8 =
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.12E8 =
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 =
0.11E8 =
0.1094E-4 0.0910E-4 0.1412E-4
Define anisotropic material properties with an automatically generated material name.
See Also:

page 516
19/08/1999
394
PROPERTY MATERIAL
TISO
Define temperature dependent material properties
2.14.6.4 PROPERTY MATERIAL TISO [manm] emod nu alpha rho tref [nref]
This command is used to define temperature dependent material properties.
manm
emod
nu
alpha
rho
tref
nref
=
=
=
=
=
=

modulus of elasticity
Poisson's ratio
coefficient of thermal expansion
density
reference temperature
number of reference temperatures for the whole property
All the material property values including nref are compulsory on the first command line.
This command line must then be followed immediately by (nref-1) further `PROPERTY
MATERIAL TISO' command lines, for which both manm and nref are omitted. These
further command lines define the material property values at subsequent temperatures. The
value of tref must be ascending throughout the command lines. To assign material properties to a certain part of the structure, use the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' , referencing
manm from the property in the first command line.
Multiple material names
The subsequent command lines will generate separate material names when tabulated in
FEMGEN . However these are ignored when transferring the data to the ASAS data file.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY MATERIAL TISO MA1 20000 0.3 0.009 0.002 0 3
PROPERTY MATERIAL TISO MA1 20500 0.3 0.008 0.0022 100
PROPERTY MATERIAL TISO MA1 20900 0.3 0.0079 0.003 200
PROPERTY ATTACH S1 MATERIAL MA1
Define a temperature dependent material property with values specified at 0, 100 and
200 degrees and apply it to the elements generated on surface S1.
See Also:

page 516
19/08/1999
395
PROPERTY MATERIAL
ORTH
Define orthotropic material properties
2.14.6.5 PROPERTY MATERIAL ORTH [manm] props

This command is used to define orthotropic material properties.
manm
props
name of material, used at later references. If omitted a new name

is generated automatically
list of orthotropic material properties
The properties required are as follows:

e11 , e22 , e33
g12 , g23 , g31
12 , 23 , 31
11 , 22 , 33
=
=
=
=
=
density
Young's moduli in local 1, 2 and 3 directions
shear moduli in local 12, 23 and 31 planes
Poisson's ratio in local 12, 23 and 31 planes
coefficients of thermal expansion in local 1, 2 and 3 directions
All 13 values must be specified.

Element types
Orthotropic material properties only apply to ASAS element types QUS4, TCS6 and TCS8.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY MATERIAL ORTH OPROP 7.85E-9
40E6 1E6 0.0 0.5E6 0.5E6 0.5E6 =
0.25 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.1
PROPERTY ATTACH S1 MATERIAL OPROP
Define an orthotropic material property called OPROP and apply it to the elements
generated on surface S1.
See Also:

page 516
19/08/1999
396
PROPERTY MATERIAL
LAMI
Define laminate material properties
2.14.6.6 PROPERTY MATERIAL LAMI [manm] rho

This command is used to define laminate material properties.
manm
rho

density
To assign material properties to a certain part of the structure, use the command `PROPERTY ATTACH' .
Examples:
1. PROPERTY MATERIAL LAMI LAMIN2 7680
Define a laminate material called LAMIN2 with rho = 7680.
See Also:

page 516
19/08/1999
397
PROPERTY MATERIAL
LIBRARY
Define material properties from external library
2.14.6.7 PROPERTY MATERIAL LIBRARY [manm] filename [mat]

This command is used to define a material property from an external ' library' file. This
type of definition is particularly suited to ASASNL material data types which are generally
too complex to be entered through a command line definition.
manm
filename
mat
=
=

name (and path) of the external library file
name of the material to be used from the external library file
File name
The file name and material name (if present) must be in quotes so that FEMGEN is able
to distinguish these from the material property name. If the material name mat is omitted,
then the material property name manm must be supplied. In this case, mat (the material
name in the external library file) is assumed to be manm, the material name in the external
library file. By doing this the selected material from the library will be displayed by the
`LABEL GEOMETRY MATERIAL' command.
Format of external library file
The format of the external library file is identical to the ASAS/ASASNL material data formats, except that the material numbers are replaced by material name of up to 12 characters
long. A typical example is given below. It should also be noted that the material will be
assigned a unique material number in the ASAS data file NOT the material name from the
external library file.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY MATERIAL LIBRARY MAT1 C:nMATERIALnSTEEL.LIB SS316
PROPERTY ATTACH SHELL MATERIAL MAT1
Select material SS316 from the library file C:nMATERIALnSTEEL.LIB and attach
it to all elements generated in set SHELL.
2. PROPERTY MATERIAL LIBRARY C:nMATERIALnWOODS.LIB BEECH
Select material BEECH from the library file C:nMATERIALnWOODS.LIB, generating a new property name automatically.
3. PROPERTY MATERIAL LIBRARY PINE C:nMATERIALnWOODS.LIB
Select material PINE from the library file C:nMATERIALnWOODS.LIB, generating
a property name called PINE.
19/08/1999
398

4. Example of external library file for material properties
MAT01
MAT02
:
:
:
:
:
:
MAT03
:
:
MAT04
ISO
AISO
TISO
ISO
0.298E8
0.290
0.42E8
0.42E8
0.0
0.0
0.11E8
0.1094E-4
2.07E11
2.01E11
1.87E11
0.312E8
0.3
0.1182E-4
0.283
0.18E8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.39E8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.18E8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.16E8
0.13E8
0.12E8
0.0
0.0910E-4
0.32
0.31
0.30
0.31
0.1412E-4
1.47E-6
1.57E-6
1.72E-6
0.1212E-4
0.284
0.284
0.284
0.298
0.0
200.0
350.0
See Also:

page 516
19/08/1999
399
PROPERTY
PHYSICAL
Define Physical Properties
2.14.7 PROPERTY PHYSICAL

This command is used to define or redefine the physical properties of the elements. In
ASAS, these properties are called geometric properties. Typically they define properties
such as:
Beam Elements Area
Moments of Inertia and Torsion
Shear Area
Member Offsets and Orientation
Shell Elements Thicknesses
Some elements (bricks and axi-symmetric elements) do not require physical properties,
since they are fully defined by the elements own geometric shape.
`PROPERTY PHYSICAL' has the following sub-commands:
2.14.7.1
2.14.7.2
PROPERTY PHYSICAL DEFINE

PROPERTY PHYSICAL GENERAL
2.14.7.3
2.14.7.4
2.14.7.5
2.14.7.6
2.14.7.7
2.14.7.8
For beam properties

PROPERTY PHYSICAL BEAM
PROPERTY PHYSICAL sectyp
PROPERTY PHYSICAL FLEX
PROPERTY PHYSICAL SECTION
PROPERTY PHYSICAL OFFSET
PROPERTY PHYSICAL ORIENTATE
2.14.7.9
2.14.7.10
2.14.7.11
2.14.7.12
For shell properties

PROPERTY PHYSICAL THICKNES
PROPERTY PHYSICAL VAR THIK
PROPERTY PHYSICAL SC THICK
PROPERTY PHYSICAL LAMINATE
For model archiving only, do not use

For general physical properties
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY PHYSICAL' , section 2.11.1, page 256

`LABEL MESH PHYSICAL' , section 2.11.2, page 258
ÙTILITY DELETE PHYSICAL' , section 2.18.2, page 479
ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY PHYSICAL' , section 2.18.9, page 516
The following tables show which property types may be used with each of the ASAS elements.
19/08/1999
BM3D
BM2D
BMGN
GRIL
FLA2
CURB
ASH2
AHH2
SPR1
SPR2
GAPX
GAP2
GAPA
RLNK
RBM2
RBM3
CON2
NLK2
RAD2
GCB3
TCBM
FLA3
FAX3
BAX3
WST4
SST4
STF4
TRM3
TBC3
TRB3
TRX3
THX3
LAMINATE
SC_THICK
VAR_THIK
Notes
THICK
ORIENTATE
OFFSET
sectyp
SECTION
TUBE
FLEX
BEAM
BEAM
ASAS
Elements
GENERAL
400
Only section type TUB permitted
No properties required
Figure 2.115: ASAS element property types
19/08/1999
QUS4
QUM4
MEM4
QUX4
QHX4
MOQ4
QUN4
GCS6
TCS6
TRM6
TRX6
THX6
TSP6
STM6
CTM6
CTX6
GCS8
TCS8
QUM8
QUX8
QHX8
SLB8
WAP8
SQM8
TCS9
BRK6
SND6
BRK8
SND8
BR15
SN12
CB15
SN16
401
LAMINATE
SC_THICK
VAR_THIK
THICK
ORIENTATE
OFFSET
SECTION
FLEX
sectyp
BEAM
ASAS
Elements
GENERAL

Notes
BR20
TET4
TE10
Figure 2.116: ASAS element property types (cont)

19/08/1999
402
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
DEFINE
Define physical properties
2.14.7.1 PROPERTY PHYSICAL DEFINE Type name Nvals

This command is used only for archiving FEMGEN models and should NOT be used
interactively.
19/08/1999
403
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
GENERAL
Define general physical properties
2.14.7.2 PROPERTY PHYSICAL GENERAL [phname] props

This command is used to define or redefine physical (geometric) properties for elements requiring properties other than the standard types provided by the other `PROPERTY PHYSICAL' commands. See the Table of section 2.115, page 400.
pbname
props
name of physical property, used at later references. If omitted a new

name is generated automatically
list of physical (geometric) properties applicable to the ASAS element
type
To assign physical properties to a certain part of the structure use the `PROPERTY ATTACH' command.
Reference required to the ASAS User Manual
The list of properties are ASAS element dependent as specified in Appendix A of the ASAS
User Manual. It is up to the user to ensure that the correct number of properties are entered
in the correct order.
Use of GENERAL properties
This definition should ONLY be used when none of the other definitions will meet the
requirement of the ASAS element type.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL GENERAL HAR 2
Define a physical property called HAR, which has a single value of 2. If this is
attached to a part meshed with the ASAS element type QHX8, then this will define
the harmonic number of the element.
See Also:

19/08/1999
404
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
BEAM
Define general beam properties
2.14.7.3 PROPERTY PHYSICAL BEAM [phname] props

This command is used to define or redefine physical (geometric) properties for ASAS beam
elements, which do not allow section definitions to be used. See the Table of section 2.115,
page 400.
pbname
props
name of physical property, used at later references. If omitted a new name is

list of physical (geometric) properties applicable to the ASAS element type
Reference required to the ASAS User Manual
The list of properties are ASAS element dependent as specified in Appendix A of the ASAS
User Manual. It is up to the user to ensure that the correct number of properties are entered
in the correct order.
OFFSET and ORIENTATE
The ÒFFSET' and ÒRIENTATE' property commands may be used in conjunction with
the FLEX definition to build a complete definition sharing the same property name. A
check should be made on the applicability of these properties to the element type. In cases
where the orientation cannot be specified, then the FLEX property type may be used.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL BEAM BP 0.5 0.02 0.08 0.1
Define BEAM properties named BP. If this was attached to a line meshed with ASAS
element type BEAM, then the properties would be:
cross-sectional area
moment of inertia about local z
moment of inertia about local y
torsional constant
=
=
=
=
0.5
0.02
0.08
0.1
See Also:

19/08/1999
405
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
sectyp
Define cross-sectional properties for beam members
2.14.7.4 PROPERTY PHYSICAL sectyp [phname] dimensions [props]

This command is used to define or redefine a physical (geometric) property consisting of
beam sectional properties in terms of shape, dimensions and flexural properties. If the
flexural properties are omitted, then they will be calculated by ASAS according to the
dimensions of the sections.
sectyp
=
section type name (see the Table of section 2.117, page 407)
pbname
=
name of physical property, used at later references. If omitted
a new name is generated automatically
dimensions =
dimensions of the cross-section in accordance to its type
=
props
=
list of flexural properties ordered as follows:
Ax = cross-sectional area
Iz
= principal moment of inertia about element local z axis
Iy
= principal moment of inertia about element local y axis
J
= torsional constant
Ay = effective shear area for forces in element local y direction
Az = effective shear area for forces in element local z direction
Flexural properties
Flexural properties only need to be defined if the value calculated from the cross-section
dimensions are to be overwritten with `doctored' values. Zero flexural property values will
cause the calculated values to be retained.
these definitions to build a complete definition sharing the same property name. A check
should be made on the applicability of these properties to the element type.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL BOX BX1 10 8 1 0.5
Define a box beam section called BX1 with a beam depth of 10 and width of 8. The
top and bottom plates are of thickness 1 and the sides plates of thickness 0.5.
2. PROPERTY PHYSICAL BOX BX1 10 8 1 0.5 0 0 0 0 6.1667
Define a similar box beam section to BX1, except that the torsional constant has been
modified so that the beam section behaves as if the section is open. The 0 following
the 0.5 is the bottom plate thickness, which is being allowed to default to the top
plate thickness. The other three zeros refer to default flexural properties.
See Also:

19/08/1999
406

19/08/1999
19/08/1999
Figure 2.117: Beam section types
407
408
Figure 2.118: Beam section types (cont)
19/08/1999
409
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
FLEX
Define flexural section properties
2.14.7.5 PROPERTY PHYSICAL FLEX [phname] props

This command is used to define or redefine the flexural properties of ASAS beam elements
only.
pbname
props
=
Ax
Iz
Iy
J
Ay
Az
name of physical property, used at later references.

If omitted a new name is generated automatically
list of flexural properties ordered as follows:
= cross-sectional area
= principal moment of inertia about element local z axis
= principal moment of inertia about element local y axis
= torsional constant
= effective shear area for forces in element local y direction
= effective shear area for forces in element local z direction
Conversion to ASAS data file
These flexural properties are stored using section data in the ASAS data file.
the FLEX definition to build a complete definition sharing the same property name. A
check should be made on the applicability of these properties to the element type.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL FLEX FLX1 50 600 200 300 40 45
Define a flexural beam property called FLX1, with cross-sectional area of 50, moments of inertia of 600 and 200, torsional constant of 300 and effective shear areas
of 40 and 45.
See Also:

19/08/1999
410
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
SECTION
Define a section to be used from an external section library
2.14.7.6 PROPERTY PHYSICAL SECTION [phname] filename [secnam]

This command is used to define or redefine the flexural properties of ASAS beam elements
only.
pbname
filename
secnam
=
=

name (and path) of the external section library file
name of the section to be used from the external section library file
To assign physical properties to part of the structure use `PROPERTY ATTACH' .

File name
The file name and section name (if present) must be in quotes so that FEMGEN is able to
distinguish these from the physical property name. If the section name secnam is omitted,
then the physical property name pbname must be supplied. In this case, pbname (the
section name in the external section library file) is assumed to be secnam. This is useful
since it means that the command `LABEL GEOMETRY PHYSICAL' will show the section
names, with the limitation that the section names must be 8 characters or less.
Format of external section library file
The external section libraries may be:
A standard ASAS section library (binary format)
A section library created by ADLIB (binary format)
User created library files(ASCII format)
Only one binary format section library may be specified for a model. However any number
of additional ASCII format libraries may be used. An ADLIB created binary format section library file must reside in the working directory and must only be up to 6 characters
long (i.e. a path name cannot be used). A standard ASAS section library resides in the
directory containing the ASAS programs and is referenced by its six character name. The
user created ASCII library files should have the same format as the SECT data in ASAS.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL SECTION SEC01 AISCLB W12X120
The section W12X120 will be used from the standard section library AISCLB.
2. PROPERTY PHYSICAL SECTION WF10X20 C:nSECTIONSnUSER.SEC
The section WF10X20 will be used from the user defined ASCII section library
C:nSECTIONSnUSER.SEC
3. Example of external library file for beam section properties
WF10X15 XSEC 10.0 15.0 1.0 1.0
WF10X20 XSEC 10.0 20.0 1.5 1.2
OBOX10X8 XSEC 10.0 8.0 1.0 0.5
: FLEX J 6.1667
WF20X30 XSEC 20.0 30.0 1.8 1.5
19/08/1999

See Also:

19/08/1999
411
412
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
phname OFFSET
Define beam offsets
2.14.7.7 PROPERTY PHYSICAL phname OFFSET vect1 [vect2]

This command is used to add beam offsets to an existing beam property in terms of two
vectors. These offsets equate to the OFFG offset definitions in ASAS.
pbname
vect1
vect2
=
=
=
name of existing physical property to which offsets are to be added

offset vector at beam start point (x, y, z components)
offset vector at beam end point (x, y, z components)
Second vector
If the second vector is omitted, then it is assumed to be the same as the first vector. These
vectors are defined in the global coordinate system.
Property name
The same property name pbname must be used for the beam property, offset and local axes
definitions to build the complete definition for a particular group of members.
Property types
This command is only valid for physical property types:
ANGL, BEAM, BOX, CHAN, FABI, FLEX, PRI, RHS, SECTION, TEE, TUB and WF.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL WF PH1 10 8 1 0.8 0.005
PROPERTY PHYSICAL PH1 OFFSET 0 0 1 0 0 1
Add unitary offsets in the global Z direction to physical property definition PH1 of a
wide flange section.
See Also:

19/08/1999
413
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
phname ORIENTATE
Define beam orientation
2.14.7.8 PROPERTY PHYSICAL phname ORIENTATE zdir

This command is used to add beam orientation as a vector to an existing beam property.
The orientation equates to the ASAS VECT orientation defined in the XZ direction.
pbname
zdir
name of existing physical property to which orientation

is to be added
zdir is used to define the beam local z' axis direction.
This can be done either with an orientation vector or a
point name. The orientation vector requires three components
to define the beam local z' axis in terms of the global axis
system. The default local direction is (0, 0, 1).
When a point name is used the beam local z' axis is defined
orthogonal to the line to which the property is attached and
in a direction towards the point
To assign physical properties to part of the structure use `PROPERTY ATTACH' .

Property name
The same property name pbname must be used for the beam property, offset and local axes
definitions to build the complete definition for a particular group of members.
Property types
This command is only valid for physical property types:
ANGL, BEAM, BOX, CHAN, FABI, FLEX, PRI, RHS, SECTION, TEE, TUB and WF.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL WF PH1 10 8 1 0.8 0.005
PROPERTY PHYSICAL PH1 ORIENTATE 1 0 0
Add an orientation definition to a wide flange section property definition PH1. The
members local z' -axis will lie in the plane of the member and be positive in the
positive global X direction.
section orientation
member local axis
global local axis
Figure 2.119: Define section orientation of a wide flange beam property
19/08/1999
414

See Also:

19/08/1999
415
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
THICKNES
Define an element thickness
2.14.7.9 PROPERTY PHYSICAL THICKNES [pbname] thick

This command is used to define a uniform element thickness.
pbname = name of physical property, used at later references. If omitted a new name
is generated automatically
thick
= thickness of plate, membrane or shell elements
Element types
This command must only be used for plate, membrane or shell element types.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL THICKNES TH13 0.13
Define a thickness called TH13 to be 0.13.
See Also:

19/08/1999
416
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
VAR THIK
Define a variable element thickness
2.14.7.10 PROPERTY PHYSICAL VAR THIK

[pbname] thick1 thick2 coord1 coord2
This command is used to define a variable element thickness.
pbname = name of physical property, used at later references.
thick1
= thickness at position defined by coord1
thick2
= thickness at position defined by coord2
coord1
= x, y and z coordinates of first point
coord2
= x, y and z coordinates of second point
Direction
The two points (defined by coordinates) define the vector in the direction of the thickness
variation. The thickness at any node on the element is found by dropping a perpendicular
from the node onto the vector and interpolating (or extrapolating) the thickness from the
linear variation along the vector. Hence for a cylinder of varying wall thickness, the two
points could be on the central axis.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL VAR THIK V5 0.5 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.0
Define a variable thickness called V5 that varies linearly in the global Z direction,
with values of 0.5 at z=0.0 and 0.8 at z=5.0.
See Also:

19/08/1999
417
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
SC THICK
Define a variable element thickness using a space curve
2.14.7.11 PROPERTY PHYSICAL SC THICK

[pbname] scname [val1 [val2 [lmask]]]
This command is used to define an element thickness that varies in accordance with a space
curve.
pbname = name of physical property, used at later references.
scname = name of the space curve to be used
val1
= multiplier to be applied to the space curve value at each point
val2
= constant to be added at each point (to avoid zero thickness)
lmask
= load mask name
Use of quotes
The space curve name, values and load mask name must be in quotes to distinguish these
from the physical property name.
Visualisation in FEMVIEW
Although space curves and load masks are primarily for the application of load variations,
they also provide a useful way of defining thickness variation. These variations may be contoured by saving the FEMM files from an ASAS data check run, and then viewing the GE
OMPR `loadcase' THICKNESS component of element results in FEMVIEWAdditionally
a 3-D rendition of the thicknesses may be viewed by saving the FV3D from an ASAS data
check run.
Load masks
If a load mask is used, then care must be taken to avoid leaving element thicknesses outside
the mask undefined. For this reason, only global load masks are really suitable, where the
part having the property attached falls entirely within the load mask.
19/08/1999
418

Examples:
1. GEOMETRY SURFACE 4POINTS P1 P2 P3 P4
CONSTRUCT SCURVE SC1 SURFACE LINE L1 LIST 0.0 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0
PROPERTY PHYSICAL SC THICK STHK1 SC1
PROPERTY ATTACH S10 PHYSICAL STHK1
Figure 2.120: Define surface thickness variation using a space curve
See Also:

19/08/1999
419
PROPERTY PHYSICAL
LAMINATE
Define laminate properties
2.14.7.12 PROPERTY PHYSICAL LAMINATE

[pbname] filename THICK thickness
This command is used to define the laminate properties from an external file.
pbname
filename
name
THICK
thickness
=
=
=

name (and path) of the external file containing the
laminate properties
name of the laminate property to be used
keyword to indicate a thickness follows
total thickness of laminate
Use of quotes
The file name, laminate name and thickness definition must be in quotes to distinguish
these from the physical property name.
Total thickness
The total thickness of the laminate is defined by thickness and the thicknesses of the individual layers are scaled to sum to this thickness.
Format of laminate library file
The laminate library file is in the same format as the ASAS data file except that both the
geometric and material numbers are replaced by names. The laminate library file must
include the material definition for all the materials used by the layer definitions in the file.
These are referenced by a name and separated from the layup data by a `MATERIAL'
heading. In the ASAS data file the material names will be replaced by unique material
numbers.
Examples:
1. PROPERTY PHYSICAL LAMINATE LAYUP1 C:nLAMINATSnLAM001.LIB
THICK 10.0
A laminate definition called LAYUP1 will be used from the library file
C:nLAMINATSnLAM001.LIB. The individual layer thicknesses will be scaled to
give a total thickness of 10.
2. Example of external library file for laminate properties
LAYUP1
:LAMI 3 1
:MATER01 20.0 35.0
:MATER02 20.0 20.0
:MATER03 20.0 35.0
MATERIAL
MATER01 ISO 2.3E5 0.3 0.1 0.1
MATER02 ORTH 0.78E7
: 56.0E4 10.0E4 10.0E4 0.0 0.0 20.0
19/08/1999
420

:
0.25 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.1
See Also:

19/08/1999
2.15. PRIMARY COMMAND RESULTS
421
RESULTS
Select results details
2.15 PRIMARY COMMAND RESULTS

The `RESULTS' command allows the details of the results required for inspection to be
specified. It is also the command used to perform calculations on results, to scan results,
and to combine and factor loadcases.
The `RESULTS' command is only available within the results assessment module FEMVIEW
and has the following secondary commands:
2.15.1
2.15.2
2.15.3
2.15.4
2.15.5
2.15.6
2.15.7
2.15.8
2.15.9
2.15.10
19/08/1999
RESULTS CALCULATE
RESULTS ELEMENT
RESULTS GAUSSIAN
RESULTS INVARIANT
RESULTS LOADCASE
RESULTS NODAL
RESULTS OFF
RESULTS RANGE
RESULTS STACK
RESULTS TRANSFORM
- calculate results
- select element results attribute
- select Gaussian results attribute
- select element constant results attribute
- select loadcase(s)
- select nodal results attribute
- switch off results presentation
- specify results range controls
- select many results
- transform results
422
RESULTS
CALCULATE
Calculate results
2.15.1 RESULTS CALCULATE

`RESULTS CALCULATE' is the command for performing calculations on the results that
are stored in the database. Loadcases can be factored and combined to form new loadcases
and existing loadcases or attributes can be scanned to find extreme results. Also, certain
pre-defined calculations can be performed. The full range of `RESULTS CALCULATE'
commands are shown below.
2.15.1.1
2.15.1.2
AVERAGE
AV-DIFF
2.15.1.3
2.15.1.4
2.15.1.5
2.15.1.6
2.15.1.7
2.15.1.8
2.15.1.9
BEAMST
COMBINE
DIFFEREN
EXPRESSN
EXTRAPOL
INTEGRAT
PERDIFF
2.15.1.10
2.15.1.11
2.15.1.12
2.15.1.13
2.15.1.14
2.15.1.15
2.15.1.16
2.15.1.17
2.15.1.18
PRESSURE
P-ESTRAI
P-STRESS
P-SHEAR
P-YIELD
SAFETY
SCAN LOADCASE
SCAN SURFACES
VONMISES
- perform nodal averaging

- calculate the maximum difference between the average
and the element values
- spawns as a sub-process the WS Atkins program Beam Stress
- loadcases factored and added together
- differentiate the `y' values of a graph
- expressions are evaluated
- extrapolate gaussian or invariant values to nodes
- integrate over a region
- calculate a percentage difference between the average
and the element values
- pressures are calculated
- principal strains are calculated (needs engineering strains)
- principal stresses are calculated
- principal shears are calculated
- plastic yield is calculated
- factor of safety is calculated
- loadcases scanned for extreme values
- surfaces scanned for extreme values
- Von Mises stresses are calculated
Further information on each of these commands is given in the following sections. The
equations used in the calculations are given in Appendix H of the User Manual Appendices.
Note 1: The full range of commands for the presentation of results can be used with
calculated values.
Note 2: Only results calculated using `RESULTS CALCULATE AVERAGE' , `RESULTS
CALCULATE COMBINE' , `RESULTS CALCULATE AV-DIFF' , `RESULTS
CALCULATE EXPRESSN' , `RESULTS CALCULATE EXTRAPOL' , `RESULTS
CALCULATE PERDIFF' or `RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN' are saved in the
database. For all the other `RESULTS CALCULATE' commands the requested
results data is calculated òn the fly' and not saved in the database.
Note 3: The calculated loadcase/results will become the current loadcase/results.
19/08/1999

Note 4: The calculations `PRESSURE' , `P-ESTRAI' , `P-STRESS' , `P-SHEAR' , `PYIELD' , `SAFETY' and `VONMISES' will remain active if a different loadcase
is selected but will be switched off if a different results attribute or component is
selected via the `RESULTS NODAL/ ELEMENT/ GAUSSIAN/ INVARIANT'
command.
19/08/1999
423
424
RESULTS CALCULATE
AVERAGE
Perform nodal averaging
2.15.1.1 RESULTS CALCULATE AVERAGE

This command allows the user to perform nodal averaging on element, gaussian or invariant
result data sets. Averaging is carried out on all components of the selected attribute. The
resulting data is stored as a new nodal result data set.
This new data set takes the name of the current attribute (the result selected for averaging),
unless this attribute name already exists for nodal results, in which case the user is then
prompted for a new attribute name.
When the average command is applied to gaussian or invariant results, a results extrapolation is implicitly performed prior to calculating average values (see `RESULTS CALCULATE EXTRAPOL' ). No nodal averaging is performed across material boundaries and the
resulting nodal data set is therefore material dependent. Only material discontinuities are
considered in the present calculation, other discontinuities, such as difference in shell
thicknesses or non co-planar shells, are not taken into account.
Note 1: Loadcases
The averaging is performed on the selected results for all of the selected loadcases.
Note 2: Coordinate systems
Averaging cannot be performed on results defined in more than one coordinate
system (this is based on the value of the FEMVIEW system indicator ISYSTM).
An error message is issued if several coordinate systems are encountered for the
current data set.
Note 3: Record variants
The averaging command is only applicable if all results are the same variant
record. If the command is applied to results that use more than one variant
record, an error message is issued.
Note 4: Multi-surface results in multi-material models
For models with several materials and several surfaces, there might be a variation
in the number of materials from one surface to the other at any one node. In this
case a warning message is issued and the averaging is calculated only for the
materials that are common to all surfaces.
Note 5: Averaging of gaussian results
As part of the averaging process an extrapolation is made and the extrapolated
results will be valid only if the gauss point coordinates are given in their undeformed state. FEMVIEW assumes that this is the case and the user should take
care to ensure that the command is only used in this situation.
Note 6: Use of averaging with assemblies
It is not currently possible to average results at the assembly level.
See Also:
19/08/1999

`RESULTS CALCULATE AV-DIFF' , section 2.15.1.2, page 426
`RESULTS CALCULATE PERDIFF' , section 2.15.1.9, page 440
19/08/1999
425
426
RESULTS CALCULATE
AV-DIFF
Difference calculation for averaging
2.15.1.2 RESULTS CALCULATE AV-DIFF

This command applies to element nodal, gaussian or invariant result data sets and allows the
user to calculate the maximum difference between the results obtained by nodal averaging
and the selected element results. The calculation is carried out on all components of the
selected attribute.
The resulting data is stored as a new nodal result data set. A new attribute name is made
for this new data set by attaching the letter D in front of the current attribute name, unless
it already exists for nodal results. The user then has the choice of accepting it or typing a
new attribute name.
When the AV-DIFF command is applied to gaussian or invariant results, a results extrapolation is implicitly performed for the calculation of the average values (see `RESULTS CALCULATE EXTRAPOL' ). No nodal averaging is performed across material boundaries and
the resulting nodal data set is therefore material dependent. Only material discontinuities
are considered in the present calculation, other discontinuities, such as difference in
shell thicknesses or non co-planar shells, are not taken into account.
The restrictions on nodal averaging apply here, see notes below.
The difference calculation can be written as follows:
D = max(jRi , mj)
where
(Ri , i=1,n) are the ' n' element results attached to the node and
Pni=1 Ri
m is the average value calculated at this node (m = n )
Note 1: Loadcases
The maximum difference is calculated for the selected results for all of the selected loadcases.
The difference calculation cannot be performed on results defined in more than
one coordinate system (this is based on the value of the FEMVIEW system
indicator ISYSTM). An error message is issued if several coordinate systems
are encountered for the current data set.
The present command is only applicable if all results are the same variant record.
If the command is applied to results that use more than one variant record, an
error message is issued.
case a warning message is issued and the difference is calculated only for the
materials that are common to all surfaces.
19/08/1999

Note 5: Gaussian results
Note 6: Use of AV-DIFF with assemblies
It is not currently possible to calculate AV-DIFF at the assembly level.
19/08/1999
427
428
RESULTS CALCULATE
BEAMST
Spawn the WS Atkins program Beam Stress
2.15.1.3 RESULTS CALCULATE BEAMST Set name

This command spawns as a sub-process the WS Atkins program Beam Stress.
Either the name of a set may be specified, in which case the elements in the set will be procesed by Beam Stress, or the keyword ÀLL' may be given in which case all the elements
in the model will be processed by Beam Stress.
On workstations the Beam Stress program is run as a sub-process and the user can continue to work with FEMVIEW while Beam Stress is executing. When Beam Sress has
completed it will automatically transfer new results data back to FEMVIEW.
On PC's execution of FEMVIEW is suspended until Beam Stress has finished.
Further details on the Beam Stress program are available from WS Atkins Ltd.
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE BEAMST BRACE
The BEAMST process is initiated and takes as input all elements in the set named
BRACE.
2. RESULTS CALCULATE BEAMST ALL
The BEAMST process is initiated and takes as input all elements in the model.
19/08/1999
429
RESULTS CALCULATE
COMBINE
Combine and factor loadcases
2.15.1.4 RESULTS CALCULATE COMBINE Combination name [Step number]

This command enables the user to scale and combine loadcases.
Combination name
Step number
The name to be given to a new combination loadcase or the name

of an existing combination loadcase (See notes 1 and 2).
This defines the step number associated with the combination
loadcase and may be required when using combinations for non
linear or time dependent analysis results.
Note 1: Defining a new combination loadcase

If the combination loadcase does not exist then the user will be prompted for
source loadcase names and scale factors alternatively until the keyword `GO' is
entered in full; at which point the user will be prompted for a description of the
new loadcase and the name of the results attribute(s) to be combined.
Note 2: Using an existing combination loadcase
If the combination loadcase already exists, then the definition of the combination
will be referenced and the user will be prompted for the name of the results
attribute(s) to be combined.
Note 3: Selecting the results attribute(s) to be combined
During the combination procedure, the user will be prompted to specify the
attribute(s) to be combined. The list of attributes available for combination are
those attributes that exist in the first source loadcase specified in the definition
of the combination. In addition, the user may use the keyword `CURRENT' to
request that the current results attribute be combined, or the keyword ÀLL' to
request that all the available attributes in the attribute list be combined.
If an attribute that already exists in the combination loadcase is specified then
the combination request will be ignored. An error message will be produced and
existing attribute data in the combination loadcase will not be overwritten.
An attribute cannot be combined unless it exists in all of the source loadcases
specified in the definition of the combination.
Note 4: Status on command completion
On successful completion of a combination command, the combination loadcase will become the current loadcase. The results attribute and component that
become current will depend on which attribute selection was made:
(a) If the attribute was selected from the attribute list then the first component of that attribute will be made current.
(b) If the `CURRENT' attribute was selected then the current component
of that attribute will remain current.
(c) If ÀLL' attributes were selected then no attribute will be made current.
19/08/1999
430

Note 5: Use of combination loadcases
Results stored in combination loadcases may be accessed and presented in the
normal way. Combination loadcases may also be used in the definition of other
combination loadcases.
Note 6: Use of combination loadcases with assemblies
It is not currently possible to define and perform a loadcase combination on
an assembly model. However, any combination loadcases existing in the models used to create the assembly will exist in the assembly model, and the user
should ensure that the definition of the loadcase combination is consistent for
each model in the assembly.
Note 7: Using appropriate data
Users are reminded that the combination of certain types of data is meaningless.
Examples are principal or Von Mises stresses and principal strains. If ÀLL'
attributes are selected for combination a precautionary warning message to this
effect will be given. The user should delete any meaningless attributes from the
combined loadcase.
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE COMBINE COMB1
The following is an example prompt sequence if `COMB1' is a new combination
loadcase:
SOURCE LOADCASE (OR 'GO') => L1
SCALING FACTOR => 1.0
SOURCE LOADCASE (OR 'GO') => L2
SCALING FACTOR => 2.5
SOURCE LOADCASE (OR 'GO') => GO
20 Character Ref => WIND LOAD PLUS DEAD
ATTRIBUTE => ALL
2. RESULTS CALCULATE COMBINE COMB2
The following is an example prompt sequence if `COMB2' is an existing combination loadcase:
ATTRIBUTE => NODAL STRESS
19/08/1999
431
RESULTS CALCULATE
DIFFERENT
Calculate the derivative of a graph line
2.15.1.5 RESULTS CALCULATE DIFFERENT Control

This command differentiates the `y' values of a graph with respect to the x-axis of the
graph. The graph is then drawn of this derivative against the x-axis. Note that the derivative
is constant over each line segment of the original graph.
Control
Comments
LINE
OFF
Calculate the derivative of a graph line.

Turn the calculation off.
19/08/1999
432
RESULTS CALCULATE
EXPRESSN
Perform Calculations
2.15.1.6 RESULTS CALCULATE EXPRESSN Loadcase name [Step number]

This command allows the user to perform calculations on the attributes of result data sets
stored in the database. The resulting data is stored as either a new or an existing loadcase
Loadcase name
Step number
The name of the loadcase in which the calculated results

will be stored.
This defines the step number required for non linear analysis
results.
The command has four parts each having its own prompt sequence, they are:
- Output loadcase definition.
- Expression definition.
- Operand definition.
- Output attribute definition.
Having completed the calculation successfully the program will create the new attribute
and components, and select the (new) loadcase, but not the attribute.
If the `/' character is used to abort, the user will be placed at the begining of the current definition except when the user is at the begining of the definition when the complete command
will be abandoned.
OUTPUT LOADCASE DEFINITION
The loadcase name given as part of the command defines the name of the loadcase which
will be used to store the results of the calculation. If required a step number can be specified
as well.
If the specified loadcase does not exist then the user is prompted for a 20 character title to
be associated with it.
20 Character Ref => new loadcase text
If a step number is specified with the loadcase name then further prompts will be issued to
define the type of analysis, starting with
ANALYSIS TYPE =>
The user has the choice between `STATIC' , `TIME-STEP' , `FREQUENCY' , `LOADSTEP' , ÙSER-1NAM' and ÙSER-2NAM' . If `TIME-STEP' , `FREQUENCY' or `LOADSTEP' are selected then the user will be prompted to enter the associated step value, if
ÙSER-1NAM' is chosen then the user will be prompted to enter the analysis name followed by the associated step value, and if ÙSER-2NAM' is chosen then the user will be
prompted to enter an analysis name followed by an associated step value twice.
19/08/1999

EXPRESSION DEFINITION
The user is then prompted to enter an expression by the following prompt:
EXPRESSION =>
An expression is defined in terms of operands and unary and binary operators. Expressions
are evaluated in left to right order with no operator precedence. Brackets cannot be used.
FEMVIEW uses an accumulator to store the intermediate results.
The syntax of an expression is :-
->[Subtract]-+-> [Unary operator] Operand -+--->
|
|
v
+<--[Binary operator] --------+
An Operand is a user supplied name of up to eight alphanumeric characters. This name

will be used to prompt for its definition (see Operand Definition below). An operand name
may appear more than once in an expression.
Unary operators perform an operation on the subsequent operand putting the result in the
accumulator. Available unary operators are defined below.
POWER
SQUARE ROOT
RESULTANT
GRADIENT
DIVERGENCE
CURL
VON MISES1
P-STRESS1
P-SHEAR1
P-YIELD1
PRESSURE1
STRESS
1
Each component of the operand is raised to the power of the input

real number.
The square root is taken of each component of the operand.
Forms the resultant of a vector, produces a SCALAR.
Forms the gradient of a scalar, produces a VECTOR.
Forms the divergence of a vector, produces a SCALAR.
Forms the curl of a vector, produces a VECTOR.
Calculates the Von Mises Stress from a 3 by 3 symmetric `stress'
matrix, produces a SCALAR.
Calculates the Principal Stresses from a 3 by 3 symmetric `stress'
matrix, produces 3 Principal stresses, which can be 'sorted' .
See ' RESULTS CALCULATE P-STRESS'
Calculates the Principal Shears from either a 3 by 3 symmetric
`stress' matrix or Principal Stresses, produces 4 SCALARS.
Calculates the Plastic Yield from a 3 by 3 symmetric `stress' matrix,
produces a SCALAR.
Calculates the Pressure from a 3 by 3 symmetric `stress' matrix,
produces a SCALAR.
Forms a stress matrix from Principal Stresses.
These calculations are defined in Appendix H of the User Manual Appendices.
19/08/1999
433
434

Binary operators perform an operation on the current contents of the accumulator and the
subsequent operand. Available binary operators are defined below.
ADD
SUBTRACT
MULTIPLY
DIVIDE
DOT PRODUCT
CROSS PRODUCT
Adds each component of this operand to its corresponding

component in the accumulator.
Subtracts each component of this operand from its corresponding
component in the accumulator.
Multiplies the accumulator by the operand by a method determined
from data types involved.
Divides the accumulator by the operand by a method determined
from data types involved.
Forms the dot product of a VECTOR in the accumulator with the
VECTOR operand, produces a SCALAR.
Forms the cross product of a VECTOR in the accumulator with the
VECTOR operand, produces a VECTOR.
The resultant output types for the MULTIPLY operator are:

SCALAR ' any'
àny'
SCALAR
VECTOR VECTOR
VECTOR MATRIX
MATRIX VECTOR
MATRIX MATRIX
Multiplies each component of àny' data type with the

SCALAR, produces àny' data type.
Multiplies each component of àny' data type with the
SCALAR, produces àny' data type.
Not defined, use DOT or CROSS.
Performs homogeneous transformation, produces a VECTOR
(NB: assumes MATRIX is suitable).
Performs homogeneous transformation, produces a VECTOR
(NB: assumes MATRIX is suitable).
Performs matrix concatenation, produces a MATRIX.
The resultant output types for the DIVIDE operator are:

àny'
SCALAR
àny' VECTOR
SCALAR MATRIX
VECTOR MATRIX
MATRIX MATRIX
Divides each component of àny' type with the SCALAR,

produces àny' data type.
Not defined.
Inverts the MATRIX and multiplies by SCALAR, produces a
MATRIX (NB: assumes MATRIX is suitable).
Inverts the matrix and performs homogeneous transformation,
produces a VECTOR (NB assumes MATRIX is suitable).
Inverts the operand MATRIX and performs matrix
concatenation, produces a MATRIX.
19/08/1999

OPERAND DEFINITION
After the expression has been entered the definition of each unique operand will be prompted
for by the following sequence.
OPERAND òperand' =>
where òperand' is the name of a user entered operand.
The syntax of the operand definition is:
->+->SCALAR-->'value'-------------------->-----------------------+-->
|
|->VECTOR-->`x-comp' `y-comp' `z-comp'-------------->----------|

|
|
|->MATRIX--> `1,1' `2,1' `3,1' `4,1' `1,2' `2,2' `3,2' `4,2'
|
|
`1,3' `2,3' `3,3' `4,3' `1,4' `2,4' `3,4' `4,4'->-+
|
|
+->LOADCASE->'Loadcase name'--+------->--------+------+
|
+->'Step number'-+
|
|
|
+------------------------<----------------------------+
|
|
|
+---->---+->NODAL ----+----> àttribute name'-->'scale factor'-+
|->ELEMENT --|
|->GAUSSIAN -|
+->INVARIANT +
The first three operand types are constants requiring the input of the indicated numbers.
The fourth type specifies the loadcase from which values for this operand will be taken. If
loadcase is specified then the user is prompted for the attribute within the loadcase by:
ATTRIBUTE =>
and a scale factor to be applied:
SCALE FACTOR (1.0)=> `factor'
the factor will be applied to the components of the attribute before any other processing
(default of 1.0).
Note 1: At present one of the first two operands in an expression has to be defined in
terms of an existing loadcase.
Note 2: At present the definition of a constant is in terms of real numbers only.
Note 3: The attributes have to be of the same type e.g. only nodal.
Note 4: `GRAD' , `DIV' and `CURL' are calculated on an element by element basis and
will produce element results.
19/08/1999
435
436

OUTPUT ATTRIBUTE DEFINITION
The preceeding sequences completely define the calculation to be performed and FEMVIEW
will determine the type of output that it will produce. FEMVIEW will then prompt for the
names of the attribute and components of the result.
OUTPUT ATTRIBUTE NAME => `name'
If output is a vector then further prompts for the components are issued:
COMPONENT (i) NAME => `name'
or if output is a matrix then further prompts:
COMPONENT (i,j) NAME => `name'
Note 1: FEMVIEW will automatically add the calculation ALL to a vector.
BATCH FILE INPUT

Commonly used expressions can be stored in named batch files.
For example to rotate a vector by a 45 degree angle about the x axis, a batch file called
TRAN45X could be created containing:
MATRIX MULT VECTOR
.707 .707 0 0 -.707
0
0
1 0 0
@
.707 0 0
0
0 1
and then invoked by:

EXPRESSION => @TRAN45X
Examples:
1. Transformation of a Vector
To transform a vector, for example displacement, one would enter the following sequence of commands.
(a) To define the loadcase.
RESULTS CALCULATE EXPRESSN CASE4
(b) To define the expression
EXPRESSION => MATRIX MULT VECTOR
(c) To define the operands.
OPERAND MATRIX
=> load case1
ATTRIBUTE => NODAL local
SCALE FACTOR (1.0)=>
OPERAND VECTOR
=> VECTOR 0.0 0.0 1.0
19/08/1999
437
(d) The program will have determined that the output will be a vector and the following sequence will define the output:
OUTPUT ATTRIBUTE NAME
COMPONENT (1) NAME =>
=> normal
x
y
z
2. To find the dot product between two displacement vectors

(a) To define the loadcase, with a step number.
RESULTS CALCULATE EXPRESSN R4 1
(b) To enter the title associated with the new loadcase.
20 Character Ref =>dot2
(c) To define the analysis type.
ANALYSIS TYPE => TIME-STEP
(d) To define the step value.
TIME STEP =>.5
(e) To define the expression.
EXPRESSION =>r1 dot r2
(f) To define the operands.
OPERAND R1
=> l l1 2
ATTRIBUTE =>n d
OPERAND R2
=> l l1 4
ATTRIBUTE =>n d
(g) The program will have determined that the output will be a scalar and the following sequence will define the output:
OUTPUT ATTRIBUTE NAME =>dot14
19/08/1999
438
RESULTS CALCULATE
EXTRAPOL
Extrapolate results to nodes
2.15.1.7 RESULTS CALCULATE EXTRAPOL

This command allows the user to perform a results extrapolation on gaussian or invariant
result data sets. It is done on an element by element basis. If results within an element
are invariant, an invariant extrapolation is used. If the results distribution is linear, a linear extrapolation is used. If the results are not invariant, and are not linear, a quadratic
extrapolation will be used. Extrapolation is carried out on all components of the selected
attribute.
The resulting data is stored as a new element nodal result data set. This new data set takes
the name of the current attribute (the result selected for extrapolation), unless this attribute
name already exists for element results, in which case the user is then prompted for a new
attribute name.
Note 1: Loadcases
The extrapolation is performed on the selected results for all of the selected
loadcases.
Note 2: Extrapolation of gaussian results
The extrapolated results will be valid only if the gauss point coordinates are
given in their undeformed state. FEMVIEW assumes that this is the case and
the user should take care to ensure that the command is only used in this situation.
Note 3: Extrapolation of gaussian results with unknown Gauss Points coordinates
When the Gauss Points coordinates are unknown (set to zero in FEMVIEW),
extrapolation is performed by calculating the average of the results at all the
element Gauss Points and allocating this averaged value to each of the element
nodes.
For example with an ABAQUS analysis if the user has not requested the output
of the Gauss Points coordinates, the gaussian results will still be transferred
by the post-processor postabaqus but with zero values for the Gauss Points
coordinates.
Note 4: Use of extrapolation with assemblies
It is not currently possible to extrapolate results at the assembly level.
19/08/1999
439
RESULTS CALCULATE
INTEGRATE
Calculate the integral over a region
2.15.1.8 RESULTS CALCULATE INTEGRATE Control

This command integrates the current results component over the specified region and displays the resulting value in the results monitor.
Control
Comments
LINE
Integrate over beam elements: a

defined line or graph.
Integrate over 2-D elements: a
defined surface, or axisymetric
beam elements for a given axis.
Integrate over 3-D elements, or
2-D elements for a given axis of
symmetry.
Integrate over the visible
elements of the model, for
element invariant results only.
The PATH command predicts the
infra red image seen by a remote
viewer for the radiation or
apparent temperature of a gas
cloud or exhaust plume. The image
is then displayed as a contour
plot with the original model
appearing as a dashed outline.
See Note 1
Turn the calculation off.
SURFACE [axis]
VOLUME [axis]
IMAGE
PATH
OFF
RADIANCE
TEMP
SETUP
[AUTO]
[AUTO]
ATTRIBUTES
DEFAULTS
Note 1: By default the calculation reads a text input file to orientate the model and to
supply default values to the result calculation code. The ' AUTO' and ' SETUP'
options of the command allow the user to automatically produce this text file for
the current model orientation.
The command requires an additional plug-in module to calculate the resultant
values at ' pixel locations' on the image. This module can either be user supplied
to customize the calculation process, or ia available from S&C Thermofluids.
Contact Femsys Ltd for further information.
19/08/1999
440
RESULTS CALCULATE
PERDIFF
Percentage difference calculation for averaging
2.15.1.9 RESULTS CALCULATE PERDIFF [Tolerance]

This command applies to element nodal, gaussian or invariant result data sets and allows the
user to calculate the percentage difference between the results obtained by nodal averaging
and the selected element results. The calculation is carried out on all components of the
selected attribute.
Tolerance
This is an optional limiting percentage value used in the percentage

difference criterion. If it is given, its value should be between 0 and
100, inclusive. If not entered, its default value of 5 is then used.
The percentage difference criterion, with the default tolerance, can be written as follows:

where
if m > 5% Rmax , then P
if m 5% Rmax , then P
max(jRi ,mj)
m
max(jRi ,mj)
Rmax
Pn
m is the average value calculated at the node (m = i=1n Ri )

(Ri , i=1,n) are the ' n' element results attached to the node and
Rmax is the maximum result value in the element result data set.
The resulting data is stored as a new nodal result data set. A new attribute name is made
for this new data set by attaching the letter P in front of the current attribute name, unless
it already exists for nodal results. The user then has the choice of accepting it or typing a
new attribute name.
When the PERDIFF command is applied to gaussian or invariant results, a results extrapolation is implicitly performed for the calculation of the average values (see `RESULTS
CALCULATE EXTRAPOL' ). No nodal averaging is performed across material boundaries
and the resulting nodal data set is therefore material dependent. Only material discontinuities are considered in the present calculation, other discontinuities, such as difference
in shell thicknesses or non co-planar shells, are not taken into account.
The restrictions on nodal averaging apply here, see notes below.
Note 1: Loadcases
The percentage difference is calculated for the selected results for all of the
selected loadcases.
Percentage difference cannot be performed on results defined in more than one
coordinate system (this is based on the value of the FEMVIEW system indicator ISYSTM). An error message is issued if several coordinate systems are
encountered for the current data set.
19/08/1999

The present command is only applicable if all results are the same variant record.
If the command is applied to results that use more than one variant record, an
error message is issued.
case a warning message is issued and the percentage difference is calculated
only for the materials that are common to all surfaces.
Note 5: Gaussian results
Note 6: Use of PERDIFF with assemblies
It is not currently possible to calculate PERDIFF at the assembly level.
19/08/1999
441
442
RESULTS CALCULATE
PRESSURE
Calculate pressure
2.15.1.10 RESULTS CALCULATE PRESSURE

This command requests the calculation of pressure as defined in Appendix H of the User
Manual Appendices.
The calculation will be performed on the current result attribute which must contain a stress
matrix.
19/08/1999
443
RESULTS CALCULATE
P-ESTRAIN
Calculate principal strains from engineering strains
2.15.1.11 RESULTS CALCULATE P-ESTRAIN Component Sort

This command requests the calculation of principal strain from engineering strain values
as defined in Appendix H of the User Manual Appendices. The components are `P1' , `P2' ,
`P3' or ÀLL' .
The calculation will be performed on the current result attribute which must contain a strain
matrix.
When this command is issued the user must be sure that engineering strains are available
from the finite element analysis software. (However, if the mathematical strains are available from the analysis then `RESULTS CALCULATE P-STRESS' can be used to calculate
the principal values as the equation takes the same form.)
Component
Sort
Comments
NOSORT
No sort of the components is made.
2DSORT
The components are sorted so that with a 2D model

having one principal strain of zero this value is
discarded and the other two are sorted such that
when requesting `P1' the user will get `PMAX' and
when requesting `P2' the user will get `PMIN' ,
where `PMAX' > `PMIN' .
The components are sorted so that when requesting
`P1' the user will get `PMAX' , when requesting `P2' the
user will get `PMID' and when requesting `P3' the user
will get `PMIN' , where `PMAX' > `PMID' > `PMIN' .
ALL
P1
P2
P3
3DSORT
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE P-ESTRAIN P1 2DSORT
The P1 component of principal strain is calculated for the current result attribute.
PMAX will be given.
19/08/1999
444
RESULTS CALCULATE
P-STRESS
Calculate principal stress
2.15.1.12 RESULTS CALCULATE P-STRESS Component Sort

This command requests the calculation of principal stress as defined in Appendix H of the
User Manaual Appendices. The components are `P1' , `P2' , `P3' or ÀLL' .
matrix.
Component
Sort
Comments
NOSORT
No sort of the components is made.
2DSORT
The components are sorted so that with a 2D model

having one principal stress of zero this value is
discarded and the other two are sorted such that when
requesting `P1' the user will get `PMAX' and when
requesting `P2' the user will get `PMIN' , where
`PMAX' > `PMIN' .
The components are sorted so that when requesting
`P1' the user will get `PMAX' , when requesting `P2' the
user will get `PMID' and when requesting `P3' the user
will get `PMIN' , where `PMAX' > `PMID' > `PMIN' .
ALL
P1
P2
P3
3DSORT
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE P-STRESS P1 2DSORT
The P1 component of principal stress is calculated for the current result attribute.
PMAX will be given.
19/08/1999
445
RESULTS CALCULATE
P-SHEAR
Calculate principal shears
2.15.1.13 RESULTS CALCULATE P-SHEAR Component Sort

This command requests the calculation of principal shears as defined in Appendix H of the
User Manual Appendices. The components are `Q1' , `Q2' , `Q3' or `QMAX' .
matrix, or principal stresses. It is possible to specify how the principal stresses should be
sorted prior to the calculation of the principal shears.
Component
Sort
Comments
Q1
Q2
Q3
MAX
NOSORT
No sort of the principal stress components is made

prior to the calculation of the principal shears.
2DSORT
Prior to the cacluation of the principal shears,

the principal stress components are sorted so that
with a 2D model having one principal stress of
zero this value is discarded and the other two
are sorted such that when requesting `P1' the
user will get `PMAX' and when requesting `P2'
the user will get `PMIN' , where `PMAX' > `PMIN' .
Prior to the cacluation of the principal shears,
the principal stress components are sorted so
that when requesting `P1' the user will get
`PMAX' , when requesting `P2' the user will get
`PMID' and when requesting `P3' the user will
get `PMIN' , where `PMAX' > `PMID' > `PMIN' .
3DSORT
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE P-SHEAR Q1 2DSORT
The Q1 component of principal shear is calculated for the current result attribute. The
principal stresses used for the calculation will be sorted according to the `2DSORT'
described above.
19/08/1999
446
RESULTS CALCULATE
P-YIELD
Calculate plastic yield
2.15.1.14 RESULTS CALCULATE P-YIELD Yield Value

This command requests the calculation of plastic yield stress as defined in Appendix H of
the User Manual Appendices.
matrix.
19/08/1999
447
RESULTS CALCULATE
SAFETY
Calculate Factor of Safety
2.15.1.15 RESULTS CALCULATE SAFETY Loadcase name [Step number]

This command calculates factors of safety from nodal values. A new combination loadcase
is generated in which the factors of safety are stored as an attribute named `FACTOR' . The
name of the new loadcase is specified in the command.
Temperature dependent values for Fatigue Strength (FS) and Ultimate Tensile Strength
(UTS) may be input to FEMVIEW via the material properties data set, see Appendix B of
the User Manual Appendices. This data set allows pairs of values for temperature versus
Fatigue Strength and temperature versus Ultimate Tensile Strength to be given. Alternatively, the user may input constant values for FS and UTS during a prompt sequence.
The prompt sequence first requires the user to give some reference text to be associated with
the factor of safety loadcase; then to give the names of the loadcases containing the values
of nodal temperature and thermal stress and thermal plus mechanical stress which are to
be used in the calculation; and finally to give the name of the attribute in these latter two
loadcases containing the actual stress data. Note that this attribute must occur with identical
attribute and component names in both the thermal stress and thermal plus mechanical
stress loadcases. If no temperature dependant data has been given in the material properties
data set, or if no temperature loadcase is specified, then the user will be prompted for
constant values of FS and UTS.
The minimum safety factor is then calculated and stored for each node in the current subset
of the model. The calculation will consist of the following steps :

The relevant FS and UTS values will be taken as specified in the prompt sequence
or interpolated from the tables input for the material properties at this node and from
the temperature given in the temperature loadcase.
The thermal and mechanical stress components will be used to calculate the mean
stress and the alternating stress, and their respective principal stresses P-Mean and
P-Alt will be calculated.
The principal stresses will then be paired according to their directions.
For each pair of principal stresses the Factor of Safety (FOS) is calculated as defined
in the Appendix H of the User Manual Appendices.
The minimum Factor of Safety is stored along with the direction cosines of the pair
of stresses that caused it.
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE SAFETY CASE3
The following is an example prompt sequence:
20 Character Ref => FATIGUE - F.O.S.
19/08/1999
448

TEMPERATURE LOADCASE => CASE1
THERMAL LOADCASE => CASE2
THERMAL+MECHANICAL LOADCASE => CASE1
19/08/1999
449
RESULTS CALCULATE
SCAN LOADCASE
Scan loadcases for extreme results
2.15.1.16 RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN LOADCASE Scan name

This command performs a scan of the chosen results attribute(s) in the currently selected
loadcases to find extreme values. At least two loadcases should be selected before the
command is issued.
Scan name
The name to be given to a new scan loadcase (to contain

the output of the scan) or the name of an existing scan
loadcase (See notes 1 and 2).
Note 1: Defining a new scan loadcase

If the scan loadcase does not exist the user will first be prompted for the criterion
for the scan. The choice is from the following keywords:
`MAX'
`MIN'
ÀBSMAX'
ÀBSMIN'
=
=
=
=
Scan for maximum values

Scan for minimum values
Scan for absolute maximum values
Scan for absolute minimum values
The user will next be prompted for a description of the scan loadcase, and finally
the name of the results attribute(s) to be scanned.
Note 2: Using an existing scan loadcase
If the scan loadcase already exists, then the existing definition of the scan will
be referenced and the user will only be prompted for the name of the results
attribute(s) to be scanned.
Note 3: Selecting the results attribute(s) to be scanned
During the scan procedure, the user will be prompted to specify the attribute(s)
to be scanned. The list of attributes available to be scanned are those attributes
that exist in the first source loadcase specified in the definition of the scan. In
addition, the user may use the keyword `CURRENT' to request that the current results attribute be scanned, or the keyword ÀLL' to request that all the
available attributes in the attribute list be scanned.
If an attribute that already exists in the scan loadcase is specified then the scan
request will be ignored. An error message will be displayed, the scan command
will be aborted and existing attribute data in the scan loadcase will not be overwritten.
An attribute cannot be scanned unless it exists in all of the source loadcases
specified in the definition of the scan, or if it contains more than ten components,
or if it contains enumerative or complex components. In these cases an error
message will be displayed and the scan command will be aborted.
On successful completion of the scan loadcase command, the scan loadcase will
19/08/1999
450

become the current loadcase. The results attribute and component that will become current will depend on which attribute selection was made:
(a) If the attribute was selected from the attribute list then the first component of that attribute will be made current.
(b) If the `CURRENT' attribute was selected then the current component
of that attribute will remain current.
(c) If ÀLL' attributes were selected then no attribute will be made current.
Note 5: Use of scan loadcases
Results stored in scan loadcases may be accessed and presented in the normal way, with the exception of RESULTS CALCULATE commands which are
blocked.
Note 6: Use of scan loadcases with assemblies
It is not currently possible to define and perform a loadcase scan on an assembly
model. However, any scan loadcases existing in the models used to create the
assembly will exist in the assembly model, and the user should ensure that the
definition of the loadcase scan is consistent for each model in the assembly.
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN LOADCASE SCAN1
The following is an example prompt sequence if `SCAN1' is a new scan loadcase:
CRITERION => MAX
20 Character Ref => Max values in L1-L4
ATTRIBUTE => ALL
2. RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN LOADCASE SCAN2
The following is an example prompt sequence if `SCAN2' is an existing scan loadcase:
19/08/1999
451
RESULTS CALCULATE
SCAN SURFACES
Scan surfaces for extreme results
2.15.1.17 RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN SURFACES Scan name

This command performs a scan of all the surfaces of the currently selected results attribute
to find extreme values. The required results attribute in the required loadcase should therefore be selected before the command is issued.
Scan name
The name to be given to a new scan loadcase (to contain

the output attribute of the scan) or the name of an
existing scan loadcase (See notes 1 and 2).
Note 1: Defining a new scan loadcase

If the scan loadcase does not exist the user will first be prompted for the criterion
for the scan. The choice is from the following keywords:
`MAX'
`MIN'
ÀBSMAX'
ÀBSMIN'
=
=
=
=
Scan for maximum values

Scan for minimum values
Scan for absolute maximum values
Scan for absolute minimum values
The user will then be prompted for a description of the scan loadcase.
Note 2: Using an existing scan loadcase
If the scan loadcase already exists, then the existing definition of the scan will
be referenced and the user will not be prompted for anything.
To avoid confusion, an existing scan loadcase can only be added to if the currently selected loadcase (where the attribute to be scanned exists) is the same
loadcase as the one that was selected when this scan loadcase was first created.
If this is not the case then an error message will be produced and the scan command will be aborted.
Note 3: Restrictions on the results attribute(s) to be scanned
An attribute cannot be scanned if it already exists in the scan loadcase, or if it
contains material independent results (which are never multi-surface), or if it
contains more than ten components, or if it contains enumerative or complex
components. In these cases an error message will be displayed, the scan command will be aborted and existing attribute data in the scan loadcase will not be
overwritten. A warning message will be produced if the attribute being scanned
has different numbers of surfaces in different places or is single surface, but the
surface scan will not be aborted.
On successful completion of the scan surfaces command, the scan loadcase will
become the current loadcase, and the results attribute and component selected
prior to the scan surfaces command will remain current.
19/08/1999
452

Note 5: Use of scan loadcases
Results stored in scan loadcases may be accessed and presented in the normal way, with the exception of RESULTS CALCULATE commands which are
blocked.
Note 6: Use of scan loadcases with assemblies
It is not currently possible to define and perform a surface scan on an assembly
model. However, any scan loadcases existing in the models used to create the
assembly will exist in the assembly model, and the user should ensure that the
definition of the surface scan is consistent for each model in the assembly.
Examples:
1. RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN SURFACES SCAN1
The following is an example prompt sequence if `SCAN1' is a new scan loadcase:
CRITERION => MAX
20 Character Ref => Max of all surfaces
19/08/1999
453
RESULTS CALCULATE
VON MISES
Calculate Von Mises Stress
2.15.1.18 RESULTS CALCULATE VON MISES

This command requests the calculation of Von Mises stress as defined in Appendix H of
matrix.
19/08/1999
454
RESULTS
ELEMENT
Select elementwise results attribute
2.15.2 RESULTS ELEMENT Attribute [Component] [Complex part]

This command is used to specify the elementwise attribute and component of analysis
results required for assessment. In general the names of the attributes and components will
be user-defined, and these will be offered in the form of a menu in a similar way to the
standard commands available in FEMVIEW.
Elementwise results in FEMVIEW are taken to mean sets of results submitted on an elementwise basis corresponding to the values at the nodes for each of the elements. Since the
value at a given node for an element may differ from the value at that node for an adjacent
element, a display of contours will tend to exhibit discontinuities at element boundaries.
For selection of the required surface see also the `RESULTS RANGE' command. If no
surface is specified, and results are available at more than one surface, the default condition
is that values for the first surface will be selected.
For components which are complex an optional function can be specified by the user to
produce a real value that can be presented. If the complex number is represented by x + iy
the functions that can be applied are:
Complex part Comments

REAL
IMAGINARY
ANGLE
MAGNITUDE
PHASE
Produces the real component of the complex

number. (This is the default if no function is
specified)
Produces the complex component of the
complex number.
Resolves the complex number at a given
angle , where is in degrees
Produces the magnitude of the complex
number.
Calculates the phase angle of the complex
number. The angle returned is in the range
180 degrees.
Equation used
x
y
x cos + y sin
px
+ 2
, y=x)
tan 1 (
Note 1: It is possible to define results that have no `Component' names; for example,
Von Mises stress.
Examples:
1. RESULTS ELEMENT STRESS S11
This selects the S11 component of the stress results for the current loadcase
See Also:
19/08/1999

19/08/1999
455
456
RESULTS
GAUSSIAN
Select element Gaussian results
2.15.3 RESULTS GAUSSIAN Attribute [Component] [Complex part]

This command is used to specify the element Gaussian attribute and component of analysis
results required for assessment. In general the names of the attributes and components will
be user-defined, and these will be offered in the form of a menu in a similar way to the
standard commands available in FEMVIEW.
Gaussian results in FEMVIEW are sets of results submitted at a Gauss-point or reference
point within the element. They are submitted on an elementwise basis, and the global
coordinates of the Gauss-point or reference point are input with the results. A maximum of
27 different Gauss-points may be given for each element, while there is no limitation for
the number of surfaces for which results can be input.

REAL
IMAGINARY
ANGLE
MAGNITUDE
PHASE

specified)
complex number.
number.
180 degrees.
Equation used
x
y
x cos + y sin
px
+ 2
, y=x)
tan 1 (
Von Mises stress.
Examples:
1. RESULTS GAUSSIAN STRESS S22
This selects the S22 component of the stress results for the current loadcase
See Also:
19/08/1999

19/08/1999
457
458
RESULTS
INVARIANT
Select element invariant results
2.15.4 RESULTS INVARIANT Attribute [Component] [Complex part]

This command is used to specify the element invariant attribute and component of analysis
results required for assessment. The names of the attributes and components will be userdefined, and these will be offered in the form of a menu in a similar way to the standard
commands available in FEMVIEW.
Invariant results in FEMVIEW are sets of results submitted as constant for the element,
although different values may be submitted for each surface. The results will be presented
at the centroid of the element.

REAL
IMAGINARY
ANGLE
MAGNITUDE
PHASE

specified)
complex number.
number.
180 degrees.
Equation used
x
y
x cos + y sin
px
+ 2
, y=x)
tan 1 (
Von Mises stress.
See Also:

19/08/1999
459
RESULTS
LOADCASE
Select loadcase
2.15.5 RESULTS LOADCASE Loadcase name [Range]

This command enables a user to name a specific loadcase, or range of loadcases as the
current loadcase(s) from which analysis results will be selected for results presentation.
The loadcase specified remains current until another `RESULTS LOADCASE' command
is used to specify a new current loadcase, or until the commands `RESULTS CALCULATE
COMBINE' or `RESULTS CALCULATE SCAN' are performed.
Note that when a model is initially selected, the first loadcase for the model is automatically
selected as the current loadcase.
Loadcase name Range
Comments
ALL
See note 1. below
Name
ABOVE min [BELOW max]

BELOW max [ABOVE min]
Step [Step] [Step] . . .
Step [Step] [Name] . . .
Step [TO Step]
Step [TO Name [Step]]
TO Name [Step]
Name [Step] . . .
Name [Name] . . .
See note 1. below
Note 1: Selection of a Range of loadcases for graphing

A `Range' of loadcases is required for graphing when the results from a number
of loadcases are to be superimposed on the same plot, or when the results for a
single node are graphed across loadcases.
All loadcases may be selected for graphing by issuing the command `RESULTS
LOADCASE ALL' .
If a range of loadcases is specified then the first loadcase of that range will be
used for result presentation modes other than graphing.
The maximum number of loadcases that can be selected is 1000.
Note 2: Steps for Non-linear Results
The steps are those resulting from non-linear analysis results. They have no
meaning for linear results
Examples:
1. RESULTS LOADCASE CASE1
The loadcase `CASE1' is made current. If `CASE1' has more than one step then the
first step is made current except for graphing when all steps are made current.
19/08/1999
460

2. RESULTS LOADCASE CREEP 5
Step number 5 of loadcase `CREEP' is made current.
3. RESULTS LOADCASE ALL
All loadcases are made current for graphing. Otherwise the first loadcase found is
made current.
4. RESULTS LOADCASE FRACT ABOVE 0.5 BELOW 3.7
All steps of loadcase `FRACT' having step values above 0.5 and below 3.7 are made
current for graphing. Otherwise the first valid step found is made current.
5. RESULTS LOADCASE THERM 1 TO 10
The step number 1 of loadcase `THERM' is made current. Steps 1 to 10 of loadcase
`THERM' will be used for graphing.
6. RESULTS LOADCASE THERM1 5 TO THERM2 10
The step number 5 of loadcase `THERM1' is made current. Loadcases from THERM1
step 5 to THERM2 step 10 inclusively will be used for graphing.
7. RESULTS LOADCASE THERM 1 2 5 6 7
The step number 1 of loadcase `THERM' is made current. Steps 1, 2, 5, 6 and 7 will
be used for graphing.
8. RESULTS LOADCASE CASE1 CASE2 CASE3 1 2 CASE4
The loadcase `CASE1' or its first step is made current. All of CASE1 and CASE2,
step 1 and 2 of CASE3, and CASE4 will be used for graphing.
See Also:
ÙTILITY TABULATE LOADCASES' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
461
RESULTS
NODAL
Select nodal results attribute
2.15.6 RESULTS NODAL Attribute [Component] [Complex part]

This command is used to specify the nodal attribute and component of analysis results
required for assessment. In general the names of the attributes and components will be
user-defined, and these will be offered in the form of a menu in a similar way to the standard
commands available in FEMVIEW.
Nodal results are sets of results whereby the values are submitted nodewise and, in general,
a contour plot will produce smooth contours across element boundaries. In a multi-material
model it is possible to submit material-dependent nodal results whereby discontinuities
may be seen at the material boundaries. It is also possible to submit multi-surface results.
For selection of the required material and/or surface see the `RESULTS RANGE' command. In cases where a material or surface has not been specified but multi-material and/or
multi-surface results have been input then results for the first material and/or surface will
be used.

REAL
IMAGINARY
ANGLE
MAGNITUDE
PHASE

specified)
complex number.
number.
180 degrees.
Equation used
x
y
x cos + y sin
px
+ 2
, y=x)
tan 1 (
Von Mises stress.
19/08/1999
462

Examples:
1. RESULTS NODAL DISPLACE ALL
Selects the all component of displacement in the current loadcase as the current results
See Also:

19/08/1999
463
RESULTS
OFF
Switch off the presentation of results
2.15.7 RESULTS OFF

This command switches off the presentation of analysis results.
Note that the current loadcase, attribute and component remain current as does any current
calculation.
19/08/1999
464
RESULTS
RANGE
Specify range controls on results
2.15.8 RESULTS RANGE Limit [Control]
This command is used to specify range controls (or filters) on the result values that will be
considered for display when presenting results. Note that certain filters are not general in
their effect and are for use only with specific results presentations.
19/08/1999
465
Limit
Control
Values considered for display
SET
Set-name(s)
ALL
Values at elements and nodes in the

named sets where these form part of
the current model set (see note 1).
MATERIAL
Material Number
ALL
Values for the specified material

or ÀLL' materials. (see note 2).
SURFACE
Surface Number(s)
TOP
MIDDLE
BOTTOM
ALL
Values for the specified surface(s)

or ÀLL' surfaces. (see note 3).
VALUES
OFF
The control is turned off and

defaults will apply (see note 4).
Min. and max. values only.
Values equal to or above or below the
specified thresholds are used. Note
that if both ÀBOVE' and`BELOW'
thresholds are specified then only one
threshold test need be satisfied for the
value to be used (i.e the test is a
logical .OR. not a logical .AND.)
Values equal to or between the
thresholds are used.
MINMAX
ABOVE v1 [BELOW v2]
BELOW v1 [ABOVE v2]
BETWEEN v1 v2
EL-RESULT
ALL
MAX [ABSOLUTE]
MIN [ABSOLUTE]
MEAN
POINT-ID n
All values for each element.

The [absolute] maximum value for each element.
The [absolute] minimum value for each element.
The mean of all values for each element.
The nth value for each element.
See note 5 for more details on the
`RESULTS RANGE EL-RESULT' command.
LOCAL
[XSECTION]
[LINE]
The min. and max. values used will refer

to the current results set (see note 1) and
this is generally the default.
The `XSECTION' option is used to refer
min. and max. values to the current cross
section.
The `LINE' option is used to refer min.
and max. values to the current line and
this is the default with `VIEW LINE' .
The min. and max. values used will refer to
the whole model even if a results set is current.
Cancels the current range controls.
GLOBAL
OFF
Note 1: The `SET' control

The command `RESULTS RANGE SET set-names(s)' allows the user to specify
sets of elements or nodes for which results will be displayed; the ' results set' .
Up to 10 previously defined sets may be specified to form the current results set
19/08/1999
466

(see: `CONSTRUCT SET' ) but all must be of a consistent type, i.e all node sets
or all element sets. Note that the node representation of an element set is all
the nodes that define the elements in the set and the element representation of a
node set is all elements that have any node in the node set.
Only result values at elements and nodes in the current results set are considered
for presentation. Note that the results set is subservient to the current model set,
so elements or nodes in the results set that do not exist in the current model set
will be ignored.
The minimum and maximum values thus found for the results set are displayed
in the results monitor next to the `MIN' and `MAX' keywords. The exception
to this rule is that the command `RESULTS RANGE GLOBAL' will cause the
calculation of maximum and minimum values to refer to the whole model rather
than the results set. Note that the maximum and minimum values will refer to the
current surface as specified in the `RESULTS RANGE SURFACE' command.
Note that the command `PRESENT NUMERICS' allows the user to explicitly
specify a range of elements or nodes for which result values are required (eg:
`PRESENT NUMERIC 95 TO 100' ). In this case result values will be displayed regardless of whether the specified elements or nodes are in the current
results set. The current results set will remain unchanged and the maximum and
minimum values displayed in the results monitor will still refer to the results set.
The default results set is the current model set. The command `RESULTS
RANGE SET ALL' causes the results set to be equated to the current model
set.
Note 2: The `MATERIAL' control
The `MATERIAL' control may be used when plotting graphs of material related
results in order to specify that values for a particular material or ÀLL' materials
are to be graphed. It can also be used when specifying a datum (eg: `RESULTS
TRANSFORM RELATIVE' ) to be applied to nodal material related results.
If a filter on material number is required for other result presentation modes,
then a set containing elements of the required material should be created using
`CONSTRUCT SET' and applied as a results set using `RESULTS RANGE
SET' .
Note 3: The `SURFACE' control
A single surface, a selection of surfaces, or all surfaces may be specified, and
lines for each will be shown on any graph subsequently plotted. However, for
other results presentation modes values for only one surface can be displayed at
a time, and these will be for the first of the specified surfaces. If no surface has
been specified then the default is the first surface.
The surface controls will select results according to the order in which the results were input into FEMVIEW for a particular node or element. That is,
`RESULTS RANGE SURFACE 2' will select the results for the second surface.
The control `TOP' will select results for the first surface and `BOTTOM' for the
last surface. `MIDDLE' will select results for the middle surface if results for
an odd number of surfaces have been input but will make no selection if results
for an even number of surfaces have been input.
If results are not multi-surface, then the controls `TOP' , `MIDDLE' and `BOTTOM' will be ignored and results for the first surface (the only results available)
will be selected.
Note however, that surface selection by number, eg: `RESULTS RANGE SURFACE n' , has no default condition and will cause an error message if results for
the specified surface do not exist.
19/08/1999

Note 4: The `VALUES' control
The `VALUES' control only effects the `PRESENT PEAKS' , ÙTILITY TABULATE RESULTS' , ' PRESENT VECTORS' and `PRESENT NUMERICS' presentation modes. For `PRESENT PEAKS' the control `VALUES OFF' is equivalent to `MINMAX' .
Note 5: The ÈL-RESULT' control
This range control may be used with results presentation modes where one representative value for each element is taken, to specify how this value is to be
obtained. When presenting contour plots it has the same effect as the `PRESENT
OPTIONS CONTOUR FILL/EDGES ALL/MAX/MIN/MEAN/POINT-ID' command. When using PRESENT GRAPH ELEMENT or PRESENT GRAPH
LINE along an element line it controls the value that is plotted by default for
each element. In this case the control ÀLL' is taken as `MEAN' . If the control
`POINT-ID ' is selected then the integer entered specifies which value to take.
For example, if `POINT-ID 3' is specified then for elementwise nodal results
the value for the third node (according to the element topology) is taken and for
elementwise Gaussian results the value for the third Gauss point (according to
the order entered into FEMVIEW) is taken. The ÈL-RESULT' control has no
effect on the value taken for elementwise invariant results, as there is only one
value for each element anyway.
Examples:
1. RESULTS RANGE SET WING BODY WHEEL
Elements in the previously defined sets `WING' , `BODY' and `WHEEL' will (if part
of the current model set) form the current results set.
2. RESULTS RANGE SURFACE 2 4
Values for surface numbers 2 and 4 will be plotted on a graph, but for all other modes
of results presentation only values for surface 2 will be considered for results display.
3. RESULTS RANGE VALUES ABOVE 3.5
Values above 3.5 will be considered for results display.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT SET' , section 2.3.8, page 78
19/08/1999
467
468
RESULTS
STACK
Select many results
2.15.9 RESULTS STACK ADD/IMPORT-XY/CLEAR

This command allows up to five different results selections to be stored in a `RESULTS
STACK' . Initially the results stack is empty. When a results type, attribute, component and
optionally a calculation has been selected the command `RESULTS STACK ADD' may be
used to add this to the results stack. Then subsequent selections of results type, attribute,
component and optionally calculation may be specified, and these may in turn be added to
the results stack as well. Results selections identical to any already in the results stack can
not be added to the stack again, and the results stack may be cleared with the command
`RESULTS STACK CLEAR' .
Currently the results stack is only referenced when a graph is being plotted, when graphs
for the currently selected results will be superimposed with any in the results stack. For
other results presentation modes only one results selection (the current one) is used.
The results stack can also be used to select external files of X and Y values to be superimposed on a graph. The command `RESULTS STACK IMPORT-XY filename' may be used
to specify a file whose name and path is then stored. When a graph is subsequently drawn
data will be read from the file and superimposed on the graph as if the results in the external
file were results for an attribute and component. Up to five external files may be stored in
the results stack, which are removed with the command `RESULTS STACK CLEAR' .
The first line of each external file is for the Y-axis label. Only the first 20 characters are
used and this line can be left blank if desired. Each subsequent line should contain an X
value and a Y value, and optionally a point identification number and/or a 1 or 0 to indicate
whether the point should be joined to the previous point (=1) or not (=0). These lines have
a free format, and values can be separated with spaces, commas, semi-colons or colons.
Any other non-numerical characters will be ignored. However values for only one point
should appear on each line and they should be in the correct order. If no point identification
number is given then by default the points are numbered in sequence. If no value is given to
indicate whether or not a point is to be joined to the previous one then by default the point
will be joined. To enter this value without having to enter a point identification number two
separators can be entered between the Y value and this value.
Examples:
1. A typical sequence of commands
Let the results stack be empty at this point.
RESULTS NODAL STRESS S11
The results stack is still empty at this point.
RESULTS STACK ADD
The results stack now contains the results `NODAL STRESS S11' .
19/08/1999

RESULTS STACK ADD
The results `NODAL STRESS S22' are added to the stack but the results `NODAL
STRESS S33' are not.
RESULTS
RESULTS
RESULTS
RESULTS
ELEMENT STRAIN E11

STACK ADD
ELEMENT STRAIN E22
STACK ADD
The results stack now contains the results `NODAL STRESS S11' , `NODAL STRESS
S22' , ÈLEMENT STRAIN E11' and ÈLEMENT STRAIN E22' . Any graph plotted now would have lines for each of these results attributes superimposed. If any
other method of presentation was used now then the results ÈLEMENT STRAIN
E22' (the current results) would be displayed.
RESULTS STACK ADD
These results are not added to the results stack because they already have been. The
results stack remains unchanged.
RESULTS STACK CLEAR
The results stack is now empty again.
19/08/1999
469
470
RESULTS
TRANSFORM
Calculate results relative to a datum
2.15.10 RESULTS TRANSFORM Transform Datum

This command requests the transformation of results from a defined local system to the
global system, into a local system and also the calculation of results relative to a datum.
The datum may be a node, or in the case of relative displacements, it may be a line specified
by two nodes or a plane defined by three nodes.
Transform Datum
Comments
GLOBAL
ON or OFF
Transform results from local to global.

Default is OFF. (See note 1.)
LOCAL
LINE [AUTO]/[HOLD]
Stresses are transformed to a

local co-ordinate system on a line
(see note 2).
Stresses are transformed to a
local co-ordinate system on a
plane cross section (see note 3).
' name' identifies the coordinate
system to be used and ' comp' defines
the component of the local system to be
displayed.
' comp' can be RR/XX, HH/YY, ZZ, RH/XY,
HZ/YZ or ZX. (see note 4.)
The local transformation is turned off.
XSECTION [AUTO]/[HOLD]
CONICAL name comp

CYLINDRICAL name comp
RECTANGUL name comp
SPHERICAL name comp
OFF
RELATIVE
NODE n1
LINE n1 n2
PLANE n1 n2 n3
VALUE value
OFF
The result value at the specified node is

subtracted from all results (see note 5).
Result values are given relative to a
line (see note 6).
Result values are given relative to a
plane (see note 7).
The specified value is subtracted from
all results.
The relative transformation is turned
off.
Note that the `RESULTS TRANSFORM' command will be switched off if another results
attribute/component is selected, but remains active if the loadcase is changed.
Note 1: Transformation from a local system to the global system
Certain analysis packages give specific results in a local coordinate system and
will provide the necessary transformation matrix to transform from local to
global. If all this information is available then FEMVIEW will perform the
transformation when requested by this command and, if results are to be presented as vectors, then the directions will be transformed to the global system
19/08/1999

irrespective of this command.
Note 2: Transformation of stresses to a local line
The local system will be defined such that `n1' to `n2' (or cursor hit 1 to cursor
hit 2) define the local x-direction, the local y-direction is in the plane of the
screen and the local z-direction out of the screen.
The ÀUTO' control means that a new transformation will be calculated for each
new line. The `HOLD' control means that the existing transformation will be
applied to subsequent lines, and a new transformation not calculated.
Note 3: Transformation of stresses to a local cross section
The local system will be defined in one of two ways depending on how the
cross section was defined in FEMVIEW . If the cross section was defined by
three nodes, then the direction of `n1' to `n2' will define the local x-direction,
a normal from the local x-direction to `n3' will define the local y-direction; and
the local z-direction will be determined according to the right hand screw rule
for an orthogonal system.
If the cross section was defined using the graphics cursor, then the direction of
cursor hit 1 to cursor hit 2 will define the local x-direction; the local y-direction
is defined by a normal to the plane of the screen (+ve into the screen); and the
local z-direction determined as before.
The ÀUTO' control means that a new transformation will be calculated for each
new cross section. The `HOLD' control means that the existing transformation
will be applied to subsequent cross sections, and a new transformation not calculated.
Note 4: Results stored with local system If the results being transformed have been
stored in the database with a local coordinate system, the results will be transformed into the global system before being transformed into the coordinate system specified.
Note 5: Results relative to a node
This datum can only be used with nodal results.
Note 6: Results relative to a line
This datum can only be used with nodal vector quantities and with certain result
presentation modes.
A transformation is calculated such that node `n1' will have zero displacement.
The transformation incorporates a rotation (if necessary) such that node `n2' is
made to lie on the line. The transformation is applied to all results.
Note 7: Results relative to a plane
This datum can only be used with nodal vector quantities and with certain result
presentation modes.
A transformation is calculated such that node `n1' will have zero displacement.
The transformation incorporates a rotation (if necessary) such that node `n2' is
made to lie on the line `n1' `n2' , and `n3' is made to lie on the plane defined by
the three nodes. The transformation is applied to all results.
19/08/1999
471
472
19/08/1999
2.16. PRIMARY COMMAND SAVE
473
SAVE
Save the current model
2.16 PRIMARY COMMAND SAVE

SAVE [Control]
The `SAVE' command writes the current FEMGEN model to a database file. The following
controls are options on the `SAVE' command:
Control
Comments
CURRENT
The current FEMGEN model is written to its' database file. This is also
the case if the `SAVE' command is entered without a control option.
The current FEMGEN model is written to the named database file.
The current FEMGEN model is written to its' database backup file.
AS model
BACKUP
Note 1: FEMGEN database file names

The name of a FEMGEN database file is MODEL.G50 where ' MODEL' is the
name of the model. The name of a FEMGEN database backup file is MODEL.BAK.
(File extensions may be installation dependant)
Note 2: The `SAVE' and `SAVE CURRENT' commands
If a database file for the model does not exist (new model) then a database file
will be created. If a database file for the model does exist (old model) then, if the
model has been modified since the start of the FEMGEN session, the database
file for the model will be updated.
The user is always asked for confirmation whenever a database file is created or
updated and, for a new file, the user will also be asked to give some description
of the model.
Note 3: The `SAVE AS model' command
The model will be written to a database file which will be named as specified in
the command. The model name specified must be six or less characters.
The user is always asked for confirmation whenever a new database file is created or an existing database file updated and, for a new file, the user will also
be asked to give some description of the model. If a database file with the given
name already exists then a warning message is issued.
The new model name will be added to the Model INDEX display.
Note 4: The `SAVE BACKUP' command
The user is not asked for confirmation of the `SAVE BACKUP' command.
When FEMGEN is used under DOS or Windows 3.*, modelnames `CON' and `LPT'
should not be used as these are reserved system names.
19/08/1999
474

Examples:
1. SAVE
The current model will be saved with the current name as shown in the monitor.
2. SAVE AS CONROD
The current model will be saved under the name CONROD. It can subsequently be
accessed with the `FEMGEN' command or by selecting the CONROD model from
the ÌNDEX' display.
19/08/1999
2.17. PRIMARY COMMAND STOP
475
STOP
2.17 PRIMARY COMMAND STOP

The primary command `STOP' is used to terminate execution of FEMGV.
19/08/1999
476
19/08/1999
2.18. PRIMARY COMMAND UTILITY
477
UTILITY
Utility for program setup; data I/O and management; graphing and measurement
2.18 PRIMARY COMMAND UTILITY

The command ÙTILITY' is used for the input of data, and the tabulation, printing, and
dumping of information from FEMGV and enables deletion of items from the database
and the conversion of databases from previous versions of FEMGV.
It allows the setup of the graphics display, plotter and printer devices and other program
control parameters. It also provides graphing in FEMGEN and a distance measurement
utility.
The following sections refer to the ÙTILITY' commands:
2.18.1
2.18.2
2.18.3
2.18.4
2.18.5
2.18.6
2.18.7
2.18.8
UTILITY COPY
UTILITY DELETE
UTILITY GRAPH
UTILITY LOG
UTILITY MEASURE
UTILITY NAME
UTILITY READ
UTILITY SETUP
2.18.9
2.18.10
2.18.11
2.18.12
UTILITY TABULATE
UTILITY UNDO
UTILITY UPDATE
UTILITY WRITE
copy a model.
delete data from the database.
display a graph of a time curve or space curve
open a log file.
measure distances, angles or line lengths.
rename a part.
read an external file.
setup printer, plotter, and define colours.
set synonyms and program control parameters.
set point marker display.
tabulate data.
Undo the most recent change to a FEMGEN model.
update database from previous version.
write data to a file for subsequent processing.
When suitable combinations of hardware and software exist, a number of forms are available at the ÙTILITY SETUP' level. The presence of these forms is indicated by ' ...'
appearing in the menu after the command e.g. ÙTILITY SETUP PLOTTER...' .
19/08/1999
478
UTILITY
COPY
Copy a model
2.18.1 UTILITY COPY GEOMETRY model name TO new model name

This command enables the user to make a copy of an existing FEMGEN model. A
new FEMGEN database will be created in a file called `new model name.G61' and this
file will be automatically added to the FEMGV index display using the model name
`new model name' .
Note that file extensions can be installation dependant and that the user should not give the
file extension as part of the name for the new model.
Examples:
1. UTILITY COPY GEOMETRY WHEEL TO RWHEEL
Copies the FEMGEN model `WHEEL' to a new FEMGEN model called `RWHEEL' .
A FEMGEN database file called `RWHEEL.G61' is created and added to the current
FEMGV index display using the model name `RWHEEL' .
19/08/1999
479
UTILITY
DELETE
Delete an item from the database
2.18.2 UTILITY DELETE Item identifier

This command enables the user to delete an item from the database in order to release space
which can be re-used when new models are read in, or when additional items are generated
and stored.
FEMGEN Command.
Item
Identifier
Comments
TRANSFORM
POINTS
Name
Names or ALL
or sets or /PICK
LINES
Names or ALL
or sets or /PICK
SURFACES
Names or ALL
or sets or /PICK
BODIES
Names or ALL
or sets or /PICK
SHAPES
Name or ALL or type
ELEMENTS
CSYST
INITIAL
LOADS
`n'
Name
Name or ALL
Name or ALL or
loadcase number
Name or ALL
Name or ALL
Name or ALL
Name or ALL
Name or ALL
Name or ALL
Name or ALL
Name
Name or ALL
Name
Name or ALL
Deletes the named transformation.

Deletes the named points or set of points or makes the
cursor available to pick a point for deletion
(see note 1).
Deletes the named lines or set of lines or makes the
cursor available to pick a line for deletion
(see note 1).
Deletes the named surfaces or set of surfaces or makes the
cursor available to pick a surface for deletion
(see note 1).
Deletes the named bodies or set of bodies or makes the
cursor available to pick a body for deletion
(see note 1).
Deletes the named shapes or all of the shapes of the
given type.
Deletes the element number `n' .
Deletes the named coordinate system.
Deletes the named initial conditions.
Deletes the named loads. Using loadcase number will
delete all loads in the given loadcase.
Deletes the named time curves.
Deletes the named space curves.
Deletes the named load masks.
Deletes the named initial conditions.
Deletes the named material properties.
Deletes the named constraints.
Deletes the named physical properties.
Deletes the named set.
Deletes the named merge definitions.
Deletes the named transformation.
Deletes the named nodal coordinate systems.
TCURVE
SCURVE
LMASK
INITIAL
MATERIAL
CONSTRNT
PHYSICAL
SETS
MERGE
TRANSFORM
NCSYST
Item
Identifier
name
/PICK
19/08/1999
Comments
For points, lines, surfaces and bodies the part name
can be entered directly.
Allows the cursor to be used to pick the item to be
deleted.
480

Points, lines, surfaces, bodies and shapes that are to be deleted will be drawn in red, items
that will be modified as a result of the deletions will be drawn in green. A message detailing
the numbers of points, lines surfaces and bodies to be deleted is displayed.
For all items that are to be deleted, the user will be asked for confirmation before deletion
takes place. Note that the confirmation can be turned on or off with the ÙTILITY SETUP
CONFIRM' command although this is not recommended.
Return Level: ÙTILITY DELETE'
Note 1: Deletion of FEMGEN geometric objects
All objects that are defined directly or indirectly from the deleted object will be
either deleted (if the definition becomes invalid) or references redefined. In other
words, if a point is deleted, all lines referencing the point will be deleted, and all
surfaces referencing those lines will be deleted etc. This does not however apply
to points or lines used in region definitions in order to allow simpler modification
of the region when required. Similarly, points, lines and surfaces defining a
prism body may also be deleted without deleting the prism definition.
FEMVIEW Command.
Item
Identifier
Comments
LOADCASE
Name [n1]
Deletes the named loadcase with

optional step number.
Deletes all steps of the named
loadcase.
Deletes all loadcases.
Deletes the attribute and its associated
components from the current
loadcase.
Name ALL
ATTRIBUTE
SET
SHAPE
LINE
DRAWING
ALL
NODAL Attribute name
ELEMENT Attribute name
GAUSSIAN Attribute name
INVARIANT Attribute name
Name
Name
Name
LIVE Number
Deletes the named set.

Deletes the named shape.
Deletes the named line.
Deletes the specified live drawing.
19/08/1999

MODEL INDEX Command.
Item
Identifier
Comments
MODEL
Model name
GEOMETRY
Model name
VIEWDATA
Model name
Deletes all the data and files associated with the

specified model.
Deletes all the FEMGEN geometry data associated with the
specified model.
Deletes all the FEMVIEW viewdata associated with the
specified model.
Note that entire Models can only be deleted at the index level.
19/08/1999
481
482
UTILITY
GRAPH
Display a graph of a time curve or space curve
2.18.3 UTILITY GRAPH Type name [identifier]

This command displays a graph of time curves or space curves where possible. For time
curves the user must supply the time curve name; for space curves the user must supply the
space curve name and optionally an identifier X, Y, or Z for global space curves or L1-L4
for surface space curves.
Type
Name
TCURVE
SCURVE
tcurve name
scurve name
Identifier
[X]
[Y]
[Z]
[L1]
[L2]
[L3]
[L4]
OFF
Note 1: Space Curve Limitations

This command will only generate a graph for TIME CURVES, LINE, SURFACE LINE, and GLOBAL space curves.
Note 2: Defaults
For global space curves the default identifier is X, for surface space curves the
default identifier is L1.
Note 3: OFF
The OFF command cancels the graph and returns the display to what was on the
screen prior to displaying the graph.
Examples:
1. UTILITY GRAPH TCURVE TC1
2. UTILITY GRAPH SCURVE SC1
See Also:

19/08/1999
FEMGV
483
Femsys Devel
Model: EXAMPLE
Analysis:NEUTRAL
TCURVE : TC1
1
V
A
L
U
E
10
12
-1
-2
-3
TIME
Figure 2.121: Time curve graph
FEMGV
Femsys Devel
Model: EXAMPLE
Analysis:NEUTRAL
SCURVE : SC1
.8
V .6
A
L
U
E
.4
.2
.2
.4
.6
.8
DISTANCE
Figure 2.122: Space curve graph
19/08/1999
484
UTILITY
LOG
Controls a command log file
2.18.4 UTILITY LOG [Filename]

This command enables the user to open a new log file and to start and stop logging commands. If no file name is given the log will be written to a default file. The default is the
last log file named in the current run. If no log file has been used then the system default is
used.
Filename Comments
OFF
Name
Stops logging of commands.

Start logging of commands to a file called name.log.
Note 1: Changing log files

If a second log file is opened with out issuing a ÙTILITY LOG OFF' command,
logging will switch to the second file.
Note 2: History files
For each model in FEMGEN a log of all inputs for that model is kept automatically.
Examples:
1. UTILITY LOG rotor
Creates a file called `rotor.log' to which a copy of subsequent command input will
be logged.
2. UTILITY LOG
Creates a default file into which all subsequent commands are copied.
3. UTILITY LOG OFF
Stops logging to any file.
19/08/1999
485
UTILITY
MEASURE
Measure distances and angles
2.18.5 UTILITY MEASURE

Measures distances between two points/nodes and measures angles defined by three points/nodes.
Measures line lengths or alternatively displays the length and name of the shortest line.
FEMGEN Command.
UTILITY MEASURE Mode Name1 [Name2] [Name3]
namen
name of an existing point, node or line. The graphics cursor may be used to
pick the item required. Three items are required only when angles are being
measured. Two items are required only when distances are being measured.
Mode
Comments
DISTANCE
This is used to measure the distance between two points/nodes. The

resultant distance is shown in the dialogue area. The three global
components of the distance are also shown.
This is used to measure the angle between an imaginary line from Name1
to Name2 and another from Name1 to Name3. The angle given will
always be between 0 and 180 degrees.
This is used to measure the length of a line. The length is taken along
the trajectory of the line. Alternatively the keyword MINIMUM may
be used to obtain the length and name of the shortest line in the current
model.
ANGLE
LENGTH
The selected points, nodes and lines will be tabulated and labelled on the screen. The
coordinates in the current axis system of points and nodes will also be tabulated.
FEMVIEW Command
UTILITY MEASURE Mode Node1 Node2 [Node3]
noden
name of a node. The graphics cursor may be used to pick the item required.
The third node is only required when an angle is being measured.
Mode
Comments
DISTANCE
This is used to measure the distance between two nodes. The resultant
distance is shown in the dialogue area. The three global components of
the distance are also shown.
This is used to measure the angle between an imaginary line from Node1
to Node2 and another from Node1 to Node3. The angle given will always
be between 0 and 180 degrees.
ANGLE
The selected nodes and their coordinates will be tabulated and the nodes labelled on the
screen.
19/08/1999
486
UTILITY
NAME
Rename a part
2.18.6 UTILITY NAME Old name New name

This command enables the user to change the name of an existing entity in FEMGEN .
Name
Comments
Old name
New name
Name of existing FEMGEN entity.

New name to be given to the entity. If the name is already in use then a
warning will be given and the command not executed..
Examples:
1. UTILITY NAME P3 PCENTRE
Renames entity `P3' as `PCENTRE'
19/08/1999
487
UTILITY
READ
Reads from an external file
2.18.7 UTILITY READ Mode Filename

The ÙTILITY READ' command allows the user to read information into the database
from an external file, or to read a batch command file.
FEMGEN and FEMVIEW Commands.
Mode
Filename Comments
BATCH
[Name]
Reads commands from the file specified. Where no file name

is given a default name will be used; on most systems this is
`fgvbatch.bat' . The special character `@' may be used in place
of the command ÙTILITY READ BATCH' .
Examples:
1. UTILITY READ BATCH rotor.log
Reads commands from the file called `rotor.log' .
2. @plane.fgi
Reads commands from the file called `plane.fgi' .
Mode
Filename Comments
GEOMETRY
Name
VIEWDATA
Name
19/08/1999
Reads a file containing archived FEMGEN geometry

data. If no file name is given the user will be prompted
for one. The user will also be prompted to give a
model name to be used when recording the geometry data
in the FEMGV database index. (See notes 1 and 2).
If the name of an existing model is provided, then the
archived geometry will be appended to a host model (See note 3) ,
otherwise a new model is created.
Reads a file containing FEMVIEW topology and results
data in the format specified in Appendix B of the User
Manual Appendices. If no file name is given the user will
be prompted for one.
488

IGES
Name
PATRAN
Name
DXF
Name
BATCH
[Name]
Program
[Name]
Reads geometry data from a IGES (Version 5.2) format file and
translates it to geometry for a FEMGEN model. If no file name
is given the user will be prompted for one. (See note 4).
Reads geometry data from a PATRAN Neutral format file and
translates it to geometry for a FEMGEN model. If no file name
is given the user will be prompted for one. (See note 5).
Reads geometry data from a DXF format file and translates it to
geometry for a FEMGEN model. If no file name is given the
user will be prompted for one.
Reads commands from the file specified. Where no file name
is given a default name will be used; on most systems this is
`fgvbatch.bat' . The special character `@' may be used in place
of the command ÙTILITY READ BATCH' .
Reads a results file created by the specified Finite Element
program and either generates a new FEMVIEW model or appends
results to an existing FEMVIEW model. This command is
only supported for those FEMVIEW interface programs that
are linked in as part of the FEMGV executable.
Note 1: Reading FEMGEN archived data

The ÙTILITY READ GEOMETRY' command can be used to read either a FEMGEN
coded archive file written via the ÙTILITY WRITE GEOMETRY' command at the model
index level or a FEMGEN standard archive file written via the ÙTILITY WRITE ARCHIVE'
command from within FEMGEN. Both file formats are essentially FEMGEN command
files and will comprise all the commands required to regenerate the model (except the
mesh). However, the coded archive format is considerably quicker to read and process.
The user will be asked if graphics output and command logging is to be suppressed during
the read in order to further speed up processing of the archive file. If the ' fast read' option
is selected then program control passes to FEMGEN, the archive file is read silently and,
after completion, program control returns to the model index level.
Note that FEMGEN command files can be also be read by the user entering FEMGEN
with a new model name and using the ÙTILITY READ BATCH' command. However, no
' fast read' option is available in this case.
Note 2: Mesh information
When an archive file is read, it will be necessary to use MESH GENERATE to create
the mesh. Note that offsets to node and element numbering (created with `MESHING
OPTIONS NODE or ELEMENT' ) are not transferred via the archive file.
Note 3: Naming convention for append to a host model
The name that is assigned (in the host model) to a newly created entity will contain the
default alpha part for entities of that type, unless CONSTRUCT NAME has been used in
the host model prior to the append. The numeric part of the name will be incremented from
the highest numeric value encountered in the host model for names with the relevant alpha
part. This will preclude potential naming conflicts. The ' fast read' option is available for a
model append.
Note 4: Reading an IGES file
Geometry data from an IGES file can be read and translated into FEMGEN geometry by
using the command ÙTILITY READ IGES' . The user will be prompted to give a new
model name and model description to be used when recording the data in the FEMGV
19/08/1999

database index. The user will also be prompted for the model tolerance and points which
differ by less than this tolerance will be merged by the interface. The default for the tolerance is the tolerance value read from the IGES file or 0.1% of the maximum dimension
if no IGES tolerance exists. The program will then scan the IGES file and list the IGES
entities that can be processed. The user is prompted to specify (on a single line) which of
these entities are required, the default being that all entities will be processed.
Where spline lines or spline surfaces exist, the user is asked to specify if the program is
to look for any IGES splines that could be represented as straight lines or arcs. When this
conversion is requested, the user will be prompted for a conversion tolerance to be used.
The default for the tolerance is the same as the tolerance given above. Converting relevant
spline lines to straight lines or arcs can lead to simpler line definitions, smaller databases
and faster execution times, due to the creation of fewer points. If the user does not request
this conversion then all IGES spline lines will be transferred as FEMGEN curves. The user
will be prompted for the number of points to be used when generating FEMGEN spline
lines. The default number of points is 5 which is generally found to be sufficient. More
points will give a better curve fit but will increase both model size and processing time.
Since it became possible to store spline surfaces in FEMGEN the processing of IGES
type 128 surfaces now involves creating a surface and a NURB surface shape, which are
associated together with a MESHING SHAPE command. This leads to a more accurate
reflection of the original CAD model; but this extra information in the shape - control
points and possibly also knots and weights leads to larger databases and slower display and
meshing times in FEMGENUsers

are now given three new options to control this. Since
many CAD surfaces are actually planar, cylindrical or conical, users can select to try to
convert NURB surface shapes which are planes, cones or cylinders within the tolerance.
Alternatively, users may wish not to recover the spline surface shape data at all, and simply
represent the surface using a blend of the boundary lines. They will have smaller databases
and faster display and meshing times, at the cost of more simplified surface interiors.
The interface will always check for and remove duplicate points. By default, the program
will also check before creating each line that the line does not already exist. This is very
useful if the model contains surfaces or is known to contain a lot of duplication.
However, if the IGES file contains only lines or the user has not requested that surfaces be
transferred, then it can be quicker to read the IGES file without checking for duplicate lines
and then to remove any duplicate lines with the `CONSTRUCT MERGE' .
While the data is being processed, diagnostic messages will be printed to the screen indicating how far the interface has progressed in the translation process. After the data has
been processed a summary will be given of the FEMGEN geometric entities created.
The following IGES entities are recognised and mapped to FEMGEN entities as indicated:
IGES entity
100
Type
Circular arc
102
104
Composite curve
Conics
106
Poly line
19/08/1999
FEMGEN entity generated

An arc. If the IGES arc is 180 it is split
into arcs < 180 which are then placed in set.
Processed as part of IGES 144 entities.
An IGES conic can be either an ellipse, a
parabola or a hyperbola. Ellipses will be
transferred to FEMGEN as arcs with different
radii, while parabolae and hyperbolae will be
simply approximated as straight lines.
A poly line defined from a list if nodes exist in
the IGES file.
489
490

IGES entity
110
112
Type
Straight line
Parametric spline
line
114
120
Parametric spline
surface
Surface of revolution
122
Tabulated cylinder
124
Transformation
126
Rational B-spline
curves
Rational B-spline
surfaces
Curve on a parametric
surface
Trimmed Surface
128
142
144

A straight line.
If the IGES spline line is less than 4 line
segments then each segment will be a spline line.
Otherwise a single spline line will be fitted
through each point defining the IGES spline.
In FEMGEN each spline lines will have a start
and end point and a set containing spline points.
A single spline surface will be created for
each of the segments ' ij' patches.
A single spline surface will be generated
together with a FEMGEN surface shape. This
IGES entity type is the result of sweeping a line
about an axis between two angles, and is
supported when the swept line is a straight
line, an arc or a NURB curve.
A single spline surface will be generated
together with a FEMGEN surface shape. This
IGES entity type is the result of sweeping a line,
using a translation. As for the IGES type 120,
it is supported when the swept line is a straight
line, an arc or a NURB curve.
Geometric entities referencing transformations
will be transformed into the global system.
A single spline line will be fitted, using the
FEMGEN curve shape entity.
A single spline surface will be generated,
together with a FEMGEN surface shape entity.
Processed as part of IGES 144 entities.
A FEMGEN surface (and where the IGES
base surface is type 128, 120 or 122 a
corresponding surface shape entity), will
be generated for each type 144. The type
of the FEMGEN surface will be a REGION
if it is bounded by more than 4 lines or
if it has any holes. Otherwise it will be
made into a 3 or 4 sided surface. All
boundaries must be closed and
non-intersecting, all holes must be contained
within the outer boundary.
A typical sequence may be as follows:

UTILITY READ IGES igtest1.igs
ENTER MODEL NAME =>IGTEST
ENTER MODEL DESCRIPTION =>
ACCESSING FILE
ENTITY
TYPE
FOUND
------------ARCS
100
246
LINES
110
342
B-SPLINE CURVES
126
450
B-SPLINE SURFACES 128
205
19/08/1999

TRIMMED SURFACES
144
205
ENTER IGES TYPES TO BE PROCESSED (GO) =>
POINTS WITHIN TOLERANCE OF EACH OTHER WILL BE REMOVED
MAXIMUM ABSOLUTE DIMENSION 145.109
ENTER MODEL TOLERANCE (.145104E-1) =>
SEARCH FOR STRAIGHT LINES (Y/N) =>
SEARCH FOR ARC LINES (Y/N) =>n
ENTER TOLERANCE FOR LINE CONVERSION (.145104E-1) =>
ENTER NUMBER OF POINTS FOR SPLINES (5) =>
PROCESS NURB SURFACE SHAPES (Y/N) =>y
SIMPLIFY TO PLANAR SHAPES WHERE POSSIBLE (Y/N) =>y
SIMPLIFY TO CONICAL SHAPES WHERE POSSIBLE (Y/N) =>y
GEOMETRY CREATED AS FOLLOWS:
--------------------------NUMBER OF POINTS
: 579
NUMBER OF LINES
: 1054
NUMBER OF SURFACES : 205
NUMBER OF SHAPES
: 507
NUMBER OF SETS
: 222
5
9
2
SHAPES WERE CONVERTED TO PLANES.

SHAPES WERE CONVERTED TO CYLINDERS.
SHAPES WERE CONVERTED TO CONES.
In order that a mesh may be created from entities created, lines are allocated the default
number of divisions (as set by `MESHING DIVISION DEFAULT' ) and element types are
allocated according to the highest entity type in the final model. Consequently, if surfaces
exist in the FEMGEN model then these will be allocated surface elements and the lines
will not be given an element type.
The geometry created is stored as a FEMGEN model (named ÌGTEST' in this case) and
the commands required to create an identical FEMGEN model are written to the history
file.
There are a number of FEMGV resources that can be used to customise the behaviour of
the interface, they are listed below:
Resource name
and (default)
Femsys.*.IGES.IGES Nshape
(TRUE)
Femsys.*.IGES.IGES Debug
(FALSE)
19/08/1999
Notes
By default, surface shapes are generated for IGES type
128 even when the shape is closed. Users can optionally
select not to generate NURB surface shapes for types
128 if they are closed by setting IGES Nshape to FALSE.
Users can make the IGES translator write a table
summarising the translation to the history file by
setting IGES Debug to TRUE. The table includes an entry
for all entities processed in the IGES file, giving the
name of the corresponding FEMGEN part together with
information on how parts are related. By default, this is
disabled as it can significantly increase the size of the
history file.
491
492

Resource name
and (default)
Femsys.*.IGES GAPS
(FALSE)
Femsys.*.IGES Gtol
(3*model tol.)
Femsys.*.MESH.ALG DLY
(FALSE)
Notes
By default, the program will try to fill in gaps in loops
which ought to be closed. Sometimes this can have some
unwanted effects; especially where points used in the
construction of other parts, for example points defining
shapes or centre points get moved. Users can specify not
to fill in gaps (ie keep the gaps) by setting IGES GAPS
to true. When deciding whether to fill in gaps, a critical
gap size is used. This is controlled by the next resource
IGES Gtol.
By default gaps less than 3*model tolerance will be closed
(provided IGES GAPS is FALSE). If users wish to specify
the maximum gap size to be closed, they can do so by
setting IGES Gtol. For example IGES Gtol : 0.77
specifies that all gaps up to size 0.77 will be closed.
By default, all regions (IGES type 144) will have the
automatic quad meshing algorithm called PAVING attached.
If it is intended to use tetrahedral meshing, users may
prefer to select the automatic triangulation algorithm
called DELAUNAY by setting ALG DLY to TRUE.
The user is referred to the ' femsys.ini' file in the FEMGV installation directory and the
Resources section in the FEMGV Installation and Customisation Guide.
Note 5: Reading a PATRAN Neutral file
Geometry data from a PATRAN Neutral file can be read and translated into FEMGEN using ÙTILITY READ PATRAN' . The format of the PATRAN Neutral file (from PATRAN
2.0 or later) is described in section 29 of the Patran Manual.
The user is prompted for the name of the PATRAN Neutral file, a model name and a description.
All lines in PATRAN are defined as spline lines and to avoid unnecessarily large databases
the user can request that the interface try to transfer lines as straight lines or arcs where
possible. The tolerance supplied by the user is used to determine whether the end tangents
of the splines are sufficiently similar for the lines to be considered as straight or whether
points evaluated on the spline are within tolerance of the arc. In a similar way, users are
given the option of detecting which surface shapes could be represented as planes within
the tolerance. The default value for the tolerance is 1% of the maximum model diagonal
(as calculated from the point locations).
In FEMGEN all material, physical, loading and constraint data are attached to the model
geometry. In PATRAN they are generally attached directly to the elements and nodes in the
mesh. Because of this, loading and constraint information is not transferred. Material and
Physical property definitions are transferred (Entity types 3 and 4), but are not attached to
the model geometry.
The interface is primarily intended for the transfer of geometric data, and will convert the
following PATRAN entity types :
19/08/1999

PATRAN entity
31
32
Type
Grid Point
Line
33
Patch
34
47
Hyperpatch
Trimmed Patch
493

A Point.
A Straight or a Spline line depending on
the values of the end tangents. Spline
lines will refer to a FEMGEN curve
shape.
A Surface created from boundary lines,
and referring to an underlying surface
shape describing its curvature.
A Body created from 5 or 6 patches.
A surface shape entity describing the
curvature of the underlying base
surface, and a set of lines describing the
outer boundary and each of any inner
boundaries. Where there are holes or
more than 3 or 4 lines in the outer
boundary the surface will be of type
REGION; and otherwise simply 3 or 4
sided. All boundaries must be closed
and non-intersecting. All holes must be
contained in the outer boundary.
Currently, PATRAN trimmed patches
containing holes must have only one
outer boundary.
To facilitate the re-meshing of PATRAN entities, the following information is also transferred :
PATRAN entity Type
FEMGEN information generated
42
GFEG : Line
Mesh divisions and bias along a line.
43
GFEG : Patch
Mesh divisions and bias along lines in a
surface.
44
GFEG : Hyperpatch Mesh divisions and bias along lines in a
body.
45
CFEG : Line
Element types for lines.
45
CFEG : Patch
Element types for surfaces.
45
CFEG : Hyperpatch Element types for bodies.
A typical sequence might be as follows:
UTILITY READ PATRAN file.pat
ENTER MODEL NAME => PAT1
ENTER MODEL DESCRIPTION => Geometry transfer from Patran
MAXIMUM COORDINATES IN MODEL :
XMIN
YMIN
ZMIN
XMAX
YMAX
ZMAX
-1.0355 -2
-6.5355 7
7
1.5
MAXIMUM MODEL DIAGONAL : 14.4962
ENTER MODEL TOLERANCE (.14496) =>
SEARCH FOR STRAIGHT LINES (Y/N) =>
SEARCH FOR ARC LINES (Y/N) =>
ENTER TOLERANCE FOR LINE CONVERSION (.14496) =>
SIMPLIFY TO PLANAR SHAPES WHERE POSSIBLE (Y/N) =>y
ENTITY
19/08/1999
TYPE
FOUND
494

------------------POINTS
31
86
LINES
32
88
PATCHES
33
102
HYPERPATCHES
34
17
TRIMMED PATCHES
47
12
GFEG TABLES
42-43
21
CFEG TABLES
44-45
17
ENTER PATRAN DATA TYPES TO BE PROCESSED =>
LINES (Y/N) =>n
PATCHES (Y/N) =>n
HYPERPATCHES (Y/N) =>y
TRIMMED PATCHES (Y/N) =>n
GEOMETRY CREATED AS FOLLOWS :
---------------------------NUMBER OF POINTS
: 110
NUMBER OF LINES
: 186
NUMBER OF SURFACES : 96
NUMBER OF BODIES
: 17
NUMBER OF SHAPES
: 120
5
SHAPES WERE CONVERTED TO PLANES.
19/08/1999
495
UTILITY
SETUP
Sets up animation, synonyms and program controls
2.18.8 UTILITY SETUP Mode Control

This command enables the user to setup program controls, the characteristics of the display,
plotter and printer, parameters for animation and define synonyms.
2.18.8.1
2.18.8.2
2.18.8.3
ANIMATE
COLOUR
CONFIRM
2.18.8.4
2.18.8.5
2.18.8.6
2.18.8.7
2.18.8.8
2.18.8.9
2.18.8.10
2.18.8.11
2.18.8.12
2.18.8.13
2.18.8.14
DIALOGUE
ECHO
FEEDBACK
MENU
PLOTTER
PRINTER
QUALITY
ROTATIONS
SYNONYMS
UNDO
VIEW
Setup animation parameters.

Change colour definitions.
Switch on/off confirmation for `MODIFY' and
`DELETE' commands.
Set number of lines in dialogue area.
Switch on/off the command echo.
Control feedback with FEMGEN.
Control the display of command menus.
Setup plotter characteristics.
Setup printer characteristics.
Setup mesh quality criteria.
Change sense of relative rotations.
Define and save command synonyms.
Switch on/off the FEMGEN undo facility.
Switch on/off display of geometric point
markers.
When suitable combinations of hardware and software exist, a number of forms are available at the ÙTILITY SETUP' level. The presence of these forms is indicated by ' ...'
appearing in the menu after the command e.g. ÙTILITY SETUP PLOTTER...' .
19/08/1999
496
UTILITY SETUP
ANIMATE
Setup animation parameters
2.18.8.1 UTILITY SETUP ANIMATE Control

This command provides controls for animation sequences requested by the `DRAWING
RECOVER ANIMATE' command.
Control
Comments
DURATION n
Controls the duration of the animation. The duration is

specified in seconds and can be from 5 seconds to 36000
seconds (10 hours). The default is 20 seconds.
Controls the speed of animation and can be set from
1 to 100, where the maximum speed is 100.
The default is set to 75.
Selects colour animation.
Selects monochrome animation. This is the default.
Specifies that the frames will be displayed as a cyclic
sequence. e.g. 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 etc.
Specifies that the frames will be displayed as a
linear sequence. e.g. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 etc.
SPEED n
COLOUR
MONOCHROM
OSCILLATE
LINEAR
Note 1: Hardware requirements

Animation is only available on a selected number of graphics displays. Colour
animation will only be available on displays with a fast redraw time e.g. workstations.
Note 2: Use of Start-up files
The above ÙTILITY SETUP' commands can always be stored in a file and read
in at the start of a FEMGV run, see Appendix I of the User Manual Appendices.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP ANIMATION DURATION 60
This command sets the duration of animation to 60 seconds.
2. UTILITY SETUP ANIMATION SPEED 100
This command sets the animation speed to the fastest that the hardware can achieve.
3. UTILITY SETUP ANIMATION OSCILLATE
This command sets the animation sequence as an oscillation. This might be used to
animate a mode shape.
4. UTILITY SETUP ANIMATION COLOUR
This command selects colour animation for displays that are capable of supporting
colour animation. In general, colour animation will be slower than monochrome
animation where the hardware has limited memory.
5. UTILITY SETUP ANIMATION MONOCHROM
This command selects monochrome animation. In general, monochrome animation
will be faster than full colour animation where the hardware has limited memory.
19/08/1999

See Also:
`DRAWING RECOVER' , section 2.4.4, page 143

19/08/1999
497
498
UTILITY SETUP
COLOUR
Change colour definitions
2.18.8.2 UTILITY SETUP COLOUR [Control]

This command allows the user to redefine the colours in the colour palettes that are used
when contouring and when producing shaded pictures.
Control
Comments
[CONTOUR]
[colour R G B]
Redefines the colours in the contour palette. This

is the default. (See note 1).
[WHITE]
[RED]
[ORANGE]
[YELLOW]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
[VIOLET]
[colour R G B]
[colour R G B]
[colour R G B]
[colour R G B]
[colour R G B]
[colour R G B]
[colour R G B]
Redefines the colours in the white, red, orange,

yellow, green, blue or violet shading palettes.
(See note 1).
[INVERT]
[PRIMARY]
[colour R G B]
[SAVE]
[Filename]
Inverts the foreground and background colours

(Colours 1 and 8 in the primary palette). The
default foreground colour is White and the
default background colour is Black.
Allows the FEMGV reserved (primary) colours to
be modified (See notes 1 and 2).
Saves colour definitions to a file.
Note 1: Redefining colours

The default is that the cursor is used to select a colour from a palette, to modify
the colour interactively, and then to replace the colour in the palette. Alternatively, any colour number in a palette may be set with specific R G B (red, green,
blue) levels.
Where the cursor is being used, the colours in the requested palette will be displayed as a number of coloured boxes at the bottom of the viewport. The user
is then invited to make a cursor hit on one of the boxes to select the colour that
is to be modified. A colour modification hit-box is then displayed and the user
can adjust the R G B levels by making hits in either the analogue or digital part
of the hit-box. Finally the colour can be replaced (anywhere in the palette) by
making a hit in the colour-box at the bottom of the viewport. The sequence must
be terminated by a hit in the QUIT, EXIT or SAVE boxes.
Use of the QUIT box will cause any colour changes made to be abandoned, the
EXIT box will make the changes current for the duration of the current FEMGV
session, and use of the SAVE box will cause the current colour palette definitions
to be written to a named file.
Note 2: Redefining the reserved (primary) colours using R G B levels
When defining the primary colours using specific R G B (red, green, blue) levels,
the code numbers for the FEMGV primary colours are 1 = White (foreground),
19/08/1999

2 = Red, 3 = Orange, 4 = Yellow, 5 = Green, 6 = Blue, 7 = Violet, and 8 = Black
(background).
in at the start of a FEMGV run, see Appendix I of the User Manual Appendices.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP COLOUR
This command initiates the display of the contouring palette as a number of coloured
boxes at the bottom of the viewport and the user can then modify the colours using
the graphics cursor as described in note 1 above.
2. UTILITY SETUP COLOUR GREEN 7 .046 .95 .26
This command sets the colour number 7 in the green shading palette to have a red
level of .046, a green level of .95 and a blue level of .26; where colour levels are in
the range 0 1.
3. UTILITY SETUP COLOUR SAVE shading
This command writes the current colour palette definitions, in the form of commands,
to a file named 'shading' . This command file can be used to re-establish these colours
on a subsequent occasion.
19/08/1999
499
500
UTILITY SETUP
CONFIRM
Switch on/off the confirmation prompt
2.18.8.3 UTILITY SETUP CONFIRM MODIFY/DELETE ON/OFF

In an interactive session this command can be used to switch on/off the confirmation prompt
for commands which delete or modify information in the model. The default is ÒN' ,
in which case confirmation of a deletion or modification command will be requested. If
ÒN/OFF' is omitted then the command acts as a toggle switch and will change ÒN' to
ÒFF' or ÒFF' to ÒN' .
Even if the confirmation prompt has been switched off, confirmation of a deletion or modification is written to the history and log files. This enables these files to be read in regardless
of the current setting of the confirmation prompt for interactive work. So when input is read
from a file the command will have no effect.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP CONFIRM MODIFY OFF
This will switch off the confirmation prompt for commands which modify existing
data.
2. UTILITY SETUP CONFIRM DELETE ON
This will switch on the confirmation prompt for ÙTILITY DELETE' commands.
3. UTILITY SETUP CONFIRM MODIFY
If the the prompt is currently ÒN' then this command will change it to ÒFF' and
vice versa.
19/08/1999
501
UTILITY SETUP
DIALOGUE
Set the number of lines in the dialogue area
2.18.8.4 UTILITY SETUP DIALOGUE Lines

This command enables the user to set the number of lines of dialogue to be displayed in
the command dialogue area. The default number of lines is 5 and the minimum number
allowed is 1.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP DIALOGUE 7
Sets the command dialogue area to be 7 lines.
19/08/1999
502
UTILITY SETUP
ECHO
Switch on/off the command echo
2.18.8.5 UTILITY SETUP ECHO [ON/OFF]

This command enables the echoing of commands to be switched on and off.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP ECHO ON
This command switches on the echo of commands.
2. UTILITY SETUP ECHO OFF
This command switches off the echo of commands. Note that the messages given to
the user e.g. ACCESSING FILE will also be turned off.
3. UTILITY SETUP ECHO
This will toggle the state of echoing from its previous state.
19/08/1999
503
UTILITY SETUP
FEEDBACK
Control geometry generation and tabulation feedback
2.18.8.6 UTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK Type Control

This command controls the level of immediate feedback provided when using FEMGEN
to generate geometric parts or to tabulate (inquire) information on geometric parts or when
nodes are being merged. Note that any feedback to the graphics area will be temporary and
will be lost the next time the picture is redrawn.
Type
The type of operation for which feedback controls are to be set.

`GEOMETRY' for feedback when geometric parts are being generated.
`TABULATE' for feedback when tabulating geometric parts.
`MESHING' for feedback when nodes are being merged.
Control
Comments
DIALOGUE
ON/OFF
LABELS
ON/OFF
SYMBOLS
ON/OFF
GRAPHICS
ON/OFF
SHRINK control
COLOUR
POINTS colour
LINES colour
SURFACES colour
BODIES colour
DIALOGUE ON/OFF
SYMBOL ON/OFF
MERGE
Switches on/off text feedback to the dialogue

area. The default is on.
Switches on/off the display of labels for
geometric parts. The default is on.
Switches on/off the display of symbols for
geometric parts. The default is on.
(See note 1).
Switches on/off the over drawing of point
symbols, lines, surfaces and bodies. The
default is on. A shrink factor to be applied
to a line, surface or body may be specified.
(See note 2).
Sets the colour to be used for the display of
labels, symbols and graphics feedback for the
specified type of geometric part. (See note 3).
Switches on/off feedback of node merging
information to the dialogue area. The default
is on. Also, switches on/off the the use of
symbols to mark nodes as they are merged.
The default is on.
Note 1: Feedback for points and lines

For points and lines, the symbolic representation of the part is the same as the
graphical representation of the part, viz: for points a diamond symbol at the
point is drawn and for lines the line itself is drawn. Thus to completely suppress
the display of points and lines both the `.....SYMBOLS' and `.....GRAPHICS'
feedback controls need to be off.
19/08/1999
504

Note 2: The `GRAPHICS' feedback control
This control, when switched ÒN' , will cause a point symbol or a line, surface
or body to be over drawn. A shrink factor to be applied to the line, surface or
body (but not to the point symbol) may be specified with the `..... GRAPHICS
SHRINK factor' command and may be turned off with the `...... GRAPHICS
SHRINK OFF' command. The colour used for drawing a surface or body will
be as specified in the `...... COLOUR SURFACES or BODIES' command.
Note 3: The `COLOUR' control of feedback
All labels, symbols and graphics feedback for the specified type of geometric part will be displayed in the requested colour. The colours available are
`WHITE' , `RED' , ÒRANGE' , `YELLOW' , `GREEN' , `BLUE' and `VIOLET' .
The default is that feedback for points is yellow, for lines green, for surfaces blue
and for bodies red.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK GEOMETRY COLOUR SURFACES WHITE
Specifies that during geometry generation, all labels, symbols and graphics feedback
for surfaces will be displayed in white.
2. UTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK GEOMETRY GRAPHICS ON
Switches on graphical feedback for geometry generation. Surfaces and bodies will
be drawn around.
3. UTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK GEOMETRY GRAPHICS SHRINK .8
Specifies that during geometry generation, surfaces and bodies will be drawn shrunken
by a factor of 0.8.
4. UTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK TABULATE LABELS OFF
Switches off the display of part labels when tabulating geometric parts data.
See Also:
`GEOMETRY' , section 2.8, page 169

19/08/1999
505
UTILITY SETUP
MENU
Switch on/off display of the command menus
2.18.8.7 UTILITY SETUP MENU Control

This command enables the user to control the display of the command menus which appear
in the command column on the right of the screen.
Control
Comments
ON
OFF
Switches on the display of command menus. This is the default.

Switches off the display of command menus. The command column is
removed.
Integer specifying the number of characters to be used for the display
of command words in the command menus. A minimum of 4 and a
maximum of 20 characters is allowed. The default is that 8 characters is
used. The width of the command column is adjusted accordingly.
`n'
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP MENU ON
This command switches on the display of the command menus.
2. UTILITY SETUP MENU OFF
This command switches off the display of the command menus. The drawing of the
model will be redisplayed so that the whole of the screen is used.
3. UTILITY SETUP MENU 6
This command sets the number of characters used for the display of command words
to 6. The width of the command column is adjusted.
19/08/1999
506
UTILITY SETUP
PLOTTER
Setup plotter characteristics
2.18.8.8 UTILITY SETUP PLOTTER Control

This command enables characteristics of the plotter device to be set.
Control
Comments
COLOUR [n]
Defines the number of colours

available (see note 1).
Sets if polygon fill is available.
Sets the height and width for
character size code ' n' (see
note 1).
(See note 2).
Specifies the required
format of the plot file.
(See note 3).
POLYFILL [OFF]
SIZECHAR n
Height Width
FORMAT
SCALE s
POSTSCRPT
NEUTRAL
INTERLEAF
LASERJET
PAINTJET
HPGL
HPGL2
DESKJET
CGM
HARDCOPY
MONOCHROM
COLOUR
(See note 4)
Note 1: Plotter character sizes and colours

Plotter character height and width are defined in the plotting range 09999. If the
user selects ÙTILITY SETUP PLOTTER COLOURS 14' then the contouring
colours will be in the range 1 to 14, where 1 is dark blue, and 14 is bright red. If
the number of colours is not set then these will be dependent upon the currently
selected graphics display.
Note 2: Plotter character size scaling
The character size for the plotfile can be adjusted by a scaling factor. This factor
is a ratio of the size allocated to characters in the plotfile as compared to the
size allocated to characters on the current graphics display screen. The default
ratio is 1.1 so that the size allocated to characters in the plotfile is slightly larger
than those used for the display. If a plotfile is written from viewport zero, and
recovered into viewport one, for example, the character fields may tend to be
rather crowded, as the character size cannot be set small enough to map to the
smaller viewport. Setting the plotter character size scale to 2.0 before writing
the plotfile will overcome this problem.
Note 3: Plotter file format
It is possible to specify that data be written to a plot file either in the `neutral' format described in Appendix E of the User Manual Appendices or in
Postscript, Interleaf, HP Laserjet, HP Paintjet, HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP Deskjet
or CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) format. With Postscript, both colour
and monochrome devices are supported.
19/08/1999

Note 4: Hardcopy format
Note that the format `HARDCOPY' causes the file to be written using the screen
hardcopy facility of the graphics device.
in at the start of a FEMGV run, see the User Manual Appendices.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP PLOTTER COLOUR 14
This command sets the plotter driver to use just 14 colours when contouring, and for
shading. This would be the default setting if the currently selected graphics device
was a 16 colour display where two colours would be used for black and for white,
and the remaining 14 colours would be available for contouring, or for generating
shaded pictures.
2. UTILITY SETUP PLOTTER COLOUR 8
This command sets the plotter driver to use just 8 colours when contouring, and
would be necessary e.g. if the user were to use the output to drive an 8 pen plotter.
3. UTILITY SETUP PLOTTER FORMAT POSTSCRPT COLOUR
This command sets the plotter driver to deliver a colour postscript plotfile, and would
be necessary if, for example, the user were to use the output to drive a laser plotter
requiring a postscript input file.
See Also:
19/08/1999
507
508
UTILITY SETUP
PRINTER
Setup printer page length
2.18.8.9 UTILITY SETUP PRINTER PAGELEN length

This command enables the number of lines to be used per page of printer output to be set.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP PRINTER PAGELEN 76
This command sets the program to deliver a printfile formatted to 76 lines per page.
19/08/1999
509
UTILITY SETUP
QUALITY
Setup mesh quality criteria
2.18.8.10 UTILITY SETUP QUALITY Test Control

This command allows the user to specify what constitutes an illegally shaped (distorted)
element by setting the values for element quality criterion.
Test
Control
Comments
MINANG
MAXANG
ASPECT
NODOFF
BULGE
WARP
TOTAL
value El type
WEIGHT value El type
OFF
ON
Set value for specified quality

test for element type
Note 1: The quality tests

The quality tests are as follows: `MINANG' (minimum angle), `MAXANG'
(maximum angle), ÀSPECT' (aspect ratio), `NODOFF' (mid node offset), `BULGE'
(mid node bulge), `WARP' (warpage) and `TOTAL' (overall quality value).
Note 2: The El type control
This is used to specify the elements to which the quality test is to be applied. The
keyword ÀLL' indicates all element types while `BE3' , `TR3' , `QU4' , `TR6' ,
`PE6' , `QU8' , `QU9' , `HE8' , `PE15' , `HE16' , `HE20' and `HE27' indicate
specific element types.
Note 3: Further Information
Further information on Mesh Quality is given in Appendix J of the User Manual
Appendices.
The ÙTILITY TABULATE STATUS QUALITY' command is used to display
the current settings for the quality criteria.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP QUALITY NODOFF .3 ALL
This command sets the maximum allowable offset of the midside node to 0.3 across
all element types.
2. UTILITY SETUP QUALITY NODOFF WEIGHT .7 BE3
This command sets the proportion of NODOFF to the overall quality value to 0.7 for
the element type BE3.
3. UTILITY SETUP QUALITY ASPECT .35 QU4
This command sets ASPECT to be .35 for QU4 elements.
19/08/1999
510

See Also:
ÙTILITY TABULATE STATUS QUALITY' , section 2.18.9, page 516

`LABEL MESH QUALITY' , section 2.11.2, page 258
ÙTILITY TABULATE MESH QUALITY' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
511
UTILITY SETUP
ROTATIONS
Setup sense of relative rotations
2.18.8.11 UTILITY SETUP ROTATIONS Mode

This command enables the sense of relative rotations to be changed.
Mode
Comments
MODEL
EYE
Make relative rotations apply to change the orientation of the model.

Make relative rotations apply to change the position of the viewers eye.
This is the default mode of operation.
19/08/1999
512
UTILITY SETUP
SYNONYMS
Setup command synonyms
2.18.8.12 UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS Control

This command enables the user to define and manage command synonyms. Further information on the use of synonyms is given in the Installation and Customisation Guide.
Control
Comments
ADD Synonym, Length, Definition
Adds a new command synonym to the list

(See Note 1).
Lists the named or all synonym definitions.
Deletes the named synonym.
Saves the synonyms to a named file
Switches on the use of synonyms.
Switches off the use of synonyms.
The default is off.
LIST [Synonym]
DELETE Synonym
SAVE [Filename]
ON
OFF
Operating system commands may now be used as part of the synonym definitions; they
must appear inside double quotation marks, e.g. !ls for a UNIX system.
Note 1: Defining a new Synonym
To add a new synonym to the list it is necessary to specify the synonym itself,
the number of characters that must be typed to identify the synonym, and to give
the FEMGV commands that the synonym maps to. Parameter substitution is
possible.
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS ON
This command activates the use of synonyms.
2. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS ADD ISOMETRIC 3 E R T 45 45 45;E F
The synonym ÌSOMETRIC' is added to the list of synonyms. The command ÌSO'
may now be used to obtain the defined rotation, and framing of the model or subset.
Note that 3 characters are defined as sufficient to identify this synonym. This is not a
true isometric view but serves to illustrate the use of synonyms to define a particular
viewing angle.
3. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS ADD ABOVE 2 R R V A
The command e.g. ÀB 1.5 B .5' may now be used in the place of the rather longer
command `RESULTS RANGE VALUES ABOVE 1.5 BELOW .5' . This technique
may be used to abbreviate long or difficult commands.
4. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS ADD ABOVE 2 R R V A $1 B
An even more concise solution for the previous example is obtained by use of parameter substitution. The $1 indicates where the 1st argument entered is to be substituted
in the expanded command. The command e.g. ÀB 1.5 .5' may now be used to generate the command `RESULTS RANGE VALUES ABOVE 1.5 BELOW .5' .
19/08/1999

5. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS ADD PICT 4 R L $1; R N STRESS $2; P C L
$3
This defines a synonym called PICT. The $1, $2 and $3 specify that three parameters will be required to satisfy the synonym. If, for example, the user enters `PICT
CASE1 XX 12' then this will generate the command sequence `RESULTS LOADCASE CASE1 ;' , `RESULTS NODAL STRESS XX ;' `PRESENT CONTOURS
LEVEL 12'
6. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS DELETE ISO
This command deletes the synonym ÌSO' defined above.
7. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS SAVE david
This command saves a definition of the current synonyms in a file named `david' and
this file may be accessed to establish these definitions on a subsequent occasion.
8. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS LIST L
This will list all the synonyms beginning with L.
9. UTILITY SETUP SYNONYMS ADD FILES 3 !ls
This defines a synonym called FILES which will list (in the dialogue area) all the files
in the current directory for a UNIX installation. On a PC the command is similar, but
' ls' is replaced by ' dir' .
19/08/1999
513
514
UTILITY SETUP
UNDO
Switch on/off the FEMGEN undo facility
2.18.8.13 UTILITY SETUP UNDO ON/OFF

This command enables the FEMGEN ùndo' facility to be switched on and off.
The ùndo' works by making a copy in memory of the current state of the FEMGEN model
prior to executing any command, with the exception of `MESHING GENERATE' , that will
change the model in any way.
Only one previous state of the model is maintained.
By default the ùndo' is switched on when starting a FEMGV session and is a session wide
control.
If the ùndo' facility is on, then the command ÙTILITY UNDO' will return to the previous
state of the model.
Note that when active the ùndo' facility imposes an overhead in memory requirement and
response time. When reading in command files that contain no ÙTILITY UNDO' commands the best performance will be obtained by setting the ùndo' off. However, for normal
interactive working it is recommended to have the ùndo' facility on. The current setting
of the ùndo' switch is shown with the command ÙTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY
STATUS' .
Examples:
1. UTILITY SETUP UNDO ON
This command switches on the undo facility.
2. UTILITY SETUP UNDO OFF
This command switches off the undo facility.
See Also:
ÙTILITY UNDO' , section 2.18.10, page 522
19/08/1999
515
UTILITY SETUP
VIEW
Control display of geometry point markers
2.18.8.14 UTILITY SETUP VIEW Control

This command enables the display of geometry point markers to be switched off and on.
Control
POINTS
Comments
ON
OFF
19/08/1999
Display the point markers when the geometry is drawn.

This is the default.
Suppress the point markers when the geometry is drawn.
516
UTILITY
TABULATE
Tabulate or inquire data
2.18.9 UTILITY TABULATE Control

This commands enables the user to tabulate or inquire various information about the current
model.
FEMGEN Command.
Control
GEOMETRY
Name
STATUS
POINTS
ALL or
Part name
LINES
ALL or
Part name
LCMB
ALL or
Part name
ALL or
Part name
REGION
SURFACES
BODIES
ALL or
Part name
PRISM
GBODY
Comments
Lists FEMGEN geometry status.
Additionally displays the smallest distance
between start and end points of all lines
within the current model
(MINIMUM LINE SPAN), the smallest
distance between start and end points of
all lines contained in bodies within the
current model (MINIMUM BODY SPAN)
and the smallest distance between start
and end points of all lines contained
in surfaces within the current model
(MINIMUM SURFACE SPAN).
Lists points associated with the
specified part. Default is ALL.
Further the user can ask for just the
coordinates (with COOR), the point
dependencies (with DEPEND), the point
properties (with PROPERTY) or all
these together with ALL. The default
is COOR.
Lists lines associated with the specified
part. Default is ALL.
Lists combined lines associated with the
Lists surfaces associated with the
Lists all those surfaces that are regions.
Alternatively, lists regions associated
with a specified part.
Lists bodies associated with the
Lists all those bodies that are prisms.
Alternatively, lists prisms associated
with a specified part.
Lists all general bodies.
Alternatively, lists general bodies that
are associated with a specified part.
19/08/1999
Control
Name
/PICK
FE
MESH
Comments
Allows the cursor to be used to select
the parts to be listed
Lists FEMGEN finite element
types for licensed interface programs
(which are controlled by the keyfile).
The default for FE package is the
current analysis environment (as
shown in the monitor).
The default for generic element type
is all available element types.
[ABAQUS]
[ANSYS]
[ASAS]
[ASKA]
[DIANA]
[DYNA3D]
[FS2]
[NASTRAN]
[PAFEC]
etc ...
NODES
Generic
elem
type
ALL
Part name
`n'
/PICK-N
Lists nodal point coordinates. A node

number may be specified or a node
picked with the cursor.
ELEMENTS
ALL
Part name
`n'
/PICK-E
Lists element definitions. An element

number may be specified or an element
picked with the cursor.
STATUS
MERGE
QUALITY
ALL or merge name

Part name
TRANSFORM
Name
SHAPES
Name
CSYST
Name
SETS
PARAMETER
Name
Name
TCURVE
Name
SCURVE
Name
LMASK
Name
LOADS
Name
or loadcase
19/08/1999
517
Lists mesh status.

Lists mesh merge definitions.
`FAILED' (the default) will list all
failed elements and `COMPLETE' will
list all values for all elements. Further
information on Mesh Quality is given in
Appendix J of the User Manual
Appendices.
Lists the named transformations.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named shapes. Default is ALL.
When NURBS shapes are being
tabulated the additional keyword NURB
provides a summary of the NURB shapes;
the keywords CONTROL, PARAMETER,
U-KNOTS, V-KNOTS and WEIGHTS provide
a selective tabulation. FULL will
tabulate all the relevant information.
Lists the named coordinate systems.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named sets. Default is ALL.
Lists the named parameter.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named time curve.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named space curve.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named load mask.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named loads.
Default is ALL.
518
Control
Name
Comments
INITIAL
Name
MATERIALS
Name
CONSTRNT
Name
PHYSICAL
Name
Lists the named initial condition.

Default is ALL.
Lists the named material definitions.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named constraints.
Default is ALL.
Lists the named physical properties.
Default is ALL.
Lists the contents of the current drawing.
Gives the status of utility setup control parameters.
Gives the status of the drawing contents control parameters.
Gives the status of the view light control parameters.
Gives the quality criteria and weight values for the specified
element type. If ÀLL' is selected then information for all
element types will be tabulated (this is the default). If a
specific element type is selected then information for this will
be tabulated. If `CURRENT' is selected then information for the
element types encountered during the processing of the commands
ÙTILITY TABULATE MESH QUALITY' or `LABEL MESH QUAL
will be tabulated, provided that these commands have previously
been issued. Otherwise information for all element types will be
tabulated.
Further information on Mesh Quality is given in Appendix K of
DRAWING
STATUS
SETUP
CONTENTS
LIGHT
QUALITY
[ALL]
[El type]
[CURRENT]
Examples:
1. UTILITY TABULATE MESH NODES /PICK-N
The cursor is made available for nodes to be picked. The coordinates of the picked
node are tabulated.
2. UTILITY TABULATE MESH STATUS
Information about the current mesh is tabulated including the number of nodes and
elements and the maximum node difference for an element, for example:
NODES = 38
ELEMS = 28
EBASE = 1
NBASE = 1
NODES/ELEM = 4
NODE DIFF = 12
MAX NODES = 12000
3. UTILITY TABULATE MESH ELEMENTS 136
Tabulates the definition of element 136.
4. UTILITY TABULATE MESH QUALITY S2 FAILED
This command tabulates the quality values for elements on S2 which fail.
5. UTILITY TABULATE GEOMETRY POINTS SIDE1 DEPEND
Tabulates the points in set SIDE1 which are in any way dependent on other points,
coordinate systems or transforms.
6. UTILITY TABULATE STATUS QUALITY PE15
This command tabulates the current quality criteria for the PE15 element.
19/08/1999
519
FEMVIEW Command.
Control
Range
Comments
MESH NODES
ALL
VIEWMODE
n1 n2 n3...
n1 TO n2 [STEPS n3]
Set name
Lists nodal coordinates. (See note 1).
Control
Range
Comments
MESH ELEMENTS
ALL
n1 n2 n3...
n1 TO n2 [STEPS n3]
Set name
n1 n2 n3...
n1 TO n2 [STEPS n3]
n1 n2 n3...
n1 TO n2 [STEPS n3]
Lists elements. (See note 1).
MESH MATERIALS
MESH TRANSFRMS
MESH Set name
LOADCASES
[Load name [Step]]
RESULTS
VIEWMODE
n1 n2 n3...
n1 TO n2 [STEPS n3]
ALL
-
DRAWINGS
SETS
SHAPES
LINES
COORDSYS
PRINTFILE
OPEN Filename
CLOSE Filename
STATUS
RESULTS
PRESENT
GRAPH
SETUP
CONTENTS
LIGHT
Lists materials. (See note 2).

Lists model transformations.
(See note 2).
If the set is a node set then
the nodes in the set are listed.
If the set is an element set
then the elements in the set
are listed.
Lists loadcase information.
(See note 3).
Lists values of the currently selected
component of results for all of the
selected loadcases for the specified
range of nodes or elements.
Lists all saved drawings.
Lists all sets.
Lists all shapes or a named shape.
Lists all lines or a named line.
Lists all coordinate systems
or a named coordinate system.
Starts/stops output of graph
and tabulated data to the
named print file. If no file
name is given then all output
will go to ' fgvlst.lst' .
Gives the status of results range selection parameters.
Gives the status of present option parameters.
Gives the status of graphing control parameters.
Note 1: Listing nodes and elements

With nodes, if no range is specified then the default is `VIEWMODE' and all
visible nodes in the current model set will be listed. For a node to be `visible'
it would have attached mesh lines shown as a result of the command `VIEW
19/08/1999
520

OPTIONS EDGES ALL' ; (the effect of commands `VIEW OPTIONS EDGES
OUTLINE' and `VIEW OPTIONS EDGES INHIBIT' is ignored).
With elements, if no range is specified then the default is ÀLL' and all elements
in the current model set will be listed. The command `VIEWMODE' maps to
ÀLL' for elements.
When listing elements on a specified node set, then any element connected to
any of the nodes in the node set will be listed.
When listing nodes on a specified element set, then all nodes that define the
elements in the element set will be listed.
For both nodes and elements, if a range other than `VIEWMODE' or ÀLL'
is specified then the specified nodes or elements will be listed regardless of
whether they form part of the current model set or not.
Note 2: Listing materials and transforms
If no range is specified then all materials or transforms in the model will be
listed, otherwise only those materials or transforms specified will be listed.
Note 3: Listing loadcases
Loadcases are listed in the order in which they were defined. If no loadcase is
specified then all loadcases in the model will be listed, otherwise the listing will
start from the loadcase specified.
Note 4: Multiple page plots
Where data has been listed in the single full screen viewport it is possible that,
because of formatting differences, there will be more data listed to the graphics
viewport than could be contained on a single page of plotter output. In this case
the plotter driver will produce additional pages of output until all the data listed
in the viewport has been plotted.
Note 5: Multiple page tabulations
Where a tabulation contains more than one complete screen full of information a
prompt will be issued and the user may continue with the next page by pressing
carriage return. Alternatively, the user may issue any primary level command or
a `/' to be prompted for a primary command.
Examples:
1. UTILITY TABULATE MESH NODES 10 TO 15
This command initiates the tabulation of nodal coordinate data for nodes 10, 11, 12,
13, 14 and 15.
2. UTILITY TABULATE MESH TRANSFRMS
This command initiates the tabulation of model transformations that are stored in the
data base to facilitate the building of models into assemblies.
19/08/1999

Control
STATUS
Comments
SETUP
CONTENTS
LIGHT

Note 1: Multiple page tabulations

Where a tabulation contains more than one complete screen full of information a
prompt will be issued and the user may continue with the next page by pressing
carriage return. Alternatively, the user may issue any primary level command or
a `/' to be prompted for a primary command.
19/08/1999
521
522
UTILITY
UNDO
Undo the most recent change to a FEMGEN model
2.18.10 UTILITY UNDO

This command enables the user to undo the most recent change to a FEMGEN model.
Only one previous state of the model is maintained.
Note that a `MESHING GENERATE' command cannot be undone. This means that a
change to the mesh controls can be made, the mesh generated and viewed and if the mesh
is unsatisfactory, the mesh controls can returned to their previous settings with ÙTILITY
UNDO' .
The geometry and/or mesh displayed after a ÙTILITY UNDO' command will be as it was
when the model was changed. A hidden view will be switched off.
See Also:
ÙTILITY SETUP UNDO' , section 2.18.8.13, page 514
19/08/1999
523
UTILITY
UPDATE
Update database from previous version of FEMGV
2.18.11 UTILITY UPDATE model name

This command enables the user to convert database files created by previous versions of
FEMGV into the form required by the latest version of FEMGV.
The user may specify an individual model for conversion or specify that ÀLL' models in
the current directory be converted.
Both FEMVIEW and FEMGEN databases will be converted. The rule is that conversion
only occurs if database files for the latest version of FEMGV do not exist and appropriate
database files for a previous version of FEMGV do exist. Note that conversion does not
alter or delete the original FEMGV database files and that it is always the database files of
the most recent previous version that will be updated in preference to earlier versions.
The menu column will include the name of a model available for conversion only if no
database files for either FEMGEN or FEMVIEW for the latest version of FEMGV exist
for that model. However, if only the FEMGEN or FEMVIEW database has been converted for a model, the command ÙTILITY UPDATE model name' will force the update
of any remaining database for that model even though the model name did not appear in
the menu column.
It is also possible to convert databases by using the ÙPDATE' button in the model index
display. This button will appear under the same circumstances that the model name appears
in the menu column as described above.
Database files created by FEMGV Version 2.3, FEMGV Version 4, FEMGV Version 5
and FEMGV Version 6 are as follows:
Version
Program
Database Files
FEMGV 2.3
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
FEMGV 4
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
FEMGV 5.*
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
FEMGV 5.1-03
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
FEMGV 6.0-01
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
FEMGV 6.1-01
FEMGEN
FEMVIEW
model name.G20
model name.V20
fgvindex.m20
model name.G40
model name.V40
model name.M40
model name.G50
model name.V50
model name.M50
model name.G51
model name.V51
model name.M51
model name.G60
model name.V60
model name.M60
model name.G61
model name.V61
model name.M61
19/08/1999
524

Examples:
1. UTILITY UPDATE GASKET
If `GASKET.G61' does not exist and `GASKET.G50' does exist then `GASKET.G61'
will be created. `GASKET.G50' will be unchanged. If `GASKET.V61' and `GASKET.M61' do not exist and `GASKET.V50' and `GASKET.M50' do exist then `GASKET.V61' and `GASKET.M61' will be created. `GASKET.V50' and `GASKET.M50'
will be unchanged.
19/08/1999
525
UTILITY
WRITE
Write data to a file for further processing
2.18.12 UTILITY WRITE

The ÙTILITY WRITE' command is used to write data to a file for further processing or
to archive data from the database.
FEMGEN Command.
UTILITY WRITE Format [Filename]
This command enables the user to create an input file for a Finite Element Analysis program. It can also be used to create an archive file which will contain all information (in
the form of commands) necessary for FEMGV to regenerate the current model (except the
generated mesh). It may also be used to create a file of geometry data for input to a CAD
program and also to create a file in either of the neutral formats described in Appendix A
and Appendix B of the User Manual Appendices.
The user can optionally specify the name of the file to which the data is to be written.
The default file name is `modelname.anl' except with the command ÙTILITY WRITE
ARCHIVE' when the default file name is `modelname.fga'
Note that file names may be installation dependent and that file extension defaults can be
changed via the FEMGV Environment Variables (see Appendix A of the Installation and
Customisation Guide) and Resources.
Format
Part
Program
ARCHIVE
NEUTRAL
FEMVIEW
[ALL] or [`set' ]
Comments
Creates an input file in the format required by the
specified Finite Element Analysis program or in the
specified CAD format.
Creates a file containing the FEMGEN commands
necessary to re-generate the current model. If `set' has
been specified then only the commands relating to this
set are put in the file. See notes 1, 2 and 3 below.
Creates a file in the FEMGEN neutral format
described in Appendix A of the User Manual
Appendices.
Creates a file in the FEMVIEW neutral format
described in Appendix B of the User Manual
Appendices. This file is created from the FEMGEN
mesh data and therefore there will be no results data.
Interfaces to many popular Finite Element Analysis programs are available with FEMGV.
Details of the data that can be generated for a particular Finite Element Analysis program
are given in a separate document. Users should contact their FEMGV distributor for further
information.
19/08/1999
526

Note 1: Archiving a set
If a set name is specified, then all the parts in the set will be archived along with
any additional information necessary to complete their definitions; this could
include points, lines, transforms, shapes and coordinate systems on which the
geometry in the set is dependent. Further sets will be included if they are used
in load or constraint definitions and are not empty. Load, constraint and merge
definitions are also included if some or all of the parts to which they refer are
in the specified set. Material definitions, physical properties and coordinate systems are output if they are attached to all or part of the set.
Note 2: Archive for fast model regeneration
If the whole FEMGEN model is being archived for backup reasons or in order
to compact the database then it is advisable to use the ÙTILITY WRITE GEOMETRY' command at the model index level as this will create a file in the
coded archive format which can be read more quickly by FEMGV.
Note 3: Mesh information When an archive file is read, it will be necessary to use
MESH GENERATE to create the mesh. Note that offsets to node and element
numbering (created with `MESHING OPTIONS NODE or ELEMENT' ) are not
transferred via the archive file.
Examples:
1. UTILITY WRITE ABAQUS abaqus.inp
Creates a file called àbaqus.inp' containing an input deck for the finite element analysis program ABAQUS.
2. UTILITY WRITE ASAS asas.inp
Creates a file called àsas.inp' containing an input deck for the finite element analysis
program ASAS.
3. UTILITY WRITE ARCHIVE wing.dat
Creates a file called `wing.dat' containing the FEMGEN commands necessary to
regenerate the current model.
See Also:
ÙTILITY READ BATCH' , section 2.18.7, page 487

ÙTILITY READ VIEWDATA' , section 2.18.7, page 487
ÙTILITY WRITE GEOMETRY' , section 2.18.12, page 525
ÙTILITY READ GEOMETRY' , section 2.18.12, page 525
19/08/1999

FEMVIEW Command
UTILITY WRITE Mode [Filename]
This command allows model and results data for the current subset of a model to be written
to an archive file for further processing. If no file name is specified and no archive file
is already open then a file with the default name of ' fgvarc.fva' will be opened. Once an
archive file has been opened then any subsequent ÙTILITY WRITE' command in which
no file name is specified will cause data to be appended to the existing archive file. The
exception to this rule is the ÙTILITY WRITE DPL' command, for which a new file is
opened each time.
When using the ÀLL' , ÈDGES' , `FACES' or `MESH' options, the user will be prompted
for a name to be used in the model header record in the file (see Appendix B of the User
Manual Appendices); and if no model name is entered the current model name will be used.
Mode
Comments
ALL
Writes the nodal point coordinates, the element topology, material data,
set definitions, transformation data, results local axis and systems data,
nodal and multi-point constraints data, loading data and analysis results
(if any) for the current subset of the model.
Writes the edges of the current subset of the model as a beam model.
(See note 2).
Writes the visible faces of the current subset of the model as a 2D model.
(See note 3).
Writes the nodal point coordinates, the element topology and material
data for the current subset of the model.
Writes the current attribute of results for the selected loadcase(s).
(See note 4).
Writes the current attribute of results in Discrete Point Load (DPL)
format. Currently only nodal material independent results and element
invariant results can be archived in DPL format. (See note 4).
EDGES
FACES
MESH
RESULTS
DPL
Note 1: Format of the output file

The format of the file produced by the ÙTILITY WRITE' command is the
standard FEMVIEW neutral file format as given in Appendix B of the User
Manual Appendices. The exception is that when archiving results on a cross
section view, or when archiving results using the command ÙTILITY WRITE
DPL' , the format of the file produced is not the standard neutral file format and
is given in Appendix F.
Note 2: The ÈDGES' command
When issuing the command ÙTILITY WRITE EDGES' the current `VIEW'
mode must be `VIEW EDGES' .
Note 3: The `FACES' command
When issuing the command ÙTILITY WRITE FACES' the current `VIEW'
mode must be `VIEW FACES' .
Note 4: Effect of `VIEW' mode when archiving results
When issuing the command ÙTILITY WRITE RESULTS' or ÙTILITY WRITE
DPL' the program will be sensitive to the current `VIEW' mode, and only results for nodes that are visible, and elements that are at least partially visible will
be archived.
19/08/1999
527
528

See Also:
`VIEW EDGES' , section 2.19.9.4, page 552

`VIEW FACES' , section 2.19.4, page 536
MODEL INDEX command

UTILITY WRITE Mode Model name [Filename]
Mode
Comments
GEOMETRY
Creates a `coded' archive file containing all the information about

the requested model except the generated mesh. This file will
contain FEMGEN commands in a coded form and can be read by
FEMGV to recreate the model (See note 1).
This command is currently not implemented
VIEWDATA
Note 1: Use of the coded archive file

The user may write a coded archive file either for backup purposes or to achieve
a compaction of the FEMGEN database file. When entities are deleted in FEMGEN the space in the model database file is not released for re-use and the size
of the database will be greater than the optimum required. Where many deletions have occurred, this may adversely effect disk file resources and the performance of FEMGEN. A new compacted database can be achieved by archiving
the model, deleting the database and then reading back the archive file.
The FEMGEN commands in the coded archive file contain coded direct references between geometric entities rather than references by name. These coded
references enable the file to be read and the FEMGEN model regenerated more
quickly. A coded archive file should preferably be read at the model index level
with the command ÙTILITY READ GEOMETRY' as this allows additional
controls to be applied to improve the speed of processing the file.
The user should not edit a coded archive file as this may destroy the validity of
the direct references it contains.
19/08/1999
2.19. PRIMARY COMMAND VIEW
529
VIEW
Selection of model visualisation technique
2.19 PRIMARY COMMAND VIEW

The `VIEW' command offers the user a selection of techniques for visualisation of a model.
Some of these techniques reduce picture congestion by displaying a partial representation
of the finite element model. This can aid the user's appreciation of the model and, by reducing the amount of data being displayed, may allow analysis results to be more meaningfully
superimposed on the picture.
Partial representation of the model can also be used to minimise redraw times whilst determining a satisfactory orientation of the model.
The following sections refer to the `VIEW' command:
FEMGEN Command.
2.19.5
2.19.6
VIEW GEOMETRY
VIEW HIDDEN
2.19.8
2.19.9
2.19.10
2.19.11
VIEW MESH
VIEW OPTIONS
VIEW SHAPE
VIEW SPOT
- display geometric parts

- hidden line view
shaded hidden line views with light source
hidden line view showing surface normals
- display the mesh
- additional controls on the `VIEW' command
- display geometric shapes
- highlight geometric parts
FEMVIEW Command.
2.19.1
2.19.2
2.19.3
2.19.4
2.19.6
VIEW CUTAWAY
VIEW DEVEL
VIEW EDGES
VIEW FACES
VIEW HIDDEN
2.19.7
2.19.8
2.19.9
2.19.12
VIEW LINE
VIEW MESH
VIEW OPTIONS
VIEW XSECTION
19/08/1999
- cut-away view though solid elements

- developed view of shell models
- draw edge representation
- selected element faces
- hidden line view
- shaded hidden line views with light source
- a line through the mesh
- mesh set selection
- additional controls on the `VIEW' command
- cross-section through solid elements
530
VIEW
CUTAWAY
Displays a cut-away section through the model
2.19.1 VIEW CUTAWAY Definition of the cut-away

This command enables the user to cut-away a model to one side of an intersection plane.
The cut-away plane may either be defined as part of the command or a previously defined
plane may be referenced.
Hidden views of a cut-away model may be obtained via the `VIEW HIDDEN' command.
Mode
Definition of Cut-away
/CURSOR
The cursor is used twice to define a cut-away plane that lies normal to
the plane of the screen.
The named shape, which must be a plane, is selected as the cut-away
plane.
shape name
The part of the model (relative to the plane) to be cut-away is indicated via the keywords
`TOP, BOTTOM, FRONT, BACK , LEFT, RIGHT or CURSOR' . If `CURSOR' is used
then a cursor hit to the required side of the plane must be made.
Note 1: Limitations on use
The `VIEW CUTAWAY' command uses similar logic to the `VIEW XSECTION' command and the user should refer to `VIEW XSECTION' for notes on
limitations with section planes.
Examples:
1. VIEW CUTAWAY CURSOR RIGHT
A cut-away plane is defined using the cursor and the model to the right of the plane
is removed.
2. VIEW CUTAWAY Slice1 TOP
A cut-away plane is defined using the previously defined plane `Slice1' and the
model to the top of the plane is removed.
3. VIEW CUTAWAY Slice1 CURSOR
A cut-away plane is defined using the previously defined plane `Slice1' and the
model to the side of the plane indicated by the cursor is removed.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE' , section 2.3.9, page 96

19/08/1999
Cut-away section
Figure 2.123: Cut-away
19/08/1999
531
532
VIEW
DEVEL
Generates a developed view of a shell model
2.19.2 VIEW DEVEL Mode

This command allows the user to produce a developed view of a shell model, using a
cylindrical mapping about the X, Y, or Z-axis or about an axis that is indicated by the user
with a single cursor hit, defining an axis normal to the screen at the position of the hit.
Mode
Comments
X
Y
Z
/CURSOR
ndc
Develops model about the x-axis.

Develops model about the y-axis.
Develops model about the z-axis.
Develops model about an axis defined with the cursor.
Develops model about an axis defined by normalised device coordinates.
Note 1: Cutting a surface

For complete cylindrical surfaces, it is necessary to generate a cut in the surface
in order to provide a developed view. The rules used for cutting a surface are as
follows :
If development is specified about the X, Y, or Z-axis, the surface will be broken
in the 180 degree position relative to a cylindrical co-ordinate system around the
chosen axis.
If development is specified using the cursor, then imagining that the user is viewing the end of a cylindrical model, positioning the cursor at the axis of this cylinder, the shell will be broken at the 12 o' clock position relative to the position of
the cursor hit on the screen.
If the axis specified does not result in a cutting position that intersects the model
surface then the model is developed without the surface being broken. Thus in
cases where the shell is not a complete cylinder and the cursor is used to develop
the model, care should be taken to make sure that no part of the model passes
through the 12 o' clock position, or the model will be broken into two seperate
regions at this point.
19/08/1999
Figure 2.124: Undeveloped view
Figure 2.125: Developed view
Examples:
1. VIEW DEVEL Z
The model is developed about the z axis : i.e. an axis at x=0, y=0. If necessary the
model will be split in order to represent it as a developed view.
See Also:
`VIEW OPTIONS' , section 2.19.9, page 545
19/08/1999
533
534
VIEW
EDGES
Displays element edges
2.19.3 VIEW EDGES [Edge Control]

This command allows the user to display element edges of interest, for example those with
a specified connectivity, those at a material boundary or those that represent a geometric
profile in the model.
The algorithm generally uses a data set in FEMVIEW in which each edge is contained just
once and this allows a representation of the model to be drawn quickly.
The default view of a FEMVIEW model when first accessed is `VIEW EDGES OUTLINE' .
Edge Control
CONNECT
Comments
`n'
ALL
OUTLINE
MATERIALS
Only those edges that are common to `n' finite elements

will be drawn. This enables the connectivity of the model
to be examined.
All the edges of the model are displayed with colour coding
to indicate the connectivity of each edge.
The following edges are drawn:
Edges with a connectivity of 1 (ie. edges common to a single
element), and edges that are common to free faces of elements
where these faces have normals that subtend an angle greater
than 35 degrees to each other. This is the default.
This will display the same edges as ÒUTLINE' and
in addition edges that are on a material boundary.
Note 1: Results presentation on ÈDGE' views

Certain techniques for the presentation of results (eg: contours) are unsuitable
with `VIEW EDGES' as they require element data rather that edge data. In these
cases an error message will be given.
Examples:
1. VIEW EDGES CONNECT 2
Edges with a connectivity of 2 are drawn.
See Also:
`VIEW OPTIONS EDGES ' , section 2.19.9.4, page 552
19/08/1999
Figure 2.126: Edge View
19/08/1999
535
536
VIEW
FACES
Provides a representation of the external faces of the model
2.19.4 VIEW FACES Side [View angle]

This command displays a surface representation of the current finite element model. The
command is only effective with models comprising 3-dimensional solid elements.
Side
View angle Comments
EXTERNAL
All free element faces are displayed.
TOP
BOTTOM
FRONT
BACK
LEFT
RIGHT
See below
See below
The key-words `TOP' , `BOTTOM' , `FRONT' , `BACK' , `LEFT' and `RIGHT' define view
points at infinity at the corresponding side of the display screen. (e.g. `RIGHT' means a
view point at infinity to the right of the screen). A surface normal is calculated to each
element free face that is oriented to the observer and the element face is displayed if the
angle between its normal and line of sight from the view point is less than or equal to the
specified `view angle' .
The `VIEW FACES' command also provides valuable connectivity information as it draws
faces oriented towards the observer which it identifies as ' free' i.e. not connected to other
faces. Thus a spurious face drawn within the body of the model may identify connectivity
problems.
Examples:
1. VIEW FACES LEFT 30.5
Draws free faces pointing to the the left, such that the normal to each surface will be
30.5 degrees or less to the line of sight.
2. VIEW FACES EXTERNAL
Draws all free faces.
See Also:
`VIEW EDGES' , section 2.19.3, page 534

`VIEW OPTIONS EDGES' , section 2.19.9.4, page 552
19/08/1999
537
VIEW
GEOMETRY
Displays geometric parts
2.19.5 VIEW GEOMETRY Part [Colour]

This command allows the user to display selected geometric parts that have been used for
the geometric construction of the model.
Part
Colour
Comments
Partname
[RED]
[ORANGE]
[YELLOW]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
[VIOLET]
[WHITE]
Displays the named geometric part in the

specified colour (see note 1). The default
colour is yellow.
ALL
(colours as above)
Displays all the geometric parts in the

specified colour. The default colour is
yellow.
CURRENT
(colours as above)
Displays all the currently displayed geometric

parts in the specified colour. The default
colour is yellow.
OFF
Turns off the display of geometry.
Return Level: `VIEW GEOMETRY' except for ÀLL' or ÒFF'

Note 1: Displaying named geometric parts
When displaying named parts the name may be prefixed with a `+' or `-' sign to
indicate if the part is to be added to, or subtracted from, the current display. If no
`+' or `-' sign is prefixed then the display screen is cleared and only the named
part is displayed and all labels will be removed. Note that it is not possible to
remove parts that were not separately added by name.
Examples:
1. VIEW GEOMETRY Wing
The geometric part named `Wing' is displayed.
2. VIEW GEOMETRY +Tail
The geometric part `Tail' is added to the existing display.
3. VIEW GEOMETRY CURRENT VIOLET
Redraws the currently displayed geometric parts in violet.
19/08/1999
538
VIEW
HIDDEN
Provides a hidden line (or surface) representation of the model
2.19.6 VIEW HIDDEN Mode

This command produces a view of the model with hidden lines (or hidden surfaces) removed. Several hidden view algorithms are provided, and their advantages are given in the
table below.
Hidden views may be requested of the current sub-set of finite elements and in FEMVIEW
of cut-away views and of multiple cross sections. Note that in FEMGEN, `VIEW HIDDEN' commands are only available if a mesh has been generated.
A hidden view may be turned off via the command `VIEW HIDDEN OFF' and in FEMVIEW
it will be automatically turned off if certain other `VIEW' commands are issued.
Mode
Comments
FILL
[BACKGRND]
[COLOUR]
[NORMAL]
SHADE
[Colour]
[FACEWISE]
[NODEWISE]
[SMOOTH] [`real' ]
[HIGHLIGHT] [`real' ]
This provides a hidden surface representation

of the model using the overdrawing
characteristics of a raster display. Polygons
at the rear of the model are drawn first, and
these are overwritten with polygons nearer
to the viewer.
The default is `BACKGRND' in which the
model is colour filled in the current background
colour. The option `COLOUR' will cause
each part of the model to be filled with the
colour currently assigned to it via the
`VIEW MESH part colour' or
`VIEW GEOMETRY part colour' command.
The option `NORMAL' will cause a surface to be
colour filled with red (white on monochrome
display, light grey on greyscale display)
if its surface normal is pointing away from the
viewer and colour filled with blue (black on
monochrome display, dark grey on greyscale
display) if its surface normal is pointing
towards the viewer. Currently the controls
`BACKGRND' , `COLOUR' and `NORMAL'
are available in FEMGEN only.
This provides a shaded view of the model
using parallel light for illumination. The
quality of shading can be controlled (see
below). The algorithm, and drawing technique
is the same as for `VIEW HIDDEN FILL' ,
except when
`VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN MESHFILL OFF'
is used in FEMGEN. (See note 5 for colours).
19/08/1999

LINE
OFF
This provides a hidden line view of the model

in which each edge is clipped to display only
those line segments which would be visible to
the user at the current model rotation.
Turns off hidden views (FEMGEN only).
Figure 2.127: Hidden line with shading
Note 1: Control of the rendition with `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE'

With the `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE FACEWISE' command each element face
will be displayed with a single shade dependent upon its average orientation to
the current light sources.
With the `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE NODEWISE' command each element face
will be displayed with a range of shades dependent on the orientation of that
face, in the region of each of its nodes, to the current light sources. Note that the
picture will be as `FACEWISE' for planar faces.
With the `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE SMOOTH [`real' ]' command each element
face will be displayed with a range of shades dependent on the orientation of the
model, averaged at each of its nodes, to the current light sources. An optional
angle (default 30 degrees) can be specified to stop the averaging over adjacent
faces.
The `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE HIGHLIGHT [`real' ]' command is as for `SMOOTH'
with the addition of reflection highlighting.
Note 2: Assignment of colour for hidden views
Colour can be assigned to the model in a variety of ways; for example, with
the `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' command or with the `VIEW GEOMETRY part
colour' command. Colours can also be selected with the `VIEW OPTIONS
COLOUR' command.
The FEMGEN command `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN MESHFILL OFF' will
cause the program to ignore any colour assignment to mesh parts that are currently being displayed. The mesh elements will be coloured in the background
colour as though the command `VIEW HIDDEN FILL BACKGROUND' had
been issued. As colour assignments to geometry parts will be retained, this
allows simultaneous display of `VIEW HIDDEN FILL BACKGROUND' and
`VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' on different parts of the model.
19/08/1999
539
540

Note 3: Producing pictures faster
With a graphics terminal that is capable of fast polygon fill, the `VIEW HIDDEN
FILL' command (rather than `VIEW HIDDEN LINE' ) is the fastest way of
achieving a hidden view. There is very little overhead in requesting a shaded
picture with `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' .
Hidden views take longer to produce if a shrink factor has been applied. Normally, internal surfaces and bodies can be ignored when producing a hidden
view, but if a shrink factor is applied, more of the model becomes visible and
so more data must be processed. Shrink applied to geometric parts will incur
a small penalty and shrink applied to mesh will incur a large time penalty. For
this reason, users with large models are advised to experiment with the content,
lighting and eye position of a picture with the shrink factor off, and then apply
the shrink factor only when everything else in the picture is ready.
Note 4: Choice of algorithm for hidden views
A choice of a quick or more rigorous algorithm for use with the above hidden
views can be selected via the `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN' command.
Note 5: Shaded views
The default condition is that a shaded view using in general six shades of blue
will be drawn. On graphics displays with sufficient colours the user may specify a `Colour' , either `WHITE' , `RED' , ÒRANGE' , `YELLOW' , `GREEN' ,
`BLUE' or `VIOLET' ; in which case a shaded view using in general fourteen
shades of the specified colour will be drawn.
Multiple light sources are available, see `VIEW OPTION LIGHT' .
Note 6: Hard copy on pen plotters
For hard copy on a pen plotter clipped lines will be required and `VIEW HIDDEN LINE' would have to be used. (Even if `VIEW HIDDEN FILL' or `VIEW
HIDDEN SHADE' is selected for screen display, a clipped line picture will
none-the-less be sent to the plot file).
Examples:
1. VIEW HIDDEN FILL NORMAL
Produces a hidden view of the model where each element face is colour filled in
red or blue depending on whether its normal is pointing towards or away from the
viewer.
2. VIEW HIDDEN SHADE RED
Requests a red, shaded, hidden view of the model.
See Also:
`VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR' , section 2.19.9.2, page 547

`VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN' , section 2.19.9.5, page 554
`VIEW OPTIONS LIGHT' , section 2.19.9.6, page 557
`VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK' , section 2.19.9.7, page 559
19/08/1999
541
VIEW
LINE
Displays a line through the mesh
2.19.7 VIEW LINE

This command enables the user to view a line through the mesh that has previously been
constructed. The line can either be the current (ÒLD' ) line, or a line saved to the database
by name.
Examples:
1. VIEW LINE OLD
The last line to be constructed, viewed, or graphed along is displayed.
2. VIEW LINE top edge
The line named `top edge' that was previously saved in the database is displayed.
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT LINE' , section 2.3.2, page 40

ÙTILITY TABULATE LINES' , section 2.18.9, page 516
19/08/1999
542
VIEW
MESH
Displays the complete mesh
2.19.8 VIEW MESH

This command allows the user to display the mesh of selected parts of the model.
FEMGEN Command.
VIEW MESH Part [Colour]
Part
Colour
Comments
Partname
[RED]
[ORANGE]
[YELLOW]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
[VIOLET]
[WHITE]
Displays the mesh of the named geometric

part in the specified colour (see note 3).
The default colour is green.
ALL
(colours as above)
Displays the mesh for all the geometric

parts in the specified colour (see note 3).
The default colour is green.
CURRENT
(colours as above)
Displays the mesh for the currently displayed

geometric parts in the specified colour
The default is green.
OFF
Turns off the display of the mesh.
Return Level: `VIEW MESH' except for ÀLL' or ÒFF'

Note 1: Displaying the mesh for named parts
When displaying the mesh for named parts of the model the name may be prefixed with a `+' or `-' sign to indicate if the part is to be added to, or subtracted
from, the current display. If no `+' or `-' sign is prefixed then the display screen
is cleared and only the mesh for the named part is displayed.
The named part may be any geometric part to which elements are attached.
Note 2: Superimposing mesh on geometry
If mesh is to be superimposed on the geometry the `+' sign must be used.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. VIEW MESH Wing
The mesh of the part named `Wing' is displayed.
2. VIEW MESH +Tail
The mesh for part `Tail' is added to the existing display.
3. VIEW MESH CURRENT BLUE
The currently displayed mesh is redrawn in blue.
FEMVIEW Command.
VIEW MESH [Part]
Part
Comments
Set name
ALL
Displays the mesh of the named set.

Displays the mesh for all the model.
Note 1: Displaying the mesh for named sets

When displaying the mesh for named sets of the model the name may be prefixed
with a `+' or `-' sign to indicate if the set is to be added to, or subtracted from,
the current display. If no `+' or `-' sign is prefixed then the display screen is
cleared and only the mesh for the named set is displayed. Where a named set is
already displayed then it is only allowable to add or subtract further named sets
if these are of the same type (ie. consistently node sets or consistently element
sets).
Note 2: Default Option
If no set is specified the default is the previously specified set.
Note 3: Viewing a node set
If a node set is specified then the FEMVIEW display routines (which are element based) work differently than when displaying an element set. When displaying a node set, only mesh lines that have both end nodes in the node set
will be displayed. Thus if the contents of a node set are such that not all the
nodes of an element are contained in the node set, then that element will only be
displayed in part. An extreme example is that viewing a node set containing a
single node will result in a blank screen, although the presence of the node and
its attached elements can be shown by the commands `LABEL MESH NODES'
and `LABEL MESH ELEMENTS' .
Certain `VIEW' commands are not supported with node sets. These are `VIEW
SECTION' , `VIEW FACES' , `VIEW DEVELOP' , `VIEW EDGES' , `VIEW
OPTIONS EDGES OUTLINE' and `VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK' .
Note 4: Order of drawing
Elements are drawn in the order they are stored in the database and if the model
is three dimensional and colour fill is used they may appear to overwrite each
other. If this is felt to be misleading then `VIEW HIDDEN' should be selected.
19/08/1999
543
544

Note 5: Shrinking the elements
If `VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK' is selected the elements will be reduced in size
about their centroids.
Note 6: Removing internal mesh lines
If `VIEW OPTIONS EDGES OUTLINE' is selected then mesh lines with a
connectivity of greater than 1 will not be drawn.
Examples:
1. VIEW MESH Top
The mesh of the set named `Top' is displayed.
2. VIEW MESH +Base
The mesh for set `Base' is added to the existing display.
See Also:
`VIEW OPTIONS' , section 2.19.9, page 545

Figure 2.128: Full mesh
19/08/1999
545
VIEW
OPTIONS
Controls for the ' VIEW' command
2.19.9 VIEW OPTIONS Mode Control

The command `VIEW OPTIONS' is the keyword for additional mesh visualisation control.
These visualisation controls allow the user to examine the model and to reduce picture
congestion when superimposing results.
`VIEW OPTIONS' has the following sub-commands:
2.19.9.1
2.19.9.2
2.19.9.3
2.19.9.4
2.19.9.5
BROKEN
COLOUR
DEFORM
EDGES
HIDDEN
2.19.9.6
2.19.9.7
LIGHT
SHRINK
19/08/1999
draw mesh lines with broken vectors.

assign colour.
apply nodal displacements to deform mesh.
draw mesh edges.
select hidden line algorithm and control whether mesh is
filled or not.
controls for shading.
shrink elements (exploded view).
546
VIEW OPTIONS
BROKEN
Display the mesh with broken lines
2.19.9.1 VIEW OPTIONS BROKEN [OFF]

In order to distinguish between the model and certain result presentation modes the user
may enter the command `VIEW OPTIONS BROKEN' .
This will cause a picture redraw and the mesh will be drawn in dashed rather than solid
lines. This selection may be cancelled with the command `VIEW OPTIONS BROKEN
OFF' .
This command effects the drawing of the mesh for all visualization modes.
See Also:
19/08/1999
547
VIEW OPTIONS
COLOUR
Colour code a model attribute
2.19.9.2 VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR Attribute [Control]

The `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR' commands allow the use of colour to add information
to the drawing of the model.
FEMGEN Command.
Attribute
Comments
MATERIAL
PHYSICAL
QUALITY
TYPES
OFF
Colour model based on materials.

Colour model based on physical properties.
Colour model based on any quality tests failed.
Colour model based on element types.
Assignment of colour by attribute is switched off.
Note 1: Assignment of Colours in FEMGEN

In FEMGEN, for hidden views only, colours can be assigned according to element type, material, physical property or the first quality test to fail. Currently
the colours used are red, orange, yellow, green, blue and violet. When colouring
on the basis of element quality tests, green is reserved for elements which pass
all tests. Otherwise colours are allocated in the above order; for example when
colouring according to element types, all elements of the first element type encountered will be coloured red, any elements of the second element type will
be coloured orange and so on. Where more than six instances of an attribute
exist (for example eight element types) the colours will be cycled. A legend is
always output with FEMGEN coloured hidden pictures indicating what each
colour represents.
Once colours have been allocated with the `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR' command, the resulting picture can be displayed with a `VIEW HIDDEN' command.
The `VIEW HIDDEN FILL COLOUR' command will create a hidden view with
each element colour filled according to the colour assignments. On devices capable of multi-coloured shading, these pictures can also be shaded with the `VIEW
HIDDEN SHADE' command. To cancel the colour assignments, the command
`VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR OFF' should be issued.
Examples:
1. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR TYPES
Assign colours to elements according to element type.
2. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR QUALITY
Assign colours to elements based on the first mesh quality test to fail.
19/08/1999
548
FEMVIEW Command.
Attribute
Control
Comments
ASSIGN
DEFAULT
Assign default colours to entities

(See note 1).
Assign specific colours to entities
(See note 2).
Colour nodes in specified colour
(See note 3).
Colour nodes in modulated
colour.
Colour nodes having a
specified (n) connectivity or
colour all nodes and modulate the
colour according to connectivity.
Colour [Range]
NODES
Colour
MODULATE
CONNECT `n' or ALL
ELEMENTS
OFF
Colour [FILL or EDGES]
MODULATE [FILL or EDGES]
OFF
GROUPS
[EDGES, FILL or OFF]
MATERIALS
TYPES
Colour elements in specified

colour (See note 3).
Colour elements in modulated colour.
Specify how groups are to be

coloured (See notes 1 and 2).
Specify materials are to be
Specify element types are to be
Note 1: Default Colour Ranges in FEMVIEW

The command `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR ASSIGN DEFAULT' works so that
entities 1, 7, 13, 19 .... are assigned the colour red; entities 2, 8, 14, 20 .... the
colour orange; 3, 9, 15, 21 .... the colour yellow etc. The command works with
Groups, Materials and Element Types.
Note 2: Specific Range and Colour Control in FEMVIEW
The colours available are `RED' , ÒRANGE' , `YELLOW' , `GREEN' , `BLUE'
and `VIOLET' . The command works with Groups, Materials and Element Types.
To associate a colour with a range of entities, for example groups 1 to 4 with the
colour red, use the command `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR ASSIGN RED 1 TO
4' . Groups 5 to 8 may then be associated, for example, with colour blue via the
additional command `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR ASSIGN BLUE 5 TO 8' . In
each case a colour is assigned to a range, and only one assignment is stored for
each colour. Thus an additional assignment for colour blue here, would overwrite the previous assignment.
Note that when mesh colouring is turned off with the commands `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR OFF' or `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR Attribute OFF' the
colour assignments are retained and will be re-applied with the next `VIEW
OPTIONS COLOUR Attribute' command unless otherwise reset.
Note 3: Colouring elements and nodes in FEMVIEW
19/08/1999

The colours available are `WHITE' , `RED' , ÒRANGE' , `YELLOW' , `GREEN' ,
`BLUE' and `VIOLET' .
Note 4: Advantage in shrinking the mesh
With the `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR Attribute EDGES' command, the edges
of an element will overwrite, or be overwritten by, the edges of an adjacent element; depending on the order in which they are drawn. By applying a small
shrink factor the differences between adjacent elements can be seen (see: `VIEW
OPTIONS SHRINK' .
Note 5: Problems with colour fill pictures
With `VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR Attribute FILL' applied to model visualisation modes (see `VIEW' other than `VIEW HIDDEN' , the faces of the model
will be drawn in the order in which the elements occur in the database, so with
some models, the faces at the back of the model may be drawn after faces nearer
to the observer which will produce a confusing picture.
Examples:
1. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR ASSIGN RED 1 TO 6
The colour red is assigned to entities in the range 1 to 6.
2. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR ASSIGN GREEN 10
The colour green is assigned to entity number 10.
3. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR MATERIALS FILL
If issued following the two previous commands the effect will be that elements with
material numbers 1 to 6 are colour filled red and elements with material number 10
are colour filled green.
4. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR ASSIGN GREEN 15 16 17
The colour green is assigned to entities 15, 16 and 17. This will replace the previous
assignment for the colour green given in the second example.
5. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR GROUPS EDGES
If issued following the previous commands the effect will be that elements in groups
1 to 6 have their edges coloured red and elements in groups 15, 16 and 17 have their
edges coloured green (see note 3 above).
6. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR NODES RED
A red symbol is displayed at each node point.
7. VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR ELEMENTS BLUE FILL
All elements are filled with the colour blue.
See Also:
`VIEW OPTIONS LIGHT' , section 2.19.9.6, page 557

`VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK' , section 2.19.9.7, page 559
19/08/1999
549
550
VIEW OPTIONS
DEFORM
Display the mesh in its deformed shape
2.19.9.3 VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM Component [Factor]

This command enables the user to present analysis results on a view of the deformed model.
The deformed model view is produced by adding a specified component of results, or component resultant, to the nodal point co-ordinates. A scale factor to be applied may be
specified, but if no scale factor is specified then a factor is calculated such that the model is
deformed so that the maximum nodal deformation will be 10mm (if viewed normal to the
screen).
Where the user has a results attribute named ' DISPLACE' with vector components `X' ,
`Y' , `Z' and ÀLL' then a shortened form of the command is available to apply these components.
Alternatively, it is possible to deform the mesh using the vector components of any attribute
of nodal materially independent results.
Component
Comments
X
Y
Z
ALL
Component `X' of attribute `DISPLACE' is chosen.

Component `Y' of attribute `DISPLACE' is chosen.
Component `Z' of attribute `DISPLACE' is chosen.
The resultant of the components of attribute
`DISPLACE' is chosen.
A component of any nodal attribute that is a vector
quantity may be chosen.
Return to undeformed view.
USING Àttribute Name'

OFF
Factor =
A new scale factor may be applied to the currently

chosen attribute. The displayed ' factor' should be
used as a guide to the value.
Note 1: Effect of loadcase selection

A loadcase containing the requested attribute and component must be current
when the `VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM' command is issued.
The selection of a new loadcase will cancel the `VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM'
command if the required attribute and component do not exist in the new loadcase.
Note 2: A factor of -1
A factor of -1 is used internally to FEMVIEWto reset the scale factor to the
default value. Where a scale factor of -1 is required the user should set the scale
factor to -1.01 or similar.
19/08/1999

Examples:
1. VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM X
The component `X' from the attribute `DISPLACE' is used to deformed the mesh.
2. VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM ALL 5.0
The resultant of the `X' , `Y' and `Z' components of attribute `DISPLACE' is used
to deform the mesh. A scale factor of 5.0 is applied.
3. VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM USING EIGEN YDIRECT 4.3
The component `YDIRECT' of attribute ÈIGEN' , where this is a vector quantity, is
used to deform the mesh. A scale factor of 4.3 is applied.
4. VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM 70.0
A scale factor of 70.0 is applied to the currently deformed mesh. If the mesh is not
currently deformed then no scaling will take place.
5. VIEW OPTIONS DEFORM OFF
The deformed mesh is turned off and the undeformed view is redrawn.
19/08/1999
551
552
VIEW OPTIONS
EDGES
Edge display control
2.19.9.4 VIEW OPTIONS EDGES [Control]

The command allows selection of which edges (mesh lines) of the elements are to be displayed. In FEMGEN, only hidden views will be effected.
Control
Comments
ALL
OUTLINE
All element edges are displayed.

In FEMVIEW , the following element edges are drawn:
Edges with a connectivity of 1 (ie. edges common to a single element),
and edges that are common to free faces of elements where these faces
have normals that subtend an angle greater than 35 degrees to each
other.
In FEMGEN , element edges that are on FEMGEN lines will be drawn.
This will display the same edges as ÒUTLINE' and in addition edges
that are on a material boundary. (FEMVIEW only).
Only those edges that are common to a single finite element will be
drawn. (FEMVIEW only).
No element edges are displayed.
MATERIALS
CONNECT-1
INHIBIT
Note 1: Difference from the `VIEW EDGES' Command

Whereas the command `VIEW EDGES' allows a quick representation of the
model to be drawn and, for example, edge connectivity to be checked; the
`VIEW OPTION EDGES' command allows the display of element edges to
be controlled in other `VIEW' commands.
Figure 2.129: CONNECT-1 edges applied to a hidden view
Examples:
1. VIEW OPTIONS EDGES ALL
All edges of displayed elements are drawn.
See Also:
19/08/1999

`VIEW DEVEL' , section 2.19.2, page 532
`VIEW EDGES' , section 2.19.3, page 534
`VIEW HIDDEN' , section 2.19.6, page 538
19/08/1999
553
554
VIEW OPTIONS
HIDDEN
Select hidden line algorithms
2.19.9.5 VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN Algorithm

This command enables the user to select algorithms for use in the calculation of hidden
views. The style of hidden view is selected via the `VIEW HIDDEN' command.
There is an extra option in FEMGEN to allow the user to selectively fill the mesh of hidden
views with background rather than colour. After the option `MESHFILL OFF' has been set,
if the picture is recalculated, all of the mesh to be displayed will be filled in the background
colour, while any geometry will still be filled with colour or shaded.
The command `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS' enables the user to control the display of beam elements in hidden views by ignoring them altogether or to control how they
are represented.
Algorithm Control
Comments
QUICK
A quick algorithm based on a single pass of the

data is used. This is the default and will usually
produce correct pictures (See note 1).
A more rigorous algorithm based on a multiple
pass on the data is used. The time taken is longer
than for the `QUICK' algorithm (See note 1).
An option to specify whether the mesh is filled
with colour or background when displaying a
view hidden picture (See note 2).
A simple representation of beams will be included
in hidden views, where ' real' is used to increase or
decrease the apparent width of the beam.
See notes 3 & 4.
FEMGEN only. A realistic representation of
beams based on beam type and dimensions will
be included in hidden views, where ' real' is used
to increase or decrease the apparent width
of the beam. See notes 3 & 5.
Beams will not be included in hidden views.
RIGOROUS
MESHFILL
[OFF]
BEAMS
QUICK [' real' ]
PHYSICAL [' real' ]
OFF
Note 1: Limitations on the `QUICK' and `RIGOROUS' algorithms

The `QUICK' algorithm will sometimes produce an incorrect picture where
there is a large difference in the relative size of elements in the model. In this
case the `RIGOROUS' algorithm should be used.
Neither algorithm will correctly handle non finite element data in which elements penetrate one another or in which element A overlaps element B, which
overlaps element C, which overlaps element A.
19/08/1999

Note 2: Filling the mesh
The `MESHFILL [OFF]' command is available only in FEMGEN. While `MESHFILL' is set to ÒFF' , any `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' or `VIEW HIDDEN FILL
COLOUR' pictures of meshes will look like `VIEW HIDDEN FILL' pictures.
This command has no effect on any geometry being displayed. It is useful for
composing pictures with part of the model (the mesh) drawn in VIEW HIDDEN
FILL and the rest (the geometry) in VIEW HIDDEN SHADE. This command
only affects the colour used to fill the inside of the element. The edges will still
be drawn in the assigned colours. The default is to have `MESHFILL' on, and
so fill the mesh in any colours currently allocated when the commands `VIEW
HIDDEN FILL COLOUR' or `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' are issued. The command `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN MESHFILL' will reset to the default setting
of `MESHFILL' on.
Note 3: Beams in hidden views
The command `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS' allows the user to tailor
the presentation of beams in hidden views. If beam elements are not required
at all, some execution time can be saved by the command `VIEW OPTIONS
HIDDEN BEAMS OFF' . Beams can be switched on again by the `QUICK' or
`PHYSICAL' options.
Note 4: Simple beam visualisation
When `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS QUICK' is used, a beam is generally thickened into a rectangle where length to width is 40:1 The exception is that
on 3D displays, for the command `VIEW HIDDEN FILL' or `VIEW HIDDEN
SHADE' , beams are converted to an elongated brick with 6 faces. (HE8). In
every picture, the fattening factor is set for the first beam processed and used for
every subsequent beam. The command `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS
QUICK ' real' ' allows the user to apply an extra fattening factor, and so make
the beams appear fatter or thinner.
Note 5: Realistic beam visualisation
When `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS PHYSICAL' is used, a realistic
representation of each beam element is drawn. Currently the standard section
types available in the FEMGEN neutral environment (box, general, pipe, tsection and u-section) are displayed. Each type of beam is dislayed using the dimensions defined with the `BOX' ,`PIPE' ,`GENERAL' ,`TSEC' or ÙSEC' options
in `PROPERTY PHYSCAL' and attached to the underlying geometry with `PROPERTY ATTACH' . Consequently a visual check of the beam section type, dimensions, orientation and offset is provided. For beam properties defined with
`PROPERTY PHYSICAL GENERAL' an equivalent cylinder is calculated and
used for the visualisation.
For beam section types not included above, the locations of beams can be checked
with `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS QUICK' .
When an offset is specified the distance from the beam axis to half the section
depth is used for the positioning of the beam section.
A general warning is given when beam elements without physical properties are
encountered.
`VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN SHRINK' and `VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN SHRINK
GEOMETRY' may be useful when viewing the beam sections.
Examples:
19/08/1999
555
556

1. VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN RIGOROUS
Select the rigorous algorithm for hidden views.
2. VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN MESHFILL OFF
Fill any mesh to be displayed with the background colour.
3. VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS OFF
Ignore any beam elements in the model when producing a hidden view.
4. VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS QUICK 2.0
Process the beam elements and make them appear twice as wide as the default when
producing a hidden view.
5. VIEW OPTIONS HIDDEN BEAMS PHYSICAL
When producing a hidden view show beam elements with a realistic cross section
and with the actual dimensions used in the beam property definition.
See Also:
`VIEW HIDDEN' , section 2.19.6, page 538
19/08/1999
557
VIEW OPTIONS
LIGHT
Controls light sources and type of shading
2.19.9.6 VIEW OPTIONS LIGHT Source [Intensity/OFF]

This command controls the type of shading required, which light sources are to be used
used and their intensity. It is used in conjunction with the `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE'
command. Eleven independent white light sources can be used singly or in combination to
illuminate the model. Each light source can be switched off, or on with specified or default
intensity. Intensity is specified in the range 0.0 to 1.0.
If no options are specified the light is switched ON with its current intensity.
Below is the definition of the possible light sources with their initial defaults given ( state,
intensity):
Source
Comments (Default)
AMBIENT
EYE
A non-directional ambient light (ON, 0.25)

A parallel light source perpendicular to the screen
(OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the top of the screen at
an angle of 45 degrees to the centre of the screen
(OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the top left of the screen at
degrees to the centre of the screen (OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the top right of the screen at
degrees to the centre of the screen (OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the bottom of the screen at
(OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the bottom left of the screen
at degrees to the centre of the screen (OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the bottom right of the screen
at degrees to the centre of the screen (OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the left side of the screen at
(OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light from the right side of the screen at
(OFF, 0.5)
A parallel light which can be positioned with the
cursor or device coordinates such that its direction
is parallel to the line from the point defined by
the cursor position projected on to a sphere with
its centre at the centre of the screen and diameter
equal to the width of the screen, and the centre of
the screen. (ON, 0.5)
TOP
TOP LEFT
TOP RIGHT
BOTTOM
BOTTOM LEFT
BOTTOM RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
POSITION
19/08/1999
[/CURSOR]
[' ndc' ]
558

Note 1: Obtaining current status information
The current state of the lighting of the model can be inquired with the command
ÙTILITY TABULATE STATUS LIGHT' .
Note 2: Colour selection
The default colour used for a shaded view of the model is blue but a different colour can be specified as part of the `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' command;
for example, `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE GREEN' . On some displays (typically
those which provide 256 colours) multi-coloured shaded pictures indicating different materials or element groups in the model can be produced by using the
`VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR MATERIAL' or `GROUP FILL' command in conjunction with the `VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' command.
Examples:
1. VIEW OPTIONS LIGHT LEFT
The light source at the left of the screen is switched on with its current intensity.
2. VIEW OPTIONS LIGHT BOTTOM LEFT .3
The light source at the bottom left of the screen is switched on with an intensity of
.3.
3. VIEW OPTIONS POSITION OFF
Turns the postitionable light off.
See Also:
ÙTILITY TABULATE STATUS LIGHT' , section 2.18.9, page 516

`VIEW HIDDEN SHADE' , section 2.19.6, page 538
`VIEW OPTIONS COLOUR' , section 2.19.9.2, page 547
19/08/1999
559
VIEW OPTIONS
SHRINK
Display a shrunken view of the element mesh or the geometry
2.19.9.7 VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK [Type] [Control]

This command applies a shrink factor to, and then displays all the elements in the current
subset of the finite element model. It can also be used to specify different shrink factors for
use with the geometry and the mesh in FEMGEN. If no shrink factor is specified a default
of 0.8 is applied. If a shrink factor is specified then this becomes the current default value.
A shrink factor specified as less than 0.1 will be taken as 0.1.
The picture produced is dependent on the current view mode (see `VIEW' command).
Thus if `VIEW EDGES' is current each edge is shrunk about its centre; if `VIEW FACES'
then each face will be shrunk, and for all other view modes the element is shrunk about its
centroid.
Note that the Type parameter applies to FEMGEN only.
Type
Comments
GEOMETRY
MESH
Applies the shrink to the geometry only

Applies the shrink to the mesh only.
If type is not given then the shrink is applied to the mesh.
Control
Comments
[FACTOR] Factor
OFF
Specifies a shrink factor

Return to unshrunken view
Figure 2.130: Hidden line with shrunken elements
19/08/1999
560

Note 1: Disadvantages in using a shrink factor with `VIEW HIDDEN'
If a shrink factor is used when viewing a model, normally more faces of the
model will become visible. The effect of this is to increase the time taken to
produce a hidden view.
If the shrink factor is applied in FEMGEN, parts which were displayed as mesh
will be redisplayed with the element lines shrunken about the element centroid,
as in FEMVIEW. Parts which were displayed as geometry will be redisplayed
with the geometry shrunken about the centroid of the geometric part. In general,
the program will take the least time to display an unshrunken picture, there will
be a small time penalty for displaying shrunken geometry and a larger time
penalty for displaying shrunken mesh.
Applying a large shrink factor to a very curved and narrow body can sometimes
produce a confusing picture because some element faces on the body are not
drawn. This occurs if the body is so curved and so narrow that when the shrink
factor is applied, the body centroid now lies outside the shrunken body. If this
does occur, the user is advised to use a smaller shrink factor or break the body
down into smaller and less curved bodies.
Examples:
1. VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK
The elements are shrunk with a factor of .8 .
2. VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK FACTOR 0.5
The elements are shrunk with a factor of .5 .
3. VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK OFF
The elements are restored to their normal size.
4. VIEW OPTIONS SHRINK GEOMETRY .6
The geometry is shrunk with a factor of .6 .
19/08/1999
561
VIEW
SHAPE
Displays a shape
2.19.10 VIEW SHAPE Shape name

This command enables the user to display shapes that have been defined with the ' CONSTRUCT SHAPE ' command.
Shape name Comments

OFF
ALL
Name
Displayed shapes will be removed from the display.

All defined shapes will be displayed.
Displays the named shape.
Return Level: `VIEW SHAPE' except for ÀLL' or ÒFF'

Note 1: Adding shapes to a display
If you wish to view the shapes in addition to anything that is already displayed
put + before the Shape name. To remove a shape from the display use a - before
the shape name.
Examples:
1. VIEW SHAPE CC1
Clears the screen and displays the shape CC1
2. VIEW SHAPE +ALL
Adds all defined shapes to the current display.
See Also:
19/08/1999
562
VIEW
SPOT
Highlights geometric parts
2.19.11 VIEW SPOT Part [Colour] [SHRINK Factor]

This command allows the user to highlight a geometric part in a temporary way by overdrawing the part in a specified colour. It is also possible to specify a shrink factor to be
applied to the part when it is drawn. Note that the highlighting is temporary and will be
lost the next time the picture is redrawn.
Part
Control
Comments
Partname
/PICK
[RED]
[ORANGE]
[YELLOW]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
[VIOLET]
[WHITE]
[SHRINK Factor]
Displays the named geometric part (a point, line,

surface or body) in the specified colour. The
default colour is white. The /PICK option allows
the part to be selected with the cursor. Note that
lines, surfaces and bodies will be overdrawn and
a point will have its point symbol redrawn.
Specifies a shrink factor to be applied to the part
when it is drawn. The default factor is 0.9.
Examples:
1. VIEW SPOT SUR5
Surface `SUR5' is drawn in the default colour white. A default shrink factor of 0.9
is applied to the surface when it is drawn.
2. VIEW SPOT SUR5 RED
Surface `SUR5' is drawn in colour red. A default shrink factor of 0.9 is applied to
the surface when it is drawn.
3. VIEW SPOT BOD6 SHRINK .7
Body `BOD6' is drawn in the default colour white. A shrink factor of 0.7 is applied
to the body when it is drawn.
4. VIEW SPOT LHR2 GREEN SHRINK .85
Part `LHR2' is drawn in colour green. A shrink factor of 0.85 is applied to the part
when it is drawn.
See Also:
`LABEL GEOMETRY' , section 2.11.1, page 256

ÙTILITY SETUP FEEDBACK' , section 2.18.8.6, page 503
19/08/1999
563
VIEW
XSECTION
Displays a cross-section through the model
2.19.12 VIEW XSECTION Mode [Definition of Plane]

This command enables the user to view a plane cross-section through 3-dimensional elements. The cross-section plane may either be defined as part of the command or one or
more previously defined plane(s) may be referenced.
Mode
Definition of Plane
/CURSOR
The cursor is used twice to define a section plane that lies normal to the
plane of the screen.
The user enters the numbers of three nodes that lie in the section plane.
The most recently viewed cross-section is re-displayed.
The named shape(s), which must be planes, are selected and the
corresponding cross-section(s) are viewed simultaneously. Also, a global
plane may be specified at different offset positions and the
corresponding cross-sections viewed simultaneously. (See note 1).
NODES
OLD
shape name(s)
Note 1: Viewing multiple cross-sections using previously defined shapes

Multiple cross-sections may be viewed simultaneously by specifying up to 20
shape names in the command. These shapes, which must be planes, must have
been previously defined with the `CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE' command.
Also, multiple cross-sections may be viewed by referencing a shape that is a
plane defined in one of the model global planes and specifying the number of
times the plane is to be repeated and the distance between repeats. Hidden views
of multiple cross-sections can be obtained via the `VIEW HIDDEN' command,
however, note that the software algorithms provided for hidden views do not
work reliably with polygons that intersect each other which is a condition that
could occur with multiple cross-sections.
Note 2: Limitations on use
It is not advisable to attempt to define a cross section in the plane of a plane
external surface of a model by specifying three nodes on that surface with the
`VIEW XSECTION NODES' command. This is because the intersection algorithm slightly perturbs the plane of intersection towards the centroid of the current subset of elements in order to prevent the plane passing èxactly' through
the specified nodes. If a cross section is defined on an external surface this perturbation may cause the plane of intersection to move away from (outside of)
the surface of the model. Either the `VIEW XSECTION /CURSOR' command
should be used to cut a section just inside the surface or the surface should be
isolated by the `VIEW FACES' command.
19/08/1999
564

Examples:
1. VIEW XSECTION /CURSOR
Displays the cross section defined by the plane containing the points identified by the
cursor.
2. VIEW XSECTION NODES 23 46 85
Displays the cross section defined by the plane containing nodes 23, 46 and 85.
3. VIEW XSECTION OLD
The most recently viewed cross-section is re-displayed.
4. VIEW XSECTION Sh1 Slice Slice1 Flange
The plane shapes `Sh1' , `Slice' , `Slice1' and `Flange' are used to specify four crosssections to be viewed simultaneously.
5. VIEW XSECTION Refsec REPEAT 4 OFFSET 5.0
The plane shape `Refsec' , which must be normal to one of the global axes, is used to
specify five cross-sections to be viewed simultaneously. The positions of the sections
will be the original position of `Refsec' and at offsets 5.0, 10.0. 15.0 and 20.0 along
the global axes from `Refsec' .
See Also:
`CONSTRUCT SHAPE PLANE' , section 2.3.9, page 96

ÈYE NORMAL' , section 2.5.5, page 156
19/08/1999
Figure 2.131: Cross section
19/08/1999
565
566
19/08/1999
Index
!, 14
+, 537, 542, 543, 561
, , 14, 218
-, 537, 542, 543, 561
/, 13
: , 13
; , 13
=, 13
?, 13
@, 13
487
# , 14
FEMGEN model
deleting, 481
making a copy, 478
writing to file, 528
FEMGEN neutral files (FG), 525
FEMVIEW model
deleting, 481
FEMVIEW neutral files (FG), 525
Absolute rotations, 158
Absolute tolerance (FG), 115
Activating coordinate systems (FG), 34
Adding names, see Labelling
Adding results together (FV), 429
Adding to a set (FG), 79
Ambient lighting, 557
Analysis loading environments, 345
Analysis program loading environment (FG),
362
Analytical shapes (FG), 96
line definition from, 204
surface definition from, 230
Angle of rotation, 158
Angle of sight to the model, 152
Angles (FG), 485
Angular accelerations (FG), 383
Animation, 136, 496
colour, 136, 496
cyclic, 136, 496
duration, 136, 496
from batch files, 496
linear, 136, 496
monchrome, 496
567
monochrome, 136
quitting, 136, 496
sequence of, 136, 496
setup status, 516
speed, 136, 496
submenu, 136, 496
Animation (FV)
automatic setup, 136
macro commands, 136
of complex values, 136
of modeshapes, 136
of results, 136
Anisotropic materials (FG), 392, 393
Annotating, see Label
Annotation of contour lines (FV), 329
Anticlockwise rotations, 158
Appending to a set (FG), 79
Appending to a set (FV), 81
Applying constraints (FG), 348
Applying displacements to the model (FV),
341
Arbitrary cross sections (FV), 134, 563
Arbitrary cut-away sections (FV), 530
Arbitrary plane through the model (FV),
134, 530, 563
Archive files, 528
reading, 487
Archive files (FG), 525, 528
Arcs (FG), 198
Assemblies (FG)
constraining, 352
Assigning (FG), see Attaching
Attaching (FG)
beam orientations, 346
beam sections, 346
load masks, 346
local coordinate systems, 346
physical properties, 346
space curves, 346
thickness, 346
time curves, 346
Attributes (FV)
deleting, 480
Automatic model framing, 154
Averaging results (FV), 424
568
INDEX
Difference, 426
Percentage difference, 440
Axes
positioning, 140
Axes (FG), see alsoCoordinates
labelling, 256, 258
Axes (FV)
labelling, 260
Backing up the database (FG), 528
Bandwidth (FG)
renumbering nodes, 298
Batch files (FV)
results calculations from, 432
Batch input, 487
Beam offsets (FG), 412
Beam orientation (FG), 413
Beams (FG)
deleting sections, 479
listing sections, 516
orientations
assigning, 346
sections
assigning, 346
Beams (FV)
diagrams, 314
graphs, 314
imposed on the mesh, 312
integration over, 439
Bending moment diagrams, 312, 314
Biasing the distribution of elements (FG),
275
Binary operators for calculations (FV),
432
Body (FG), see also Parts
applying a shrink factor, 503
creating from a sweep, 246
definition, 170180
deleting, 479
five surface definition, 177
four surface definition, 176
general, 181
in-line editing, 170
listing, 516
manual definition of elements, 172
multi surface definition, 181, 183
number of elements on, 275
renaming, 486
six surface definition, 179
two surface definition, 174
Boolean sets operations, 86, 87
Boundary conditions (FG)
definition of, 348
Broken line mesh (FV), 546
Building a view (FG), 537

CAD input (FG)
merging parts, 56
reading, 487
Calculating new loadcases (FV), 422453
Calculations on stored results (FV), 422
453, 470
Calculations (FV)
user defined, 432
Cancelling, see also deleting
command echo, 502
hidden views, 538
menu, 505
mesh line display, 552
shrinking, 559
Cancelling the mesh (FG), 274
Cancelling (FG)
colour, 547
effect of a command, 514, 522
graphical feedback, 503
the mesh display, 542
Cancelling (FV)
broken line view, 546
colour, 548
current range of results, 464
results display, 463
Cartesian coordinates (FG), 35
Centralising the model, 154
Centralising the workbox (FG), 154
Centrifugal accelerations (FG), 382
Changing
the mesh density (FG), 275
the screen layout, 140
Changing (FG)
the contents of sets, 90
Changing (FV)
the contents of sets, 92
Character size
plotter, 506
Circles (FG), 200, 202
Clearing labels (FG), 256
Clearing the results display (FV), 463
Clockwise rotations, 158
Closing sets, 85
Colour
animation, 136, 496
changing the background, 498
inverting, 498
of hidden views, 538
plotter format, 506
redefining, 498
setting in startup file, 498
setup status, 516
19/08/1999
INDEX
Colour (FG)
applying to parts, 537
assigning to the model, 547
cancelling, 547
element edges only, 547
filling with, 547
highlighting parts, 562
labels, 256, 258, 271
of element types, 547
of feedback, 503
of materials, 547
of mesh, 542
of mesh quality, 547
of physical, 547
Colour (FV)
assigning to the model, 548
cancelling, 548
contours, 309
element edges only, 548
filling with, 548
labels, 260
modulation of maxmin display, 336
modulation of numerical values, 335
modulation of vectors, 338
of element types, 548
of groups, 548
of materials, 548
of nodes, 548
Combining geometric parts (FG), 56
Combining lines (FG), 194
Combining meshes (FG), 280, 282
Combining models, 25
Combining results (FV), 422453
Command
controlling echo, 502
log of, 484
macros, 512
setting number of lines for echo, 501
synonyms, 512
undoing effect off, 514, 522
Complementary sets, 86
Completion of sets (FG), 85, 88
Complex results (FV), 454, 456, 458, 461
Cone (FG)
definition, 100
variable radius, 100
Confirmation prompt
switching it off, 500
Connectivity of elements (FV), 534, 536,
552
Consistent added mass (FG), 386
Constant for element results (FV), see Invariant results
Constraining the model (FG), 348
19/08/1999
569
Constraint equations (FG), 353, 357
Constraints (FG)
changing the default name, 57
coupled, 353
defining, 348
deleting, 479
elastic, 351
external, 352
fixed, 350, 354, 357, 361
general, 353
labelling, 256, 258
listing, 516
positioning points for, 217
prescribed, 360
renaming, 486
Construction shapes (FG), 96
Continuation lines, 13
Contoured mesh lines (FV), 329
Contours (FV)
annotation of, 329
cancelling, 463
edge, 329
filled, 329
key, 140
keylines, 329
labelling of, 329
legend, 140
levels, 309
line, 329
number of, 309
on edge views, 309
on hidden line views, 309
on outline views, 309
setting the levels, 309
shell, 329
steps, 309
values of, 309
Control of mesh profiles (FG), 299
Controlling the mesh density (FG), 275
Controlling the view, 545
Controlling the view of the model, 151
Converting a previous database, 523
Coordinate systems (FG)
assigning, 346
Cartesian, 35
Cylindrical, 30
defining, 28
deleting, 479
detaching, 346
effect on node numbering, 298
Global, 33
labelling, 258
listing, 516
570
INDEX
Local, 28, 34
Polar, 30, 37
Rectangular, 35
renaming, 486
Spherical Polar, 37
Coordinate systems (FV)
applying to results, 470
Coordinates (FG)
converting digitized, 114
effect of coord system on, 28
entering, 218
nodal
listing, 516
parametric definition, 218
point
listing, 516
variable, 218
workbox, 117
Copying between viewports, 147
Copying parts (FG), 184
Copying (FG)
tolerance for, 115
Coupled Degrees of Freedom (FG), 353
Creating a mesh (FG), 279
Creating an analysis input deck (FG), 525
Cross section (FV)
defining, 106, 134, 563
filtering results with, 464
tranformation of stresses onto, 470
viewing, 156
Cross-sectional properties for beam members (FG), 405
Curl (FV), 432
Current loadcase (FV), 459
Current range of results (FV), 464
Cursor
positioning lights with, 557
setting up colours with, 498
shifting the model with, 160
use of, 14
zooming in/out with, 163
Cursor (FG)
appending to sets, 79
entering coordinates with, 218
mapping points, 113
mid-side point definition with, 235,
238, 240, 242, 244
picking a node for point definition,
217
picking items to delete, 479
picking items to list, 516
picking labels with, 258
picking points, 220
point definition, 113
removing parts from sets, 90

splitting lines with, 225
Cursor (FV)
defining a cross section with, 134,
563
defining a cut-away with, 530
defining a line with, 40
developing a view with, 532
numerical display using, 326
picking labels with, 260
removing from sets, 92
Curves (FG), 198, 200, 202, 211
Cut-away (FV)
defining, 106, 530
Cylinder (FG)
definition, 104
variable radius, 104
Cylindrical coordinates (FG), 30
Dashed line mesh (FV), 546
Database
converting previous version, 523
updating previous version, 523
Date
model creation and modification, 253
Default (FG)
workbox size, 117
Defining (FG)
boundary conditions, 348
Deformed view of the mesh (FV), 550
Degrees of freedom (FG), see constraints
Deleting
FEMGEN model, 481
FEMVIEW model, 481
models, 481
switching off the confirmation prompt,
500
synonyms, 512
Deleting (FG), 479
effect of a command, 514, 522
with the cursor, 479
Deleting (FV)
attributes, 480
drawings, 480
lines, 480
loadcases, 480
plotfiles, 480
results, 480
sets, 480
Developed view of a shell (FV), 532
Diagonal node renumbering (FG), 298
Diagram (FV)
beam on the mesh, 312
19/08/1999
INDEX
Dialogue area
setting up, 501
Dialogue (FG)
controlling, 503
Difference (FV), 426
Differentiation of graphs, 431
Digitizer (FG)
coordinate space, 114
Direction of sight to the model, 153
Displacements (FV)
applying to the mesh, 550
applying to the model, 341
Displaying, see Viewing
Displaying names, see Labelling, see Labelling
Displaying the mesh (FG), 542
Displaying the model, see View
Displaying the results (FV), 307
Distances (FG), 485
Distortion of element (FG), 509
Distributed loads in beam local axes (FG),
370
Distributed loads in the global axes (FG),
373
Divergence (FV), 432
Dividing lines (FG), 225
Divisions (FG)
assigning, 275
defining on line, 195212
labelling, 256
Dotted line mesh (FV), 546
Dotted outline of model (FV), 155
Drawing
splitting into 2, 3 or 4 views, 147
Drawings (FG)
listing contents of, 516
Drawings (FV)
contents status, 519, 521
deleting, 480
listing saved, 519
Duplicate parts (FG)
merging, 56
Duplicate points (FG)
tolerance for, 115
DXF format files
reading, 487
Echo
setup status, 516
Edge contours (FV), 329
Edge view of a model (FV), 534, 552
Editing, see also deleting
Editing the screen contents, 140
Elastic supports (FG), 351
19/08/1999
571
Element centroid results (FV), see Invariant results
Element library (FG)
assigning, 301
Element nodal results (FV), 454
Element numbering (FG)
control of, 291
Element quality (FG), see Mesh Quality
Element thickness (FG), 415
Element types (FG)
colouring by, 547
definition of, 301
labelling, 256, 258
Element types (FV)
colouring by, 548
Element variants (FG)
assigning, 301
listing, 516
Elements
shrinking, 559
Elements (FG)
assigning to a body, 172
assigning to a line, 203
assigning to a surface, 229
assigning types and variants, 301
biasing the distribution, 275
colour of edges, 547
defining from nodes, 278
defining type on bodies, 170180
deleting, 479
labelling, 258
listing, 516
number on a body, 275
number on a line, 275
number on a surface, 275
removing from a part, 301
size of, 275
Elements (FV)
adding to sets, 81
appending types to sets, 81
colour of edges, 548
defining a line of, 40
graph across loadcases, 315
labelling, 260
listing, 519
plotting along a line, 317
removing types from sets, 92
specifying values to use, 464
viewing faces of, 536
viewing the connectivity, 534
Ellipse (FG), 198
Enviroment
index, 253
572
INDEX
Equations for postprocessing calculations
(FV), 432
Exiting the program, 475
External degrees of freedom (FG), 352
Extrapolate results (FV), 438
Eye rotate
changing the sense of, 511
Face view (FV), 536
Factor
perspective, 157
Factor of safety (FV), 447
Factoring results (FV), 422453
Feedback (FG)
controlling, 503
setup status, 516
File formats
FEMGEN neutral
reading, 487
FEMVIEW neutral
reading, 487
archive
reading, 487
batch
reading, 487
drawings, 506
Files
outputting to, 525, 528
synonym, 512
Filled contours (FV), 309, 329
Filled view of the model, 538
Filled view of the model (FG)
colour, 547
Filled view of the model (FV)
colour, 548
Fillets (FG)
defining, 187
Filtering results (FV), 464
Finishing execution, 475
Fixed constraints (FG), 350, 354, 357,
361
Flattening shell models (FV), 532
Flexural section properties (FG), 409
Flipping surfaces (FG), 190
Four point surface definition (FG), 242,
244
Framing the model, 154
Free edge display (FV), 534, 552
Free line definition (FV), 40
Gaussian results (FV), 456
General beam properties (FG), 404
General physical properties (FG), 403
Generalised constraints (FG), 353
Generating the mesh (FG), 279

Geometric node renumbering (FG), 298
Geometry
shrinking, 559
Geometry (FG)
definition, 169
fillets, 187
labelling, 256
viewing, 537
Gradients (FV), 432
Graph
Space curves, 482
Time curves, 482
Graphical feedback (FG)
controlling, 503
Graphics devices (FG)
coordinate space, 114
Graphs (FV), 313
across loadcases, 315, 319
along a line through the model, 317
assisted, 321
axes, limits of, 333
axes, linear or logarithmic, 333
axes, multiple or single, 333
axes, swap, 333
beams, 314
defining a line for, 40
defining the loadcase range for, 459
differentiation, 431
feedback of values, 333
graph lines, 333
grid lines, 333
imposed on the mesh, 312
material labels, 333
multiple results attributes, 468
options, 333
point labels, 333
point symbols, 333
prompted, 321
results against results, 324
results from external files, 468
setup status, 519
size and position, 333
surface labels, 333
values considered, 464
viewing lines for, 541
Gravity loads and linear accelerations (FG),
381
Grouping, see Sets
Groups (FV)
adding to sets, 81
colouring by, 548
19/08/1999
INDEX
Hardcopy, see also Plotter
making, 145
Hidden view, 538
coloured, 538
filled, 538
shaded, 538
showing surface normals, 538
Hidden view of cut-aways, 538
Hidden view of multiple cross sections,
538
Hidden view (FV)
choice of algorithm, 554
History files, 484
HP-Laserjet plots, 506
HP-Paintjet plots, 506
HPGL plots, 506
IGES format files
reading, 487
Imaginary component of complex results
(FV), 454, 456, 458, 461
Initial conditions (FG), 363
deleting, 479
labelling, 256
listing, 516
Input files for analysis (FG), 525
Input from batch files, 487
Integration of results (FV), 439
Integration points, see Gaussian results
Interleaf
format plots, 506
Intersecting sets, 87
Intersection Curve (FG)
definition, 103
Intersection lines (FG), 204
Intersection point (FG), 220
Intersection surfaces (FG), 230
Invariant results (FV), 458
Inverting colours, 498
Isolines, see contours
Isotropic materials (FG), 392394
Joining lines (FG), 194
Joining meshes (FG), 280, 282
Key
positioning, 140
Key (FV), see also Legend
Labelling
control of symbol size, 263
feedback control, 503
Labelling (FG)
axes, 256, 258
19/08/1999
573
constraints, 256, 258, 265
coordinate systems, 258
divisions, 256
element types, 256, 258
elements, 258
externals, 266
in colour, 258
Initial conditions, 258
loads, 256, 258, 267, 268
materials, 256, 258
merged parts, 256, 258
mesh, 258
mesh quality, 258
moving loads, 268
MPC's, 270
nodes, 258
off, 256
parts, 256
physical properties, 256, 258
removing, 258
shapes, 271
surface normals, 256
with colour, 256, 271
Labelling (FV)
axes, 260
constraints, 260
element types, 260
elements, 260
externals, 260, 266
groups, 260
in colour, 260
local axes systems, 264
materials, 260
mesh, 260
nodes, 260
removing, 260
Laminate materials (FG), 396
Laminate physical properties (FG), 419
Left rotations, 158
Legend (FV)
positioning, 140
Lengths (FG), 485
Light control (FV)
status, 519, 521
Lighting
control of, 557
Line and point surface definition (FG),
237
Line combinations (FG)
definition of surface from, 240
point definition of surface, 238, 240,
242, 244
splitting lines to be, 225
Line contours (FV), 309, 329
574
INDEX
Line (FG), see also Parts
arc, 198
at shape intersection, 204, 230
circles, 200
combination, 194
defining, 195212
defining a surface from, 237, 240
deleting, 479
from analytical shapes, 204, 230
listing, 516
manual definition from nodes, 207
number of divisions on, 275
NURB, 202
of nodes, 207
point on, 222
renaming, 486
spline, 211
straight, 212
undoing a split line, 249
Line (FV)
arbitrary, 40, 541
definition of, 40
free, 40, 541
graphs along, 317
of elements, 40, 541
of nodes, 40, 541
transform of stresses onto, 470
viewing, 541
Lines (FV)
deleting, 480
listing, 519
Link freedoms (FG), 352
Listing, see Tabulating
synonyms, 512
Live Drawings (FV)
recovering, 143
saving, 145
Load mask (FG)
renaming, 486
Load Masks (FG), 44
Body load, 45
defining, 44
Global Coordinate System, 47
Line load, 50
Surface load, 52
Load masks (FG)
assigning, 346
listing, 516
Loadcases (FG)
defining, 364
numbering, 364
Loadcases (FV), see also Results
combining with calculations, 422
453
deleting, 480
graphing across, 315, 319
listing, 519
making current, 459
scan, 449
selecting a range, 459
selecting the step from, 459
Loading the model (FG), 364
Loads (FG)
angular accelerations, 383
applying, 364
centrifugal accelerations, 382
consistent added mass, 386
deleting, 479
distributed in beam local axes, 370
distributed in the global axes, 373
gravity and linear accelerations, 381
interpretation of, 362, see Interface
Manual
labelling, 256, 258
listing, 516
lumped added mass, 384
lumped full mass, 385
neutral environment, 362
nodal, 366
positioning points for, 217
prescribed displacements, 367
pressure, 368
projected distributed in the global axes,
375
renaming, 486
setting the analysis program, 362
temperature gradients at nodes, 378
temperature gradients on elements,
380
temperatures at nodes, 377
temperatures on elements, 379
Local coordinate systems (FG), 28
Local coordinate systems (FV)
application to results, 470
Locating the model, 155
Locked mesh (FG), 279
Locking the mesh (FG), 292
Logging of input, 484
Lumped added mass (FG), 384
Lumped full mass (FG), 385
Macros, 512
Magnifying the model, 163
19/08/1999
INDEX
Magnitude of complex results (FV), 454,
456, 458, 461
Mapping (FG)
midside nodes, 293
points, 113
shapes for, 96
surfaces, 233
Material boundary display (FV), 534, 552
Material properties from external library
(FG), 397
Materials (FG)
aiso, 392
anisotropic, 393
assigning, 346
colouring by, 547
defining, 390
deleting, 479
detaching, 346
isotropic, 392394
labelling, 256, 258
laminate, 396
library, 397
listing, 516
naming, 390
orthotropic, 395
renaming, 486
temperature dependent isotropic, 394
Materials (FV)
colouring by, 548
Maximum results (FV), 449, 451
Maximum value (FV), 340
Maxmin display (FV), 340
colour control, 336
values considered, 464
Measuring (FG)
angles, 485
distances, 485
lengths, 485
Menu
changing width, 505
removing, 505
setup status, 516
Merged parts (FG), 56
labelling, 256, 258
tolerance, 115
Merges (FG)
cancelling, 479, 516
renaming, 486
Merging meshes (FG), 280, 282
Merging tolerance (FG)
19/08/1999
575
effect of, 282
Mesh Quality (FG), 516
aspect ratio, 509
colouring by, 547
labelling, 258
listing, 516
maximum angle, 509
mid node bulge, 509
mid node offset, 509
minimum angle, 509
setting up, 509
total, 509
warpage, 509
Mesh status (FG)
listing, 516
Mesh status (FV)
listing, 519
Mesh (FG)
adding to the display, 542
cancelling, 274, 279
changing the density, 275
controlling the density, 275
displaying, 542
generating a single part, 279
labelling, 258
locked, 279
Projection onto a shape, 299
removing from the display, 542
renumbering, 298
Mesh (FV)
broken line view, 546
deforming, 550
with nodal results, 550
displaying, 543
effect of options on, 543
labelling, 260
Meshing (FG)
algorithm, 286
Delaunay, 286
free , 286
mappped, 286
Paving, 286
Midside node (FG)
positioning, 293
testing, 509
Minimum results (FV), 449, 451
Minimum value (FV), 340
Mirror transform (FG), 127
Model
assembling, 25
creation dates, 253
deleting, 481
generating, 165
576
INDEX
geometry definition, 169
index, 253
inputting, 487
orientation, 152, 153, 158
rotating, 158, 511
shifting, 160
size, 117
status, 253
walk through, 161
zooming in, 163
Model generation environment, 165
Model saving, 473
Model transformations (FV)
listing, 519
Monitor
positioning, 140
Mouse
button definition, 14
Moving parts (FG), 213
Moving the model, 160
Multi viewport mode, 147
Multilayer elements (FV)
selecting the results, 464
Multiple copies (FG), 184
Multiple sided surface definition (FG), 235
Names
changing names, 486
displaying, see Labelling, see Labelling
of parameters, 59
Names (FG)
body, 170180
for models, 165
line combinations, 194
lines, 195212
loads, 364
points, 216224
renaming parts, 486
Setting the defaults, 57
split lines, 225
surfaces, 227245
Neutral files
reading, 487
Nodal averaging (FV), 424
Difference, 426
Percentage difference, 440
Nodal coordinate system (FG)
deleting, 479
listing, 516
Nodal coordinates (FV)
Nodal loads (FG), 366
Nodal (FV)
averaged results, 461

element results, 454
Node numbering (FG)
control of, 298
Node (FG)
control of numbering, 295, 298
Nodes (FG)
changing the position of, 284
defining the coordinates of, 284
forming a line from, 207
labelling, 258
listing, 516
manual definition of, 284
merging, 280, 282
positioning points at, 217
projection on to a shape, 299
renumbering, 298
Nodes (FV)
colour of, 548
defining a cross section with, 134,
563
defining a line of, 40
graph across loadcases, 319
labelling, 260
listing, 519
plotting along a line, 317
Non-linear analysis results (FV)
selecting steps from, 459
Normal view of cross-section (FV), 156
Numbering (FG)
of elements, 291
of nodes, 295
Numerical values (FV)
colour control, 335
displaying on the mesh, 326
number of significant figures, 337
NURB Curve (FG)
definition, 102
NURB Surface (FG)
definition, 111
Offsetting results values (FV), 470
Online point (FG), 222
Opening sets, 88
Operators for results calculations (FV),
432
Options (FG)
meshing, 285
Orientation of the model, 152, 153
Orthotropic materials (FG), 395
Outline view, 552
Outline view (FV), 534
Output, see also Measuring, see also Writing
19/08/1999
INDEX
of tables, 516
printer page length, 508
Overlaying plotfiles(FV), 143
Parameters (FG)
cone radius, 100
cylinder radius, 104
defining, 59
point coordinates, 218
position of point on line, 222
sphere radius, 109
parameters (FG)
listing, 516
Parts (FG)
adding to a set, 79
copying, 184
defining element type on, 301
deleting, 479
displaying, 537
flipping, 190
framing, 154
generating a mesh on, 279
highlighting, 562
labelling, 256
listing, 516
merging the mesh on, 280, 282
moving, 213
removing from the display, 537
renaming, 486
viewing, 154
PATRAN format files
reading, 487
Peaks (FV)
labelling, 340
results considered, 464
Percentage difference (FV), 440
Perspective
applying, 157
Phase angle of complex results (FV), 454,
456, 458, 461
Physical properties (FG), 399
assigning, 346
beam, 404
beam offsets, 412
beam orientation, 413
Cross-sectional for beam members,
405
deleting, 479
detaching, 346
element thickness, 415
19/08/1999
577
element thickness using space curve,
417
flexural section, 409
general, 403
labelling, 256, 258
Laminates, 419
listing, 516
renaming, 486
sections from external library, 410
variable element thickness, 416
Physical (FG)
colouring by, 547
Picking (FG)
parts for sets, 79
Plane definition, 97, 106
Plotfile, 506
recalling, 143
saving, 145
Plotfile (FV)
deleting, 480
Plots (FV), see Graphs
Plotter
character size, 506
colour, 506
format, 506
polygon fill, 506
scaling output, 506
setting up from batch file, 506
setup status, 516
Pointers adding, 140
Points
switching markers on or off, 515
Points (FG), see also Parts
coordinates, 218
defining, 216224
defining a surface from, 237, 238,
242, 244
deleting, 479
intersection, 220
mapping cursor definitions, 113
on a line, 222
on split lines, 225
parametric positioning, 218, 222, 224
positioned at a node, 217
renaming, 486
set for spline line, 211
transformed, 224
Polar coordinates (FG), 30, 37
Polygon fill plotters, 506
Polygon (FG)
of parts, 79
Polygon (FV)
of elements, 81, 92
578
INDEX
Position (FG)
moving loads, 268
Postprocessing calculations (FV), 422453,
470
Postscript
plots, 506
Powers in calculations (FV), 432
Pre-check (FG)
general body, 297
Prescribed displacements (FG), 360, 367
Prescribed Freedoms (FG), 360
Present (FV)
setup status, 519
Presentation modes (FV)
affect of view on, 307
Presentation of results (FV)
cancelling, 463
Pressure calculations (FV), 432, 442
Pressure loads (FG), 368
Principal shear (FV), 432, 445
Principal strain (FV), 443
Principal stress (FV), 432, 444
Principal yield (FV), 432, 446
Printer, see also Plotter
pagelength, 508
setup status, 516
Printing
copies of the screen, 145
Printing tables, 516
Profile edge display (FV), 534, 552
Projected distributed loads in the global
axes (FG), 375
Prompted graphs (FV), 321
Properties of materials (FG), 390
Quality (FG), see Mesh Quality
Quick draw view (FV), 534
Quitting execution, 475
Reading
FEMGEN models, 487
FEMVIEW models, 487
archive files, 487
batch files, 487
CAD models, 487
Real component of complex results (FV),
454, 456, 458, 461
Recovering Drawings, 143
Rectangular coordinates (FG), 35
Redefining attachments (FG), 346
Redefining colours, 498
Redefining surface normals (FG), 190
Redrawing, 142
Reference systems, see Coordinate systems

Refreshing the screen, 142
Regions (FG)
defining, 227
Related points (FG), 224
Relative tolerance (FG), 115
Relocating parts (FG), 213
Removing, see deleting
Removing from a set (FV), 92
Removing labels (FG), 258
Removing labels (FV), 260
Removing Parts from sets (FG), 90
Renumbering the mesh (FG), 298
Replicating parts (FG), 184
Results
at gauss points, 456
at integration points, 456
invariant, 458
nodal averaged, 461
Results presentation (FV), see Present
Results range status (FV), 519
Results viewing environment, 167
Results (FV)
adding together, 429
addition calculations, 432
at element nodes, 454
averaging, 424
batch file input for calculations, 432
calculations with user defined expressions, 432
combining, 429
cross product calculations, 432
curl calculations, 432
defining calculations, 432
deleting, 480
Difference for averaging, 426
displaying the values, 326
divergence of, 432
division calculations , 432
dot product calculations, 432
extrapolate, 438
factor of safety, 447
factoring, 422453
gradient calculations, 432
graphing across loadcases, 315, 319
graphing along a line, 317
graphing variation at element nodes,
315
graphing variation at elements, 315
graphing variation at Gauss points,
315
graphing variation at nodes, 319
19/08/1999
INDEX
graphs of one attribute against another, 324
integrating, 439
listing, 519
loadcase titles, 432
maximum, 449, 451
minimum, 449, 451
multiplication calculations, 432
naming, 422453
operators for calculations, 432
Percentage difference for averaging,
440
power calculations, 432
Pressure calculations, 432
Principal shear, 445
Principal shear calculations, 432
Principal strains, 443
Principal stresses, 444
Principal stresses calculations, 432
Principal yield, 446
Principal yield calculations, 432
relative to a line, 470
relative to a node, 470
relative to a plane, 470
relative to value, 470
resultant calculations, 432
scaling, 429
scan, 449, 451
selecting many, 468
square root calculations, 432
subtraction calculations, 432
time step definition, 432
values considered for display, 464
vector, 342
Von Mises, 453
Von Mises calculations, 432
Reversing the local Z-axis (FG), 190
Right rotations, 158
Rigid constraints (FG), 354
Rotating the model, 158, 511
Rotational transform (FG), 129
Rotations
absolute, 158
displaying, 140
setup status, 516
Saving the model, 473
Scale factor (FV)
for shape presentation, 341
for vectors, 342
Scaling parts (FG), 131
Scaling results (FV), 429
Scanning results (FV), 422451
19/08/1999
579
Screen dumps, 145, see also Plotter
Screen layout
changing, 140
dialogue area, 501
Section properties from an external section library (FG), 410
Selecting (FV)
averaged nodal results, 461
elementwise results, 454
gaussian results, 456
invariant results, 458
loadcase, 459
multiple results attributes, 468
the results to be considered, 464
Selective meshing (FG), 292, 296
Separating elements, 559
Separating geometry, 559
Session log, 484
Sets, 78
Boolean combinations of, 86, 87
closing, 85
complementary, 86
intersected, 87
name of, 88
opening, 88
Sets (FG) (FG)
defining a body from, 181
Sets (FG)
appending, 79
appending with cursor, 79
completion, 8588, 90
copying, 184
deleting, 479
listing, 516
removing parts from, 90
renaming, 486
spline line from, 211
Sets (FV)
adding element types, 81
adding elements, 81
adding groups, 81
adding materials, 81
deleting, 480
displaying the mesh in, 543
listing, 519
locating in the model, 155
name of, 85
removing element types, 92
removing elements, 92
removing groups, 92
removing materials, 92
Setting up
580
INDEX
animation, 496
colour, 498
command echo, 502
confirmation prompt, 500
lighting, 557
menu, 505
number of dialogue lines, 501
plotter, 506
sense of model rotations, 511
synonyms, 512
Setting up (FG)
command undo, 514
feedback, 503
mesh quality, 509
Shaded contours (FV), 329
Shaded view
lighting for, 557
Shaded view of the model, 538
Shape of the deformed mesh (FV), 341
Shape (FG)
labelling, 271
Shapes (FG)
box, 97
cone, 100
curve, 102, 103
cylinder, 104
defining, 96
deleting, 479
displaying, 561
Intersection surface, 230
line of intersection, 204
listing, 516
mapping points onto, 113
mapping surfaces onto, 233
plane, 106
point of intersection, 220
projection of mesh onto, 299
renaming, 486
sphere, 109
surface, 111
Shapes (FV)
defining, 96
Shear force diagrams, 312, 314
Shell elements (FV)
developed view of, 532
selecting the surface, 464
Shells (FG)
thickness, 346
Shifting parts (FG), 132, 213
Shifting the model location, 160
Shrink factor (FG)
application of, 503
temporary application of, 562
Shrinkage factors (FG), 353

Shrinking elements, 559
Shrinking geometry, 559
Side and point surface definition (FG),
237
Sides, see Line
Significant digits (FV)
number displayed, 337
Skewed constraints and loads (FG), see
Coordinate systems
Solid view of the model, 538
Space curve (FG)
renaming, 486
Space Curves (FG), 60
Body, 61
defining, 60
Global Coordinate System, 63
Line, 66
Surface, 73
Space curves (FG)
assigning, 346
Space (FG)
cursor, 113
digitizer, 114
tolerance, 115
Spaces curves (FG)
listing, 516
Sphere definition (FG), 109
Spherical Polar coordinates (FG), 37
Spline line (FG), 211
Splitting lines (FG), 225
Spotting parts (FG), 562
Springs (FG), 351
Square roots (FV), 432
Startup files
setting colour from, 498
Status
of drawing contents parameters, 519,
521
of light control parameters, 519, 521
of model setup parameters, 521
of setups, 516
Status (FV)
of graphing control parameters, 519
of present option parameters, 519
of results range parameters, 519
Steps (FV)
loadcase, 459
Stopping execution, 475
Straight line (FG), 212
Superimposing mesh and geometry (FG),
542
Suppressions (FG), 350
Surface normals
19/08/1999
INDEX
displaying, 538
Surface normals (FG)
displaying, 256
flipping, 190
Surface (FG)
deleting, 479
listing, 516
renaming, 486
Surface (FV)
Surfaces (FG), see also Parts
automatic definition of, 228
automatic sub-division of polygons,
233
defining, 227; 227 , ,245
defining a body from, 174, 176, 177,
179, 181, 183
four point definition, 242
four side definition, 244
line and point definition, 237
mapped onto shapes, 233
Multiple sided surface definition, 235
number of elements on, 275
points, 227245
three point definition, 238
three side definition, 240
Surfaces (FV)
scan, 451
Sweeping (FG)
parts, 246
tolerance for, 115
Switching on/off point markers, 515
Symbols (FG)
display control, 503
Synonyms
activating, 512
adding, 512
deleting, 512
listing, 512
parameters for, 512
saving, 512
setup status, 516
switching off, 512
Tabulating
synonyms, 512
Tabulating (FG)
constraints, 516
coordinate systems, 516
19/08/1999
581
drawing contents, 516
element variants, 516
elements, 516
geometry status, 516
initial conditions, 516
Interface program element types, 516
load masks, 516
loads, 516
materials, 516
merged parts, 516
mesh quality, 516
mesh status, 516
nodal coordinate systems, 516
nodes, 516
parameters, 516
parts, 516
set names, 516
shapes, 516
space curves, 516
time curves, 516
transforms, 516
using the cursor, 516
workbox, 516
Tabulating (FV)
colour control for, 335
elements, 519
lines, 519
loadcases, 519
materials, 519
mesh, 519
model transformations, 519
nodes, 519
number of significant figures, 337
results, 519
saved drawings, 519
sets, 519
Tabulation
hardcopies of, 516
Temperature dependent materials (FG),
394
Temperature gradients at nodes (FG), 378
Temperature gradients on elements (FG),
380
Temperature loads at nodes (FG), 377
Temperature loads on elements (FG), 379
Testing element quality (FG), see Mesh
Quality
Text adding, 140
Thickness (FG)
assigning, 346
deleting, 479
listing, 516
Three point surface definition (FG), 238
582
INDEX
Three side surface definition (FG), 240
Time curve (FG)
renaming, 486
Time Curves, 119
Time curves (FG)
assigning, 346
listing, 516
Title, see monitor
Tolerance (FG)
definition of, 115
effect of workbox on, 117
effect on Construct Merge, 56
effect on copy, 184
the effect of, 280
Tolerance (FV)
for line definition, 40
Transformations (FG), 126
mirroring, 127
rotating, 129
scaling, 131
translation, 132
Transforming results to local coordinate
systems, 470
Transforming stresses to local systems (FV),
29, 31, 36, 38
Transforming vectors (FV), 432
Transforms
assembling with, 25
Transforms (FG)
copying with, 184
deleting, 479
listing, 516
moving with, 213
renaming, 486
sweeping with, 246
Translating the model, 160
Translation transform (FG), 132
removing, 463
resultant of, 432
scale factor, 342
transforming, 432
Video sequences, see Animation
Viewing
shrunken elements, 559
shrunken geometry, 559
Viewing control, 151
Viewing enviroment for results, 167
Viewing shapes (FG), 561
Viewing (FV)
external faces, 536
selected element faces, 536
Viewports, 147
Volume (FV)
Von Mises stress (FV), 432, 453
Walk through the model, 161
Workbox (FG), 117
tabulation, 516
viewing, 155
Workspace (FG), see Workbox
Writing
archives, 528
Writing (FG)
FEMGEN neutral files, 525
FEMVIEW neutral files, 525
archive files, 525, 528
database backups, 528
FE input deck, 525
Writing (FV)
FEMVIEW data, 527
WS Atkins loading environment, 345
Zooming in/out on the model, 163
Unary operators for calculations (FV), 432

Undoing a command (FG), 514, 522
Unlocking the mesh (FG), 296
Updating a previous database, 523
Updating the screen, 142
Variable element thickness using space
curve (FG), 417
Variable element thickness (FG), 416
Variables, see parameters
Vectors (FV)
colour control, 338
display of, 342
head types, 338
key, 140
no heads, 338
19/08/1999

Femgv6 1

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Femgv6 1

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

FEMGV

For Version 6.1-01

1.4.4 LOGGING OF INPUT . .

2.3.9.8 CONSTRUCT SHAPE SURFACE NURB .

This page intentionally blank

This page intentionally blank

Definition of a cylindrical coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The resulting set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

This page intentionally blank

This page intentionally blank

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2 FEATURE SUMMARY

1.2. FEATURE SUMMARY

The order of generation is:

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.1.5 Controls on Mesh Density

as concentrated loads applied to nodes,

1.2. FEATURE SUMMARY

1.2.2 FEMVIEW FEATURES

as numerical values superimposed on the model,

Figure 1.1: Filled Contours

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.2.3 Calculations with Results

1.2.2.4 Further Post-Processing

VARIATION ALONG A LINE

Figure 1.2: Graph Plots

1.2.3 VIEWING TECHNIQUES AND GENERAL FEATURES

1.2. FEATURE SUMMARY

1.2.3.4 Saving of Drawings

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Figure 1.3: Light source shading

1.3. USE WITH FE ANALYSIS PACKAGES

1.3 USE WITH FE ANALYSIS PACKAGES

1.4 INPUT OF COMMANDS

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

in the INDEX module

1.4.1 KEYBOARD INPUT

new name for a body

1.4. INPUT OF COMMANDS

name of an existing body

1.4.1.3 Integer and Real Values

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Select the point keyword:

Select the coordinates option:

Input a name for the new point

Give the coordinates:

1.4. INPUT OF COMMANDS

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

# Allows a comment line to be written to the history and log files.

1.4.2 INPUT USING GRAPHICAL INPUT DEVICES

1.4.2.1 Menu selection

1.4. INPUT OF COMMANDS

`pulling' the menu selector into the graphics area

/PICK-P for points

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.4.3 BATCH INPUT OF COMMANDS

1.4.4 LOGGING OF INPUT

1.4.5 USER INTERRUPT

1.5 OUTPUT DEVICES

1.6 THE DATABASE

1.7. LIMITATIONS ON MODEL SIZE

1.7 LIMITATIONS ON MODEL SIZE

1.8 THE ELEMENT LIBRARY

The cylindrical coordinates (r; ; z ) are connected to the local